# Welcome
Welcome to the Supply'd Help Docs!
These carefully curated resources are designed to provide comprehensive support, helping you make the most of the powerful features available across Supply’d ERP, Supply’d Hub, and Supply’d Lite. Whether you’re a new user setting up your account for the first time or an experienced administrator managing complex workflows, our Help Docs are here to guide you every step of the way.
Ultimately, our goal is to empower users to master Supply’d ERP, Hub, and Lite - boosting productivity and encouraging innovation across your operations. Whether you’re streamlining day-to-day tasks or driving strategic initiatives, these Help Docs will help you unlock the full potential of your Supply’d experience. Begin your journey today and discover how Supply’d can transform the way you manage your business.
### Jump Right In
**Creating a Supply'd Account**
Create your account - ERP, Hub or Lite - [Creating a Supply'd Account](/quickstart)
# Creating a Supply'd Account
Creating a Supply’d account allows you to easily manage your products, suppliers, and orders all in one place - helping you save time, stay organised, and streamline your business operations.
Welcome to **Supply’d**!
Supply’d offers three account types designed to support businesses at different stages and operational needs - **Supply'd ERP**, **Supply'd HUB** and **Supply'd LITE**. Whether you are looking for a simple way to showcase products, manage daily operations, or run a complete enterprise system, Supply’d provides a solution to suit your business.
### Supply’d ERP
Supply’d ERP is the full enterprise solution designed for businesses requiring advanced inventory and operational management capabilities.
#### Key Features
* Advanced inventory management
* Purchasing and sales workflows
* Invoice management
* Multi-location support
* Multi-user access and permissions
* Advanced reporting and automation
* Integrated business management tools
* Optional add-on delivery and production modules
* Third party accounting, delivery and marketing integration
#### Benefits of Supply’d ERP
* Provides complete business management functionality
* Supports larger and more complex operations
* Improves visibility across inventory, sales, and purchasing
* Helps automate workflows and processes
* Supports scalable business growth
#### Best For
Businesses that require full enterprise-level operational and management tools.
To find out more go to [https://app.supplyd.co](https://app.supplyd.co/register/).
If you would like to see the full Supply’d experience or see what it can do for your business, click and complete the demo request form. You will receive an email with a link to book a time for a Supply’d representative to show you how Supply’d can help your business thrive.
***
### Supply’d Hub
Supply’d Hub is a free supplier-focused account designed for businesses that want to showcase products and connect with retailers on Supply’d.
#### Key Features
* Set up and manage products
* Connect with retailers
* Send product offers and promotions
* Allow retailers to range products
* View sales orders
* Manage customers and account settings
* Add one additional user
#### Benefits of Supply’d Hub
* Free to use
* Increases product visibility
* Helps build retailer relationships
* Supports product ranging opportunities
* Simple and easy to get started
#### Best For
Small suppliers or businesses wanting to promote products and connect with retailers without needing advanced operational tools.
To create a free **Supply's Hub** account, follow the steps outlined in the [Creating Your Supply'd Hub Account](/supplyd-hub/creating-your-supplyd-hub-account).
***
### Supply’d Lite
Supply’d Lite is designed for businesses who need essential operational tools for managing purchase orders, products, and suppliers.
#### Key Features
* Manage suppliers and products
* Process and track purchase orders
* Connect and purchase from suppliers
* Support day-to-day purchasing needs
* Add one additional user
#### Benefits of Supply’d Lite
* Free to use
* Improves purchasing efficiency
* Streamlines purchase order management
* Keeps product and supplier information organised
* Simple to use
#### Best For
Businesses that need purchasing tools to support regular supply activities.
To create a free **Supply'd Lite** account, follow the steps outlined in the [Creating Your Supply'd Lite Account](/supplyd-lite/quickstart).
***
## Choosing the Right Account
| Account Type | Best For | Main Benefit |
| ------------ | ------------------------------------------------ | ------------------------------------ |
| **ERP** | Full business management | Advanced enterprise functionality |
| **Hub** | Product showcasing and retailer connections | Free and simple to use for suppliers |
| **Lite** | Managing purchase orders, suppliers and products | Free and easy to use for customers |
Supply’d accounts are flexible, and businesses can operate multiple account types depending on their needs.
***
## Verifying Your Email Address
After creating your account you will see red message at the top of the screen that says "Your email address has not yet been verified, some features will be unavailable until your account is verified. Click here to verify your email".
To verify your email click the link that says **Click here to verify your email**. You will be sent an email with a verification code and a screen will appear to enter the code.
Enter the code in the field and click **Verify** to verify the code. If all is correct your email address will be verified.
{% hint style="warning" %}
If you cannot find the email please check your spam and ensure your email address is correct. If your email address is incorrect you can change it in your **Account Settings** by clicking your name in the top right and selecting **My Account**.
{% endhint %}
***
## Creating Multiple Supply'd Accounts
Supply’d supports using one login across multiple accounts, making it easy to manage multiple sites, brands, or entities independently. Multiple accounts in Supply’d allow businesses to manage separate locations, teams, or operations within a single system while maintaining clear control and visibility across each account. For example, a business may run its production facility under one account while individual branches operate under separate accounts, keeping operations distinct while still connected through a single login. This setup improves organisation, streamlines workflows, and ensures data remains structured without mixing activities between entities.
* [#creating-a-additional-account](#creating-a-additional-account "mention")
* [#switching-between-accounts](#switching-between-accounts "mention")
* [#logging-in](#logging-in "mention")
***
### Creating an Additional Account
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Go to Account Settings
Log in to your account. Click on your name in the top right and select **My Account**.
The **Account Settings** page will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Select Register New Account
Click on the 3 dots in the top right and select **Register New Account**.
The **Register** form will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Complete the Form
* **Email Address:** Your email address will be automatically added.
* **Business trading Name:** Enter the business name you trade under, eg. Tim’s Cookies. Please do not enter your legal business name here; that will be added in the next step.
* **Country:** Select the country your business is based in. If your country is not listed, it is not currently supported by Supply’d.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Add Your Details
**Product Type**
Select the type of account you would like to register:
* **Lite:** A free streamlined version designed for simpler operations. It provides the essential tools needed to manage purchasing without the full complexity of advanced production or ERP features.
* **Hub (Beta):** A free platform within Supply’d where suppliers can showcase and range their products with retailers. Suppliers can list their products, connect with current and potential customers, and present their range to businesses such as grocery stores and supermarkets for ranging consideration.
* **ERP:** The most advanced account type, built for end-to-end operational management. It supports full production control, inventory tracking, costing, and integrated business processes, giving a complete overview of operations from planning through to output.
{% hint style="warning" %}
Users on a LITE or HUB plan can only create additional accounts of the same type, while paid accounts can create accounts of any type.
Only users with access to Settings and Users permissions can create additional accounts.
{% endhint %}
Enter your **Business Number** (eg. ABN), the **Street Address**, **Suburb**, select the **State**, enter the **Postcode** (entering your street address will display a list of matching addresses to choose from, and the suburb, state, and postcode will be filled in automatically), and, optionally, the business **Website**.
{% hint style="success" %}
The **Legal Company Name** will be pulled from the business register when you enter your **Business Number**.
{% endhint %}
Click .
Your new account will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Complete the Set-up
Complete the set-up following the instructions for [Creating Your Supply'd Hub Account](/supplyd-hub/creating-your-supplyd-hub-account) or [Creating Your Supply'd Lite Account](/supplyd-lite/quickstart).
{% hint style="success" %}
Your [Account Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/account-settings) can be managed in the same way as the original account. Each new account functions as a completely separate account.
If you would like to give existing [Users](/supplyd-erp/settings/users) access to the new account, simply add them using their name and email address. The system will automatically recognise existing users, handle the linking process, and send an email invitation for them to accept access to the new account.
You can also create additional accounts directly from the new account.
{% endhint %}
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
### Switching Between Accounts
Once the new account has been created, you can easily switch between accounts.
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Click on your name in the top right and select **Switch Account**.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Select the account you would like to switch to.
{% hint style="success" %}
You can also add a new account from this page. Click on the 3 dots in the top right and select **Register New Account**.
{% endhint %}
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click .
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
### Logging In
When you have multiple accounts, you’ll be presented with a list of accounts upon login, allowing you to select which account you would like to access.
Simply select the account you would like to log in to and click .
{% hint style="info" %}
When logging in:
* If a user does not belong to any of the companies, they will see an error page.
* If the user belongs to one company only, they will be taken directly into that account.
* If the user belongs to multiple companies, they will see a list of accounts (as above) to choose from when logging in.
{% endhint %}
# Navigating Supply'd ERP
Supply’d helps you manage your stores, orders, and inventory all in one place, making it easier to track sales, fulfil orders, and keep your business running smoothly.
Welcome to **Supply’d**, your all-in-one platform for food and retail businesses, streamlining operations, automating key tasks, and eliminating the hassle of disconnected systems - helping you save time, reduce costly errors, and clearly see what’s working (and what’s not). Supply’d gives you the tools to stay organised and focused.
This guide will walk you through a brief overview of how to navigate the platform, so you can make the most of its features and keep your business running smoothly, including:
* [Logging In](#logging-in)
* [Home Page](#home-page)
* [Location](#location)
* [Settings Menu](#settings-menu)
* [Main Menu](#main-menu)
* [#navigating-multiple-supplyd-accounts](#navigating-multiple-supplyd-accounts "mention")
***
## Logging In
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Go to Supply'd
To go to Supply'd -
{% hint style="success" %}
If you already have a **Supply’d** account, click **Login** or head straight to the **Login** page -
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="success" %}
If you don't have a Supply'd account you can book a demo and see the benefits for yourself.
To book a demo, simply click either of the buttons and complete the form.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="success" %}
If you would like to create a free **Supply'd Lite** account with limited features, click the **Login** button in the top right, then the button.
👉 Follow the instructions in the [Creating Your Supply'd Lite Account](/supplyd-lite/quickstart) document.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Log In
1. Enter your email, click and enter your password.
2. If Two-Factor Authentication is enabled, you may need to enter a code from your authenticator app or SMS.
{% hint style="success" %}
Check the box to remember your device for 30 days and avoid entering a code each time you log in.
{% endhint %}
3. Click .
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
## Home Page
The **Supply’d Home** page **Today** tab displays your sales stats for the current day. The **Sales** tab shows all sales stats, while the **Purchases** tab provides an overview of your purchase stats.
{% hint style="success" %}
The various tabs display stats, tasks, and activity for the current day based on the sections you choose to show on your dashboard.
👉 See [#home-page-dashboards](#home-page-dashboards "mention") below to see how to edit your dashboards and choose which tabs you would like to display on the **Home** page.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="success" %}
Clicking on **Gross Sales** gives you the choice to display either **Gross Sales** or **Net Sales**.
Clicking on **Last Year** gives you the choice to display a range of comparison time periods, ranging from **Yesterday** to **Last Year**.
When you hover over a point on the graph, a pop-up will display details for that point in time.
{% endhint %}
***
### Home Page Dashboards
Clicking the 3 dots in the top right lets you edit your dashboards and choose which tabs you would like to display on the **Home** page.
Select **Edit Dashboards** from the menu.
Choose the dashboards you would like to see on your homepage.
{% hint style="success" %}
You can easily rearrange the order of dashboards on your homepage by clicking the 3 lines to the right of a dashboard’s name and dragging it to your preferred position.
If you plan to use **Tasks** for staff using Supply'd handheld scanners, it’s recommended to place **Tasks** first so the scanner opens directly to the **Tasks** screen.
For the best user experience, it is also recommended to place the **Training** tab next to the **Tasks** tab on the Homepage, making it easier for staff to quickly access both training and daily tasks.
{% endhint %}
With all options selected, the page would look like this:
***
### Location
Clicking the location next to your name in the top right lets you choose from your available locations. This option only appears if your account has multiple locations. It determines which location items added to your cart will be assigned to.
***
## Settings Menu
Clicking your name in the top right corner will bring up the menu to take you to all your **Settings**.
***
### **My Account**
Your account settings allow you to modify your personal account details, set up two-factor authentication and notifications.
***
### **Settings**
This is where you can manage your settings for Supply'd.
For full details see the relevant documents:
* [Billing Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/billing-settings)
* [Company Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/company-settings)
* [Customer Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/customer-settings)
* [Delivery Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/delivery-settings)
* [Device Set-Up](/supplyd-erp/settings/device-set-up)
* [Expense Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/expense-settings)
* [Integrations](/supplyd-erp/settings/integrations) - This section displays any integrations you have, such as Square, Shopify, or Xero. You can also add new integrations here. For details on specific integrations, refer to the relevant docs.
* [Locations](/supplyd-erp/settings/locations)
* [Pick & Pack Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/pick-and-pack-settings)
* [Product Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/product-settings)
* [Production Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/production-settings)
* [Purchase Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/purchase-settings)
* [Report Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/report-settings)
* [Sales Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/sales-settings)
* [Supply'd Stores](/supplyd-erp/settings/supplyd-stores)
* [Supplier Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/supplier-settings)
* [Shipping Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/shipping-settings)
* [Tax](/supplyd-erp/settings/tax)
* [Templates](/supplyd-erp/settings/templates)
***
### Help
Redirects you to **Supply’d Help**, where you can search for answers or browse the instructional articles.
***
### Report Bug
If you experience any issues with Supply'd, you can report them by clicking here to open the **Report a Bug** form.
1. **Issue\* \[required field]:** Tell us the issue you are experiencing.
2. **Step To Replicate\* \[required field]:** Please describe the steps needed to reproduce the issue, step-by-step. Include as much detail as possible, such as what you were doing, what you expected to happen, and what actually happened. The more information you provide, the easier it will be for the team to identify and fix the problem quickly.
3. **Severity:** Select the severity of the issue.\
\
* **Low:** There is an easy work around.
* **Normal:** The bug is manageable temporarily.
* **High:** It's problematic, but not affecting critical functionality.
* **Urgent:** Critical business functionality is broken.
4. **Screenshots (optional):** Optionally add any screenshots showing the issue (eg. error messages etc.). Click to select the files from your device.
5. Click .
***
## Main Menu
On the left-hand side you will see the main menu.
{% hint style="info" %}
Options may vary depending on your [Users](/supplyd-erp/settings/users) access, account type and additional modules.
{% endhint %}
### Home
The **Home** page displays various stats, tasks, and activity for the current day based on the tabs you choose to show on your dashboard, as [above](#home-page).
{% hint style="success" %}
The 3 dots in the top right of a page opens a menu with options for that page.
{% endhint %}
***
### Products
The **Products** page is where you view, add and manage products in Supply'd.
There are 3 tabs on this page:
* **Products:** Provides a complete list of your products, including pricing, stock levels, and supplier details. You can easily search, update, and reorder items.
* **Pricing:** Enables you to schedule future price changes for your products, such as for an upcoming sale. This tab lists those upcoming price changes.
* **Offers:** Lists any product offers you've received from suppliers.
👉 See the [Products](/supplyd-erp/products) docs for more information.
{% hint style="success" %}
You will notice that on most pages there are colour-coded statuses beside tasks, names, and other items for easy identification of their status at a glance.
{% endhint %}
***
### **Suppliers**
The **Suppliers** page is where you view, add, connect to and manage your suppliers in Supply'd.
You will see 5 tabs:
* **Suppliers:** Lists your suppliers and allows you to manage supplier details, track orders, access contact info, pricing, and transaction history.
* **Connect:** All suppliers available to connect with on Supply’d. Clicking on a supplier allows you to view all their information.
* **Requests:** Supplier connection requests. You can approve or decline suppliers you would like to trade with on Supply'd.
* **Promotions:** Displays all promotions sent to you from your Supply'd suppliers.
* **Groups:** Lets you organise suppliers into categories (groups), making it easier to manage and access related supplier information.
👉 Refer to the [Suppliers](/supplyd-erp/suppliers) docs for more details.
{% hint style="success" %}
Many pages include search and filter tools to help you quickly find and sort items such as products, suppliers, and customers.
{% endhint %}
***
### **Favourites**
Lists your favourite products, organised by supplier, and allows you to save and quickly access your most-used products and suppliers, streamlining the ordering process and saving you time.
\
👉 See the [Favourites](/supplyd-erp/favourites) docs for more information.
{% hint style="success" %}
Some pages include an button that, when items are selected, allows you to perform bulk actions on multiple items at once.
{% endhint %}
***
### Purchases
The **Purchases** page is where you can view, add, and manage all your purchase orders in Supply’d.
There are 3 tabs on this page:
* **Purchases:** Lists and allows you to manage purchase orders you have placed with suppliers.
* **Standing:** Standing purchase orders which are repeating orders for consistent order schedules.
* **Postponed:** Postponed orders for completion at a later date, helping you manage and monitor their new timelines.
👉 See the [Purchases](/supplyd-erp/purchases) docs for more details.
***
### Expenses
Lists and allows you to track and manage all business purchases, providing insights into costs and helping you maintain better financial control.
There are 5 tabs on this page:
* **Reconcile:** Purchase orders not yet reconciled.
* **Invoice:** Invoice files that have been uploaded to Supply'd.
* **Payments:** Scheduled payments to be made to suppliers.
* **Completed:** Completed purchase order payments and orders.
* **Statements:** Statements that have been uploaded to Supply'd.
👉 See the [Expenses](/supplyd-erp/expenses) docs.
***
### Production
On the **Production** page you can view, add and manage your production runs.
The 2 tabs on this page are:
* **Up Next:** Your upcoming and in-progress production runs, tracks product creation, ingredient usage, stock levels and monitors costs.
* **Completed:** Your completed production runs.
👉 See the [Production](/supplyd-erp/production) docs for more details.
***
### Inventory
The **Inventory** page is where you can view and manage your stock in Supply’d. This includes tracking stock levels, handling transfers and receives, and managing write-offs, recalls, and stocktakes.
There are 6 tabs on this page:
* **Stock:** Lists current stock levels for each product and warehouse allowing you to track and manage your stock levels.
* **Transfers:** Transfer orders and tracks the movement of stock between locations.
* **Receives:** Lists and tracks incoming stock, allowing you to manage and verify received items against orders.
* **Write Offs:** Displays write-offs and allows you to record and manage inventory losses or damaged goods, ensuring accurate stock levels.
* **Recalls:** Any recalls made for batches.
* **Stocktakes:** Lists all performed stocktakes and allows you to conduct and track physical inventory counts, ensuring your stock levels align with recorded quantities for accurate management.\
👉 Check the [Inventory](/supplyd-erp/inventory) docs for more information.
***
### **Customers**
Lists your customers and allows you to manage customer details, track their orders, view their transaction history, set up and manage customer-specific pricing, and set up and manage customer groups.
You will see 6 tabs:
* **Customers:** All of your customers. You can add and manage all of your customers for your business in Supply'd for sales and marketing.
* **Connect:** Customers available to connect with on Supply’d.
* **Leads:** Keep track of potential customers before they convert. Record call dates, add notes, and manage follow-ups - all from one central hub.
* **Request:** View any pending connection requests from customers on Supply'd.
* **Promotions:** A list of promotions sent to your customers. Also where you add and manage customer promotions.
* **Groups:** Groups you can use to allocate customers. Customers can be grouped for easy filtering, group pricing, etc.
👉 See the [Customers](/supplyd-erp/customers) docs.
***
### **Sales**
Lists all your sales and purchase orders, allowing you to track and manage them with real-time updates on status and history.
The 3 tabs on this page are:
* **Sales:** Lists and allows you to manage sales orders customers have placed with you and provides real-time updates on order status and history.
* **Quotes:** Lists and allows you to create, track, and manage price quotes for customers, streamlining the quoting process before finalising orders.
* **Standing:** Standing orders which are repeating orders for consistent order schedules. Allows you to set up and manage these regular, repeat purchases for customers.
👉 See the [Sales](/supplyd-erp/sales) docs.
***
### **Deliveries**
Lists all your upcoming and completed deliveries, and allows you to set up and track new deliveries.
* **Up Next:** All your deliveries and allows you to set up deliveries, enabling you to track and manage outgoing deliveries.
* **Completed:** Your completed delivery runs.
👉 See the [Deliveries](/supplyd-erp/deliveries) docs for more information.
***
### Tasks
Displays all tasks you’ve created and allows you to add and manage tasks while easily seeing what needs attention.
On this page there are 4 tabs:
* **Tasks:** Displays all tasks you’ve added, helping you quickly see what needs attention.
* **Scheduled:** Shows tasks in a timeline view, helping you visualise when tasks are planned.
* **Completed:** All tasks that have been completed or are in the process of being finished, providing a record of work done.
* **Groups:** All **Task Groups** that have been created to organise tasks by their assigned categories.
👉 Refer to the [Adding Tasks](/supplyd-erp/tasks/adding-tasks) doc for more details.
***
### Reports
Allows you to run a multitude of reports, providing detailed insights into sales, purchases, inventory, and financial data, helping you analyse performance and make informed business decisions.
\
👉 Refer to the [Reports](/supplyd-erp/reports) docs.
***
### Training
**Training** lets businesses create, manage, and deliver staff training in Supply’d. They can use built-in or custom courses for onboarding, compliance, safety, and operations.
👉 See the [Training](/supplyd-erp/training) document for more information.
***
## Navigating Multiple Supply'd Accounts
Supply’d supports using one login across multiple accounts, making it easy to manage multiple sites, brands, or entities independently.
{% hint style="success" %}
See the [Creating a Supply'd Account](/quickstart#creating-multiple-supplyd-accounts) section of the [Creating a Supply'd Account](/quickstart) document for details on creating additional accounts in Supply’d.
{% endhint %}
* [#logging-in-1](#logging-in-1 "mention")
* [#switching-between-accounts](#switching-between-accounts "mention")
***
### Logging In
When you have multiple accounts, you’ll be presented with a list of accounts upon login, allowing you to select which account you would like to access.
Simply select the account you would like to log in to and click .
{% hint style="info" %}
When logging in:
* If a user does not belong to any of the companies, they will see an error page.
* If the user belongs to one company only, they will be taken directly into that account.
* If the user belongs to multiple companies, they will see a list of accounts (as above) to choose from when logging in.
{% endhint %}
***
### Switching Between Accounts
Once the new account has been created, you can easily switch between accounts.
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Click on your name in the top right and select **Switch Account**.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Select the account you would like to switch to.
{% hint style="success" %}
You can also add a new account from this page. Click on the 3 dots in the top right and select **Register New Account**.
{% endhint %}
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click .
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
# Supply'd Intelligence
Supply’d Intelligence uses automation and intelligent tools to streamline your workflows, reduce manual tasks, and improve accuracy across your operations.
# Scanner
Using a handheld scanner in Supply’d streamlines inventory management by allowing you to quickly scan and update stock levels in real time, reducing errors and improving efficiency on the go.
# Using & Navigating a Supply'd Handheld Scanner
Scanning in Supply’d boosts accuracy, speeds tasks, and ensures real-time inventory updates for efficient stocktaking, picking, packing, and transfers.
A Supply’d handheld scanner is a highly efficient and time-saving tool designed to streamline your workflow. Whether you're managing inventory, receiving stock, or processing orders, the scanner simplifies these tasks, reducing manual entry and improving accuracy. This article provides a brief overview of how to use the scanner, such as:
* [#key-features](#key-features "mention")
* [#logging-on-when-the-scanner-is-powered-off](#logging-on-when-the-scanner-is-powered-off "mention")
* [#scanner-menu](#scanner-menu "mention")
* [#scanning](#scanning "mention")
* [#main-menu](#main-menu "mention")
* [#settings-menu](#settings-menu "mention")
* [#waking-the-scanner](#waking-the-scanner "mention")
* [#additional-navigation](#additional-navigation "mention")
* [#powering-off-the-scanner](#powering-off-the-scanner "mention")
## Key Features
#### Power Button
Press to turn on or wake up the scanner.
#### Volume Buttons
Press to increase or decrease the volume.
#### Scanner Buttons
Press either of these buttons to scan a barcode or QR code.
***
## Logging On when the Scanner is Powered Off
Press the power button to turn on the scanner.
The scanner home screen will display the time and date. The icons in the top right indicate that Bluetooth is enabled, Wi-Fi is connected, and shows the battery level, much the same as a mobile phone.
Swipe up and the screen will now show the time, date and any apps installed on the scanner.
Click on the Supply'd logo and the Supply'd **Login** screen will show.
Enter your email and click **Next**. Enter your password. Click **Login**.
{% hint style="success" %}
You can set up the scanner up to remember your password for you.
{% endhint %}
***
## Scanner Menu
After logging in, you will be taken to the **Scanner** menu.
For detailed instructions on using each of these features, see the various articles:\
* **Order Stock:** [Ordering Stock (Scanner)](/supplyd-erp/scanner/ordering-stock-scanner)
* **Pick & Pack:** [Pick & Pack (Scanner)](/supplyd-erp/scanner/pick-and-pack-scanner)
* **Pick-up Order:** [Pick Up Orders (Scanner)](/supplyd-erp/scanner/pick-up-orders-scanner)
* **Receive:** [Receiving Orders (Scanner)](/supplyd-erp/scanner/receiving-orders-scanner) & [Receiving Stock (Scanner)](/supplyd-erp/scanner/receiving-stock-scanner)
* **Transfer:** [Stock Transfer (Scanner)](/supplyd-erp/scanner/stock-transfer-scanner)
* **Write off:** [Writing Off Stock (Scanner)](/supplyd-erp/scanner/writing-off-stock-scanner)
* **Stocktake:** [Performing a Stocktake (Scanner)](/supplyd-erp/scanner/performing-a-stocktake-scanner)
* **Scan to List:** [Scan to List (Scanner)](/supplyd-erp/scanner/scan-to-list-scanner) - Allows you to quickly capture multiple items into a list, enabling you to perform a range of actions such as printing labels, exporting details, or editing products.
***
## Scanning
During any of the above processes, the scanner screen will flash red to indicate it is ready to scan.
To scan a product, press one of the scanner buttons. The item details should appear. If the item doesn't scan, you'll see this screen, where you can either search for the item or add it if it doesn't exist.
***
## Main Menu
Clicking on the 3 lines on the top left will take you to the main Supply'd menu. This works similarly to the full version, with the additional of a scanner button which will take you back to the **"Scanner"** menu, as above.
***
## Settings Menu
Clicking on the **Supply'd** logo takes you to the setting menu.
Here, you can view, set, or modify the settings for the selected location.
#### My Account
This is where you can manage your account details.
#### Settings
This is where you can manage your settings for Supply'd.
* **Billing:** [Billing Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/billing-settings)
* **Customer Settings:** [Customer Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/customer-settings)
* **Company Settings:** [Company Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/company-settings)
* **Delivery Settings:** [Delivery Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/delivery-settings)
* **Expense Settings:** [Expense Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/expense-settings)
* **Integrations:** This section displays any integrations you have, such as Square, Shopify, or Xero. You can also add new integrations here. For details on specific integrations, refer to the relevant articles in the [Integrations](/supplyd-erp/settings/integrations) section.
* **Locations:** [Locations](/supplyd-erp/settings/locations)
* **Order Settings:** [Sales Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/sales-settings)
* **Pick & Pack Settings:** [Pick & Pack Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/pick-and-pack-settings)
* **Printer Set-up:** [Device Set-Up](/supplyd-erp/settings/device-set-up)
* **Product Settings:** [Product Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/product-settings)
* **Production Settings:** [Production Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/production-settings)
* **Report Settings:** [Report Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/report-settings)
* **Shipping Settings:** [Shipping Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/shipping-settings)
* **Supply'd Stores:** [Supply'd Stores](/supplyd-erp/settings/supplyd-stores)
* **Supplier Settings:** [Supplier Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/supplier-settings)
* **Tax:** [Tax](/supplyd-erp/settings/tax)
* **Templates:** [Templates](/supplyd-erp/settings/templates)
* **Users:** [Users](/supplyd-erp/settings/users)
#### Billing
This is where you can manage your billing details, such as your billing credit cards, your Supply'd plan, see your devices such as scanners linked to you and your account, and your invoices.
#### Users
Lists any **Users** who have access to your account.
👉 See the [Users](/supplyd-erp/settings/users) document for full details.
#### Help
Takes you to Supply’d Help, where you can search for answers or browse the instructional documents.
#### Report Bug
If you experience any issues with Supply'd, you can report them by clicking here to open the **Report a Bug** form.
***
## Waking the Scanner
If the scanner remains unused for a few minutes, the screen will turn off. Pressing any button will wake the screen and take you to the first screen. Swiping up will return you to the last open screen.
Pressing the power button will also turn off the screen.
If the scanner remains unused for a period of time, you will need to log in again. Upon logging in, you will be returned to the last open screen. Additionally, Supply’d may periodically require you to log in.
***
## Additional Navigation
At the bottom of the screen you will see some shapes with a black background.
**Triangle:** Takes you back to the previous screen.
**Circle:** Takes you to scanner home screen.
**Square:** Shows all windows open on the scanner.
***
## Powering Off the Scanner
To power off the scanner, press the power button until this screen appears.
Click the **Power Off** button.
You also have the option to restart the scanner should the need arise.
# GS1 Barcode Scanning (Scanner)
Enabling GS1 barcode scanning lets scanners automatically capture batch, weight, and expiry, streamlining Receives and reducing manual entry errors.
GS1 barcode scanning allows your scanners to read advanced barcodes, including Databar and Datamatrix, which can contain not just the product code, but also additional information like batch numbers, weight, and expiry dates. This capability streamlines Receives, improves inventory accuracy, and reduces manual data entry, making production and stock management faster and more reliable.
{% hint style="success" %}
#### **What is a GS1 Barcode?**
A **GS1 barcode** is a standardised barcode used globally to identify products and share additional information in a machine-readable format.
* It can include a **GTIN (Global Trade Item Number)** to identify the product.
* It can also encode **extra data** such as **batch numbers, expiry dates, and weight**.
* GS1 barcodes come in formats like **Databar** or **Datamatrix**, allowing more information to be stored than a standard barcode.
Using GS1 barcodes helps automate inventory management, ensures accurate tracking, and reduces manual data entry errors.
{% endhint %}
***
## Enabling GS1 Scanning
GS1 scanning is usually already enabled on Supply’d scanners. If you need to enable it for any reason, follow these steps:
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Open the Scanner Settings
Open the scanner and swipe up from the bottom of the screen to show all apps. Select **Settings**.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Select Enterprise Setting > Scanner
Scroll to **Enterprise Setting** and select **Scanner**.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Select Symbology Settings
Select **Symbology Settings**.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Select GS1 DataBar Family
Scroll down and select **GS1 DataBar Family**.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Enable GS1 Types
Toggle on the 3 GS1 Databar types.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Configure Basic Data Formatting
Go to back to **Scanner Settings** and select **Basic Data Formatting**.
Select **Append Formatting**.
Click on **Replace**.
Enter:
* **Target text:** `\x1D`
* **Replacement:** `[GS]`
Click **OK** to save the settings.
{% hint style="info" %}
This setup allows the scanner to correctly interpret **Databar** and **Datamatrix** barcodes including batch numbers, weight, and expiry information.
Always test by scanning a sample barcode to confirm it’s working as expected.
{% endhint %}
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
## Scanning GS1 & Price-Embedded Barcodes in Supply’d
### **Scanning GS1 Databar / Datamatrix During a Receive**
**Steps:**
1. Assign barcodes to products.
2. Place a **Purchase Order (PO)**.
3. Open **Scanner > Receive** and scan a product barcode to start the Receive.
**Behavior:**
| Barcode Type | Quantity Update | Batch Info Saved |
| -------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------ | -------------------------- |
| Simple GTIN | Increments by units | N/A |
| Complex GS1 Databar / Datamatrix | Increments by weight if encoded; otherwise units | Weight, expiry, batch info |
***
### **Scanning Price-Embedded Barcodes During a Receive**
**Steps:**
1. Enter the product’s **PLU** (5 digits) into the product’s **Barcode field**.
2. Place a **PO**.
3. Start a **Receive** and scan the price-embedded barcode.
**Behavior:**
* Quantity is automatically calculated based on the price encoded in the barcode.
# Ordering Stock (Scanner)
Using a scanner to order stock in Supply'd increases accuracy & speeds up the process. It ensures the correct items are selected & reduces errors, making order creation more efficient & reliable.
Creating a purchase order in Supply'd can be done manually or using one of Supply's handheld scanners.
Using a handheld scanner to place orders in Supply’d makes the ordering process faster, easier, and more accurate. Instead of manually searching for products, users can simply scan barcodes to add items directly to your order(s). With Supply’d, you can easily order from multiple suppliers in one go by simply scanning items or selecting them manually and adding them to your order. No need to create separate orders for each supplier. Supply’d takes care of sorting and sending orders to the correct suppliers.
{% hint style="info" %}
👉 For guidelines on placing an order through the app, see the [Placing a Purchase Order](/supplyd-erp/purchases/placing-a-purchase-order) document.
👉 For instructions on using **Supply'd Intelligence** for purchase orders, see the [Smart Purchase Orders](/supplyd-erp/purchases/smart-purchase-orders) document.
{% endhint %}
This document will walk you through the process of placing orders using a handheld Supply’d scanner, including:
* [#creating-and-placing-an-order](#creating-and-placing-an-order "mention")
* [#viewing-orders-on-a-scanner](#viewing-orders-on-a-scanner "mention")
***
## Creating & Placing an Order
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Select Order Stock
Open Supply'd on the scanner, go to the **Scanner** menu and select **Order Stock**.
The **Scanner - Order Stock** screen will show, flashing red to indicate it's ready to scan.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Scan or Search for the Order Items
You can either scan the barcode on the item or you can search for the item manually. Scanning is the quickest and easiest method.
**Scanning**
To scan the item, point the scanner at the barcode on the item and press the scan button. The item information will display, including stock levels, supplier details, product info, and pricing.
**Manual Search**
Searching manually is useful if the item doesn't scan, doesn't have a barcode or the barcode is damaged. To search manually, in the **Search Products** field, start to type the name of the item and a list of matching products will show for you to select from.
Once the item is scanned or selected, a screen will show detailing the item and the pricing. Click the **"+"** to add the number of items you would like to order, from one or more of the suppliers listed.
{% hint style="success" %}
If the number is large, you can click the **"0"** and type the number in.
{% endhint %}
In our example, when we searched for "Unicorn" and all 3 products show we can add the order amounts for all 3.
{% hint style="warning" %}
Make sure to note whether you purchase this item in units or cartons to avoid over-ordering. In our example, we buy unicorns as single units. However, if they were set up in cartons of 10, ordering 20 cartons would result in receiving 200 unicorns!
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Repeat Step 2
Repeat step 2 for any other products you wish to order.
{% hint style="success" %}
With Supply'd, you can order from multiple suppliers all in once. No need to create separate orders for each supplier. Supply’d takes care of sorting and sending orders to the correct suppliers.
{% endhint %}
The current total cost of the order is displayed at the bottom of the screen.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Review the Order
After adding all the items you wish to order, click the button to proceed. You will then be prompted to review your order.
Here, you’ll see all the items you’ve added to your cart. They will be organised by supplier, with details such as shipping method, preferred delivery date, an optional notes field, and the send timing for each supplier. The total cost of your order will be displayed at the bottom of the screen, along with the option to place the order.
Depending on how **Cart Mode** is configured in the [Sales Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/sales-settings#cart-settings) section in your [Sales Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/sales-settings) (click on the Supply'd logo in the top right & scroll to **Order Settings**) - either **Standard** or **Supplier**, this information may appear as:
**Standard**
One continuous order, starting at **Review Order** and finishing with . (The screenshot below has been split into sections for visibility.)
**Supplier**
Grouped by supplier, allowing you to review each supplier’s order separately. Simply click on the supplier to view the details.
{% hint style="warning" %}
If your order doesn't meet the supplier's minimum, a notification will appear on screen, and you won't be able to place the order until the minimum is met. \
\
Order minimums are set when adding a supplier.
👉 See [Adding Suppliers & Supplier Groups](/supplyd-erp/suppliers/adding-suppliers-and-supplier-groups).
{% endhint %}
***
#### Additional Options Before Placing the Order
Should you wish to postpone or remove an order, clicking on the 3 dots on the right beside the supplier's name will bring up a menu.
The options are:
**Place Order**
An alternative to the button at the bottom of the screen.
**Postpone**
This option lets you remove items from the cart until a later date. After selecting it, a calendar will appear so you can choose when the items should return to the cart.
**Remove**
Will remove all items from the cart. You will be asked to confirm.
Click .
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Place the Order
Once you are satisfied that your order is correct, scroll to the bottom of the screen and click the button (or use the option in the 3-dot menu).
You will be asked to confirm. Click to proceed.
{% hint style="warning" %}
**Order Approvals**
Some businesses may require certain orders placed by staff to be approved.
👉 You can find out more about setting up user order approval in the [Users](/supplyd-erp/settings/users) document.
If this is the case, the **Place Order** button will instead say **Send for Approval**.\
\
After a user requiring order approval sends through an order the approvers will be sent an email to review the order. If the approver is happy with the order they can simply click **Approve** in the email and follow the steps on the website, or view the orders in question in the **Orders** section of the website.
{% endhint %}
An **Order Confirmation** will appear showing the **Order Number**(s), where the order(s) will **Ship To**, the **Sub Total**, **GST** and the **Total**. Every supplier receives a unique order number and total.
You will see that the order says and . This simply means that this is a custom order and is queued for sending. Once the order has been sent, will change to .
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
## Viewing Orders on a Scanner
To view the order, click the 3 lines on the top left to take you to the Supply'd main menu. \
Select **Purchases**.
{% hint style="success" %}
In Supply’d **Order Settings** (click on the Supply'd logo in the top right & scroll to **Order Settings**), you can configure **Cart Mode** to determine how users view and review their items before finalising a purchase. \
\
\
**Standard**
The cart displays every item from every supplier in a single, continuous list.
\
\
\
**Supplier**
This mode groups your items by the specific supplier they belong to, allowing you to review each supplier’s order separately.
\
The **By Supplier** view is useful when ordering many items at once, as it helps ensure nothing is missed and prevents the page from becoming too long and difficult to review.\
{% endhint %}
Clicking on an order will bring up all the details of that order.
👉 For further details on managing your orders, see the [Managing Purchase Orders](/supplyd-erp/purchases/managing-purchase-orders) document.
***
### Order Activity
At the bottom of the form there is an **Order Activity** section. This lists any activity there has been on the order, such as, when the order was placed, paid, received etc.
You also have the option to add on internal note. Simply click , enter your note, then click to add it to the **Order Activity**.
# Performing a Stocktake (Scanner)
Using a scanner for stocktake in Supply'd boosts accuracy, speeds up the process, and reduces errors, ensuring real-time inventory updates and efficient stock management.
Stocktaking in Supply’d can be done directly within the app or by using a handheld scanner. Using a handheld Supply’d scanner will make your stocktake process faster and more accurate. Instead of writing down counts manually, you can simply scan each item and enter the quantity. This reduces mistakes and saves time, especially when managing large amounts of stock. The scanner also updates your inventory in real time, once the stocktake is finalised, so your stock levels will always reflect the most current numbers. This helps keep your records accurate and makes reporting more reliable.
👉 For details on stocktaking within the Supply'd app, see the [Performing a Stocktake](/supplyd-erp/inventory/performing-a-stocktake) document.
In this document, we will guide you step-by-step through the stocktake process using a handheld Supply’d scanner. You’ll find clear instructions and helpful tips for:
* [#performing-a-stocktake](#performing-a-stocktake "mention")
* [#viewing-stocktakes-on-the-scanner](#viewing-stocktakes-on-the-scanner "mention")
* [#filtering-the-stocktakes-list](#filtering-the-stocktakes-list "mention")
***
## Performing a Stocktake
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Select Stocktake
Open Supply'd on the scanner, go to the **Scanner** menu and select **Stocktake**.
The **Start Stocktake** screen will appear.
{% hint style="info" %}
If there are any unfinished stocktakes in the system, you’ll be prompted to resume them. Inventory numbers will only update once stocktakes are finalised.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Select the Location
Select the stocktake **Warehouse**/location from the drop-down menu.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click Start
Once the location has been selected, click .
You will be prompted to confirm that you want to start the stocktake. Click .
{% hint style="warning" %}
Keep in mind that while a stocktake is in progress, you cannot receive or transfer stock from this location. Be sure to schedule the stocktake at a time when no deliveries or stock transfers are expected.
{% endhint %}
The **Scanner - Stocktake** screen will show, flashing red to indicate it's ready to scan.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Scan or Search for the Stocktake Items
You can either scan the item's barcode or search for it manually. Scanning is the quickest and easiest method.
**Scanning**
To scan the item, point the scanner at the barcode on the item and press either of the scanner buttons.
**Manual Search**
Manual searching is useful if an item won’t scan, has no barcode, or has a damaged barcode. To search manually, type the item name in the **Search Products** field, and a list of matching products will appear for you to select from.
Once the item is scanned or selected, a screen will appear detailing the item and the stock levels.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Count & Record
Count the number of items that are on the shelf and, if necessary, adjust the number using the .
{% hint style="success" %}
If the number is large, you can click the number in the centre and type the count in.
{% endhint %}
In our example, if Supply'd shows 21 White Chocolate Unicorns but only 20 are actually on the shelf, press the "**-**" button to correct the count.
The screen will update to reflect the changes, including the new count and the adjustment made.
**Batches**
{% hint style="warning" %}
A product may have multiple batches listed, so be sure to count the specific batches and adjust them accordingly.
{% endhint %}
If any of the batch details shown are incorrect, click the pencil to the right of the batch #. The **Edit Batch Details** form will show where you can edit any details necessary. Click to apply these changes.
If a new batch is required, click .
The **Add Batch** form will show where you can create the new batch. Click to add the new batch.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click Done
Click (or the **X** in the top right corner) to close the item and proceed to the next one.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Repeat for All Items
Repeat steps 4 to 6 for each item in the stocktake.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Finalise the Stocktake
Once completed, click (**Finalise Stocktake)**.
{% hint style="warning" %}
Be sure to remember to finalise the stocktake as inventory numbers will not be updated until the stocktake has been finalised. Finalising the stocktake ensures that the recorded quantities are officially applied to your inventory, keeping your stock levels accurate and up to date. Until then, the system will continue to reflect the previous inventory numbers.
Additionally, **you should not pick, receive or transfer stock from this location until the stocktake is finalised**. You can break the stocktake up into smaller counts to assist with doing this during trade.
{% endhint %}
You will be asked to confirm.
**Stocktake Finalised** will flash across the top of the screen in green.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
## Additional Options Prior to Finalising
Before finalising, clicking the three dots in the top right corner will open a menu.
### View Stocktake Items
Enables you to view the items you have adjusted during the stocktake.
{% hint style="info" %}
Only amended items will be displayed; unchanged items will not appear on this list.
{% endhint %}
**Location**
The location where you are performing the stocktake.
**Created At**
The current time and date.
**Unit Variation**
The total discrepancy in item counts.
**Cost Variation**
The total dollar value of the discrepancy in item counts.
**Item**
The item, item size, item code, and batch number.
**Variance**
The discrepancy in item counts for this item.
**Old Count**
The count for this item that was in Supply'd prior to the stocktake.
**New Count**
The count for this item after the stocktake.
**Value**
The dollar value of the discrepancy in item counts for this item.
**Total Variance**
The total discrepancy in item counts. In our example, one item was over by +1 and the other short by -5, making the total of 4.
**Variance Value**
The total dollar value of the discrepancy in item counts. In our example, one item was over by +1 with a value of +$0.75 and the other short by -5 with a value of -$3.75, making the total of $3.00.
You will also see 3 dots at the top right of this screen. The only option in this menu is **Cancel Stocktake**. Selecting this will cancel the stocktake. You will be asked to confirm.
### Finalise Stocktake
Will finalise the stocktake. An alternative to the button.
### Cancel Stocktake
Will cancel the stocktake. You will be asked to confirm.
***
## Viewing Stocktakes on the Scanner
To view a list of stocktakes on the scanner, click the 3 lines on the top left to take you to the Supply'd main menu.
Select **Inventory**, then the **Stocktakes** tab. Stocktakes are labeled with colour-coded tags - either or - for easy identification.
Clicking on a stocktake will bring up all the details, the same as **View Stocktake Items** above.
Clicking the three dots in the top right corner will open a menu.
The only option in the menu for stocktakes is **Export Stocktake**. Selecting this will allow you to download the stocktake details.
For stocktakes that are still , you will have **Finalise Stocktake** or **Remove**.
***
## Filtering the Stocktakes List
It is also possible to filter the stocktake list. To do this, click on the 3 lines under the heading.
These options will appear for you to select from.
**Stocktake Status**
Select one or both from the drop-down menu.
* **In Progress**
* **Completed**
**Warehouse**
Select the location(s) you would like to filter by from the drop-down menu.
**Date Range**
Clicking the field will open a calendar, allowing you to select a date or date range for filtering.
Click to display the filtered list.
# Performing Deliveries as a Driver (Scanner)
As a delivery driver, using a handheld Supply'd scanner makes deliveries faster, more accurate, and keeps everything updated in real time.
As a driver, you will have only have access to delivery runs, and the deliveries within those runs, assigned to you on Supply'd.
\
This guide will walk you through how to perform deliveries using a handheld Supply’d scanner.
If you are using a tablet or would like to check deliveries in the app on a computer, see the [Performing Deliveries as a Driver](/supplyd-erp/deliveries/performing-deliveries-as-a-driver) document.
This document you will guide you through:
* [#home-page-my-deliveries](#home-page-my-deliveries "mention")
* [#performing-a-delivery-run](#performing-a-delivery-run "mention")
* [#additional-options-scheduled-delivery-run](#additional-options-scheduled-delivery-run "mention")
* [#additional-options-delivery-run-underway](#additional-options-delivery-run-underway "mention")
## Home Page - My Deliveries
When you log in to Supply’d on the scanner, you’ll see the **My Deliveries** home screen. This shows the delivery runs assigned to you.
Each run displays:
* **Run Number:** A unique identifying number.
* **Date:** The date the delivery run is set to be preformed.
* **Vehicle:** The vehicle to be used for the run.
* **Driver:** The driver assigned to the run - you.
* **Delivered:** How many deliveries delivered (if the run is in progress).
* **Status:** Whether the run is scheduled, in progress or completed.
{% hint style="success" %}
Delivery runs have colour-coded statuses to clearly show what stage they are at in the delivery process.
* - An upcoming delivery run.
* - The delivery run is being performed.
* - The run has been completed.
{% endhint %}
### Run Details
Clicking on a run will display all the details for that run.
{% hint style="success" %}
To open or close the sections on this page, click the little arrows to the right of the titles (as circled in red above).
Scroll down to see the additional sections.
{% endhint %}
#### Status
Start and end times, along with how many deliveries were completed, failed, delivered on time, or delivered late.
#### Delivery Run Details
The start and end locations, assigned vehicle and driver, and the vehicle’s capacity.
#### Route
A map displaying the delivery run route, which can be enlarged for more detail.\
\
#### Schedule
A list of deliveries in the run, in the optimised delivery order, showing order numbers, customer names, locations, the run number, and the estimated time of arrival (ETA) for each address.
{% hint style="info" %}
Any breaks, such as a lunch or tea breaks, will also appear in the schedule.
{% endhint %}
**Order Details**
Clicking on a delivery will bring up all the details specific to the customer.
* **Status:** Delivery Run number, ETA and Estimated Travel Time to the customers address.\
\
* **Delivery Details:** Shows the customer, their suburb or town, order number, assigned vehicle, delivery window, and any notes from the customer about the delivery.
* **Location:** Shows the customer’s address along with a map and location details.
***
***
## Performing a Delivery Run
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Login to Supply'd
Turn on the scanner an log in with your email address and password.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Select the Delivery Run
From the **My Deliveries** list, select the run you want to perform.
The delivery details will open, showing all the information described above.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click Start Run
Click to begin the run. You will be asked to confirm.
Click .
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Make Your Way to the First Delivery Address
The details of the first delivery will open.
{% hint style="success" %}
To get directions to the address, click . Google Maps will open and guide you to the address. When finished, tap the arrow at the bottom of the screen to return to Supply’d.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click Arrived
Once you have arrived at the address, click . You will be asked to confirm.
The **Order Cartons** section screen will appear. The status will now be .
{% hint style="success" %}
When a delivery run includes multiple orders for the same location, they will be merged into a single stop on the route plan and in the driver’s delivery workflow. Any actions taken at that stop - such as updating the status as arrived, delivered, failed etc, or adding proof of delivery - will apply to all orders associated with that location.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Add the Number of Cartons
Scan the QR code on the order carton(s) (packages), or click the **+** button to add the number of cartons to be delivered.
{% hint style="info" %}
This section may or may not appear, depending on the how the delivery was set up.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="warning" %}
If a vehicle has been set as **Refrigerated** or **Frozen** in the **Cooling Type** field under the **Vehicles** tab in [Delivery Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/delivery-settings), a “vehicle temperature” field must be completed during delivery runs for orders with cartons. If you attempt to scan a carton without entering this temperature, an error will appear prompting you to complete the field first.\
\
👉 See the [Delivery Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/delivery-settings#adding-a-vehicle) section of the [Delivery Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/delivery-settings) document for details.
{% endhint %}
All the buttons will change from grey to blue and the cart and will display below the carton details.
Click . The **Add POD & Deliver** screen will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Add POD & Deliver
After reviewing any special notes in the **Delivery Details** section, click .
{% hint style="info" %}
The type of Proof of Delivery (POD) needed depends on the delivery settings. Some businesses may require just a name, a signature, a photo, or a mix of all three.
{% endhint %}
The POD form will open.
Enter the name of the person receiving the delivery (clicking on the name field will open the keyboard) and ask them to provide their signature.
If a photo is required, click on . Under **Choose an Action**, select **Camera**.
Take a clear photo showing where the order was delivered. If it looks good, tap the tick to save it as the POD. Additional photos can be added if required.
After the delivery is signed for and/or photo taken, click .
The POD details will appear in the **Proof of Delivery** section, along with the date and time.
{% hint style="success" %}
Alternatively, if the keyboard is open on the screen, you can tap the arrow in the blue circle at the bottom right to mark the order as delivered and move to the next screen.
{% endhint %}
#### Failed Deliveries
If for any reason the order was unable to be delivered, click **Mark As Failed**.
The **Delivery Order Failed** form will appear.
* **Reason\* \[required field]:** Select the reason the delivery failed from the drop-down menu.
* **Additional Notes:** Optionally, add any notes explaining why the delivery failed.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Go to the Next Order
Once the order is signed for and marked as delivered, the order status will change to , and the next screen will open.
Click on .
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Repeat Steps 4 to 7
Repeat steps 4 to 7 for all orders in the delivery run.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Mark Delivery Run as Completed
After the final delivery, the screen below will appear.
Click on (**Mark Delivery Run As Completed**). You will be asked to confirm.
The delivery run status will change to .
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
## Additional Options - Scheduled Delivery Run
Before starting the delivery run (status is ), with the run selected, click the three dots in the top-right corner to open a menu with the following options:
{% hint style="info" %}
The menu options may vary depending on the page you’re on and other factors, so you may see all or some of the options listed below.
{% endhint %}
### **Start Run**
An alternative to the button in Step 2 above. Selecting this option will start the delivery run.
### **Edit Run**
Allows limited changes to be made to the delivery run. Selecting this will open the **Edit Delivery Run** form.
* **Vehicle:** Change the vehicle being used for the delivery run. Select the vehicle from the drop-down menu.
* **Driver:** Change the driver for the delivery run. Select the new driver from the drop-down menu.
* **Start Location:** Change the start location for the delivery run. Select from the drop-down menu or add a custom address, for example, if the driver is leaving from home.
* **End Location:** Change the end location for the delivery run. Select from the drop-down, menu or add a custom address, for example, if the driver is ending the run at home.
### **Download >** **Delivery Run List**
Allows the **Delivery Run List** to be downloaded for viewing, saving, or printing.
### **Toggle Full Screen**
The page you are on will show in full screen.
### **Remove Run**
Will remove the delivery run from your list. You will be asked to confirm.
***
## Additional Options - Delivery Run Underway
After starting the delivery run (status is ), click the 3 dots in the top right to open a menu with the following options for the order you are delivering:
### **Edit Delivery Order**
Allows limited changes to be made to the delivery order. Selecting this will open the **Edit Delivery Order** form.
#### **Delivery Notes**
Add any delivery notes for the driver about this order.
#### **Delivery Address**
Change the delivery address from the address on the original order. Fields marked with an asterix (\*) are required fields and must be completed.
#### **Delivery Window**
Change the delivery window start and end times.
### **Mark As > Arrived / Delivered / Failed**
#### **Arrived**
Alternative to the button used in Step 5 above.
#### **Delivered**
Alternative to the button in Step 6 above.
#### **Failed**
Alternative to **Mark As Failed** used in Step 6 above.\
### **Download > Delivery Slip / Shipping Label / Pack Slip / Invoice**
The following can be downloaded and printed for inclusion with the order.
* **Delivery Slip**
* **Shipping Label**
* **Pack Slip**
* **Invoice**
### **Remove Delivery Order**
Removes the delivery order from the delivery run. You will be asked to confirm.
***
## Additional Options - At Location
Once you have clicked the (status is ), the menu is the same as above without the "**Arrived**" option under **Mark As**:
***
## Additional Options - Delivered
Once the order has been delivered (status is ), there will only be one item in the menu:
***
## Additional Options - In Progress
While the order is in progress (status is ), you will have the option to mark the as **Completed**:
# Pick & Pack (Scanner)
Scanning in Supply’d boosts accuracy, speed, and efficiency by ensuring correct picks, reducing errors, and updating inventory in real-time.
Using a Supply’d handheld scanner for Pick & Pack makes order fulfilment faster, easier, and more accurate. Instead of manually checking items, staff can scan products directly as they pick and pack, ensuring the correct quantities and items are included in each order. This reduces errors, speeds up workflow, and keeps inventory updated in real time - helping your team stay efficient and customers satisfied.
In this document, we will guide you through the process of picking and packing orders, providing detailed explanations and helpful insights for:
* [#starting-a-pick-and-pack](#starting-a-pick-and-pack "mention")
* [#single-pick](#single-pick "mention") - Picking a Single Order
* [#cluster-pick](#cluster-pick "mention") - Picking Multiple Orders at Once to Tub on a Trolley
* [#wave-pick](#wave-pick "mention") - Picking one item at a time across multiple orders
* [#pack](#pack "mention") - Packing an Order
***
***
## Starting a Pick & Pack
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Open Supply'd on the Scanner
To start a **Pick &** **Pack**, open Supply'd on the scanner.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Select Pick & Pack
Select **Pick & Pack** from the **Scanner** menu.
The **Start Pick & Pack** screen will show.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Select the Process
Click on the **Process** field and select whether this is a:
* **Single Pick**: Picking of a single order (see [#single-pick](#single-pick "mention") below).
* **Cluster Pick:** Picking multiple orders at the same time into separate tubs (see [#cluster-pick](#cluster-pick "mention") below).
{% hint style="warning" %}
To configure this you will need to have added tubs and their dimensions in the **Pick & Pack Settings.**
👉 See the [Pick & Pack Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/pick-and-pack-settings) document.
{% endhint %}
* **Wave Pick:** Instead of picking products for one order at a time, staff pick a single product across multiple orders in one pass (or wave) (see [#wave-pick](#wave-pick "mention") below).
* **Pack:** Packing an order (see [#pack](#pack "mention") below).
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Select the Warehouse
Select the location of the order to be picked from the drop-down menu.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
## Single Pick
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Select Single Pick
On the **Start Pick & Pack** screen, click on the **Process** field and select **Single Pick**.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Select the Location
Select the location from the **Warehouse** menu.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click Start
Click .
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Select the Order
A list of orders will appear. Select the order you wish to pick.
The order will open showing the order details and the number of each item in the order.
{% hint style="info" %}
In general, products are picked and packed by either **units** or **cartons**, depending on the **Count Mode** selected in the [Pick & Pack Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/pick-and-pack-settings#pick-and-pack) section of the [Pick & Pack Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/pick-and-pack-settings). This setting determines the quantity staff enter during the picking process and how products are counted, ensuring the workflow matches your business's fulfilment and packing methods.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Pick the Items
Use the **"+"** button to add items as you place them in your tub (or collection container), or scan the barcode on each item as you add it.
{% hint style="success" %}
If the number is large, you can click the **"0"** and type the number in, then click the tick to apply the number.
{% endhint %}
The screen will update to reflect the changes and minimise the item details if the entered number matches the ordered quantity.
{% hint style="warning" %}
If you enter a number greater than the order quantity (overpick), the scanner will emit an audible beep, and the blue background around the numbers next to the item name will turn yellow.
If you choose to continue, the quantity deducted from inventory will be the **actual quantity picked**, not the original quantity ordered. Likewise, if you **underpick** an item, inventory will be adjusted based on the quantity actually picked.
Before confirming an overpick or underpick, ensure you are happy with the adjustment, as it will directly affect your inventory levels.
Overpicking and underpicking are important features for products where the final quantity supplied may differ from the quantity ordered. For example, in a butcher shop, a customer may order **1 kg** of steak, but the actual cut may weigh **1.2 kg** or **0.9 kg**, depending on the size of the cut. These features allow the actual quantity supplied to be recorded accurately, ensuring inventory, invoicing, and order fulfilment reflect what was delivered.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Repeat for Remaining Items
Repeat step 5 for each item in the order.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Perform Additional Options
Once you have collected all the items in the order, perform any [#additional-options-for-picking](#additional-options-for-picking "mention") or [#additional-options-for-items](#additional-options-for-items "mention"), or skip to [#finalising-a-single-pick](#finalising-a-single-pick "mention").
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Print Picking Receipt
Depending on your settings, the scanner will automatically connect to your printer and will print the picking receipt.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
### Additional Options for Picking
Prior to finalising the pick, clicking the 3 dots next to **Order Number** will bring up a menu.
**Finalise Picking**
Will finalise the **Pick**. An alternative to the button. You will be asked to confirm.
{% hint style="info" %}
This option will only appear after you’ve picked all items.
{% endhint %}
**Download >**
Enables you to download and print the following for inclusion with the order:
* **Invoice**
* **Pack Slip**
* **Shipping Label**
**Cancel Picking**
Will cancel the pick.
***
### Additional Options for Items
Clicking the 3 dots on the order item will bring up a menu.
**Assign Batches**
Clicking this opens the **Assign Batch** form and allows you to assign batches to the order. Click to assign that batch to the order item.
{% hint style="warning" %}
If a batch is marked as defective, the system will alert the picker during the selection process, ensuring it is not picked.\
{% endhint %}
The Batch number will appear on the order item.
Add the number of items added to the order with that batch number by pressing the **"+"**. \
\
If there are multiple batches of any item to be added to the order, repeat the process. The total of all the items added to the various batches should add up to the order quantity. For example, this order requires 25 packs of Koala Twins. You have 20 packs from batch #5498 and 5 from batch #6227, totalling 25 packs.
{% hint style="success" %}
**Pro Tip:** You can utilise automatic batch allocation by printing batch barcodes for your products.
{% endhint %}
**Clear Batches**
Clears any batches assigned to the item.
***
### Finalising a Single Pick
Once you have completed the pick, click (or select **Finalise Picking** from the 3-dot menu). Orders will automatically be marked as .
{% hint style="info" %}
Before finalising, the order will be marked as during the picking process.
{% endhint %}
***
## Cluster Pick
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Select Cluster Pick
On the **Start Pick & Pack** screen, click on the **Process** field and select **Cluster Pick**.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Select the Location
Select the location from the **Warehouse** menu.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click Start
Click .
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Scan the Tubs
In the **Tubs** section, scan the tubs you would like to use with this cluster pick by pointing the scanner at the QR code and press either of the scanner buttons. Scan 1 tub per order. For example, if you have 5 orders to pick, you’ll need to scan 5 tubs - one for each order.
The system will automatically organise orders into tubs based on their size and quantity.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Select the Orders
In the **Orders** section, choose how you would like to assign orders for this cluster pick.
**Allocate Orders**
How you would like to allocate orders to this cluster pick.
* **Auto:** Have orders automatically assigned based on your chosen criteria.
**Delivery Dates**
The delivery date you would like to assign to this cluster pick. When clicking on this field a calendar will show for you to select your dates. **Leave blank for all delivery dates.**
**Pick Priority**
Select one or more pick priorities to use in this cluster pick. **Leave blank for all Pick Priorities**.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click Start
Click .
A list of items to pick will appear.
{% hint style="success" %}
Identical items from different orders are grouped together, each assigned a specific tub linked to its order. In our example, 2 of the orders contain unicorns. The blue unicorns are listed one after the other, as are the pink and white. The first blue unicorn item has been allocated to **TUB: 3**, the second to **TUB: 2** for their corresponding orders. This ensures a faster and more efficient picking process.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="info" %}
Products are picked and packed by either **units** or **cartons**, depending on the **Count Mode** selected in the [Pick & Pack Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/pick-and-pack-settings#pick-and-pack) section of the [Pick & Pack Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/pick-and-pack-settings). This setting determines the quantity staff enter during the picking process and how products are counted, ensuring the workflow matches your business's fulfilment and packing methods.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Pick the Items
As in single pick, scan the products, use the **"+"** buttons to add items, or click on the **"0"** and type the number in. \
\
The screen will prompt you to scan the tub QR code and place the items into the allocated tub.
The screen will update to reflect the changes and minimise the item details.
{% hint style="warning" %}
If you enter a number greater than the order quantity (overpick), the scanner will emit an audible beep, and the blue background around the numbers next to the item name will turn yellow.
If you choose to continue, the quantity deducted from inventory will be the **actual quantity picked**, not the original quantity ordered. Likewise, if you **underpick** an item, inventory will be adjusted based on the quantity actually picked.
Before confirming an overpick or underpick, ensure you are happy with the adjustment, as it will directly affect your inventory levels.
Overpicking and underpicking are important features for products where the final quantity supplied may differ from the quantity ordered. For example, in a butcher shop, a customer may order **1 kg** of steak, but the actual cut may weigh **1.2 kg** or **0.9 kg**, depending on the size of the cut. These features allow the actual quantity supplied to be recorded accurately, ensuring inventory, invoicing, and order fulfilment reflect what was delivered.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Repeat for Remaining Items
Repeat for each item in the order.
Once you are done, you will have all of the items for each order placed into each of their allocated tubs.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Perform Additional Options
Once you have collected all the items in the order, perform any [#additional-options-for-the-orders](#additional-options-for-the-orders "mention") or [#additional-options-for-the-items](#additional-options-for-the-items "mention"), or skip to [#finalising-a-cluster-pick](#finalising-a-cluster-pick "mention").
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
### Additional Options for the Orders
Prior to finalising the pick, clicking the 3 dots next to **Order Number**, will bring up a menu.
**View Orders**
Enables you to view the orders that are included in this cluster pick.
**Finalise Picking**
This will finalise the **Pick**. An alternative to the button. You will be asked to confirm.
{% hint style="info" %}
This option will only appear after all items have been picked.
{% endhint %}
**Download >**
Enables you to download and print the following for inclusion with the order:
* **Invoice**
* **Pack Slip**
* **Shipping Label**
**Cancel Picking**
Will cancel the pick.
***
### Additional Options for the Items
Clicking the 3 dots on the order item, will bring up a menu. This is the same process as explained above in [#additional-options-for-items](#additional-options-for-items "mention").
***
### Finalising a Cluster Pick
Once you have completed the cluster pick, click (or select **Finalise Picking** from the 3-dot menu). Orders will automatically be marked as .
***
## Wave Pick
**Wave Picking** is designed for businesses that produce and pack products in bulk, where items become available one product at a time rather than by individual order. Instead of picking one order at a time, staff pick **one product across multiple orders**.
This workflow is ideal for medium to large bakeries and other continuous production environments. For example, bread moves from production to the ovens and then directly into the packing area, where large quantities of a single product arrive at once. The packing team can only pack the product currently arriving, so they fulfil that item for every order that requires it before moving on to the next product.
{% hint style="success" %}
For the best Wave Picking experience, ensure the following are configured:
* **By Shipping Cartons** is selected in the **Count Mode** field in the [Pick & Pack Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/pick-and-pack-settings#pick-and-pack) section of your [Pick & Pack Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/pick-and-pack-settings).
* **Shipping Cartons** and/or **carton container products** are set up.
* Products are configured with the appropriate [Adding Products](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products#fulfilment-rules) when [Adding Products](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products) (or editing a product).
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="info" %}
Shipping cartons and carton containers can represent both standard packaging and industry-specific equipment. For example, in a bakery, bread is packed into trays or bread crates, which are treated as **shipping cartons**. These trays or crates are then loaded onto **carton containers**, such as trolleys or pallets, for staging, transport, and delivery. Other businesses may use different types of shipping cartons and carton containers depending on their products and warehouse operations.
{% endhint %}
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Select Product Wave Pick
On the **Start Pick & Pack** screen, click on the **Process** field and select **Product Wave Pick**.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Select the Location
Select the location from the **Warehouse** menu.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click Start
Click . A list of all products that need picking is displayed.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Select the Product
Select the product you want to pick. A list of orders containing that product will then be displayed.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Scan the Pack List
Scan the **Pack Slip** for one of the orders containing that product.
{% hint style="info" %}
In production facilities that use Wave Picking, **Pack Slips** are typically printed in advance to identify and separate individual boxes, cartons, packing stations, or trolleys, allowing staff to select and work on any order as products become available.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Pick the Product
Pick the selected product for that order. Once the required quantity has been picked and the number added, the scanner automatically moves to the next order requiring the same product.
{% hint style="warning" %}
If you enter a number greater than the order quantity (overpick), the scanner will emit an audible beep, and the blue background around the numbers next to the item name will turn yellow.
If you choose to continue, the quantity deducted from inventory will be the **actual quantity picked**, not the original quantity ordered. Likewise, if you **underpick** an item, inventory will be adjusted based on the quantity actually picked.
Before confirming an overpick or underpick, ensure you are happy with the adjustment, as it will directly affect your inventory levels.
Overpicking and underpicking are important features for products where the final quantity supplied may differ from the quantity ordered. For example, in a butcher shop, a customer may order **1 kg** of steak, but the actual cut may weigh **1.2 kg** or **0.9 kg**, depending on the size of the cut. These features allow the actual quantity supplied to be recorded accurately, ensuring inventory, invoicing, and order fulfilment reflect what was delivered.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Repeat
Continue scanning **Pack Slips** and picking the product until all orders containing that product have been completed.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Perform Additional Options for Items
Clicking the 3 dots on the order item, will bring up a menu. This is the same process as explained above in [#additional-options-for-items](#additional-options-for-items "mention").
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click Finalise
Click .
{% hint style="info" %}
Before **Finalising**, you can:
* Edit picked quantities.
* Close the screen by clicking the **X** in the top right and return later - all progress is saved until the wave is finalised.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Repeat for the Next Products
Continue picking in this way, working through each product in waves, until all products for all orders have been picked.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
{% hint style="warning" %}
Inventory is only deducted for orders that become fully picked after is selected.
If an order still requires other products to be picked, inventory is **not** deducted yet. However, any batch or lot information assigned during Wave Picking is stored in the background and will be applied when the remaining products are picked and the order is completed.
{% endhint %}
***
## Pack
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Select the Process
On the **Start Pick & Pack** screen, click on the **Process** field and select **Pack**.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Select Warehouse
Select the location from the **Warehouse** drop-down menu.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Select Pack Station
Select the **Pack Station**. If you have not set-up any pack stations for the location this will simply be set as "Default".
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click .
A list of orders will appear.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Select Orders
Select the order you wish to pack from the list on the scanner, otherwise, if receipt or tub-based picking is enforced, scan the receipt or tub label instead.
The order details will appear.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Add or Change Carton (optional)
The weight and carton size will be automatically calculated by Supply'd if you have added weights and dimensions when setting up the products. If for any reason you wish to change the carton size manually, click the yellow box which says "Custom Carton". Clicking this will cause the **Add Carton** form to appear.
Select the weight, dimensions and number and click .
{% hint style="warning" %}
If the **Track Items In Cartons** feature has been enabled in your [Pick & Pack Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/pick-and-pack-settings), during the packing process the packer must first scan a carton, then scan each item placed into it, and repeat this sequence for every additional carton.\
\
This feature is primarily used by companies that need to specify what their customers can expect in each carton - typically larger clients, such as supermarkets.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Pack Items
As with picking, use the **"+"** button or scan the barcode on each item to add items as you pack them.
Repeat with each item in the order.
{% hint style="info" %}
If for any reason the item was under-picked during Pick stage, for example, the customer ordered 20 pink unicorns and there was only 1 in stock, an additional section will show - **Short Picked Items** - listing these items. If this was a picking error, you will see which items will need to be checked.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Perform Additional Options
Once you have collected all the items in the order, perform any [#additional-options-for-packing](#additional-options-for-packing "mention"), or skip to [#printing-labels-and-finalising-the-pack](#printing-labels-and-finalising-the-pack "mention").
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
### Additional Options for Packing
Prior to finalising the pack, clicking the 3 dots next to **Order Number**, will bring up a menu.
**Add Parcel**
Should you need to add an extra carton for packing. Clicking this will cause the **Add Carton** form to appear.
Select the weight, dimensions and number and click .
\
The additional carton will appear on the packing list.
**Download >**
Enables you to download and print the following for inclusion with the order:
* **Invoice**
* **Pack Slip**
* **Shipping Label**
**Change Pack Station**
Allows you to change the packing station. Clicking on this opens the **Change Pack Station** form.
Select the new pack station from the drop-down menu and click
**Cancel Packing**
Will cancel the pack. You will be asked to confirm.
***
### Printing Labels & Finalising the Pack
Once all items from the order are packed, click .
You will be given the option to print the label or to finalise the pack.
Select (or click if you don't want to print labels).
Supply'd will automatically print the correct label for the order - either a shipping label for deliveries or a pick-up label for collection orders.
Once you have verified that the labels printed correctly, click to complete the order.
Orders will automatically be marked as , or, in the case of Pick-Up orders, .
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 For more information on using a scanner for pick-up orders, see the [Pick Up Orders (Scanner)](/supplyd-erp/scanner/pick-up-orders-scanner) document.
{% endhint %}
# Pick Up Orders (Scanner)
The Supply’d scanner speeds up pick-up orders by ensuring quick, accurate item verification. It reduces errors, improves inventory tracking, and enhances customer satisfaction.
Using a Supply’d handheld scanner for pickup orders makes the process quicker, easier, and more accurate. Instead of manually checking items, you can scan products as you pick them to ensure the right items and quantities are collected. This reduces mistakes, saves time, and updates your orders in real time so everything stays accurate and ready for the customer.
***
***
## Using a Scanner for Pick Up Orders
### Customer Notification
After a pick-up order has been picked and packed (👉 see [Pick & Pack (Scanner)](/supplyd-erp/scanner/pick-and-pack-scanner)), it will automatically be marked as , and the customer will be notified.
The link in the notification opens the pick-up details and displays a QR code.
***
### Using the Scanner at Pickup
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Select Pick-up Order
When the customer presents the QR code, open Supply'd on the scanner. Select **Pick-up Order** from the **Scanner** menu.
The **Pick Up Order** screen will appear.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Select the Location
Choose the location the order will be picked up from.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click Start
Click
The **Scanner - Order Pick-up** screen will show, flashing red to indicate it's ready to scan.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Scan the Order
You can either scan the customer's QR code or search for it manually. Scanning is the quickest and easiest method.
**Scanning**
To scan the item, point the scanner at the QR code and press either of the scanner buttons on the side.
**Manual Search**
Searching manually is useful if the code doesn't scan, the customer doesn't have the QR code or the QR code is damaged. To search manually, in the **Search Orders** field, start to type the person's or company's name, or the order number and a list of matching orders will show for you to select from.
The order will be colour-code tagged as .
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Locate & Scan the Order
Locate the order and scan the pick-up label(s). (Or manually enter the quantity of cartons/parcels picked up.)
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Hand the Order to the Customer
Hand the customer the order, and click the button.
You will be asked to confirm that you would like to mark the order as **Completed**.
Clicking the (**Mark as Completed**) button will mark the order as .
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
# Receiving Orders (Scanner)
Receiving orders in Supply'd lets you track what items were received when, automatically add stock to inventory, and assign batch information such as pricing, expiry and batch codes.
The Supply'd handheld scanner makes taking in new stock fast and accurate. It replaces messy paperwork with a simple digital system that updates your inventory, batch numbers, and expiry dates in real-time. Whether you are scanning a simple box of crackers or fresh produce with complex weights, the scanner does the hard work for you - automatically reading the barcode data and updating your records instantly.
A Supply’d handheld scanner can be used to receive both **Orders** and **Stock** not associated with an order. This guide focuses specifically on receiving **Orders**.
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 If you need to receive in items that are not associated with an order, see the [Receiving Stock (Scanner)](/supplyd-erp/scanner/receiving-stock-scanner) document.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="info" %}
When receiving transfers between warehouses, follow the same steps explained here for receiving regular orders. Transfer orders are identified by the prefix "T".
👉 For more details about performing stock transfers, see the [Stock Transfer (Scanner)](/supplyd-erp/scanner/stock-transfer-scanner) document.
{% endhint %}
In this document we will guide you through the process of receiving orders using a Supply'd scanner, including:
* [#starting-a-receive](#starting-a-receive "mention")
* [#receiving-an-order](#receiving-an-order "mention")
* [#adding-batch-data](#adding-batch-data "mention")
* [#additional-options](#additional-options "mention")
* [#viewing-write-offs-list-on-the-scanner](#viewing-write-offs-list-on-the-scanner "mention")
* [#filtering-the-receives-list](#filtering-the-receives-list "mention")
***
## Starting a Receive
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Open Supply'd on the Scanner
To start a **Receive**, open Supply'd on the scanner.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Select Receive
Select **Receive** from the **Scanner** menu.
The **Start Receiving** screen will show.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Select the Type
Clicking the **Type** field will give you two options:
* **Order:** Receiving an entire order.
* **Stock:** Receiving specific products.
In this case select **Order**.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Select the Location
Select the receiving location for the order from the drop-down menu.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click Start
Click .
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
## Receiving an Order
After pressing , the **Scanner - Receive Order** screen will show, flashing red to indicate it's ready to scan.
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Select Order
There are 3 ways to locate the order you want to receive:\
1. If the order was placed with a Supply'd supplier and they provide you with an invoice or pack slip, you can scan the QR code on either of these documents to start receiving.
2. If you have barcoded items on the order simply scan a product to be received. If an order is found that has not yet been received it will show in a list. Simply select the order you are receiving to start the receive.
3. If there are no barcoded items or Supply'd QR you can tap **Search Orders** and enter the Purchase Order number or supplier name, or, in the case of a transfer, the Transfer Order number to locate the order.
{% hint style="warning" %}
**Please Note:** Most suppliers will provide the purchase order number in an order reference which matches what was sent from Supply'd.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Scan and/or Count
Once the order is scanned or selected, a screen will appear detailing the order. You will be presented with a list of the items for this order and the first one highlighted.
Scan each items barcode or count the number of each item that is in the order and add the number using **"+"**.
{% hint style="success" %}
If the number is large, you can click the **"0"** and type the number in. Partial quantities are also supported when typing in the number.
{% endhint %}
If you have **Auto Next** enabled the scanner will automatically jump to the next product after the required quantity has been scanned or added. If items are missing and you would like to ignore them or partially ignore you can tap the **Skip** or **Done** button at the bottom of the item.
The screen will update to reflect the changes and minimise the item details if the entered number matches the ordered quantity.
{% hint style="warning" %}
If you enter a number greater than the order quantity, the scanner will emit an audible beep, and the blue background around the numbers next to the item name will turn yellow.
If the numbers do not match you will still be able to proceed with finalising the receive. The amount listed on the receive is what will be added to inventory.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="success" %}
If required, you can add any batch data details by clicking the 3 dots next to **Batch Data**.
👉 See the [#adding-batch-data](#adding-batch-data "mention") section below for full details.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="success" %}
### Scanning GS1 & Price-Embedded Barcodes in Supply’d
#### **Scanning GS1 Databar / Datamatrix During a Receive**
\
**Steps:**
1. Assign barcodes to products.
2. Place a **Purchase Order (PO)**.
3. Open **Scanner > Receive** and scan a product barcode to start the Receive.
**Behavior:**
* **Simple GTIN:** Increments by units.
* **Complex GS1 Databar / Datamatrix**: Increments by weight if encoded; otherwise units. Weight, expiry, batch info saved.
***
#### **Scanning Price-Embedded Barcodes During a Receive**
**Steps:**
1. Enter the product’s **PLU** (5 digits) into the product’s **Barcode field**.
2. Place a **PO**.
3. Start a **Receive** and scan the price-embedded barcode.
**Behavior:**
* Quantity is automatically calculated based on the price encoded in the barcode.
***
👉 GS1 scanning should already be enabled on Supply’d scanners. However, if you need to enable it for any reason, follow the steps outlined in [GS1 Barcode Scanning (Scanner)](/supplyd-erp/scanner/gs1-barcode-scanning-scanner).\
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Repeat for All Items
Repeat step 2 for all the items in the order.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Finalise the Receive
Once completed, click **Finalise Receiving**.
You will be asked to confirm.
**Receiving Finalise** will flash across the top of the screen in green.
{% hint style="warning" %}
Be sure to remember to finalise the **Receive**, as the inventory numbers will not be updated until then.
{% endhint %}
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
## Adding Batch Data
If you would like to assign batch information to items, clicking the 3 dots next to **Batch Data**, will bring up a menu:
***
### Edit Batch
Opens the **Edit Batch Data** form where you can enter the details for the batch.
Complete the form as follows:
**Batch Code (Optional)**
Enter an optional batch code reference for this item.
**Cost of Goods (ex tax)**
The cost of goods for a unit (or what is defined in your inventory carton quantity, if not units). This is used for margin calculations when the item is sold.
{% hint style="success" %}
You can press to pull the current average buy price if it is empty.
{% endhint %}
**Production Date (Optional)**
The date the product was produced. Select the day, month and year from the calendar.
**Expiry Date (Optional)**
Select the expiry date for the batch.
**Expiry Type**
Select the type of expiry - either **Best Before** or **Use By**. If the **Expiry Date** is not provided this field will be ignored.
**Quality Control**
Select whether or not this product passed the quality control check.
{% hint style="info" %}
This will only show if set in **Enable QC Check** in the [Sales Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/sales-settings#receiving-orders) section in your [Sales Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/sales-settings).
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="warning" %}
If you receive defective stock, make sure to mark it as **Defective**. This will notify the QC manager via email, allowing them to inspect the stock and write it off if necessary.
{% endhint %}
**Notes**
Optionally, add any notes relevant to this batch.
**Attachments**
Attach files to a batch. For example, businesses can store Certificates of Analysis (CoA) or other relevant documents directly against batches for easy access. Simply click **Choose File** and select the file you want to attach.
{% hint style="success" %}
If you have multiple files attached, you can rearrange them by clicking the 3 lines next to the file name and dragging them into your preferred order.
{% endhint %}
Click to apply this information to the batch.
Add the number of items with these batch details by using the **"+"**. In our example, all items received have the same batch details so the number is **"10"**.
***
### Match Batch
Automatically matches existing batch data and updates the inventory numbers accordingly.
***
### Split Batch
If the items you are receiving are from different batches, you can add them here. Clicking this opens the **Edit Batch Data** form, as above, where you can enter the details for the batch. Add the number of items with these batch details by using the **"+"**.
\
Repeat the process for remaining batches.
\
The total from all batches should equal the total number received.
In our example, we received 6 items from one batch and 4 from another, making a total of 10.
***
### Edit Bin Location
Opens the **Edit BIN Location** form where you can enter details of the item's location in the warehouse or store.\
\
Once you have all the required details for the item, click the "**X**" in the top right corner to close the item and proceed to the next one.
Repeat the process for each item being received.
{% hint style="success" %}
If you are assigning batches to most items you may find the **Auto Next** function, that is on by default, problematic. If you want to disable the receive automatically jumping to the next item after the quantity has been selected go to **Settings > Order Settings > Receiving Orders**, for **Auto Next** select **Never** and click **Save**. This will prevent the system from automatically jumping to the next product.
{% endhint %}
***
### Scan By Weight
This allows you to scan price-embedded barcodes on items with variable weights, such as pre-packed meat. You can edit the reference price and view a table of all scanned items before confirming.
Scan a price/weight embedded barcode to start.
As you scan, each item is recorded and totalled automatically, giving you an accurate quantity and value for the batch.
You can review all scanned items in a table before confirming and remove any accidental scans by clicking the "**X**" next to the item.
{% hint style="warning" %}
If you scan an incorrect item, a warning will be displayed.\
{% endhint %}
Once all items have been scanned, click .
{% hint style="info" %}
Individual scans are not stored, so they won’t reappear if you close and reopen the **Scan by Weight** popup. Barcode data is not saved automatically - if you leave the popup or click , the scanned details will be cleared and only the total quantity will be retained.
{% endhint %}
***
## Additional Options
Prior to finalising, clicking the 3 dots next to **Order Number**, will bring up a menu.
***
### Finalise Receive
Will finalise the Receive. An alternative to the **Finalise Receive** button. You will be asked to confirm.
***
### Receive All
If you're certain you've received all the ordered items, selecting this option will mark them all as received, saving the time required to enter each one individually. You will be asked to confirm.
***
### Change Location
Allows you to select a different location for the Receive.
Select the new location from the drop-down menu. Click .
***
### Actions > Add Item
Opens the **Add Item** form allowing you to add extra items to a purchase order during receiving - ideal for when a supplier sends the wrong or substitute stock, but you're still happy to accept it.
After adding the item, you can manage it just like any other item, including editing its details, adding a batch, updating quantities, or making any other adjustments as needed.
***
### Actions > Print Product Labels
Selecting this will take you to the **Print Label** screen where you can select a label to print. See the [Templating](/supplyd-erp/settings/templating) document for further information on creating and printing labels.
{% hint style="warning" %}
The **Actions** option is not available for transfer orders.
{% endhint %}
***
### Actions > Attach File
Opens the **Attach File** screen.
Choose a file to attach from the following options in the drop-down menu.
When receiving an order, it's a good practice to upload a photo of the invoice, as Supply’d uses it for reconciliation and to match it with the purchase order.
1. From the **Attach File** menu, select **Invoice**.
2. Click on **Choose File**.\
\
\
{% hint style="info" %}
If you receive a prompt asking Chrome to record audio, click **DENY**, as you’re only taking a photo and audio is not needed.
{% endhint %}
3. You will be prompted to **Choose an Action**. Select **Camera**.
Hold the scanner over the invoice and take the photo as straight as possible. If you're satisfied with the image, click the check mark. If not, click the X and retake the photo.
4. Click .
If you haven't already, finalise the receive (see [#finalising-a-receive](#finalising-a-receive "mention") below).
Scroll down to **Order Attachments**.
Clicking the three dots on the right opens a menu.
* **Download:** Will allow you to download the attachment.
* **Rename:** Allows you to rename the attachment. \
\
* **Remove:** Will remove the attachment. You will be asked to confirm.
You can follow the steps above to attach any other files required.
***
### Cancel Receive
Will cancel the receive. You will be asked to confirm.
***
{% hint style="success" %}
If you need to receive in items that are not associated to an order, you would instead use the **Receive Stock** function. See the [Receiving Stock (Scanner)](/supplyd-erp/scanner/receiving-stock-scanner) for details on doing this.
{% endhint %}
***
## Viewing the Receives List on the Scanner
To view a list of receives on the scanner, click the 3 lines on the top left to take you to the Supply'd main menu.
Select **Inventory**, then the **Receives** tab.
Receives are labeled with colour-coded tags - either , - for easy identification.
Clicking on a receive will bring up all the details, including the Order Number, date, location, the items and number of items received, and the dollar value.
***
## Filtering the Receives List
It is also possible to filter the Receives list. To do this, click on the 3 lines under the heading.
These options will appear for you to select from.
**Transfer Status**
Select one or more from the drop-down menu.
**Warehouse**
Select the location(s) you would like to filter by from the drop-down menu.
**Date Range**
Clicking the field will open a calendar, allowing you to select a date or date range for filtering. Click to set the dates.
Click to apply your selections and filter the **Receives** list.
# Receiving Stock (Scanner)
Using a Supply'd handheld scanner streamlines stock receiving by reducing manual entry, minimising errors, and ensuring real-time inventory updates for a more efficient process.
The Supply’d handheld scanner can also be used to receive stock that does not have an associated Purchase Order. This allows you to quickly add items to inventory as they arrive, whether they are unplanned deliveries, supplier samples, or miscellaneous stock. By scanning product barcodes, you can quickly and easily records quantities, add batch or expiry details, and update your inventory in real time, ensuring your stock records remain accurate even for items outside standard orders.
A Supply’d handheld scanner can be used to receive both **Orders** or **Stock**. This document will focus on receiving **Stock**.
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 If you need to receive in items that are associated with an order, see the [Receiving Orders (Scanner)](/supplyd-erp/scanner/receiving-orders-scanner) document.
{% endhint %}
In this document, we will guide you through the **Receiving Stock** process step-by-step, providing detailed explanations and helpful insights for:
* [#starting-a-receive](#starting-a-receive "mention")
* [#receiving-stock](#receiving-stock "mention")
* [#adding-batch-data](#adding-batch-data "mention")
* [#additional-options](#additional-options "mention")
* [#finalising-a-receive](#finalising-a-receive "mention")
***
## Starting a Receive
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Open Supply'd on the Scanner
To start a **Receive**, open Supply'd on the scanner.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Select Receive
Select **Receive** from the **Scanner** menu.
The **Start Receiving** screen will show.
{% hint style="info" %}
If a previous Receive hasn't been finalised and you attempt to start a new one, you will be prompted to resume the incomplete Receive.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Select the Type
Clicking the **Type** field will give you two options:
* **Order:** Receiving an entire order.
* **Stock:** Receiving specific products.
In this case select **Stock**.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Select the Location
Select the receiving location for the order from the drop-down menu.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click Start
Click .
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
## Receiving Stock
After pressing , the **Scanner - Receive Stock** screen will show, flashing red to indicate it's ready to scan.\
\
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Select Item
You can either scan the item's barcode or search for it manually. Scanning is the quickest and easiest method.
**Scanning**
To scan the item, point the scanner at the barcode on the item and press either of the scanner buttons on the sides.
**Manual Search**
Searching manually is useful if the item doesn't scan, doesn't have a barcode or the barcode is damaged. To search manually, in the **Search Products** field, start to type the name of the item and a list of matching products will show for you to select from.
{% hint style="info" %}
### Scanning GS1 & Price-Embedded Barcodes in Supply’d
**Scanning GS1 Databar / Datamatrix During a Receive**\
**Steps:**
1. Assign barcodes to products.
2. Place a **Purchase Order (PO)**.
3. Open **Scanner > Receive** and scan a product barcode to start the Receive.
**Behavior:**
* **Simple GTIN:** Increments by units.
* **Complex GS1 Databar / Datamatrix**: Increments by weight if encoded; otherwise units. Weight, expiry, batch info saved.\
***
\
\
**Scanning Price-Embedded Barcodes During a Receive**
**Steps:**
1. Enter the product’s **PLU** (5 digits) into the product’s **Barcode field**.
2. Place a **PO**.
3. Start a **Receive** and scan the price-embedded barcode.
**Behavior:**
* Quantity is automatically calculated based on the price encoded in the barcode.\
***
👉 GS1 scanning should already be enabled on Supply’d scanners. However, if you need to enable it for any reason, follow the steps outlined in .\
\
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Scan and/or Count
Once the item is scanned or selected, a screen will appear detailing the item and the stock levels.
Scan each item's barcode or count the number of items received and add the number using the **"**. In our example, we are receiving 10 White Chocolate Unicorns.
{% hint style="success" %}
If the number is large, you can click the **"0"** and type the number in
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Add Batch Details
If required, you can add any batch data details by clicking the 3 dots next to **Batch Data**.
👉 See the [#adding-batch-data](#adding-batch-data "mention") section below for full details.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click Done
Click (or close the screen by clicking the **X**).
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Repeat for All Other Items
Repeat for any other stock you need to **Receive**.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Finalise the Receive
Once completed, click (**Finalise Receiving**).
You will be asked to confirm.
Click .
**Receiving Finalise** will flash across the top of the screen in green.
{% hint style="warning" %}
Be sure to remember to finalise the **Receive**, as the inventory numbers will not be updated until then.
{% endhint %}
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
## Adding Batch Data
Prior to finalising, clicking the 3 dots next to **Batch data**, will bring up a menu:
***
#### Edit Batch
Opens the **Edit Batch Data** form where you can enter the details for the batch.
Complete the form as follows:
**Batch Code (Optional)**
Enter an optional batch code reference for this item.
**Cost of Goods (ex tax)**
The cost of goods for a unit (or what is defined in your inventory carton quantity, if not units). This is used for margin calculations when the item is sold.
{% hint style="success" %}
You can press to pull the current average buy price if it is empty.
{% endhint %}
**Production Date (Optional)**
The date the product was produced. Select the day, month and year from the calendar.
**Expiry Date (Optional)**
Select the expiry date for the batch.
**Expiry Type**
Select the type of expiry - either **Best Before** or **Use By**. If the **Expiry Date** is not provided this field will be ignored.
**Quality Control**
Select whether or not this product passed the quality control check.
{% hint style="info" %}
This will only show if set in **Enable QC Check** in the [Sales Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/sales-settings#receiving-orders) section in your [Sales Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/sales-settings).
{% endhint %}
**Notes**
Optionally, add any notes relevant to this batch.
**Attachments**
Attach files to a batch. For example, businesses can store Certificates of Analysis (CoA) or other relevant documents directly against batches for easy access. Simply click **Choose File** and select the file you want to attach.
{% hint style="success" %}
If you have multiple files attached, you can rearrange them by clicking the 3 lines next to the file name and dragging them into your preferred order.
{% endhint %}
Click to apply this information to the batch.
Add the number of items with these batch details by using the . In our example all items received have the same batch details so the number is "**10**".
***
#### Match Batch
Automatically matches existing batch data and updates the inventory numbers accordingly.
***
#### Split Batch
If the items you are receiving are from different batches, you can add them here. Clicking this opens the **Edit Batch Data** form, as above, where you can enter the details for the batch. Add the number of items with these batch details by using the .
\
Repeat the process for remaining batches.
\
The total from all batches should equal the total number received.
In our example, we received 6 items from one batch and 4 from another, making a total of 10.
***
#### Edit Bin Location
Opens the **Edit BIN Location** form where you can enter details of the items location in the warehouse or store.\
\
Once you have all the required details for the item, click the **X** in the top right corner to close the item and proceed to the next one.
Repeat the process for each item being received.
***
## Additional Options
Prior to finalising, clicking the 3 dots on the scanner screen, will bring up a menu:
***
### View Items Received
Open the **Edit Receive Stock** screen where you can view all the items you have entered.
Clicking on the 3 dots beside an item opens a menu.
**Edit Item** \
\
Opens a screen where you can edit the number or add **Batch Data** (as above).\
\
**Remove Item**\
\
Will remove the item from the list. You will be asked to confirm.\
\
\
You can also **Finalise** the receive from this screen.
***
### Finalise Receive
Will finalise the Receive. An alternative to the **Finalise Receive** button. You will be asked to confirm.
***
### Cancel Receive
Will cancel the receive. You will be asked to confirm.
***
{% hint style="success" %}
If you need to receive in items that are associated with an order, you would instead use the **Receive Orders** function.
👉 See the [Receiving Orders (Scanner)](/supplyd-erp/scanner/receiving-orders-scanner) document for details on doing this.
{% endhint %}
***
## Viewing the Receives List on the Scanner
To view a list of receives on the scanner, click the 3 lines on the top left to take you to the Supply'd main menu.
Select **Inventory**, then the **Receives** tab.
Receives are labeled with colour-coded tags - either , - for easy identification.
Clicking on a receive will bring up all the details, including the Order Number, date, location, the items and number of items received, and the dollar value.
***
## Filtering the Receives List
It is also possible to filter the Receives list. To do this, click on the 3 lines under the heading.
These options will appear for you to select from.
**Transfer Status**
Select one or more from the drop-down menu.
**Warehouse**
Select the location(s) you would like to filter by from the drop-down menu.
**Date Range**
Clicking the field will open a calendar, allowing you to select a date or date range for filtering. Click to set the dates.
Click to apply your selections and filter the **Receives** list.
# Scan to List (Scanner)
The Scan to List feature lets you quickly capture multiple items into a list, enabling you to perform a range of actions while reducing manual entry and improving efficiency.
The **Scan to List** feature is designed to simplify and speed up your workflow by allowing you to scan multiple items into a single list in seconds. Once captured, you can perform a variety of actions on the selected items, making processes like label printing, exporting, and item updates more efficient. By reducing the need for manual entry, **Scan to List** helps improve accuracy while saving valuable time.
In this document, we will guide you through using the **Scan to List** feature to create a list and perform actions on the items within it.
* [#creating-your-list](#creating-your-list "mention")
* [#actions](#actions "mention")
* [#print-shelf-tickets](#print-shelf-tickets "mention")
* [#print-product-labels](#print-product-labels "mention")
* [#export-products](#export-products "mention")
* [#bulk-edit](#bulk-edit "mention")
***
## Creating Your List
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Select Scan To List
Open Supply'd on the scanner, go to the **Scanner** menu and select **Scan To List**.
The **Scan To List** screen will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Scan Items
To scan an item to add to your list, point the scanner at the barcode on the item and press the scan button. The item will appear on the screen.
Repeat for any other items you would like to include on your list.
{% hint style="success" %}
To remove a single item from the list, click the **X** next to that item.
To remove all items at once, click **Clear List**.\
{% endhint %}
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
## Actions
Once you have created the list, click to open the **Scan To List Action** screen to select the action you would like to perform.
Actions that can be performed are:
* Print [#shelf-tickets](#shelf-tickets "mention")
* Print [#product-labels](#product-labels "mention")
* [#export-products](#export-products "mention")
* [#bulk-edit](#bulk-edit "mention")
***
### Shelf Tickets
Selecting this option opens the **Print Product Tickets** form, allowing you to print shelf tickets for all items on your list.
{% hint style="success" %}
* From this screen, you also have the option to **Add More Items**. You will be taken back to the **Scan To List** where you can scan more items to add to the list.
* To remove a single item from the list, simply click the **X** beside the item.
* To remove all items from the print queue, click **Clear Queue**.
{% endhint %}
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Select the **Template\*** – This required field lets you choose which template to use for your tickets.
{% hint style="success" %}
Supply’d offers a variety of templates for you to choose from.
👉 For instructions on creating your own templates, please refer to the [Templating](/supplyd-erp/settings/templating) document.
{% endhint %}
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
If you would like to customise the labels, click the small arrow on the right (as circled in red below) to expand the customisation section.
Here you can change the default font and colours.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click to generate the tickets.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
To print the tickets, click on the 3 dots in the top right and select **Print**.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
### Product Labels
This will open the **Print Label** form.
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Select the **Template\*** – This field is required and lets you choose which template to use for your labels.
{% hint style="success" %}
Supply’d offers a variety of system templates for you to choose from.
👉 For instructions on creating your own templates, please refer to the [Templating](/supplyd-erp/settings/templating) document.
{% endhint %}
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Select the **Action**:
* **Direct Print** to print the labels immediately.
* **Download PDF** to save the labels to your device in PDF format.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Select the **Printer**.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
If you would like to customise the labels, click the small **arrow** on the right to expand the customisation section.
**Font**
Select the font you would like to use for your label.
**Barcode**
Select the barcode type you want to use on the label. Choose **None** to not include a barcode.
**Logo**
Choose the logo you would like to use on the label. Choose **None** to not include a logo.
**Custom Text**
Add any custom text you would like to include on the label.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click . You will be asked to confirm.
Click . The scanner will connect to the printer to print the labels.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
### Export Products
Selecting this option opens the **Export Products** form, allowing you to export the data for all items on your list.
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Select the **Data Source** for the export.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
In the **Fields** section, tick the boxes next the **Fields** that you would like to include in the export.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click . The data will be exported to your device in a spreadsheet.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
### Bulk Edit
Opens the **Bulk Edit Products** form allowing you to update multiple products with the same changes - such as price, supplier, or category.
👉 See the [Bulk Editing Products](/supplyd-erp/products/managing-products/bulk-editing-products) document for full details.
{% hint style="warning" %}
Once you have completed all necessary actions, it is recommended to clear the list. If items remain in the list, they will stay there indefinitely, which can result in products being actioned multiple times.
{% endhint %}
# Stock Transfer (Scanner)
Using a scanner for stock transfers in Supply'd streamlines the process, ensuring accurate item tracking & reducing errors. It updates inventory in real-time, making transfers faster & more efficient.
Transfers can be performed through the Supply’d app or using a handheld scanner. The Supply’d handheld scanner makes stock transfers faster, more accurate, and easier to manage. Instead of manually tracking items between locations, you can scan products directly to create, track, and complete transfers. This helps reduce errors, keeps your inventory up-to-date in real time, and allows staff to process transfers efficiently - whether moving stock between warehouses, stores, or production areas.
👉 For details on performing transfers through the app, see the [Transferring Stock Between Locations/Warehouses](/supplyd-erp/inventory/transferring-stock-between-locations-warehouses) document.
This document will guide you through the transfer process step by step, providing detailed explanations and helpful insights for:
* [#adding-a-transfer](#adding-a-transfer "mention")
* [#additional-options](#additional-options "mention")
* [#receiving-the-transfer](#receiving-the-transfer "mention")
* [#viewing-write-offs-list-on-the-scanner](#viewing-write-offs-list-on-the-scanner "mention")
* [#filtering-the-transfers-list](#filtering-the-transfers-list "mention")
***
## Adding a Transfer
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Select Transfer
Open Supply'd on the scanner. Select **Transfer** from the **Scanner** menu.
The **Start Transfer** screen will show.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Select the Locations
**Transfer From Warehouse**
In the **Transfer From Warehouse** field, use the drop-down menu to select the location you want to move the stock **from**.
**Transfer To Warehouse**
In the **Transfer To Warehouse** field, use the drop-down menu to choose the warehouse or location you want to move the stock **to**.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click Start
Click .
The **Scanner - Transfer** screen will open, flashing red to indicate it is ready to scan.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Scan the Items
You can either scan the barcode on the item or you can search for the item manually. Scanning is the quickest and easiest method.
**Scanning**
To scan the item, point the scanner at the barcode on the item press one of the scanner buttons. The product details will appear.
**Manual Search**
Searching manually is useful if the item doesn't scan, doesn't have a barcode or the barcode is damaged. To search manually, in the **Search Products** field, start to type the name of the item and a list of matching products will show for you to select from.
Once the item is scanned or selected, a screen will appear detailing the item, stock levels and batch details.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
**Add the Amount**
Press the button to add the number of items required to the transfer.
{% hint style="success" %}
If the number is large, you can click the **"0"** and type the number in.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="warning" %}
A product may have multiple batches listed, so be sure to select the specific batches you want to transfer from. You can transfer stock from more than one batch if needed.
{% endhint %}
The screen will update to reflect the number added, including the new count and the adjustment made.
If any of the batch details shown are incorrect, click the pencil to the right of the batch #. The **Edit Batch Details** form will show where you can edit any details necessary.
Click to apply the batch data changes.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
**Click Save**
Click to apply these changes.
Click the **X** in the top right corner to close the item and proceed to the next item in the transfer.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
**Repeat for Any Other Items**
Repeat steps 4 to 6 for each item in the transfer.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Pick the Transfer Order Items
Physically pick the items for the order.
{% hint style="success" %}
You can download a **Pick List** to assist with picking by clicking the three dots near the top right, selecting **Download** from the menu, and then choosing **Pick List**.
👉 See [#additional-options](#additional-options "mention") below.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Mark Transfer as Picked
Once all items have been picked, mark the transfer as **Picked** by clicking on:
{% hint style="success" %}
You can also click the three dots near the top right, select **Mark As** from the menu, and then choose **Picked**.
👉 See [#additional-options](#additional-options "mention") below.
{% endhint %}
You will be asked to confirm.
**Transfer Marked As Picked** will flash across the top of the screen.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
## Additional Options
Prior to marking the transfer as **Picked**, clicking on the 3 dots will bring up a menu:
***
### View Transfer Items
Will bring up a list of the items you have added to the transfer.
The **Transfer Items** list also has an additional menu when you click on the 3 dots on the top right.
***
### Download > Pick List
Allows you to download and print the pick list.
***
### Mark As > Picked
Will mark the transfer as **Picked**. An alternative to the **Mark As Picked** button.
***
### Cancel Transfer
Will cancel the transfer. You will be asked to confirm.
***
## Receiving the Transfer
For the transfer to be complete, it must be **Received** at the **Transfer To Warehouse** location.
To start a **Receive**, open Supply'd on the scanner. Select **Receive** from the **Scanner** menu.
Continue as explained for **Receiving Orders** in the **Scanner >** [Receiving Orders (Scanner)](/supplyd-erp/scanner/receiving-orders-scanner) document.
{% hint style="info" %}
**Auto Receiving Transfers**
If **Auto Receive Transfers** is set to **Yes** in [Order Settings](https://help.supplyd.co/configuring-supplyd/settings/order-settings) you can auto-receive transfers within the same location. This is ideal for single-user transfers (eg. stock from back-of-house to storefront) where you want the stock to auto-receive once picked.
Transfers from other locations will still need to be received manually.
{% endhint %}
***
## Viewing the Transfers List on the Scanner
To view a list of transfers on the scanner, click the 3 lines on the top left to take you to the Supply'd main menu.
Select **Inventory**, then the **Transfers** tab.
Transfers are labeled with colour-coded tags - , , , etc. - for easy identification.
Clicking on a transfer will bring up all the details, including the Transfer Number, date, locations, the items and number of items received, and the dollar value.
Clicking on the 3 dots in the top right corner gives you the following options:
#### Download > Pick List
Allows you to download the **Pick List** for printing or viewing.
#### Receives > \#
Displays the receive numbers for this transfer. Click a number to view its details.
***
## Filtering the Transfers List
It is also possible to filter the Transfers list. To do this, click on the 3 lines under the heading.
These options will appear for you to select from.
**Transfer Status**
Select one or more statuses.
**From Warehouse**
Choose the location(s) the transfer originated from that you would like to filter by.
**To Warehouse**
Choose the location(s) the transfer was to that you would like to filter by.
**Date Range**
Clicking the field will open a calendar, allowing you to select a date or date range for filtering. Click to set the dates.
Click to apply your selections and filter the **Transfers** list.
# Performing Tasks (Scanner)
Using tasks with a scanner in Supply’d streamlines workflow, ensures accurate tracking, and saves time by allowing staff to update and complete tasks directly on the go.
In Supply’d, using tasks with a scanner makes managing daily operations faster, easier, and more accurate. Staff can view, update, and complete tasks directly from the scanner, ensuring real-time tracking and reducing the risk of errors. This feature is especially useful for busy environments, helping teams stay organised, accountable, and efficient.
Tasks can be viewed and completed within the Supply’d app or using a Supply’d handheld scanner.
👉 See the [Performing Tasks](/supplyd-erp/tasks/performing-tasks) document for details on completing tasks with the app.
This document will guide you through the process of viewing and performing tasks using a handheld Supply’d scanner.
{% hint style="success" %}
For details on creating and managing tasks, see the [Adding Tasks](/supplyd-erp/tasks/adding-tasks) document.
{% endhint %}
***
### Viewing & Performing Tasks
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Go to the Main Menu
Go to the main menu on the scanner and click on **Home**.
{% hint style="success" %}
If the scanner is displaying the Scanner menu, click the 3 dots in the top left to access the main menu.\
\
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click on My Tasks
Click on **My Tasks** to view a list of your upcoming tasks.
{% hint style="info" %}
Depending on how the **Home** page is set up, if **My Tasks** is the first option, it will be the page that appears when you open the **Home** screen.
👉 See the [Navigating Supply'd ERP](/supplyd-erp/publish-your-docs#home-page) section of the [Navigating Supply'd ERP](/supplyd-erp/publish-your-docs) documents for details on how to arrange the order of dashboards on your homepage.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="success" %}
Supply’d uses colour-coded statuses for easy identification.
The statuses in **Tasks** are:
* - The task is yet to be started.
* - The task has been started but not yet completed.
* - The task has been finished.
{% endhint %}
You will see a list of all tasks that are:
* Allocated specifically to you (your name will show as the User),
* Allocated to your department (if no specific user or location is assigned),
* Allocated to your location (if no specific user or department is assigned), or
* Not allocated to any user, department, or location.
{% hint style="info" %}
If a user is not restricted by location or department in their [Users](/supplyd-erp/settings/users) settings, they will see all available tasks except those assigned to specific users.
{% endhint %}
Tasks are generally listed in the order they should be performed. If **Task Groups** are used, tasks will be grouped accordingly. In this example, the groups are "Morning" and "Afternoon".
{% hint style="info" %}
A **Task Group** is a collection of related tasks, usually organised by team or type of work, to help manage and track them more efficiently.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="success" %}
You can view tasks for a different date by clicking on the date field and selecting the desired date.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Select the Task
Select the task you want to perform.
The details of that task will open.
{% hint style="success" %}
Once the task has been opened the status will change from to and a background timer will record how long the task takes to complete.
{% endhint %}
Depending on how tasks have been allocated, you may see:
* **Task# :** The unique identifier assigned to the task.
* **Name:** The name or title of the task.
* **Date:** The date the task is to be performed.
* **Group:** The team, or **Task Group**, responsible for the task. This will only appear if the task has been allocated to a **Task Group**.
* **Location:** The location the task is assigned to. This will only show if the task has been allocated to a location.
* **Department:** The specific department associated with the task. This will only appear if the business uses [Locations](/supplyd-erp/settings/locations#departments) and the task has been allocated to a department.
* **User:** This will show if the task has been allocated specifically to you. Your name will appear here.
{% hint style="info" %}
The fields you see will depend on whether the tasks have been allocated to specific **Groups**, **Locations**, **Departments**, or **Users**.
{% endhint %}
**Task Details**
* **Description:** A more detailed explanation of the task’s purpose, requirements, or instructions.
* **Notes:** This is where you can add any additional comments, observations, or updates while completing the task.
{% hint style="success" %}
**Description - Custom Fields**
In the **Details** section, you may notice that some tasks include additional fields that need to be completed. These are custom fields and are specific to each individual task. They may be a text field, drop-down menu, temperature, money, date, or time.
\
\
\
\
In our example above, for the task of checking fridge temperatures, there are additional fields for recording the temperature of each fridge and freezer. The setup is configured to record temperatures, so you only need to enter the numerical value - the degrees ° are added automatically.
These fields may also be a required field, meaning that they must be completed before the task can be finalised.\
If you try to finalise a task with required fields incomplete, you will be prompted to complete them and will not be able to finalise the task. This is particularly important when tasks are part of compliance requirements.\
\
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Additional Options
Clicking on the 3 dots in the top right will open a menu with additional options for the task.
**Marks As**
* **To Do:** Will mark the task as . This is useful, for example, if you are interrupted before starting the task. The timer will reset.
**Save Task**
This option saves the progress of the task so it can be resumed later before finalising. When you return to the task, or if someone else takes over, the timer will continue from where it left off.
{% hint style="info" %}
If you select a task that was started by another person, a warning will be displayed.\
If you need to take over this task, click "**Click here to take over**" to continue it.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click Finalise
Once the task has been completed click .
The status will change to .
Your name will show under **Completed By**, along with the date and the time taken to complete the task.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
{% hint style="info" %}
**Related Documents**
* [Adding Tasks](/supplyd-erp/tasks/adding-tasks)
* [Performing Tasks](/supplyd-erp/tasks/performing-tasks)
{% endhint %}
# Writing Off Stock (Scanner)
Using Supply'd to write off stock helps maintain accurate inventory, removes obsolete or damaged items, and ensures better stock management and financial reporting.
In Supply'd, writing off products - whether damaged, expired, stolen, discontinued, or used for quality control - ensures accurate inventory counts. The **Write Off** feature automatically updates inventory numbers and records the reason for the write-off.
Write-offs can be performed using the Supply'd handheld scanner, manually through the app or using Supply'd Intelligence **Smart Write-Off**.
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 For instructions on using the manual method for performing write-offs, see the [Writing Off Stock](/supplyd-erp/inventory/writing-off-stock) document.
{% endhint %}
In this document we will guide you through the scanner method, including:
* [#adding-a-write-off](#adding-a-write-off "mention")
* [#viewing-and-editing-write-off-items](#viewing-and-editing-write-off-items "mention")
* [#smart-write-off](#smart-write-off "mention")
* [#viewing-the-write-offs-list-on-the-scanner](#viewing-the-write-offs-list-on-the-scanner "mention")
* [#filtering-the-write-offs-list](#filtering-the-write-offs-list "mention")
***
## Adding a Write Off
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Select Write Off
Open Supply'd on the scanner. Select **Write Off** from the **Scanner** menu.
The **Start Write Off** screen will show.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Select the Location
Choose the warehouse/location of the item you want to write off from the drop-down menu.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click Start
Click .
The **Scanner - Write Off Stock** screen will open, flashing red to indicate it is ready to scan.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Select Item
You can either scan the barcode on the item or you can search for the item manually. Scanning is the quickest and easiest method.
**Scanning**
To scan the item, point the scanner at the barcode on the item and press either of the scanner buttons on the sides.
**Manual Search**
Searching manually is useful if the item doesn't scan, doesn't have a barcode or the barcode is damaged. To search manually, in the **Search Products** field, start to type the name of the item and a list of matching products will show for you to select from.
Once the item is scanned or selected, a form will show detailing the item, the stock on hand, the stock available and the batch details.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Select the Write off Type
From the drop-down, select the reason for the product being written-off.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Add the Amount
If multiple batch numbers exist for the same item, select the batch number that matches the item you are writing off.
{% hint style="warning" %}
Matching the correct batch is important for traceability and accurate records. It ensures you know exactly which stock was written off, helps maintain compliance, and avoids confusion in future reporting or audits.
{% endhint %}
Click the to add the number to be written-off.
{% hint style="success" %}
If the number is large, you can click the **"0"** and type the number in.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="info" %}
If any of the batch details shown are incorrect, click the pencil to the right of the batch #. The **Edit Batch Details** form will show where you can edit any details necessary. Click to apply these changes and add to the items to be written-off .
{% endhint %}
Click the "**X**" in the top right corner to close and add to the **Add Write Off** list.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Repeat for Any Other Items
Repeat the process for any additional products that need to be written-off. You can write-off a single item or multiple items, depending on your needs.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Finalise the Write Off
Finalising the write-off will complete the write-off and adjust inventory numbers.
There are four places where you can **Finalise** the write-off:
1. (**Finalise Write Off**) button on the **Write Off Stock** screen.
2. By clicking the three dots in the top right of the **Write Off Stock** screen, then select **Finalise Write Off** from the menu.
3. button on the **Edit Write Off** screen.
4. From the 3 dot menu on the **Edit** **Write Off** screen.
{% hint style="info" %}
If a write-off hasn't been finalised and you attempt to start a new one, you will be prompted to resume the incomplete write off.
{% endhint %}
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
## Viewing & Editing Write Off Items
To view the items you have added to be written-off, click the 3 dots on the top right corner. A menu will appear.
**View Items**
Will open the **Edit Write Off** page.
In this screen you can adjust quantities, finalise the write off, or add additional items to the write-off.
**Finalise Write Off**
An alternative to the button.
**Remove**
Will remove the item from the write-off. \
\
You will be asked to confirm.
#### Edit Write Off Additional Options
Clicking the 3 dots on the top right of the **Edit Write Off** page, will bring up an additional menu.
**Finalise Write Off**
An alternative to the button at the bottom of the screen.
**Remove**
Will remove the write-off.
***
## Smart Write-Off
Streamline your end-of-day routines with **Smart Write-Off**. This feature automatically identifies all stock that is due to expire at the end of the day, allowing your team to quickly review, isolate, and discard affected items.
This is especially useful for businesses like bakeries, where unsold or overproduced items often need to be written off at the end of each day.
**Smart Write-Off** can be performed either on the app or through the main menu on the scanner.
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Go to the Inventory Page
Click the 3 lines on the top left to take you to the Supply'd main menu.
Select **Inventory**, then the **Write Offs** tab which will display a list of any write offs that have, or are being performed.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Select **Smart Write-Off**.
Click on the 3 dots in the top right and select **Smart Write-Off**.
The **Smart Write-Off** form will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### **Complete the Form**
**Method**
Select the method to use, either to write-off **Expired Batches** or **All Batches**.
* **Expired Batches:** Only write-off batches that have stock on hand and are due to expire.
* **All Batches:** Write-off all inventory, regardless of expiry.
**Location**
Select the location where the write-off will be applied.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click Create
Click to generate a list of products to be written-off.
The **Edit Write-Off** form will open, and a **Write-Off Number** will be automatically assigned to the record.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Review the List
Review all items on the list. Quantities can be edited if needed, or click the 3 dots to the right of the item name to open a menu with the option to **Remove Item** from the write-off.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Finalise the Write-Off
Once any required adjustments have been made, click . You will be asked to confirm.
{% hint style="success" %}
As an alternative to the button, you can click on the 3 dots in the top right and select **Finalise Write Off**.
{% endhint %}
All items on the list will be written off, and the write-off will appear in the **Write-Offs** list, marked as .
{% hint style="info" %}
#### **Additional Options**
Prior to finalising the write-off, clicking the 3 dots in the top right will open a menu.\
\
**Finalise Write Off**
An alternative to the button, this option will finalise the write-off.
**Remove**
Will remove the write-off. You will be asked to confirm.
{% endhint %}
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
## Viewing the Write Offs List on the Scanner
To view a list of write offs on the scanner, click the 3 lines on the top left to take you to the Supply'd main menu.
Select **Inventory**, then the **Write Offs** tab.
Write-offs are labeled with colour-coded tags - either , or - for easy identification.
Clicking on a write-off will bring up all the details, including the item, batch, reason, the number and the dollar value.
***
## Filtering the Write Offs List
You can also filter the Write-Offs list. To do this, click on the three lines icon under the heading and apply your preferred filters.
These options will appear for you to select from.
**Write-off Status**
Select one or more statuses to filter the list by.
**Warehouse**
Select the location(s) you would like to filter by.
**Date Range**
Clicking the field will open a calendar, allowing you to select a date or date range for filtering. Click to set the dates.
Click to apply your selections and filter the **Write-offs** list.
# Products
The Products section of Supply’d helps you easily manage and organize your inventory, ensuring accurate tracking and efficient stock control.
# The Products Page
The Products page makes it easier to manage your product catalogue, quickly find products, and keep product information accurate and up to date.
The **Products** page in Supply’d provides a central place to view and manage all the products you buy, sell, or produce. From here, you can search and filter products, view key details such as name, SKU, supplier, price, and stock levels, and manage information including pricing, purchasing, labelling, and sales channels. You can also add new products, edit existing products, and manage stock, making it easier to keep your product catalogue organised and up to date.
This document explains the main features of the **Products** page and how to use them to efficiently manage your product catalogue.
* [#the-products-page](#the-products-page "mention")
* [#product-details](#product-details "mention")
* [#additional-options](#additional-options "mention")
* [#import](#import "mention")
* [#export](#export "mention")
* [#arrange-categories](#arrange-categories "mention")
***
## The Products Page
Selecting **Products** from the main menu displays a list of all your products, including key information such as the product name, SKU, supplier, price, stock levels, and current status.
You will see 3 tabs on the page, providing access to different product information and options.
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 You can add products by following the steps in the [Adding a Product](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products/adding-a-product) and [Adding Products in Bulk](/supplyd-erp/products/bulk-importing-of-products/adding-products-in-bulk) documents.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="success" %}
You will see colour-coded product types beside each product for easy identification.
**-** The most common product type. It is a single product with no advanced traits.
- A bundle of multiple products within one parent product.
**-** A product that is made up of a number ingredients produced at the time of sale, eg. a burger at a restaurant.
- A shipping carton that can be used at the packing stage.
**-** A gift note/card that can be configured to be automatically generated and printed.
- A product that can be manufactured using the production module. When "Production" is selected, additional sections will appear.
**-** A product that can be broken down within the production module to make other products.
{% endhint %}
**Pricing Tab**
Under the **Pricing** tab, the **Pricing Schedule** displays all of your products with upcoming price changes.
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 See the [Product Price Changes](/supplyd-erp/products/product-price-changes) document for more information.
{% endhint %}
**Offers Tab**
The **Offers** tab lists any product offers you've received from suppliers.
{% hint style="success" %}
In the **Offers** tab, retailers can review offers. From there, they can range the product (which creates their own ranged version of the product), request samples, or reject the offer. All updates are reflected on the product page. Once a retailer ranges a product, they can begin purchasing it through Supply’d.
While offers are commonly used by retailers purchasing products for resale, they can also be used by other businesses. For example, a manufacturer may receive offers from suppliers for ingredients or materials used in production.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 See the [Accepting Offers from Suppliers](/supplyd-erp/products/offers/accepting-offers-from-suppliers) documents for details.
{% endhint %}
***
#### Product Details
Select a product to open its **Product Details** page, where you can view all information associated with the product.
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 This page is described in detail in the [Product Details Page](/supplyd-erp/products/product-details-page) document.
{% endhint %}
***
### Additional Options
Click on the 3 dots in the top right of the **Products** page to open a menu containing additional options.
***
#### Import
Select **Import** to upload product information into Supply’d using a CSV file. This allows you to add new products or update multiple existing products at once, saving time and reducing the need to enter or edit product information individually.
* **Products** - Import product information in bulk, including product details, descriptions, and other product settings.
* **Sales Channels** - Import sales channel assignments to control which products are available through specific stores, channels, or marketplaces.
* **Pricing** - Import product pricing information to create or update prices across multiple products and customers at once.
* **Production Stages** - Import production stages used to manage and track products through the different steps of the production or preparation process.
* **Production Items** - Import the ingredients, components, or other items used to produce a product, helping maintain accurate production information and inventory records.
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 For guidelines on using the **Import** option to add products in bulk, see the [Bulk Importing of Products](/supplyd-erp/products/bulk-importing-of-products) documents.
{% endhint %}
***
#### Export
Select **Export** to download your product data as a spreadsheet file. This is useful for reviewing and analysing your product information, making changes in bulk, or keeping a copy of your product data for reference.
* **Products** - Export your product information, including product details and settings, for review, reporting, or bulk updates.
* **Pricing** - Export product pricing information, including customer-specific pricing, for review, analysis, or bulk updates.
* **Production Stages** - Export production stages to review or manage the different stages used in your production processes.
* **Production Items** - Export the ingredients, components, or other items used to produce your products for review, reporting, planning, or inventory management.
***
#### Arrange Categories
Select **Arrange Categories** to change the order of your product categories. Click and drag the 3 lines next to a category, then move it to your preferred position. Arranging categories helps keep your product catalogue organised by allowing you to display categories in an order that best suits your business and makes products easier to find.
# Product Details Page
A Product's page provides a central place to view & manage key product information.
A product's page provides a detailed overview of a product and all the key information associated with it. It brings together important product information in one place, making it easy to view details such as pricing, suppliers, stock, sales, purchasing, labelling, and product-specific settings.
This document explains the different sections of a product's page and the information displayed in each section.
* [#product-page](#product-page "mention")
* [#left-hand-panel](#left-hand-panel "mention")
* [#product-details](#product-details "mention")
***
## Product Page
Selecting **Products** from the main menu displays a list of all your products.
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 You can add products by following the steps in the [Adding a Product](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products/adding-a-product) and [Adding Products in Bulk](/supplyd-erp/products/bulk-importing-of-products/adding-products-in-bulk) documents.
{% endhint %}
Selecting a product will open its **Product** page, where you can view all information and details associated with that product.
***
### Left-Hand Panel
The left-hand panel displays the product's key statistics, including stock levels, sales, ordering information, and other relevant product performance data.
**Product Photo**
Displays the product photo.
**Locations**
Select the location you would like to view the product information for. You can choose a specific location or select **All Locations** to view information across all locations.
**Your Stock (Available)**
Displays the number of units of the product currently available in stock at the selected location.
**On Order (Units)**
Displays the number of units currently on order, including stock that is being transferred from another location.
**Predicted Sales (14 Days)**
Displays the predicted number of units expected to be sold over the next 14 days, based on historical sales data.
**Suggested Order (Units)**
Displays the recommended number of units to order to help meet the predicted sales for the next 14 days.
**Actual Sales (14 Days)**
Displays the number of units sold over the past 14 days.
**Rate of Sale (Actual)**
Displays the average number of units sold per day based on recent actual sales.
**Rate of Sale (Predicted)**
Displays the average number of units the system predicts will be sold per day, based on forecasted sales.
**Yellow Rectangle**
Displays information about the most recent order for the product, including how many units were ordered and when the order was placed.
***
### Product Details
The main section on the right-hand side of the page contains detailed information about the product, including product details, suppliers, pricing, labelling, and other relevant product information.
#### Product Name
Displays the product's **brand, name, and size**.
***
#### Purchasing (If you purchase this product)
Displays the **supplier(s)** you purchase this product from, as well as other locations where the product is stocked and can be transferred from.
Hover over a supplier to expand the details and view additional information, including:
* **SKU**
* **Unit Cost**
* **Unit Sell Price**
* **Unit Margin**
{% hint style="success" %}
Use the controls to quickly add the product to your order list and adjust the quantity.
{% endhint %}
***
#### Pricing (If product is sold)
Displays the pricing for the product across the various selling platforms you use, such as **Supply'd, Shopify**, and other connected platforms. It also displays the margins associated with the pricing on each platform.
***
#### Ranging
If **Place Product Offers To Customers** is set to **Yes** in the [Company Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/company-settings#company-setting) section of your [Company Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/company-settings), **Ranging** section will be displayed.
The Ranging section shows all customers the product has been offered to, including the **price offered** and the **status of each offer**. It also shows customers who have purchased the product or had an order placed on their behalf, identified by the status.
Clicking on a **customer** will open the details of the offer made to that customer.
To offer the product to additional customers, select the **Offer to Customers** button.
{% hint style="success" %}
Offer statuses are colour-coded for easy identification:
* - The offer has been sent and is waiting for the customer to review and respond.
* - The customer has requested additional information or feedback before deciding whether to range the product.
* - The customer has requested product samples for evaluation.
* - The customer has accepted the product and added it to their product range, making it available for ordering.
* - The customer has decided not to range the product at this time.
* - The offer has been withdrawn and is no longer active or available for the customer to respond to.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 See the [Placing Offers to Customers](/supplyd-erp/products/offers/placing-offers-to-customers) document for more imformation.
{% endhint %}
***
#### Details
Displays the product details entered when the product was added, such as a product **Description**, **Category, Tags, SKU, Barcode**, and other product information.
{% hint style="success" %}
Clicking the arrow (^) to the right of the "Details" will show/hide these details.
{% endhint %}
***
#### Labelling
If you have added ingredient, allergen, or nutritional information to the product, this section will display the information associated with the product, including its ingredients, allergens, and nutritional information.
***
#### Production Items
If this is a **Production** product, this section will display the items allocated to the production, along with a breakdown of the associated costs.
{% hint style="success" %}
This section is only displayed when the product is a **Production** type product.
👉 See the [Product Types](/supplyd-erp/products/product-types) document for more information about the different product types.
{% endhint %}
***
#### Bundled Items
If this product is a **Bundled** type product, this section will display the items included in the bundle, along with the associated cost.
{% hint style="success" %}
This section is only displayed when the product is a **Bundled** type product.
👉 See the [Product Types](/supplyd-erp/products/product-types) document for more information about the different product types.
{% endhint %}
***
#### Breakdown Items
If this product is a **Breakdown** type product, this section will display the items included in the breakdown, along with an outline of the associated costs.
{% hint style="success" %}
This section is only displayed when the product is a **Breakdown** type product.
👉 See the [Product Types](/supplyd-erp/products/product-types) document for more information about the different product types.
{% endhint %}
***
#### Recipe Items
If this product is a **Recipe** type product, this section will display the items used in the recipe.
{% hint style="success" %}
This section is only displayed when the product is a **Recipe** type product.
👉 See the [Product Types](/supplyd-erp/products/product-types) document for more information about the different product types.
{% endhint %}
***
#### Custom Fields
If you have configured any custom fields in your [Product Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/product-settings), a **Custom Fields** section will be displayed. This section shows the custom information entered for the product.
***
{% hint style="success" %}
The [Managing Products](/supplyd-erp/products/managing-products) documents explain the options available from this page to update and manage your products.
{% endhint %}
# Adding Products
Products within Supply'd can be used to buy, sell or produce. There is a large amount of information and functionality you can set to configure the products to be used for their various purposes.
Adding products to Supply’d lets you manage your stock, pricing, and supplier information all in one place. You can add products manually, duplicate existing ones to save time, or import them in bulk. This helps keep your product list accurate, organised, and ready for ordering or production. Products in Supply'd use a "Simple Product" methodology, meaning for each size, colour or flavour of product you would create a new product.
There are 2 ways to add products to Supply'd.
1. Manually add products Supply'd.
2. Bulk import products to Supply'd from a CSV template. \
👉 For instructions on how to do this, see the [Bulk Importing of Products](/supplyd-erp/products/bulk-importing-of-products) document.
This document will guide you through manually adding products to Supply'd, including:
* [#the-products-page](#the-products-page "mention")
* [#manually-adding-products](#manually-adding-products "mention")
* [#creating-products-using-the-duplicate-products-function](#creating-products-using-the-duplicate-products-function "mention")
* [#editing-products](#editing-products "mention")
* [#removing-products](#removing-products "mention")
***
## The Products Page
The **Products** page in Supply’d shows a list of all the products you buy, sell, or produce. From this page, you can view product details like name, SKU, supplier, price, and stock levels. You can also add new products, edit existing ones, or manage stock and pricing. It’s the main place to keep your product information up to date and organised.
{% hint style="success" %}
You will see colour-coded product types beside each product for easy identification.
**-** The most common product type. It is a single product with no advanced traits.
- A bundle of multiple products within one parent product.
**-** A product that is made up of a number ingredients produced at the time of sale, eg. a burger at a restaurant.
- A shipping carton used during the packing stage, such as a bread tray, bread crate, produce crate, carton or box.
- A pallet, trolley, stillage, etc that shipping cartons may be packed into for shipping.
**-** A gift note/card that can be configured to be automatically generated and printed.
- A product that can be manufactured using the production module. When "Production" is selected, additional sections will appear.
**-** A product that can be broken down within the production module to make other products.
{% endhint %}
Clicking on a product will show that product's page with all the information on that product.
**Pricing Tab**
Under the **Pricing** tab, the **Pricing Schedule** list displays all of your products with upcoming price changes.
👉 See the [Product Price Changes](/supplyd-erp/products/product-price-changes) document for more information
**Offers Tab**
The **Offers** tab lists any product offers you've received from suppliers.
👉 See the [Accepting Offers from Suppliers](/supplyd-erp/products/offers/accepting-offers-from-suppliers) document for details.
{% hint style="success" %}
In the **Offers** tab, retailers can review offers. From there, they can range the product (which creates their own ranged version of the product), request samples, or reject the offer. All updates are reflected on the product page. Once a retailer ranges a product, they can begin purchasing it through Supply’d.
👉 For details on sending product offers to customers, see the [Placing Offers to Customers](/supplyd-erp/products/offers/placing-offers-to-customers) document.
{% endhint %}
***
## Manually Adding Products
Manually adding products to Supply'd is easy.
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Go to the Products Page
Select **Products** from the main menu. The **Products** page will open, showing a list of all your products.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click Add+
To add a new product, click the **Add +** button in the top right.
The **Add Product** form will appear.
{% hint style="success" %}
To open or close the sections on this form click the little arrows to the right of the titles (as circled in red above).
{% endhint %}
Complete the sections as per the guidelines below:
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
### Product Details
The details about this product such as name, size, images, description etc.
**Brand**
The brand of this product. If there is no brand name you can put your business name instead. Clicking the field will show a list of options to choose from, or you can type in your own.
In the example of Sungold Full Cream Milk 2L, the brand would be "Sungold." When typing in this field, it will suggest potential brands we already have in Supply'd. If the brand you're typing isn't in the list, simply type it in the field without selecting an auto-select option.
{% hint style="warning" %}
Brand is a required field when selling on Supply'd. It helps identify who makes or supplies the product and ensures it appears correctly in the marketplace.
{% endhint %}
**Name\* \[required field]**
The name of the product. As the brand and size can be entered in alternative field you would enter it without the extra details.
For example, if you have a Sungold Full Cream Milk 2lt you would simply put the name as "Full Cream Milk".
**Size**
The weight/size of a single unit. Leave blank to ignore.
For example, with our product, Sungold Full Cream Milk 2L, define the size as "2" and select "Litres" from the drop-down menu. This will be displayed elegantly to the customer during purchase.
{% hint style="info" %}
**Size**
These fields determine how items are tracked in Inventory and depends on how you want to manage them. For products you sell, make sure you keep the correct sizing as listed. For items used internally or in production, the requirements may differ depending on use.
For example, if you buy a 15 kg bag of sugar:
* If you want to track it as a single 15 kg bag, enter **15 kg**.
* If you want to track it in 1 kg units, enter **1 kg**.
It’s best to keep this consistent across your inventory, especially if you switch suppliers or use multiple suppliers with different package sizes, to avoid confusion and simplify reporting.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="success" %}
If you do not need a **Size** (and **Measure**), and you want to keep stock as simple units, leave these fields blank. The system will recognise this and track inventory in units rather than by weight or another measurement type.
This is useful when the measurement is not important, or when the item is too small for weight to be practical.
For example:
* **Cello bags** - Each bag weighs almost 0g, so tracking them by weight adds little value. It is much easier to count them as individual units for selling and production.
* **Sugar decorations for cupcakes or cookies** - These are also very light, and during production you usually count how many decorations are needed rather than weigh them. For example, you may place a specific number on each cupcake or cookie.
{% endhint %}
**SKU**
The SKU of the product. This should be a unique identifier for the product. The same SKU cannot be used on multiple products.
{% hint style="success" %}
Supply’d can generate a unique SKU for you. Simply click **Generate** at the top right of the field.
{% endhint %}
**Category\* \[required]**
Defines the category on your supplier profile that you would like this product to sit under. Supply'd is flexible with categories to allow you to define your own so you can group your products in any way you choose. Clicking or typing in the field will display a list of available options to choose from.
For instance, with our product Sungold Full Cream Milk 2L, if you are a milk distributor, you may opt to have a "Full Cream Milk" category. Alternatively, if you sell many products, not just milk, you might choose the category as simply "Milk."
**Departments**
Select the appropriate department(s) this product belongs to.
(Your list may look different from the example, depending on how you've named your departments.)
{% hint style="info" %}
This field will only appear if you’ve set up optional Departments within your [Locations](/supplyd-erp/settings/locations).
👉 Refer to the [Locations](/supplyd-erp/settings/locations#departments) section of the [Locations](/supplyd-erp/settings/locations) document.
{% endhint %}
**Unit Barcode**
Enter the barcode for one individual unit of this product. This should be the barcode of an individual item in the carton. This lets customers scan an item to quickly find it in Supply'd for ordering or reordering.
**Carton Barcode**
Enter the barcode printed on the carton or outer packaging. This is particularly useful when receiving purchase orders, as staff can scan the carton barcode directly instead of opening the carton to scan an individual item's barcode.
**Product Image**
Upload a product image to Supply'd. We recommend a square image at least 640 x 640px with a transparent background such as a PNG file. JPG uploads are also supported if transparent images aren't available.
**Description**
Enter a detailed product description to help customers make informed purchasing decisions. This may include allergen information, ingredients, and other descriptive details.
**Tags**
Select from a set of predefined tags that describe the product, such as vegan, vegetarian, nut-free, or gluten-free. Customers can use these tags to find products - for example, all vegan items that match a search. Click the field to view the list of available tags.
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 You can also add custom tags in the [Product Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/product-settings#product-editing) section in your [Product Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/product-settings).
{% endhint %}
**Dimensions (cm)**
Enter the width, height and depth of the carton in centimetres when shipped.
**Weight (kg)**
Enter the weight of the carton in kilograms when shipped.
For our example product, "Sungold Full Cream Milk 2L", each bottle weighs 2 kg and comes in a crate of 9, so the total weight would be entered as "18". This is used for third-party applications such as Shippit to provide live quoting on products.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
### Custom Fields
Any custom field data for this product.
{% hint style="success" %}
**Custom Fields** are extra fields you can create to capture information specific to your needs. They can be different from the default fields shown in examples.
👉 See the [Product Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/product-settings) document on how to add these.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
### Product Type
Defines the kind of product it is - for example, a **Standard** product, a **Bundle**, or a **Recipe** item.
**Product Type\* \[required field]**
Select the type of product this is.
* **Standard**\
The most common product type. It is a single product with no advanced traits.
* **Bundled**\
A bundle of multiple products within one parent product. An additional section - **Bundled Items -** will show when this is selected. For full instructions on creating a Bundled Product. \
\
👉 Refer to the [Bundled Products](/supplyd-erp/products/product-types/bundled-products) document.
* **Recipe**\
A product that is made up of a number ingredients produced at the time of sale, eg. a burger at a restaurant. An additional section - **Recipe Items** - will show when this is selected. \
\
👉 See the [Recipe Products](/supplyd-erp/products/product-types/recipe-products) document.
* **Shipping Carton**\
A shipping carton used during the packing stage, such as a bread tray, bread crate, produce crate, carton or box.
* **Carton Container**\
A pallet, trolley, stillage, etc that shipping cartons may be packed into for shipping.
{% hint style="success" %}
A **Carton Container** is a larger transport unit used to hold one or more shipping cartons during fulfilment and delivery. For example, in a bakery, bread is packed into trays or crates (shipping cartons), which are then loaded onto a trolley or pallet (carton containers) before being wheeled onto the delivery truck.
{% endhint %}
* **Gift Note/Card**\
A gift note/card that can be configured to be automatically generated and printed. An additional section - **Gift Note/Card Settings** - will show when this is selected.\
\
👉 See the [Gift Notes & Cards](/supplyd-erp/products/product-types/gift-notes-and-cards) document for more details.
* **Production**\
A product that can be manufactured using the production module. When "Production" is selected, additional sections will appear. \
\
👉 For a full description of how to add a Production product see the [Creating a Production Product](/supplyd-erp/production/creating-a-production-product) document.
* **Breakdown**\
A product that can be broken down within the production module to make other products. \
\
👉 For details on creating a Breakdown Products, check the [Creating a Breakdown Product](/supplyd-erp/production/creating-a-breakdown-product) document.
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 For a more detailed overview on **Product Types**, refer to the [Product Types Overview](/supplyd-erp/products/product-types/product-types-overview) document.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
### Labelling details
Relevant details for labelling products such as ingredients, nutrition, storage type and more.
👉 For full details on completing this section, refer to the [Labelling Details](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products/labelling-details) document.
{% hint style="warning" %}
This section will not show for **Shipping Carton** or **Gift Card** type products.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
### Buy Product
Toggle on if you buy this product from a supplier.
{% hint style="warning" %}
This field will not show when **Bundled**, **Recipe**, or **Production** are selected as the **Product Type**.
{% endhint %}
Clicking on, or typing in, the field that says "Type Supplier Name" will bring up a list of your suppliers.
Select the supplier and click **Add**.
A form will show.
**Is Preferred?**
Whether or not this is a preferred supplier for purchasing this item.
If set to **Yes**, the system will add this supplier to your favourites, suggest them first when purchasing the product, and use their costs for product cost calculations
**Purchase By\* \[required]**
Select whether the item is purchased by the unit or by the carton.
**Purchase Carton Quantity\* \[required]**
Enter the number of units in a carton. This field will only show when **"Carton"** is selected in the **Purchase By** field.
**Buy Price (ex Tax)\* \[required]**
Enter the wholesale price for a unit or carton, excluding taxes (such as GST), depending on your choice in the **Purchase By** field.
**Buy Tax\* \[required]**
Indicates whether tax (such as GST) applies to this product when purchasing. Select **GST** (or the applicable tax), or leave blank if the item is tax-free.
**Supplier's SKU**
The SKU or unique identifier for this product to be used when sending orders to the supplier. Leave blank to use the SKU for the overall product.
**Supplier's Barcode**
The suppler's barcode for this product used for receiving stock with this barcode. Leave blank to use the overall product barcode.
**Supplier's Brand**
The brand of the product being bought. Leave blank if the same brand as the product. This is useful if you have the same product where you buy different brands from different suppliers.
**Supplier's Size**
The weight/size of a single unit. Leave blank to ignore if the same size as the product.
{% hint style="info" %}
**Supplier's Size**
These fields control how items are tracked in Inventory and should be decided based on how you want to manage stock.
For example, with a 15 kg bag of sugar:
* If you track it as a single 15 kg bag, set **Size = 15 kg** and leave **Supplier Size** blank.
* If you track it in 1 kg units, set **Size = 1 kg** and enter **Supplier Size = 15 kg**.
Keeping this consistent helps if you switch suppliers or use multiple suppliers with different package sizes, making inventory management and reporting simpler.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="success" %}
If you do not need a **Supplier's Size**, and you want to keep stock as simple units, leave these fields blank. The system will recognise this and track inventory in units rather than by weight or another measurement type.
This is useful when the measurement is not important, or when the item is too small for weight to be practical.
For example:
* **Cello bags** - Each bag weighs almost 0g, so tracking them by weight adds little value. It is much easier to count them as individual units for selling and production.
* **Sugar decorations for cupcakes or cookies** - These are also very light, and during production you usually count how many decorations are needed rather than weigh them. For example, you may place a specific number on each cupcake or cookie.
{% endhint %}
**Minimum Order**
The minimum order required for this supplier. You will be unable to order less than this quantity of an item. Leave blank for no minimum.
**Quantity Multiple**
The quantity multiple set for this supplier. Orders can only be placed in multiples of this amount. For example if set to "5" you will only be able to order 5, 10, 15, 20 etc. Leave blank for no order multiple.
{% hint style="success" %}
If this product is purchased from more than one supplier, additional suppliers can be added by repeating the steps above.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
### Fulfilment Rules
Define the rules for accepting orders, picking and packing, and dispatching this product.
{% hint style="warning" %}
For **Fulfilment Rules** to work correctly with carton-based picking, the following setup is required:
* Create your **Shipping Carton** and/or **Carton Container** inventory items first, as these are selected in the **Preferred Carton** field.
* In the [Pick & Pack Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/pick-and-pack-settings#pick-and-pack) section of your [Pick & Pack Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/pick-and-pack-settings), set **Count Mode** to **By Carton**. This mode is primarily intended for [Pick & Pack (Scanner)](/supplyd-erp/scanner/pick-and-pack-scanner#wave-pick), where products are picked and packed by carton rather than by individual unit.
{% endhint %}
**Pack In Carton**
Select whether or not this item should be packed in a shipping carton when shipped.
* **Yes:** The item will be packed into an appropriate shipping carton during Pick & Pack. If multiple items are being shipped together, they may be grouped into the same shipping carton.
* **No:** The item will be shipped as is and will not be placed into a shipping carton during packing. This is typically used for products that are already packaged for shipping or are too large to fit into a carton.
{% hint style="info" %}
### Pack in Carton (Fulfilment Rules) vs Pack in Carton (Sales Channel)
Although these settings have similar names, they serve different purposes.
**Pack in Carton (Fulfilment Rules)** determines whether a product is packed into its standard fulfilment carton or tray before shipping. This is the carton used to group products during picking and packing.
For example:
* A 4-pack of canned tomatoes may be managed as individual cans in inventory but sold as a single 4-pack. The 4-pack is the product's fulfilment carton.
* In a bakery, bread may be packed into trays holding 20 loaves. The tray is the fulfilment carton, so **Pack in Carton** would be set to **Yes**.\
**Pack in Carton (Sales Channel)** determines whether the completed product also requires an additional shipping carton for delivery to the customer.
For example:
* The 4-pack of canned tomatoes may be placed into a cardboard shipping box for delivery, so **Pack in Carton** would be set to **Yes**.
* Bakery bread delivered in trays does not require an additional shipping carton, so **Pack in Carton** would be set to **No**.
In short:
* **Fulfilment Rules** = *What is the product packed into as part of fulfilment?*
* **Sales Channel** = *Does the packed product need an additional shipping carton for delivery?*
{% endhint %}
**Preferred Carton**
Select the **Preferred Carton** this product should be packed into when shipping cartons are calculated for an order. If no carton is selected, Supply’d will automatically choose the best-fit carton based on the product and order contents.
{% hint style="info" %}
This field will only show if **Yes** is selected in the **Pack In Carton** field.
{% endhint %}
**Qty Per Carton**
Enter the number of units of this product that fit into the **Preferred Carton**. This value is used when calculating how many cartons are required for an order and during carton-based Pick & Pack workflows.
{% hint style="info" %}
This field will only show when **Pack In Carton** is set to **Yes** and a **Preferred Carton** has been selected.
{% endhint %}
**Order Cut-off:**
A **delivery cut-off** defines how far in advance an order must be placed to qualify for a particular delivery day. If the cut-off time has passed, that delivery day will no longer be available to customers during checkout. Select **Not Set** to disable delivery schedules and make delivery days available without a cut-off.
**Delivery Delay:**
Enter the number of processing days required before delivery, ensuring orders are only scheduled on delivery days that allow enough time for preparation and fulfilment.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
### Sell Product
Toggle on if you sell this product.
**Price (inc tax)\* \[required field]**
The default sale price for a carton/unit of this product, including tax. This is used in place of each sales channels price if they are left blank.
**Sale Price (inc tax)**
If this product is on sale, enter the sale price here. Leave blank for no sale price.
**Tax\* \[required]**
Select any tax (such as GST) that is applicable to this product when selling. Leave blank if tax does not apply**.**
👉 Refer to the [Tax](/supplyd-erp/settings/tax) document for details on setting tax rates.
**Pack In Carton**
Select whether or not this item should be packed in a shipping carton when shipped.
* If **Yes**, the item would be packed in an aggregated shipping carton during packing.
* If **No**, the item would ship as is with no additional cartons.
**Unit RRP (inc Tax)**
The recommended retail price (RRP), including taxes, for a stockist to sell one unit of this product.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
### Sell on Supply'd - \[Supply'd Store Name]?
Toggle on if you want to sell this product on Supply'd.
**Supply'd Price (ex tax)**
If you want Supply’d to use a different price from the product price, you can override it here. Enter the Supply’d price per unit or carton, excluding taxes (such as GST). This price syncs with Supply’d only.
**Supply'd Sale Price (ex tax)**
If this product is on sale on Supply’d, enter the sale price here, excluding taxes. Leave this field blank if the product is not on sale.
**Supply'd Tax\* \[required field]**
Select whether to use the product’s tax settings or apply tax (such as GST) when selling on Supply’d.
**Pack In Carton**
Whether or not this item should be packed in a shipping carton when sold on Supply'd.
* **Default:** The item would be packed as per the setting set under "Sell Product" for this product.
* **Yes:** The item would be packed in an aggregated shipping carton during packing.
* **No:** The item would ship as is with not additional cartons.
**Sold As**
Select whether you store/sell this product by the **Unit** or as a **Carton** on Supply'd.
When **Carton** is selected an additional field - **Carton Qty\*** - will show.
**Carton QTY\* \[required field]**
Enter the number of units per carton when selling on Supply’d.
{% hint style="info" %}
This field is only visible when **Carton** is selected in **Sold As**. It is a required field when **Carton** is selected.
{% endhint %}
**Minimum Order**
Enter the minimum order quantity required for customers when purchasing. Customers will be unable to order less than this quantity of the item.
Leave blank for no minimum.
**Quantity Multiple**
The quantity multiple to apply for customers when purchases. Customers will only be able to order in the specified multiple. For example, if set to "5" customers would only be able to order in 5, 10, 15, 20 etc.
Leave blank for no order multiple.
**Visibility\* \[required field]**
Whether or not the product is available in the marketplace.
* **Visible:** The product will be visible to customers that match a business type in the "Sell To Categories" list.
* **Out of Stock:** The product is visible, but marked as out of stock and cannot be ordered.
* **Not Visible:** The product will not be visible to customers. It can only be used when manually creating a sales order.
* **Specific Customers:** The product will be visible only to the customers specified in the **Assign To Customer** field, which appears when this option is selected.
**Assign to Customer**
Specify any customers who can see and buy this product. Only customers that you select can order this product. The customer must have already be your customer or have been invited to Supply'd.
{% hint style="info" %}
This field is only visible when **Specific Customers** is selected in **Visibility** field.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 To find out more about adding a customer, see the [Adding Customers, Leads & Customer Groups](/supplyd-erp/customers/adding-customers-leads-and-customer-groups) document.
{% endhint %}
**Requires Liquor Licence**
Select whether a liquor licence is required to purchase this product. If **Yes** is selected, the customer must provide their liquor licence.
**Restrict By Shipping Zones**
If this product is only available in certain shipping zones, you can select the available zones here. Leave blank for availability in all zones. Clicking on, or typing in, the field will bring up a list of your Shipping Zones.
👉 See the [Shipping Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/shipping-settings) document for details on setting up shipping zones.
{% hint style="success" %}
If you sell the product in more than one Supply’d store, repeat the above steps for each one.
{% endhint %}
***
{% hint style="warning" %}
The following sections - Shopify, Square, MYOB & Xero - will only appear if you have those platforms integrated with Supply'd.
👉 See the [Integrations](/supplyd-erp/settings/integrations) document for more information.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
### Sell on Shopify - \[Shopify Integration Name]?
Toggle on if you would like to sync this product to your Shopify online store. Additional fields will show when this is toggled on.
**Shopify Store Price (inc Tax)**
If you would like to set a different for your Shopify Store to the product price you can override it here. This price will sync to the Shopify Store only.
Leave blank if the Shopify price is the same as the product price from above.
**Shopify Store Sale Price (inc tax)**
If your product is on sale, you can enter the Shopify Store sale price here. This price will sync to the Shopify Store only. Leave blank if the product is not on sale or Shopify sale price is the same as the sale price from above.
**Shopify Store Tax**
Select whether to use the product’s tax settings or apply tax (such as GST) when selling on Shopify. This tax will sync with Shopify Store only.
**Pack In Carton**
Select whether or not this item should be packed in a shipping carton when sold on Shopify Store. Select from the drop-down menu.
* **Default:** The item would be packed as per the setting set under "Sell Product" for this product.
* **Yes:** The item would be packed in an aggregated shipping carton during packing.
* **No:** The item would ship as is with no additional cartons.
**Sold As**
Select whether you store/sell this product by the **Unit** or as a **Carton** on Supply'd.
When **Carton** is selected an additional field - **Carton Qty\*** - will show.
**Carton QTY\* \[required field]**
Enter the number of units per carton when selling on Supply’d.
{% hint style="info" %}
This field is only visible when **Carton** is selected in **Sold As**. It is a required field when **Carton** is selected.
{% endhint %}
**Collections**
The Collections you would like to feature this product under in your Shopify Store.
**Sales Channels**
The sales channels you would like this product assigned to in Shopify Store. Leave blank to use the default setting from your Shopify Store integration settings.
**Track Inventory**
Select whether or not to track inventory on this item in Shopify Store.
{% hint style="info" %}
In general, this field will default to **Yes** when you enable **Sell On Shopify**.
{% endhint %}
**Stock Buffer**
Set a buffer for this products inventory sent to Shopify. A buffer will reduce the quantity of each products inventory by the buffer amount to help prevent overselling.
Leave blank to use the default set in your integration settings.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
### Sell on Square - \[Square Integration Name]?
Toggle on if you would like to sync this product to Square.
**Square Price (inc Tax)**
If you would like to set a different for Square to the product price you can override it here. This price will sync to Square only.
Leave blank if the Square price is the same as the product price from above.
**Square Sale Price (inc tax)**
If your product is on sale, you can enter the Square sale price here. This price will sync to Square only.
Leave blank if the product is not on sale or if the Square price is the same as the sale price from above.
**Square Tax**
If you would like to set a different tax for Square to the product tax you can override it here. This tax will sync with Square only. Select **Same As Product** to use the default setting for the product, **GST** or **GST Free** from the drop-down.
**Pack In Carton**
Whether or not this item should be packed in a shipping carton when sold on Square. Select from the drop-down menu.
* **Default:** The item would be packed as per the setting set under "Sell Product" for this product.
* **Yes:** The item would be packed in an aggregated shipping carton during packing.
* **No:** The item would ship as is with no additional cartons.
**Square Product Name**
If you would like to override the default product name synced to Square, you can enter a new name here.
Leave blank to sync to the default configured name.
**Sold As**
Select whether you store/sell this product by the **Unit** or as a **Carton** on Supply'd.
When **Carton** is selected an additional field - **Carton Qty\*** - will show.
**Carton QTY\* \[required field]**
Enter the number of units per carton when selling on Supply’d.
{% hint style="info" %}
This field is only visible when **Carton** is selected in **Sold As**. It is a required field when **Carton** is selected.
{% endhint %}
**Variably Priced**
Select whether or not this product is sold with a specific price or staff need to enter it at point of sale.
**Categories**
Select the categories you would like to feature this product under in Square.
**Reporting Category**
The reporting category for this item in Square. Select from the drop-down menu. Leave blank to use the products Supply'd category.
**Sales Unit**
Select how this item is sold. The default is **by item**, but if the item is sold by weight or length, choose the applicable option here.
**Track Inventory**
Select whether or not to you would like to track inventory on this item in Square.
{% hint style="info" %}
In general, this field will default to **Yes** when you enable **Sell On Square**.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
### Other Sales Channel Integrations
Complete the sections for any other sales integrations, such as WooCommerce or Wedderburn, in a similar way as described above for Square and Shopify.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
### MYOB Settings
If MYOB is integrated with Supply’d and you want this product to sync, configure the MYOB settings for this product.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
### Xero Settings
If you have Xero integrated with Supply'd and want this product to sync, configure the Xero settings for this product.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
### Advanced
Advanced settings for this product.
**Enable Picking**
Select whether or not this item should appear in pick lists. If "No" is selected, the item will only show at the packing stage.
**Collate Picking**
Select whether to collate this item during picking when multiple units are ordered. This is useful when additional metadata may be present in imported orders.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
### Notes
Add any desired notes about this product, for internal reference only.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
### Save
Click to finish creating the product.
{% hint style="success" %}
**Save Product** is also an option on the top of the form when clicking the three dots on the top right corner.
{% endhint %}
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
## Creating Products Using the Duplicate Products Function
Adding products in Supply’d is quick and efficient using the **Duplicate Products** function. This feature lets you copy an existing product’s details, so you only need to make small changes instead of entering everything from scratch. It’s ideal for adding similar products with different sizes, flavours, or variations.
For example, we need to add a dairy free version of the blue chocolate unicorn product for our supplier Unicorn Chocolates. The brand, size, and price are the same as the Blue Chocolate Unicorn we have already added. Using the **Duplicate Product** feature will save time by copying all the details - we will only need to update the name, SKU, barcode, and description.
Here's how:
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Select the Product
From the main menu, go to **Products** and select the product you want to duplicate.
The product page will open, displaying all the details like brand, price, barcode, etc.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Select "Duplicate Product"
Click on the three dots in the top right and **Duplicate Product** from the menu.
The **Add Product** form will open with the details from the product you copied.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Change Details
Simply update what's needed, like the name, image, SKU, barcode and description.
{% hint style="warning" %}
Remember:
* The name should be unique.
* The SKU must be unique.
* The barcode must be unique.
{% endhint %}
In our example, we are adding a dairy-free version of the Blue Chocolate Unicorn. The product is the same size, looks the same, and the supplier details and buy price are the same. So in this case we simply changed:
* The product name from Blue Chocolate Unicorn to Dairy Free Blue Chocolate Unicorn
* SKU
* Barcode
* Added "dairy-free" to the description
* The ingredients
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click Save
Click to create your new product. The product will appear on the Products list.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
## Editing Products
If you would like to edit a product's details:
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Select **Products** from the main menu.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Choose the product you would like to edit. The product's page will open.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click on the three dots on the top right corner and select **Edit Product**.
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 This menu is discussed in more detail in the [Managing Products](/supplyd-erp/products/managing-products) document.
{% endhint %}
The **Edit Product** form will open. This form has the same fields as the **Add Product** form.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Update any fields as needed, following the steps above for [#manually-adding-products](#manually-adding-products "mention").
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click to apply the changes.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
## Removing Products
If you would like to remove a product:
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Select **Products** from the main menu.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Choose the product you want to remove.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click on the three dots on the top right corner and select **Remove Product**.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
You will be asked to confirm.
Click .
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
# Adding a Product
Products in Supply’d can be used to buy, sell, or produce, with settings available to configure how each product is used.
Adding a product to **Supply’d** allows you to create and manage a product record, including key information such as the product name, SKU, pricing, supplier, labelling, and sales channel details. Products can be added manually or duplicated from an existing product, using a **Simple Product** methodology, meaning each size, colour, or flavour is created as a separate product.
There are 2 ways to add products to Supply'd.
1. Manually add products Supply'd.
2. Bulk import products to Supply'd from a CSV template.
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 For instructions on how to import products into Supply'd in bulk, see the [Bulk Importing of Products](/supplyd-erp/products/bulk-importing-of-products) document.
{% endhint %}
This document explains how to manually add a new product and complete the required product information.
* [#adding-a-product](#adding-a-product "mention")
* [#creating-products-using-the-duplicate-products-function](#creating-products-using-the-duplicate-products-function "mention")
***
## Adding a Product
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Go to the Products Page
Select **Products** from the main menu to open the **Products** page, where you can view a list of all products in Supply’d.
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 The [The Products Page](/supplyd-erp/products/the-products-page) document provides further details about this page and its features.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click Add+
To add a new product, click the **Add +** button in the top right.
The **Add Product** form will open.
{% hint style="success" %}
To open or close the sections on this form click the little arrows to the right of the titles (as circled in red above).
{% endhint %}
Complete the sections as per the guidelines below:
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
### Product Details
The details about this product such as name, size, images, description etc.
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 Complete this section as outlined in the [Product Details](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products/product-details) document.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
### Custom Fields
Any custom field data for this product.
{% hint style="success" %}
**Custom Fields** are extra fields you can create to capture information specific to your needs. They can be different from the default fields shown in examples.
👉 See the [Product Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/product-settings) document on how to add these.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
### Product Type
Defines the kind of product it is - for example, a **Standard** product, a **Bundle**, or a **Recipe** item.
**Product Type\* \[required field]**
Select the type of product this is.
{% hint style="success" %}
Depending on your selection, additional sections will appear for you to enter the relevant details. These are explained in detail in the [Product Types](/supplyd-erp/products/product-types) documents.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
### Labelling details
Relevant details for labelling products such as ingredients, nutrition, storage type and more.
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 For full details on completing this section, refer to the [Labelling Details](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products/labelling-details) document.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="warning" %}
This section will not show for **Shipping Carton**, **Carton Container** or **Gift Card** type products.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
### Buy Product
Toggle on if you buy this product from a supplier.
{% hint style="warning" %}
This field will not show when **Bundled**, **Recipe**, or **Production** are selected as the **Product Type**.
{% endhint %}
Click the **Type Supplier Name** field or start typing to select a supplier, then click .
The **Buy Product?** section will expand, allowing you to enter the relevant product details.
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 Complete the details as outlined in the [Buy Product Details](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products/buy-product-details) document.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
### Sell Product
Toggle on if you sell this product.
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 Complete the details as outlined in the [Sell Product Details](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products/sell-product-details) document.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
### Fulfilment Rules
This section defines the rules for picking and packing, and dispatching this product.
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 Complete the details as outlined in the [Fulfilment Rules Details](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products/fulfilment-rules-details) document.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
### Sell on Supply'd - \[Supply'd Store Name]?
Toggle this on if you want to sell the product through the specified **Supply’d store**.
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 Complete the details in this section following the guidelines in the [Sell on Supply'd Details](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products/sell-on-supplyd-details) document.
{% endhint %}
***
{% hint style="warning" %}
The following sections - Shopify, Square, MYOB & Xero - will only appear if you have those platforms integrated with Supply'd.
👉 See the [Integrations](/supplyd-erp/settings/integrations) document for more information.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
### Sell on Shopify - \[Shopify Integration Name]?
Toggle on if you would like to sync this product to your Shopify online store. Additional fields will show when this is toggled on.
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 Complete the details in this section following the guidelines in the [Sell on Shopify Details](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products/sell-on-shopify-details) document.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
### Sell on Square - \[Square Integration Name]?
Toggle on if you would like to sync this product to Square.
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 Complete the details in this section following the guidelines in the [Sell on Square Details](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products/sell-on-square-details) document.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
### Other Sales Channel Integrations
Complete the sections for any other sales channel integrations required - **Ordermentum**, **Wedderburn**, or **WooCommerce** - following the guidelines provided in the respective documents:
* [Ordermentum](/supplyd-erp/settings/integrations/sales-channel-integrations/ordermentum)
* [Wedderburn](/supplyd-erp/settings/integrations/sales-channel-integrations/wedderburn)
* [WooCommerce](/supplyd-erp/settings/integrations/sales-channel-integrations/woocommerce)
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
### MYOB Settings
If MYOB is integrated with Supply’d and you want this product to sync, configure the MYOB settings for this product.
{% hint style="info" %}
If this section is not completed, **Supply’d** will use the global settings configured for your [MYOB](/supplyd-erp/settings/integrations/accounting-integrations/myob) integration.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
### Xero Settings
If you have Xero integrated with Supply'd and want this product to sync, configure the Xero settings for this product.
{% hint style="info" %}
If this section is not completed, **Supply’d** will use the global settings configured for your [Xero](/supplyd-erp/settings/integrations/accounting-integrations/xero) integration.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
### Advanced
Advanced settings for this product.
**Enable Picking**
Select whether or not this item should appear in pick lists. If "No" is selected, the item will only show at the packing stage.
**Collate Picking**
Select whether to collate this item during picking when multiple units are ordered. This is useful when additional metadata may be present in imported orders.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
### Notes
Add any desired notes about this product, for internal reference only.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
### Save
Click to finish creating the product.
{% hint style="success" %}
**Save Product** is also available at the top of the form by clicking the 3 dots in the top right.\
{% endhint %}
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
## Creating Products Using the Duplicate Products Function
The **Duplicate Product** function lets you copy an existing product’s details, saving time when adding similar products with different sizes, flavours, or variations.
For example, to add a **dairy-free Blue Chocolate Unicorn**, we can duplicate the existing product and only update the name, SKU, barcode, description, and ingredients.
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 Refer to the [Duplicate Product Function](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products/duplicate-product-function) document for details on how to use this feature.
{% endhint %}
# Buy Product Details
Completing the Buy Product details ensures products are correctly set up for purchasing & supplier management.
The **Buy Product** section of the **Add Product** form contains the information needed to set up a product for purchasing from suppliers. Completing these details helps ensure the product is correctly configured for purchasing, including its supplier, cost, and purchasing information.
This document explains how to complete the **Buy Product** section of the **Add Product** form when adding a new product to Supply’d.
***
### Completing the Buy Product Details
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Open the Add Product Form
1. Select **Products** from the main menu to open the **Products** page.
2. Click the **Add +** button in the top right to open the **Add Product** form.
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 The [Adding a Product](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products/adding-a-product) document provides detailed instructions on how to open this form.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Complete the Sections up to Buy Product
Following the guidelines for [Adding a Product](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products/adding-a-product), complete the sections up to **Buy Product**.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Complete the Buy Product Section
Toggle on if you buy this product from a supplier.
{% hint style="warning" %}
This field will not show when **Bundled**, **Recipe**, or **Production** are selected as the **Product Type**.
{% endhint %}
Click or start typing in the **Type Supplier Name** field to view and select from your list of suppliers.
Select the supplier and click **Add**.
A form will show.
**Is Preferred?**
Select whether or not this is a preferred supplier for purchasing this product.
If set to **Yes**, the supplier will be added to your favourites, suggested first when purchasing the product, and their costs will be used for product cost calculations.
**Purchase By\* \[required]**
Select whether the item is purchased by the unit or by the carton.
**Purchase Carton Quantity\* \[required]**
Enter the number of units contained in each carton.
{% hint style="info" %}
This field is only displayed when **Carton** is selected in the **Purchase By** field.
{% endhint %}
**Buy Price (ex Tax)\* \[required]**
Enter the wholesale price for a unit or carton, excluding taxes such as GST, based on your selection in the **Purchase By** field.
**Buy Tax\* \[required]**
Select whether tax, such as GST, applies to the product when purchasing. Select **GST** (or the applicable tax), or leave blank if the product is tax-free.
**Supplier's SKU**
Enter the SKU or unique identifier the supplier uses for this product when sending orders to them. Leave blank to use the SKU assigned to the overall product.
**Supplier's Barcode**
Enter the barcode the supplier uses for this product when receiving stock. Leave blank to use the barcode assigned to the overall product.
**Supplier's Brand**
Enter the brand of the product purchased from this supplier. Leave blank if it is the same as the overall product brand. This is useful when purchasing the same product from different suppliers under different brands.
**Supplier's Size**
The weight/size of a single unit. Leave blank to ignore if the same size as the product.
{% hint style="info" %}
**Supplier's Size**
These fields control how items are tracked in Inventory and should be decided based on how you want to manage stock.
For example, with a 15 kg bag of sugar:
* If you track it as a single 15 kg bag, set **Size = 15 kg** and leave **Supplier Size** blank.
* If you track it in 1 kg units, set **Size = 1 kg** and enter **Supplier Size = 15 kg**.
Keeping this consistent helps if you switch suppliers or use multiple suppliers with different package sizes, making inventory management and reporting simpler.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="success" %}
If you do not need a **Supplier's Size**, and you want to keep stock as simple units, leave these fields blank. The system will recognise this and track inventory in units rather than by weight or another measurement type.
This is useful when the measurement is not important, or when the item is too small for weight to be practical.
For example:
* **Cello bags** - Each bag weighs almost 0g, so tracking them by weight adds little value. It is much easier to count them as individual units for selling and production.
* **Sugar decorations for cupcakes or cookies** - These are also very light, and during production you usually count how many decorations are needed rather than weigh them. For example, you may place a specific number on each cupcake or cookie.
{% endhint %}
**Minimum Order**
The minimum order required for this supplier. You will be unable to order less than this quantity of an item. Leave blank for no minimum.
**Quantity Multiple**
The quantity multiple set for this supplier. Orders can only be placed in multiples of this amount. For example if set to "5" you will only be able to order 5, 10, 15, 20 etc. Leave blank for no order multiple.
{% hint style="success" %}
If this product is purchased from more than one supplier, additional suppliers can be added by repeating the steps above.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Repeat
Repeat the previous step if you purchase the product from more than one supplier.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Complete Remaining Fields
Complete the remainder of the form as outlined in the [Adding a Product](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products/adding-a-product) document.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
# Duplicate Product Function
Using the Duplicate Product function saves time, reduces data entry, and helps maintain consistent product information across similar products.
Adding products in Supply’d is quick and efficient using the **Duplicate Product** function. This feature lets you copy the details of an existing product, so you only need to make the necessary changes instead of entering everything from scratch. It’s particularly useful when adding similar products with different sizes, flavours, or variations.
For example, we need to add a dairy-free version of the Blue Chocolate Unicorn product from Unicorn Chocolates. The brand, size, and price are the same as the existing Blue Chocolate Unicorn product. Using the **Duplicate Product** function saves time by copying the existing product details, so we only need to update the name, SKU, barcode, and description.
This document explains how to add a product using the **Duplicate Product** function.
***
### Creating Products Using the Duplicate Product Function
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Select the Product
Select **Products** from the main menu, then click the product you want to duplicate.
{% hint style="success" %}
Use the **search** or **filter** options to narrow the list and make it easier to find the product you want to duplicate.
{% endhint %}
The product's page will open, displaying details such as the brand, price, barcode, and other product information.
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 The [Product Details Page](/supplyd-erp/products/product-details-page) document explains the details that can be viewed on this page.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Select Duplicate Product
Click the 3 dots in the top right, then select **Duplicate Product** from the menu.
The **Add Product** form will open with the details copied from the original product.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Change Details
Simply update what's needed, like the name, image, SKU, barcode and description.
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 If you need help completing any of the details, refer to the [Adding a Product](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products/adding-a-product) document.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="warning" %}
**Remember:**
* The name should be unique.
* The SKU must be unique.
* The barcode must be unique.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="success" %}
In our example, we are adding a dairy-free version of the **Blue Chocolate Unicorn**. The product is the same size and appearance, and the supplier details and purchase price are also the same. By duplicating the existing product, we only need to update the following:
* **Product name** - Change from **Blue Chocolate Unicorn** to **Dairy Free Blue Chocolate Unicorn**
* **SKU**
* **Barcode**
* **Description** - Add **dairy-free** to the description
* **Ingredients**
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click Save
Click to create your new product.
The product will appear on the Products list.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
# Fulfilment Rules Details
Completing the Fulfilment Rules helps ensure orders are fulfilled efficiently from the appropriate locations, reducing errors & improving order accuracy.
The **Fulfilment Rules** section allows you to define how the product should be fulfilled when an order is placed. Completing these settings helps ensure products are allocated and supplied from the appropriate locations according to your fulfilment requirements.
This document explains how to complete the **Fulfilment Rules** section of the **Add Product** form when adding a new product or editing an existing product in Supply’d.
***
### Completing the Fulfilment Rules Details
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Open the Add Product Form
1. Select **Products** from the main menu to open the **Products** page.
2. Click the **Add +** button in the top right to open the **Add Product** form.
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 The [Adding a Product](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products/adding-a-product) document provides detailed instructions on how to open this form.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Complete the Sections up to Fulfilment Rules Section
Following the guidelines for [Adding a Product](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products/adding-a-product), complete the sections up to **Buy Product**.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Complete the Fulfilment Rules Section
{% hint style="warning" %}
For **Fulfilment Rules** to work correctly with carton-based picking, the following setup is required:
* Create your **Shipping Carton** and/or **Carton Container** inventory items first, as these are selected in the **Preferred Carton** field.
* In the [Pick & Pack Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/pick-and-pack-settings#pick-and-pack) section of your [Pick & Pack Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/pick-and-pack-settings), set **Count Mode** to **By Carton**. This mode is primarily intended for [Pick & Pack (Scanner)](/supplyd-erp/scanner/pick-and-pack-scanner#wave-pick), where products are picked and packed by carton rather than by individual unit.
{% endhint %}
**Pack In Carton**
Select whether the product should be packed in a shipping carton when shipped.
* **Yes:** The product will be packed into an appropriate shipping carton during **Pick & Pack** and may be grouped with other items being shipped together.
* **No:** The product will be shipped as is and will not be placed in a shipping carton. Use this for products already packaged for shipping or too large to fit in a carton.
{% hint style="info" %}
#### **Pack in Carton (Fulfilment Rules) vs Pack in Carton (Sales Channel)**
Although these settings have similar names, they serve different purposes.\
**Pack in Carton (Fulfilment Rules)** determines whether a product is packed into its standard fulfilment carton or tray before shipping. This is the carton used to group products during picking and packing.
For example:
* A 4-pack of canned tomatoes may be managed as individual cans in inventory but sold as a single 4-pack. The 4-pack is the product's fulfilment carton.
* In a bakery, bread may be packed into trays holding 20 loaves. The tray is the fulfilment carton, so **Pack in Carton** would be set to **Yes**.\
**Pack in Carton (Sales Channel)** determines whether the completed product also requires an additional shipping carton for delivery to the customer.
For example:
* The 4-pack of canned tomatoes may be placed into a cardboard shipping box for delivery, so **Pack in Carton** would be set to **Yes**.
* Bakery bread delivered in trays does not require an additional shipping carton, so **Pack in Carton** would be set to **No**.\
**In short:**
* **Fulfilment Rules** = *What is the product packed into as part of fulfilment?*
* **Sales Channel** = *Does the packed product need an additional shipping carton for delivery?*
{% endhint %}
**Preferred Carton**
Select the **Preferred Carton** for packing the product when shipping cartons are calculated for an order. If no carton is selected, Supply’d will automatically select the best-fit carton based on the product and order contents.
{% hint style="info" %}
This field will only show if **Yes** is selected in the **Pack In Carton** field.
{% endhint %}
**Qty Per Carton**
Enter the number of units of the product that fit into the **Preferred Carton**. This is used to calculate the number of cartons required for an order and during carton-based **Pick & Pack** workflows.
{% hint style="info" %}
This field will only show when **Pack In Carton** is set to **Yes** and a **Preferred Carton** has been selected.
{% endhint %}
**Order Cut-off**
An **Order Cut-off** defines how far in advance an order must be placed for a particular delivery day to be available. Once the cut-off time has passed, that delivery day will no longer be available to customers at checkout. Select **Not Set** to disable order cut-offs and allow delivery days to remain available without a cut-off.
**Delivery Delay**
Enter the number of processing days required before delivery. This ensures orders are only scheduled for delivery days that allow sufficient time for preparation and fulfilment.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Complete Remaining Fields
Complete the remainder of the form as outlined in the [Adding a Product](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products/adding-a-product) document.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
# Labelling Details
Adding Labelling Details to Supply’d helps you stay compliant, improve traceability, and keep your product information consistent and easy to manage across your operations.
**Labelling Details** in Supply’d gives you a central place to manage ingredients, allergens, nutrition, storage, and shelf life for your food products. This supports compliance, improves traceability, and keeps product data accurate and up to date.
The **Labelling Details** section appears when **Standard, Bundled, Recipe, Production, or Breakdown** product types are selected when adding a product and includes key food information such as ingredients, nutrition, and storage.
For **Standard**, **Bundled**, and **Breakdown** products, **Fetch Nutrition** can be used to calculate nutrition values. For **Production** products, ingredients, allergens, and nutrition can be automatically generated, provided all recipe items include the required details.
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 See the [Adding Products](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products) for instructions on adding products.
👉 See the [Product Types](/supplyd-erp/products/product-types) documents for explanations of the different product types.
{% endhint %}
***
## Adding Labelling Details
{% hint style="warning" %}
For **Production** and **Recipe** type products - If wanting to use the auto generate features in this section, complete the **Production Settings**, **Production Stages** and **Production Items/Recipe Items** sections first.
{% endhint %}
Complete the fields in the **Labelling Details** section as follows:
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
### Country of Origin Label
Select the type of **CoOL (Country of Origin Labelling)** messaging that applies to this product.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
### Country of Origin
Enter the country where the product was produced.
When Australia is entered, an additional field - **Percentage Australian** - will appear.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
### Percentage Australian
The percentage of this products ingredients that are Australian.
**Production & Recipe Type Products**
When **Production** or **Recipe** is selected in the **Product Type** section, you will see a button on the **Percentage Australian** field.
Clicking will automatically calculate the estimated percentage of Australian content in your product.
{% hint style="success" %}
Supply'd calculates the percentage Australian by using data from your ingredients - specifically the origin info you've entered for each component. This helps you quickly work out your Australian content without doing manual calculations, which is especially useful for labelling and compliance.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="warning" %}
You will need to have completed the **Production Stage** and **Production Items/Recipe Items** sections before you use the **Generate** feature.
Each ingredient used in the production or recipe must have its relevant information entered to ensure accurate calculations.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
### Ingredients
Add any ingredients contained in this product.
**Production & Recipe Type Products**
**Production** and **Recipe** products will have a button.
Clicking will automatically create an ingredient list based on the components used in your production item.
{% hint style="success" %}
Supply'd generates the ingredients list by pulling the ingredient names from your product setup and arranges them in order of quantity, which is standard for food labelling. This saves time and helps ensure your ingredient list is accurate and compliant with labelling requirements.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="warning" %}
You will need to have completed the **Production Stage** and **Production Items/Recipe Items** sections before you use the **Generate** feature.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="info" %}
Supply'd offers two ways to format your labels based on how you want ingredients to appear:
**1. The Grouping Method (Plain Text)**
If you list ingredients as plain text, the system automatically merges duplicates and reorders them by total weight.
* **How it works:** If sugar is in both your ganache and chocolate shell, it will be grouped and listed once as "Sugar".
* **Best for:** Creating a clean, standard legal declaration.
**2. The Compound Method \[Square Brackets]**
To show specific recipe items rather than just a raw list of parts, place sub-components inside square brackets `[ ]`.
* **How it works:** Formatting an item as "Chocolate \[sugar, cocoa mass...]" ensures the main ingredient is named first, followed by its specific breakdown.
* **Best for:** Highlighting specific brands or complex components like cream or chocolate.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
### Allergens - Contains
Enter the allergens that **are present** in this product, separated by commas (eg. dairy, nuts). Do not include leading phrases like "Contains".
{% hint style="warning" %}
Use consistent naming for allergens across all ingredients. For example, if **Egg** is used for one ingredient, avoid using **Eggs** for another. Supply’d treats differently named allergens as separate entries, so inconsistent naming may result in both **Egg** and **Eggs** appearing in the generated allergen field instead of being combined into a single allergen.
{% endhint %}
**Production** and **Recipe** type products will have a button.
Clicking automatically compiles a list of allergens found in the ingredients of your product.
{% hint style="success" %}
Supply'd scans the ingredients you've added to the production item and identifies any known allergens (like gluten, dairy, nuts, etc.) based on the allergen information stored in your ingredient data. This helps you quickly and accurately populate allergen warnings for food labelling and compliance.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="warning" %}
You will need to have completed the **Production Stage** and **Production Items** sections before you use the **Generate** feature.
Each ingredient in the production or recipe must have its details entered to ensure accurate information is generated.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
### Allergens - May Contain
Enter any allergens that **may be present** in this product, separated by commas (eg. soy, peanuts).
Do not include phrases like "May contain".
{% hint style="warning" %}
Use consistent naming for **May Contain** allergens across all ingredients. For example, if **Egg** is used for one ingredient, avoid using **Eggs** for another. Supply’d treats differently named allergens as separate entries, so inconsistent naming may result in both **Egg** and **Eggs** appearing in the generated **May Contain** field instead of being combined into a single allergen.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
### Nutrition Information
Add the nutrition information for this product.
Click to open the **Edit Nutrition** form, where you can enter nutritional details manually, use **Fetch Nutrition** to assist with calculations, or, for **Production** or **Recipe** products, have Supply’d calculate them automatically from their ingredients/components.
👉 For complete instructions on adding this information, see the [#adding-the-nutrition-information](#adding-the-nutrition-information "mention") section below.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
### Storage Type
Select the type of storage required for this product - **Ambient**, **Refrigerated** or **Frozen**.
{% hint style="info" %}
If **Temperature Check** is enabled in [Sales Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/sales-settings), the system will prompt for a temperature check of refrigerated or frozen items during Receiving.
👉 See the [Receiving Purchase Orders](/supplyd-erp/purchases/receiving-purchase-orders) document for more details.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
### Shelf Life
This field allows you to specify how long the product remains suitable for use or sale.
Enter a numerical value, then select whether the shelf life is measured in **Days**, **Months**, or **Years**, depending on what applies to the product.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
### Usable Size
The weight or size of a single unit. This can be used to define drained weights or other weights or volumes that differ from the product’s listed size.
For example, a can of pineapple may weigh 450 g, but after draining the juice, the pineapple alone weighs much less.
Enter a value, then select the appropriate unit of measurement from the drop-down menu.
Leave this field blank to use the product size.
{% hint style="success" %}
**Usable Size** is mainly useful when the product is used as an ingredient in production. It ensures production calculations are based on the actual usable weight of the ingredient rather than the listed product weight.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
### Expiry Type
Select the type of expiry date for this product - either **Best Before** or **Use By**.
{% hint style="info" %}
Batch expiry types are preset during the initial inventory creation or defined at the moment you receive the stock.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
### Allowed Substitutes
Add any products that can be used as substitutes, if any, for this item during production runs if the original product is unavailable.
This allows production staff to use approved substitute products during a production run if the original ingredient is unavailable. For example, if there is not enough **Sea Salt**, an approved substitute such as **Table Salt** can be selected.
{% hint style="warning" %}
⚠️ **Important:** Using substitutes during production **does not** update recipe food labelling, allergen, or nutrition information. Management should ensure that any approved substitutes are suitable and do not affect compliance requirements.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="info" %}
To use this option, **Allow Ingredient Substitutions** must be enabled in the [Production Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/production-settings#production-defaults) section of your [Production Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/production-settings).
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
### Is Formula Base
Choose whether or not this **Product** (ingredient) is part of "100% flour" when used in a Bakers Percentage-based production recipe.
{% hint style="info" %}
This field will only show when **Bakers Mode** is enabled in the [Production Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/production-settings#production-defaults) section in your [#production-settings](#production-settings "mention").
👉 See the [Bakers Mode](/supplyd-erp/production/bakers-mode) document for full details.
{% endhint %}
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
## Adding the Nutrition Information
The **Edit Nutrition** form in Supply’d lets you add or calculate the nutritional values of your products, including energy, fat, protein, carbohydrates, and other nutrients. Nutrition information can be added manually, calculated using **Fetch Nutrition** for **Standard**, **Bundled**, or **Breakdown** products, or automatically generated for **Recipe** and **Production** products.
* [#servings-per-package-and-serving-size](#servings-per-package-and-serving-size "mention")
* [#adding-a-nutrient-field](#adding-a-nutrient-field "mention")
* [#standard-bundled-or-breakdown-types](#standard-bundled-or-breakdown-types "mention")
* [#recipe-type](#recipe-type "mention")
* [#production-type](#production-type "mention")
* [#recipe-weight-final-weight-and-weight-change](#recipe-weight-final-weight-and-weight-change "mention")
* [#removing-nutrition](#removing-nutrition "mention")
***
### **Servings Per Package & Serving Size**
**Serving Size**
This is the total number of servings in one full pack of your product.\
For example, if a bottle contains 500ml and each serving is 250ml, then **Servings Per Package = 2**.
**Serving Size**
This is the amount of product in a single serving. It should reflect the typical portion someone would consume at one time.
{% hint style="warning" %}
The system will not allow you calculate or recalculate these values unless a **Product Size** has been set for the product.
{% endhint %}
***
### Adding a Nutrient Field
If you want to add nutrition information beyond the standard table, click .
Select the nutrition value and click for the field to be added to the table.
{% hint style="warning" %}
The nutrient must be set up in your **Product Settings** to appear as an option on the menu.
👉 See the [Product Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/product-settings#nutritional-info) section of the [Product Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/product-settings) for details.
All ingredients or products used in the recipe must have this additional information for the nutrient to be calculated accurately when using the **Generate** feature. Alternatively, you can enter the value manually.
{% endhint %}
***
### Calculating Nutrition
Nutrition details can be manually input, calculated using **Fetch Nutrition** for **Standard**, **Bundled**, or **Breakdown** items, or automatically generated for **Recipe** and **Production** items.
* [#standard-bundled-or-breakdown-types](#standard-bundled-or-breakdown-types "mention")
* [#recipe-type](#recipe-type "mention")
* [#production-type](#production-type "mention")
***
#### Standard, Bundled or Breakdown Types
**Standard**, **Bundled** or **Breakdown** product types can use **Fetch Nutrition** to calculate the nutrition values.
{% hint style="success" %}
Fetch Nutrition is a tool that automatically fills in the nutritional information for a product based on its listed ingredients. \
\
Instead of manually calculating or entering nutrition values (like energy, fat, protein, etc.), **Fetch Nutrition** pulls standard data from a trusted database to generate an estimate. It’s a quick way to get a complete Nutrition Information Panel without doing all the work yourself - and you can still review and adjust the results if needed.
{% endhint %}
Click on the 3 dots in the top right and select **Fetch Nutrition**.
The **Fetch Nutrition** form will open.
Enter the ingredient, select the appropriate match from the menu and click .
***
### Recipe Type
Supply'd can automatically calculate the nutrition values for a **Recipe** type product.
{% hint style="warning" %}
You must complete the **Recipe Stages** and **Recipe Items** section before using the **Generate** feature.
For accurate calculations, each ingredient or product used in the recipe must also have its nutrition values added.
{% endhint %}
Click on the 3 dots in the top right and select **Generate From Recipe**.
Supply'd will automatically calculate the nutrition using the ingredients and their amounts in your recipe.
***
#### Production Type
For Production products, Supply’d can automatically calculate **serving details** and **nutrition values**.
**Servings Per Package / Serving Size Calculations**
For **Production** products, Supply’d can automatically calculate the **Servings Per Package**/**Serving Size**.
{% hint style="warning" %}
You need to complete the **Production Stages** and **Production Items** sections before using the **Calculate** feature.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="success" %}
The buttons help you automatically work out the **Servings Per Package** and **Serving Size**, based on your product’s total weight or volume.
**✅ Calculate Serving Size**
If you already know how many **Servings Per Package** there are, Supply’d will calculate the **Serving Size** for you.
\
Example:
* You enter “Servings per Pack” = 4
* The total pack weight is 800g
* It will calculate the **Serving Size = 200g**
**✅ Calculate Servings per Pack**
If you know the **Serving Size**, Supply’d will calculate how many servings fit in a pack.
\
Example:
* You enter **Serving Size** = 250ml
* The total pack volume is 1lt
* It will calculate **Servings Per Package = 4**
{% endhint %}
**Generating Nutrition**
{% hint style="warning" %}
You need to complete the **Production Stages** and **Production Items** sections before using the **Calculate** **Generate** feature.
For accurate nutrition calculations, each ingredient or product used must also have its nutrition values added.
{% endhint %}
Click on the 3 dots in the top right and select **Generate From Recipe**.
Supply'd will automatically calculate the nutritional values (like energy, protein, fat, sugar, etc.) for your finished product, using the nutrition details from all its components.
{% hint style="success" %}
Supply'd automatically calculates the nutritional values for Production and Recipe type products by pulling the nutrition data from each ingredient in your recipe and calculating the total values based on their quantities. This saves time and helps ensure your Nutrition Information Panel is accurate and compliant with labelling standards.
{% endhint %}
***
### Recipe Weight, Final Weight & Weight Change
In Supply’d, these fields are used to account for moisture loss or gain during the cooking process. Since nutrition is calculated by weight, the system needs to know if your product shrinks (like roasting meat) or expands (like boiling pasta) to give an accurate per-100g breakdown.
#### Recipe Weight (Input Weight)
Enter the total raw weight of all your ingredients combined before any processing or cooking.
* How it’s calculated: Supply’d automatically sums the weights of every ingredient you’ve added to the recipe.
* Example: If you combine 500g of ground beef, 10g of salt, and 90g of egg, your Recipe Weight is 600g.
#### Final Weight (Yield Weight)
Enter the actual weight of the finished product after it has been cooked, baked, or processed.
* Why it matters: Most foods lose weight during cooking due to water evaporation. If you don't update this, your nutrition labels will be inaccurate because the nutrients become more "concentrated" as the food shrinks.
* Example: After grilling those 600g of burger ingredients, the cooked patties weigh only 510g. You would enter "510" here.
#### Weight Change (%)
This field shows the percentage of weight lost or gained during production.
* Automatic Calculation: Supply'd calculates this for you based on the difference between the Recipe Weight and Final Weight.
* Negative Value (-): Indicates "Yield Loss" (common in baking or roasting where moisture evaporates).
* Positive Value (+): Indicates "Yield Gain" (common in rice or pasta where water is absorbed).
* Example: In the burger example above, the change from 600g to 510g would result in a -15% Weight Change.
{% hint style="success" %}
**Why this is critical for Nutrition Labels**
The law requires nutrition panels (like "Calories per 100g") to reflect the product as sold (usually the cooked state).
* Without Final Weight: The system thinks 100g of your burger has the calories of 100g of raw meat.
* With Final Weight: The system understands that 100g of your *finished* burger actually contains about 115g worth of raw ingredients' nutrients, making the label legally compliant and accurate.
{% endhint %}
***
Once all details have been entered, click to add the information to the **Labelling** section.
The completed information will look something like this on the product page.
***
### Removing Nutrition
Removing nutrition is useful if you need to reset the information, for example, if the recipe has changed or if you want to manually re-enter or re-generate the data from updated ingredients.
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
On the **Nutrition Information** table, click . The **Edit Nutrition** form will open.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click on the 3 dots on the top right of the **Edit Nutrition** form and select **Remove Nutrition**.
You will be asked to confirm.
Click .
This will clear all the nutritional data currently entered or generated for the product.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
# Product Details
Products within Supply'd can be used to buy, sell or produce. There is a large amount of information & functionality you can set to configure the products to be used for their various purposes.
When adding a product to **Supply’d**, the **Product Details** section contains the key information used to identify and manage the product. This includes details such as the product name, SKU, category, description, and product type.
Completing these details accurately helps ensure the product is correctly set up and easy to find, manage, and use throughout Supply’d.
This document explains how to complete the **Product Details** section of the **Add Product** form when adding a new product to Supply’d.
***
### Completing the Product Details Section
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Open the Add Product Form
1. Select **Products** from the main menu to open the **Products** page.
2. Click the **Add +** button in the top right to open the **Add Product** form.
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 The [Adding a Product](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products/adding-a-product) document provides detailed instructions on how to open this form.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Complete the Product Details
The details about this product such as name, size, images, description etc.
**Brand**
Select or enter the brand of the product. For example, for **Sungold Full Cream Milk 2L**, the brand is **Sungold**. Select a brand from the suggested options, or type a new brand if it is not already listed. If the product has no brand, you can enter your **business name** instead.
{% hint style="warning" %}
Brand is a required field when selling on Supply'd. It helps identify who makes or supplies the product and ensures it appears correctly in the marketplace.
{% endhint %}
**Name\* \[required field]**
Enter the name of the product. Enter the product name without the brand or size, as these can be entered in separate fields.
For example, for **Sungold Full Cream Milk 2L**, enter **Full Cream Milk** as the product name.
**Size**
Enter the weight or size of a single unit of the product. Leave this field blank if you do not want to specify a size.
For example, for **Sungold Full Cream Milk 2L**, enter **2** as the size and select **Litres** from the drop-down menu. The size will be displayed to customers when purchasing the product.
{% hint style="info" %}
**Size**
These fields determine how items are tracked in Inventory and depends on how you want to manage them. For products you sell, make sure you keep the correct sizing as listed. For items used internally or in production, the requirements may differ depending on use.
For example, if you buy a 15 kg bag of sugar:
* If you want to track it as a single 15 kg bag, enter **15 kg**.
* If you want to track it in 1 kg units, enter **1 kg**.
It’s best to keep this consistent across your inventory, especially if you switch suppliers or use multiple suppliers with different package sizes, to avoid confusion and simplify reporting.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="success" %}
If you do not need a **Size** (and **Measure**), and you want to keep stock as simple units, leave these fields blank. The system will recognise this and track inventory in units rather than by weight or another measurement type.
This is useful when the measurement is not important, or when the item is too small for weight to be practical.
For example:
* **Cello bags** - Each bag weighs almost 0g, so tracking them by weight adds little value. It is much easier to count them as individual units for selling and production.
* **Sugar decorations for cupcakes or cookies** - These are also very light, and during production you usually count how many decorations are needed rather than weigh them. For example, you may place a specific number on each cupcake or cookie.
{% endhint %}
**SKU**
Enter the SKU of the product. The SKU (Stock Keeping Unit) is a unique identifier used to identify and track the product. Each product must have a unique SKU, and the same SKU cannot be used for multiple products.
{% hint style="success" %}
Supply’d can generate a unique SKU for you. Simply click at the top right of the field.
{% endhint %}
**Category\* \[required]**
Select the category on your supplier profile where you want the product to be grouped. Supply’d allows you to create your own categories, giving you flexibility to organise products in a way that suits your business. Click or type in the field to view available categories.
For example, for **Sungold Full Cream Milk 2L**, you might use **Full Cream Milk** if you mainly distribute milk, or **Milk** if you sell a wider range of products.
**Departments**
Select the appropriate department or departments that the product belongs to. Your available departments may differ from the example, depending on how your business has named and organised them.
{% hint style="info" %}
This field will only appear if you’ve set up optional Departments within your [Locations](/supplyd-erp/settings/locations).
👉 Refer to the [Locations](/supplyd-erp/settings/locations#departments) section of the [Locations](/supplyd-erp/settings/locations) document.
{% endhint %}
**Unit Barcode**
Enter the barcode for one individual unit of the product. Use the barcode on an individual item inside the carton, rather than the carton barcode. This allows customers to scan the item and quickly find it in Supply’d for ordering or reordering.
**Carton Barcode**
Enter the barcode printed on the carton or outer packaging. This is useful when receiving purchase orders, as staff can scan the carton directly without opening it to scan an individual product.
**Product Image**
Upload an image of the product to Supply’d. A square image of at least **640 × 640 px** with a transparent background, such as a **PNG**, is recommended. **JPG** images are also supported.
**Description**
Enter a detailed description of the product to help customers make informed purchasing decisions. Include relevant information such as ingredients, allergens, and other useful product details.
**Tags**
Select from a set of predefined tags that describe the product, such as **Vegan, Vegetarian, Nut-Free**, or **Gluten-Free**. Customers can use these tags to find products that match their preferences. Click the field to view the available tags.
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 You can also add custom tags in the [Product Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/product-settings#product-editing) section in your [Product Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/product-settings).
{% endhint %}
**Dimensions (cm)**
Enter the **width, height, and depth** of the carton in centimetres when shipped.
**Weight (kg)**
Enter the weight of the carton in kilograms when shipped.
For example, if **Sungold Full Cream Milk 2L** comes in a crate of 9 and each bottle weighs 2 kg, enter **18**. This information is used by third-party applications such as **Shippit** to provide live shipping quotes.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Complete Remaining Fields
Complete the remainder of the form as outlined in the [Adding a Product](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products/adding-a-product) document.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
# Sell Product Details
Completing the Sell Product section helps ensure accurate pricing information is used when selling products in Supply’d.
The **Sell Product** section contains the settings used to configure a product’s pricing in **Supply’d**. This includes setting the product’s price, sale price, taxes and RRP, ensuring the correct pricing information is recorded for the product when it is sold.
This document explains how to complete the **Sell Product** section of the **Add Product** form when adding a new product to Supply’d.
***
### Completing the Product Details Section
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Open the Add Product Form
1. Select **Products** from the main menu to open the **Products** page.
2. Click the **Add +** button in the top right to open the **Add Product** form.
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 The [Adding a Product](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products/adding-a-product) document provides detailed instructions on how to open this form.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Complete the Sections up to Sell Product
Following the guidelines for [Adding a Product](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products/adding-a-product), complete the sections up to **Sell Product?**.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Complete the Sell Product Details
Toggle on if you sell this product.
**Price (inc tax)\* \[required field]**
Enter the default **sale price** for a carton or unit of the product, **including tax**. This price is used when a sales channel does not have a specific price entered.
**Sale Price (inc tax)**
If the product is on sale, enter the sale price here. Leave blank for no sale price.
**Tax\* \[required]**
Select any taxes, such as **GST**, that apply to the product when it is sold. Leave blank if no tax applies.
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 Refer to the [Tax](/supplyd-erp/settings/tax) document for details on setting tax rates.
{% endhint %}
**Unit RRP (inc Tax)**
Enter the **recommended retail price (RRP)** for one unit of the product, **including tax**, that a stockist is recommended to charge when selling it to their customers.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Complete Remaining Fields
Complete the remainder of the form as outlined in the [Adding a Product](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products/adding-a-product) document.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
{% hint style="warning" %}
**Important:** If you previously sold a product but no longer do, or accidentally enabled **Sell Product** and entered a price, make sure you clear the **Price** before toggling **Sell Product** off. Otherwise, the price may continue to appear in reports, such as in the **Sale Value** column of the **Inventory by Products** report.
To clear the sale value, while the **Sale** toggle is still on, remove the **Price** and select . Then reopen the product for editing, turn the **Sale** toggle off, and select again.
{% endhint %}
# Sell on Shopify Details
Completing the Sell on Shopify settings helps keep product information accurate & consistent between Supply’d & your Shopify store, making products easier to manage & sell online.
The **Sell on Shopify** section contains the settings needed to make a product available for sale through your Shopify store. Completing these details ensures the product is correctly configured and synchronised with Shopify for customers to view and purchase.
This document explains how to complete the **Sell on Shopify** section of the **Add Product** form when adding a new product to Supply’d.
***
### Completing the Sell on Shopify Details
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Open the Add Product Form
1. Select **Products** from the main menu to open the **Products** page.
2. Click the **Add +** button in the top right to open the **Add Product** form.
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 The [Adding a Product](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products/adding-a-product) document provides detailed instructions on how to open this form.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Complete the Sections up to Sell on Shopify
Following the guidelines for [Adding a Product](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products/adding-a-product), complete the sections up to **Sell on Shopify**.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Complete the Sell on Shopify Section
Toggle this on if you want to sell the product through the specified **Shopify store**.
{% hint style="success" %}
In this example, **Sell on Shopify – Shopify Store?**, "**Shopify Store**" is the name of the Shopify store where the product will be sold. This will be the name of your connected Shopify store.
For example, if your Shopify store is named **Fresh Foods**, the section would appear as **Sell on Shopify – Fresh Foods?**
If you have multiple **Shopify stores** connected to Supply’d, a **Sell on Shopify** section will be displayed for each store, with each section showing its respective store name.
👉 The [Shopify](/supplyd-erp/settings/integrations/sales-channel-integrations/shopify) document explains how to connect and manage Shopify stores in Supply’d.
{% endhint %}
**Shopify Store Price (inc Tax)**
If you want to use a different price for the product in your Shopify store, enter it here. This price will sync to the Shopify store only.
Leave blank if the Shopify price is the same as the product price entered in the **Sell Product** section.
**Shopify Store Sale Price (inc tax)**
If the product is on sale, enter the **Shopify Store sale price** here. This price will sync to the Shopify store only.
Leave blank if the product is not on sale or if the Shopify sale price is the same as the price entered in the **Sell Product** section.
**Shopify Store Tax**
Select whether to use the product’s existing tax settings or apply tax, such as GST, when selling the product on Shopify. This tax setting will sync with the **Shopify** store only.
**Pack In Carton**
Select whether the product should be packed in a shipping carton when sold through the **Shopify** store.
* **Default** - The product will be packed according to the setting selected under **Sell Product** for this product.
* **Yes** - The product will be packed in an aggregated shipping carton during packing.
* **No** - The product will be shipped as is, without any additional cartons.
**Sold As**
Select whether the product is sold on Shopify by the **Unit** or as a **Carton**.
When **Carton** is selected, an additional **Carton Qty** field will appear.
**Carton QTY\* \[required field]**
Enter the number of units contained in each carton when selling the product on **Shopify**.
{% hint style="info" %}
This field is only displayed when **Carton** is selected in **Sold As** and is required when **Carton** is selected.
{% endhint %}
**Collections**
Select the **Shopify Collections** you want to feature the product under in your Shopify store.
**Sales Channels**
Select the sales channels you want the product assigned to in your Shopify store.
Leave blank to use the default setting from your **Shopify Store** integration settings.
**Track Inventory**
Select whether or not inventory should be tracked for this product in the **Shopify** store.
{% hint style="info" %}
In general, this field will default to **Yes** when **Sell on Shopify** is enabled.
{% endhint %}
**Stock Buffer**
Set a buffer for this products inventory sent to Shopify. A buffer will reduce the quantity of each products inventory by the buffer amount to help prevent overselling.
For example, if you have **50 units** in stock and set a stock buffer of **5**, Supply’d will send **45 units** as the available inventory in Shopify.
Leave blank to use the default set in your integration settings.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Repeat
If you sell the product in more than one **Shopify Store**, repeat the last step for each store.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Complete Remaining Fields
Complete the remainder of the form as outlined in the [Adding a Product](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products/adding-a-product) document.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
# Sell on Square Details
Completing the Sell on Square settings helps keep product information accurate and up to date in your Square store, making products easier to manage and sell.
The **Sell on Square** section contains the settings needed to make a product available for sale through your Square store. Completing these details ensures the product is correctly configured and synchronised with Square for customers to view and purchase.
This document explains how to complete the **Sell on Square** section of the **Add Product** form when adding a new product to Supply’d.
***
### Completing the Sell on Square Details
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Open the Add Product Form
1. Select **Products** from the main menu to open the **Products** page.
2. Click the **Add +** button in the top right to open the **Add Product** form.
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 The [Adding a Product](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products/adding-a-product) document provides detailed instructions on how to open this form.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Complete the Sections up to Sell on Square
Following the guidelines for [Adding a Product](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products/adding-a-product), complete the sections up to **Sell on Square**.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Complete the Sell on Square Section
Toggle this on if you want to sell the product through the specified **Square** store.
{% hint style="success" %}
In this example, **Sell on Square – Square?**, "**Square**" is the name of the Square store where the product will be sold. This will be the name of your connected Square store.
For example, if you named your Square store **Fresh Foods**, the section would appear as **Sell on Square – Fresh Foods?**
If you have multiple **Square stores** connected to Supply’d, a **Sell on Square** section will be displayed for each store, with each section showing its respective store name.
👉 The **Square Integration** document explains how to connect and manage Square stores in Supply’d.
{% endhint %}
**Square Price (inc Tax)**
If you want to use a different price for the product in your Square store, you can override it here. This price will sync to **Square only**.
Leave blank if the Square price is the same as the product price entered in the **Sell Product** section.
**Square Sale Price (inc tax)**
If the product is on sale, enter the **Square sale price** here. This price will sync to **Square only**.
Leave blank if the product is not on sale or if the Square sale price is the same as the sale price entered in the **Sell Product** section.
**Square Tax**
If you want to use a different tax for the product in Square, you can override the product tax here. This tax will sync with **Square only**.
Select **Same As Product** to use the product’s default tax setting, or select **GST** (or the applicable tax).
**Pack In Carton**
Select whether the product should be packed in a shipping carton when sold through the **Square** store.
* **Default** - The product will be packed according to the setting selected under **Sell Product** for this product.
* **Yes** - The product will be packed in an aggregated shipping carton during packing.
* **No** - The product will be shipped as is, without any additional cartons.
**Sold As**
Select whether the product is sold on **Square** by the **Unit** or as a **Carton**.
When **Carton** is selected, an additional **Carton Qty** field will appear.
**Carton QTY\* \[required field]**
Enter the number of units contained in each carton when selling the product on **Square**.
{% hint style="info" %}
This field is only displayed when **Carton** is selected in **Sold As** and is required when **Carton** is selected.
{% endhint %}
**Square Product Name**
If you want to use a different product name in Square, enter the new name here. This will override the default product name synced to Square.
Leave blank to use the default configured product name.
**Variably Priced**
Select whether or not the product is sold at a specific price or whether staff must enter the price at the point of sale.
**Categories**
Select the **Square categories** you want to feature the product under in your Square store.
**Reporting Category**
Select the reporting category for the product in Square.
Leave blank to use the product’s **Supply’d category**.
**Sales Unit**
Select how the product is sold. The default is **By Item**. If the product is sold by weight or length, select the applicable option.
**Track Inventory**
Select whether you want to track inventory for this product in **Square**.
{% hint style="info" %}
In general, this field will default to **Yes** when you enable **Sell on Square**.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Repeat
If you sell the product in more than one **Square Store**, repeat the last step for each store.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Complete Remaining Fields
Complete the remainder of the form as outlined in the [Adding a Product](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products/adding-a-product) document.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
# Sell on Supply'd Details
Completing the Sell on Supply’d settings ensures products are correctly configured & available for customers to find, order, & purchase.
The **Sell on Supply’d** section contains the settings needed to make a product available for sale through Supply’d. Completing these details ensures the product is correctly configured for customers to view, order, and purchase.
This document explains how to complete the **Sell on Supply'd** section of the **Add Product** form when adding a new product to Supply’d.
***
### Completing the Sell on Supply'd Details
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Open the Add Product Form
1. Select **Products** from the main menu to open the **Products** page.
2. Click the **Add +** button in the top right to open the **Add Product** form.
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 The [Adding a Product](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products/adding-a-product) document provides detailed instructions on how to open this form.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Complete the Sections up to Sell on Supply'd
Following the guidelines for [Adding a Product](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products/adding-a-product), complete the sections up to **Sell on Supply'd**.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Complete the Sell on Supply'd Section
Toggle this on if you want to sell the product through the specified **Supply’d store**.
{% hint style="success" %}
In this example, **Sell on Supply’d – Supply’d?**, "**Supply'd**" is the name of the Supply’d store where the product will be sold. This will be the name you chose when setting up your store.
For example, if you named your Supply’d store **Fresh Foods**, the section would appear as **Sell on Supply’d – Fresh Foods?**
If you have multiple **Supply’d stores**, a **Sell on Supply’d** section will be displayed for each store, with each section showing its respective store name.
👉 The **Supply’d Stores** document explains how to set up and manage stores in Supply’d.
{% endhint %}
**Supply'd Price (ex tax)**
If you want Supply’d to use a different price from the product’s standard price, enter the Supply’d price per unit or carton, excluding taxes such as GST. This price applies and syncs with Supply’d only.
Leave blank if the Supply'd price is the same as the product price entered in the **Sell Product** section.
**Supply'd Sale Price (ex tax)**
If the product is on sale in Supply’d, enter the sale price per unit or carton, excluding taxes such as GST.
Leave blank if the product is not on sale or if the Supply'd sale price is the same as the price entered in the **Sell Product** section.
**Supply'd Tax\* \[required field]**
Select whether to use the product’s existing tax settings or apply tax, such as GST, when selling the product on Supply’d.
**Pack In Carton**
Select whether or not the product should be packed in a shipping carton when sold on Supply’d.
* **Default -** The product will be packed according to the **Sell Product** setting for the product.
* **Yes -** The product will be packed in an aggregated shipping carton during packing.
* **No -** The product will be shipped as is, without any additional cartons.
**Sold As**
Select whether the product is sold on Supply’d by the **Unit** or as a **Carton**.
When **Carton** is selected, an additional **Carton Qty** field will appear.
**Carton QTY\* \[required field]**
Enter the number of units contained in each carton when selling the product on Supply’d.
{% hint style="info" %}
This field is only displayed when **Carton** is selected in **Sold As** and is required when **Carton** is selected.
{% endhint %}
**Minimum Order**
Enter the minimum quantity of the product that customers must order. Customers cannot order less than this quantity.
Leave blank if there is no minimum order quantity.
**Quantity Multiple**
Enter the quantity multiple that customers must order the product in. Customers can only order quantities that match the specified multiple. For example, if set to **5**, customers can order **5, 10, 15, 20**, and so on.
Leave blank if there is no order multiple.
**Visibility\* \[required field]**
Select whether or not the product is available for customers to view and purchase in your Supply'd Stores.
* **Visible -** The product is visible to customers whose business type matches an entry in the **Sell To Categories** list.
* **Out of Stock -** The product is visible to customers but marked as out of stock and cannot be ordered.
* **Not Visible -** The product is hidden from customers and can only be added when manually creating a sales order.
* **Specific Customers -** The product is visible only to the customers selected in the **Assign To Customer** field, which appears when this option is selected.
**Assign to Customer**
Select the customers who can view and purchase this product. Only the selected customers will be able to order the product. Customers must already be set up as your customers or have been invited to Supply’d.
{% hint style="info" %}
This field is only visible when **Specific Customers** is selected in **Visibility** field.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 To find out more about adding a customer, see the [Adding a Customer](/supplyd-erp/customers/adding-customers-leads-and-customer-groups/adding-a-customer) document.
{% endhint %}
**Requires Liquor Licence**
Select whether or not a liquor licence is required to purchase the product. If **Yes** is selected, the customer must provide a valid liquor licence.
**Restrict By Shipping Zones**
If the product is only available in certain shipping zones, select the applicable zones. Leave this field blank if the product is available in all shipping zones. Click the field or start typing to view and select from your available **Shipping Zones**.
👉 See the [Shipping Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/shipping-settings) document for details on setting up shipping zones.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Repeat
If you sell the product in more than one **Supply’d Store**, repeat the last step for each store.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Complete Remaining Fields
Complete the remainder of the form as outlined in the [Adding a Product](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products/adding-a-product) document.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
# Sell on Ordermentum Details
Configuring these settings helps ensure products are accurately displayed, priced, and managed in Ordermentum, providing customers with up-to-date product and availability information.
The **Sell on Ordermentum** section contains the settings used to configure how a product is displayed and sold through your connected **Ordermentum** store. This includes Ordermentum-specific details such as pricing, featured status, badge labels, and stock availability.
This document explains how to complete the **Sell on Ordermentum** section of the **Add Product** form when adding a new product to Supply’d.
***
### Completing the Sell on Ordermentum Details
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Open the Add Product Form
1. Select **Products** from the main menu to open the **Products** page.
2. Click the **Add +** button in the top right to open the **Add Product** form.
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 The [Adding a Product](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products/adding-a-product) document provides detailed instructions on how to open this form.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Complete the Sections up to Sell on Ordermentum
Following the guidelines for [Adding a Product](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products/adding-a-product), complete the sections up to **Sell on Ordermentum**.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Complete the Sell on Ordermentum Section
Toggle this on if you want to sell the product through the specified **Ordermentum store**.
{% hint style="success" %}
In this example, **Sell on Ordermentum – Test?**, **Test** is the name of the Ordermentum store where the product will be sold. This will be the name of your connected Ordermentum store.
For example, if your Ordermentum store is named **Fresh Foods**, the section would appear as **Sell on Ordermentum – Fresh Foods?**
If you have multiple **Ordermentum** stores connected to Supply’d, a **Sell on Ordermentum** section will be displayed for each store, with each section showing its respective store name.
👉 The [Ordermentum](/supplyd-erp/settings/integrations/sales-channel-integrations/ordermentum) document explains how to connect and manage Ordermentum stores in **Supply’d**.
{% endhint %}
**Test Price (inc Tax)**
If you want to use a different price for the product in your Ordermentum store, enter it here. This price will sync to the Ordermentum store only.
Leave blank if the Ordermentum price is the same as the product price entered in the **Sell Product** section.
**Test Sale Price (inc tax)**
If the product is on sale, enter the Ordermentum store **sale price** here. This price will sync to the Ordementum store only.
Leave blank if the product is not on sale or if the Ordermentum sale price is the same as the price entered in the **Sell Product** section.
**Test Tax**
Select whether to use the product’s existing tax settings or apply tax, such as GST, when selling the product on Ordermentum. This tax setting will sync with the Ordermentum store only.
**Pack In Carton**
Select whether the product should be packed in a shipping carton when sold through the Ordermentum store.
* **Default** - The product will be packed according to the setting selected under **Sell Product** for this product.
* **Yes** - The product will be packed in an aggregated shipping carton during packing.
* **No** - The product will be shipped as is, without any additional cartons.
**Sold As**
Select whether the product is sold on Ordermentum by the **Unit** or as a **Carton**.
When **Carton** is selected, an additional **Carton Qty** field will appear.
**Carton QTY\* \[required field]**
Enter the number of units contained in each carton when selling the product on Ordermentum.
{% hint style="info" %}
This field is only displayed when **Carton** is selected in **Sold As** and is required when **Carton** is selected.
{% endhint %}
**Categories**
Select the **Ordementum categories** you want to feature the product under in your Ordermentum store.
**Featured**
Select whether the product should be featured on Ordermentum.
**Badge Label**
Enter the label you want to display as a badge on the product in Ordermentum.
**Track Inventory**
Select whether or not inventory should be tracked for this product in the Ordermentum store.
{% hint style="info" %}
In general, this field will default to **Yes** when **Sell on Ordermentum** is enabled.
{% endhint %}
**Out of Stock**
Select whether or not the product should be shown as out of stock in Ordermentum.
* **No** - If inventory is tracked, the current stock level in **Supply’d** determines the product’s stock status. If inventory is not tracked, the product will be shown as in stock.
* **Yes** - The product will be shown as out of stock in Ordermentum, regardless of its current stock level in **Supply’d**.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Repeat
If you sell the product in more than one **Ordermentum Store**, repeat the last step for each store.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Complete Remaining Fields
Complete the remainder of the form as outlined in the [Adding a Product](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products/adding-a-product) document.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
# Sell on Wedderburn Details
Configuring these settings helps ensure product information is accurately shared with Wedderburn, making it easier to manage products and maintain consistent information across systems.
The **Sell on Wedderburn** section contains settings used to configure how a product is managed and displayed through your connected **Wedderburn** integration. Completing these details helps ensure the relevant product information is correctly configured and shared with Wedderburn.
This document explains how to complete the **Sell on Wedderburn** section of the **Add Product** form when adding a new product to Supply’d.
***
### Completing the Sell on Wedderburn Section
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Open the Add Product Form
1. Select **Products** from the main menu to open the **Products** page.
2. Click the **Add +** button in the top right to open the **Add Product** form.
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 The [Adding a Product](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products/adding-a-product) document provides detailed instructions on how to open this form.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Complete the Sections up to Sell on Wedderburn
Following the guidelines for [Adding a Product](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products/adding-a-product), complete the sections up to **Sell on Wedderburn**.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Complete the Sell on Wedderburn Section
Toggle on to sync this product with **Wedderburn**.
{% hint style="success" %}
In this example, **Sell on Wedderburn – Wedderburn?**, **Wedderburn** is the name of the connected Wedderburn integration. This identifies the Wedderburn connection that the product will be synced with. The connection name will be the name you chose when setting up the **Wedderburn** integration.
For example, if you named your Wedderburn connection **Main Warehouse**, the section would appear as **Sell on Wedderburn – Main Warehouse?**
If you have multiple **Wedderburn** integrations connected to Supply’d, a separate **Sell on Wedderburn** section will be displayed for each integration, with each section showing its respective connection name.
👉 The [Wedderburn](/supplyd-erp/settings/integrations/sales-channel-integrations/wedderburn) document explains how to connect and manage Wedderburn integrations in **Supply’d**.
{% endhint %}
**Wedderburn Price (inc Tax)**
If you want to use a different price for the product in **Wedderburn**, enter it here. This price will sync to **Wedderburn only**.
Leave blank if the Wedderburn price is the same as the product price entered in the **Sell Product** section.
**Wedderburn Sale Price (inc tax)**
If the product is on sale, enter the **Wedderburn sale price** here. This price will sync to **Wedderburn** only.
Leave blank if the product is not on sale or if the Wedderburn sale price is the same as the price entered in the **Sell Product** section.
**Wedderburn Tax**
Select whether to use the product’s existing tax settings or apply a tax, such as **GST**, for **Wedderburn**. This tax setting will sync to **Wedderburn** only.
**Pack In Carton**
Select whether the product should be packed in a shipping carton when sold through the **Shopify** store.
* **Default** - The product will be packed according to the setting selected under **Sell Product** for this product.
* **Yes** - The product will be packed in an aggregated shipping carton during packing.
* **No** - The product will be shipped as is, without any additional cartons.
**Sold As**
Select whether the product is sold on Shopify by the **Unit** or as a **Carton**.
When **Carton** is selected, an additional **Carton Qty** field will appear.
**Carton QTY\* \[required field]**
Enter the number of units contained in each carton when selling the product on **Shopify**.
{% hint style="info" %}
This field is only displayed when **Carton** is selected in **Sold As** and is required when **Carton** is selected.
{% endhint %}
**Is Weighed**
Select whether or not the product is weighed. This indicates that the product’s quantity is measured using a scale.
**Override PLU**
Enter a **PLU** (Price Look-Up) code to sed to Wedderburn.
Leave blank to use the **SKU/Barcode** defined in your Wedderburn settings.
**Product Name**
Enter the product name that will be displayed in Wedderburn.
**Short Description**
Enter a brief description of the product to be displayed in Wedderburn.
**Locations**
Select the locations where the product is available or should be managed in Wedderburn. Leave blank to use the default locations.
**Sub Group**
Select the sub group to which the product belongs in Wedderburn.
**Format**
Select the format used for the product in Wedderburn, such as how the product is presented or sold.
**Colour**
Select the colour associated with the product in Wedderburn.
**Default Tare**
Enter the default tare weight for the product. This is the weight of the packaging or container that should be deducted when weighing the product. Leave blank for none.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Repeat
If you have more than one Wedderburn connections, repeat the last step for each store.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Complete Remaining Fields
Complete the remainder of the form as outlined in the [Adding a Product](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products/adding-a-product) document.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
# Sell on WooCommerce
Configuring these settings helps ensure products are accurately priced, displayed, and managed in your WooCommerce store.
The **WooCommerce** section contains the settings used to configure how a product is sold through your connected **WooCommerce** store. Completing these details ensures the product’s pricing, availability, and other WooCommerce-specific information are correctly configured.
This document explains how to complete the **Sell on WooCommerce** section of the **Add Product** form when adding a new product to Supply’d.
***
### Completing the WooCommerce Section
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Open the Add Product Form
1. Select **Products** from the main menu to open the **Products** page.
2. Click the **Add +** button in the top right to open the **Add Product** form.
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 The [Adding a Product](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products/adding-a-product) document provides detailed instructions on how to open this form.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Complete the Sections up to Sell on WooCommerce
Following the guidelines for [Adding a Product](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products/adding-a-product), complete the sections up to the **Sell on WooCommerce** section.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Complete the Sell on Sell On WooCommerce Section
Toggle this on if you want to sell the product through the specified WooCommerce store.
{% hint style="success" %}
In this example, **Sell on WooCommerce – WooCommerce Store?**, **WooCommerce Store** is the name of the WooCommerce store where the product will be sold. This will be the name of your connected WooCommerce store.
For example, if your WooCommerce store is named **Fresh Foods**, the section would appear as **Sell on WooCommerce – Fresh Foods?**
If you have multiple **WooCommerce stores** connected to Supply’d, a **Sell on WooCommerce** section will be displayed for each store, with each section showing its respective store name.
👉 The [WooCommerce](/supplyd-erp/settings/integrations/sales-channel-integrations/woocommerce) document explains how to connect and manage WooCommerce stores in **Supply’d**.
{% endhint %}
**Woo Store Price (inc Tax)**
If you want to use a different price for the product in WooCommerce you can override it here. This price will sync to WooCommerce only.
Leave blank if the WooCommerce price is the same as the product price entered in the **Sell Product** section.
**Woo Store Price (inc tax)**
If the product is on sale, enter the WooCommerce sale price here. This price will sync to WooCommerce only.
Leave blank if the product is not on sale or if the WooCommerce sale price is the same as the sale price entered in the **Sell Product** section.
**Woo Store Tax**
If you want to use a different tax for the product on WooCommerce, you can override the product tax here. This tax will sync to WooCommerce only.
Select **Same As Product** to use the product’s default tax setting, or select **GST** (or the applicable tax).
**Pack In Carton**
Select whether the product should be packed in a shipping carton when sold through the WooCommerce store.
* **Default** - The product will be packed according to the setting selected under **Sell Product** for this product.
* **Yes** - The product will be packed in an aggregated shipping carton during packing.
* **No** - The product will be shipped as is, without any additional cartons.
**Sold As**
Select whether the product is sold on WooCommerce by the **Unit** or as a **Carton**.
When **Carton** is selected, an additional **Carton Qty** field will appear.
**Carton QTY\* \[required field]**
Enter the number of units contained in each carton when selling the product on WooCommerce.
{% hint style="info" %}
This field is only displayed when **Carton** is selected in **Sold As** and is required when **Carton** is selected.
{% endhint %}
**Categories**
Select the categories you want to feature the product under in your WooCommerce store.
**Tags**
Select from a set of predefined tags that describe the product, such as **Vegan, Vegetarian, Nut-Free**, or **Gluten-Free**. Customers can use these tags to find products that match their preferences. Click the field to view the available tags.
**Featured**
Select whether the product should be featured on Ordermentum.
**Short Description**
Enter a brief description of the product to be displayed in your **WooCommerce** store.
**Stock Buffer**
Set a buffer for the product’s inventory sent to **WooCommerce**. A buffer reduces the available inventory sent to WooCommerce by the specified amount to help prevent overselling.
For example, if you have **50 units** in stock and set a stock buffer of **5**, Supply’d will send **45 units** as the available inventory in WooCommerce.
Leave blank to use the default set in your integration settings.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Repeat
If you sell the product in more than one **WooCommerce Store**, repeat the last step for each store.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Complete Remaining Fields
Complete the remainder of the form as outlined in the [Adding a Product](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products/adding-a-product) document.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
# Bulk Importing of Products
Products within Supply'd can be used to buy, sell or produce. There is a large amount of information and functionality you can set to configure the products to be used for their various purposes.
Bulk importing products into **Supply’d** is a quick and efficient way to add multiple products to your account at once. Instead of entering each product manually, you can upload all your product details using a CSV file. This saves time, reduces data entry errors, and ensures your product catalogue is accurate and up to date.
Products in Supply'd use a "Simple Product" methodology, meaning for each size, colour or flavour of product you would create a new product.
There are 2 ways to import products to Supply'd:
1. Manually add products to Supply'd \
👉 For instructions on how to do this see the [Adding Products](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products) document.
2. Bulk import products to Supply'd from a CSV template.
This document will guide you through bulk adding and updating of products to Supply'd.
* [#bulk-import-add-products](#bulk-import-add-products "mention")
* [#bulk-updating-products](#bulk-updating-products "mention")
***
## Bulk Import/Add Products
Supply'd makes it easy to import large sets of product from a spreadsheet. There is a specific template you will need to follow to do so in order to allow Supply'd to import the values correctly.
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
### Open the Import Products Form
To start an import, or to get the template:
1. Select **Products** from the menu.
2. Click on the three dots on the top right corner
3. Select **Import** then **Products**.
The **Import Products** form will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
### Download the Template
Click on **Download the template** to download our base template containing some sample products for your guidance.
The **Export Products** form will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
### Export Sample Data
Select **Sample Data** from the **Data Source** menu.
{% hint style="success" %}
If you have already started adding products to Supply'd, you will be given the option to export existing products from your various sales channels. This is particularly useful if you want to bulk update your products with additional information.
👉 See the [#bulk-updating-products](#bulk-updating-products "mention") section below.
{% endhint %}
#### **Fields**
The **Fields** section lets you select the types of data to include in the export.
* **Product Info:** Includes basic details about the product such as its name, description, SKU, category, and tags.
This information is used to create new products.
* **Purchasing Info:** If you buy this product, these fields cover supplier-related details, cost prices, minimum order quantities, and other purchasing data.
The products and suppliers must already exist.
* **Label Info :** Contains information used for food product labelling, including place of ingredients, allergens, and nutrition details. Helps with printing labels and regulatory compliance.
This will only update existing products.
* **Sales Channel Info:** Includes data related to what sales channels the product is sold on, pricing for different channels, inventory availability, and channel-specific settings. Useful for managing multi-channel sales.
Each product can be sold through multiple sales channels.
Click .
Once the data export is complete, you can open the downloaded template in any spreadsheet application, such as Excel or Numbers.
{% hint style="warning" %}
You should remove the sample products from the file before importing to Supply'd.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="info" %}
The more selections you make in the **Fields** section, the more data fields will be included in the spreadsheet. For clarity, we will break these down into sections, under their respective tabs, in the next step. However, when multiple selections are made, the order of fields on the spreadsheet may vary slightly, as some selections share the same fields, such as Name and Size.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
### Complete the Spreadsheet
Complete the template by following the instructions provided in each tab - **Product Info**, **Purchasing Info**, **Label Info** and **Sales Channel Info**. Make sure to click through all the tabs for each set of details you want to import, as each tab contains specific fields and examples needed to complete the template correctly.
{% tabs %}
{% tab title="Product Info" %}
#### Product Info
The Product Info fields contain all the basic details about a product, including its name, description, SKU, category, and tags. This information helps identify, classify, and organise the product within Supply’d, making it easier to manage inventory, track items, and support accurate reporting and search functionality.
**Id**
The **ID** is the unique identifier of a product in Supply’d.
* **For existing products:** Enter the product’s ID to update it.
* **For new products:** Leave this tab blank so Supply’d can assign a new ID automatically.
This ensures Supply’d correctly matches updates to existing products while preventing conflicts for new products by letting the system generate a unique ID.
**SKU**
The SKU of the product.
This should be a unique identifier for the product. The same SKU cannot be used on multiple products. The SKU is used to match products when updating so it is strongly recommended not to leave blank.
**Brand**
The brand or the manufacturer of the product.
In the example of : Full Cream Milk 2lt, the brand would be "Sungold". The brand is optional if you do not sell the product. Brand is required for product you sell.
**Name**
The product name.
As the brand and size can be entered in alternative field you would enter it without the extra details.
For example if you have a Sungold Full Cream Milk 2lt you would simply put the name as "Full Cream Milk".
**Size**
The unit size of the product to be used in conjunction with the **Size Measure** field.
For example, with our product Sungold Full Cream Milk 2lt we would define the size as "2".
**Size Measure**
The unit size measurement of the product to be used in conjunction with the **Size Unit** field.
For example with our product Sungold Full Cream Milk 2lt we would define the size measure as "Litres" or "l".
Possible values are:
* "Grams" or "g"
* "Kilograms" or "kg"
* "Millilitres" or "ml"
* "Litres" or "l"
* "Ounces" or "oz"
* "Pounds" or "lb"
Any alternative measures will be ignored.
{% hint style="info" %}
**Size & Size Measure**
These fields determine how items are tracked in Inventory and depends on how you want to manage them. For products you sell, make sure you keep the correct sizing as listed. For items used internally or in production, the requirements may differ depending on use.
For example, if you buy a 15 kg bag of sugar:
* If you want to track it as a single 15 kg bag, enter **15 kg**.
* If you want to track it in 1 kg units, enter **1 kg**.
It’s best to keep this consistent across your inventory, especially if you switch suppliers or use multiple suppliers with different package sizes, to avoid confusion and simplify reporting.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="success" %}
If you do not need a **Size** (and **Size Measure**), and you want to keep stock as simple units, leave these fields blank. The system will recognise this and track inventory in units rather than by weight or another measurement type.
This is useful when the measurement is not important, or when the item is too small for weight to be practical.
For example:
* **Cello bags** - Each bag weighs almost 0g, so tracking them by weight adds little value. It is much easier to count them as individual units for selling and production.
* **Sugar decorations for cupcakes or cookies** - These are also very light, and during production you usually count how many decorations are needed rather than weigh them. For example, you may place a specific number on each cupcake or cookie.
{% endhint %}
**Barcode**
The barcode of the product.
This should be the barcode of an individual item in the carton. This allows customers to scan an item to find it quickly in Supply'd for ordering or re-ordering.
**Carton Barcode**
The barcode on the carton of this product (if different to the unit barcode).
**Description**
Enter a detailed description of the product.
This is useful to give customers extra information to assist them with making their purchasing decisions. For example, you may include any allergen information and/or ingredients as well as descriptive details of the product.
**Category**
The category on your supplier profile that you would like this product to sit under.
Supply'd is flexible with categories to allow you to define your own so you can group your products in any way you choose.
For example, with our product Sungold Full Cream Milk 2lt, if you are a milk distributor you may opt to have a "Full Cream Milk" category, or if you sell lots of other products not just milk you may opt to have the category as simply "Milk".
**Tags**
Enter any tags that suit the product, separated by a comma.
Supply’d provides a set of predefined tags used to classify and match specific product attributes, such as whether a product is vegan, vegetarian, nut-free, or gluten-free. These tags help customers filter and search for products more effectively. For example, customers can use tags to find all vegan products that match a specific search query.
Available options are:
* Biodegradeable
* Compostable
* Gluten Free
* Vegan
* Vegetarian
* Dairy Free
* Nut Free
* Egg Free
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 You can also add custom tags in the [Product Editing](https://help.supplyd.co/configuring-supplyd/settings/product-settings#product-editing) section in your [Product Settings](https://help.supplyd.co/configuring-supplyd/settings/product-settings).
{% endhint %}
**Width**
The width of the carton in centimetres when shipped.
**Height**
The height of the carton in centimetres when shipped.
**Depth**
The depth of the carton in centimetres when shipped.
**Weight (kg)**
The weight of the carton in kilograms when shipped.
For our example product, "Sungold Full Cream Milk 2L", each bottle weighs 2 kg and comes in a crate of 9, so the total weight would be entered as "18". This is used for third-party applications such as Shippit to provide live quoting on products.
**Type**
The type of product this is.
Types are:
* Standard
* Bundled
* Recipe
* Shipping Carton
* Gift Note/Card
* Production
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 For more details on **Product Types**, refer to the [Product Types Overview](/supplyd-erp/products/product-types/product-types-overview) document.
{% endhint %}
**Sell Product**
Whether or not you sell this product. Type **Yes** or **No**.
**Price**
The default sell price for this product, including tax.
**Sale Price**
If this product is on sale, enter the sale price here. Leave blank for no sale price.
**Tax Type**
If tax, such as GST, is applicable to this product when selling, type the tax type, eg. "GST".
Leave blank if tax does not apply.
**Unit Rrp**
The recommended retail price (RRP), including taxes, for a stockist to sell one unit of this product.
**Avg Unit Cost**
The average cost for one unit of the product.
**Pack In Carton**
Whether or not this item should be packed in a shipping carton when shipped.
Type **Yes** or **No:**
* **Yes**: The item would be packed in an aggregated shipping carton during packing.
* **No:** The item would ship as is with no additional cartons.
**Version Of**
This field links a new product to an existing one when you're creating an updated version (like a recipe or packaging change). It helps you track changes while keeping the product history clear.
**Is Discontinued**
Whether this item is discontinued. Type "**Yes**" if the product is discontinued.
**Notes**
Add any desired notes about this product - for internal reference only.
**Departments**
The department(s) this product belongs to.
{% hint style="info" %}
This field will only appear if you’ve set up optional Departments within your [Locations](/supplyd-erp/settings/locations).
{% endhint %}
**Custom - Ambient Shelf Life**
This is an example of a custom field. The shelf life of this product.
**Custom - Ticket Name**
Another example of a custom field. The name that will appear on the shelf ticket for this item.
{% hint style="success" %}
Custom fields are additional fields you can create for yourself, and they may differ from those in our example above.
👉 See the [Product Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/product-settings#custom-fields) section of the [Product Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/product-settings) document for details on how to add these.
{% endhint %}
{% endtab %}
{% tab title=" Purchasing Info" %}
#### Purchasing Info
If you purchase this product, these fields provide detailed information about the supplier, including their name, contact details, preferred status, and any other relevant purchasing information.
**Supplier Name**
The name of the supplier for this product.
**Sku**
The SKU of the product.
This should be a unique identifier for the product. The same SKU cannot be used on multiple products. The SKU is used to match products when updating so it is strongly recommended not to leave blank.
**Supplier Sku**
The SKU or unique identifier for this product to be used when sending orders to the supplier. Leave blank to use the SKU for the overall product.
**Barcode**
The barcode of the product.
**Supplier Barcode**
The suppler's barcode for this product used for receiving stock with this barcode. Leave blank to use the overall product barcode.
**Brand**
The brand or the manufacturer of the product.
**Supplier Brand**
The brand of the product being bought. Leave blank if the same brand as the product.
This is useful when you have the same product available from different brands or suppliers.
**Name**
The product name.
**Image**
Allows you to upload a product image to Supply'd.
We recommend a square image at least 640 x 640px with a transparent background such as a PNG file. JPG uploads are also supported if transparent images aren't available.
**Category**
The category on your supplier profile that you would like this product to sit under.
**Is Discontinued**
Whether this item is discontinued. Type "**Yes**" if the product is discontinued.
**Size**
The unit size of the product to be used in conjunction with the **Size Measure** field.
**Size Measure**
The unit size measurement, eg. g, oz, l etc., of the product to be used in conjunction with the **Size Unit** field.
**Supplier Size**
The weight/size of a single unit. Leave blank to ignore if the same size as the product.
**Supplier Size Measure**
The unit size measurement, eg. g, l, kg etc., of the product to be used in conjunction with the **Supplier Size** field.
{% hint style="info" %}
**Supplier Size & Supplier Size Measure**
These fields control how items are tracked in Inventory and should be decided based on how you want to manage stock.
For example, with a 15 kg bag of sugar:
* If you track it as a single 15 kg bag, set **Size = 15 kg** and leave **Supplier Size** blank.
* If you track it in 1 kg units, set **Size = 1 kg** and enter **Supplier Size = 15 kg**.
Keeping this consistent helps if you switch suppliers or use multiple suppliers with different package sizes, making inventory management and reporting simpler.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="success" %}
If you do not need a **Supplier Size** (and **Supplier Size** **Measure**), and you want to keep stock as simple units, leave these fields blank. The system will recognise this and track inventory in units rather than by weight or another measurement type.
This is useful when the measurement is not important, or when the item is too small for weight to be practical.
For example:
* **Cello bags** - Each bag weighs almost 0g, so tracking them by weight adds little value. It is much easier to count them as individual units for selling and production.
* **Sugar decorations for cupcakes or cookies** - These are also very light, and during production you usually count how many decorations are needed rather than weigh them. For example, you may place a specific number on each cupcake or cookie.
{% endhint %}
**Buy Carton Qty**
The number of units in a carton. Applicable to products purchased by the carton.
**Buy Price**
Enter the wholesale price for a unit or carton, excluding taxes (such as GST), depending on your choice in the **Purchase By** field.
**Buy Tax Type**
Whether tax (such as GST) applies to this product when purchasing. If it does, enter the type of tax, eg. **GST**.
**Buy Currency**
The currency used to buy this product.
**In Preferred**
Enter **Yes** if this supplier is the preferred source for purchasing this product."
If **Yes**, the system will add this supplier to your favourites, suggest them first when purchasing the product, and use their costs for product cost calculations
**Minimum Qty**
The minimum order required for this supplier.
You will be unable to order less than this quantity of an item.
Leave blank for no minimum.
**Qty Multiple**
The quantity multiple set for this supplier.
Orders can only be placed in multiples of this amount. For example if set to "5" you will only be able to order 5, 10, 15, 20 etc.
Leave blank for no order multiple.
{% endtab %}
{% tab title="Label Info" %}
#### Label Info
Adding **Labelling Details** to your product set up in Supply’d gives you a central place to store and manage everything related to your food products - from ingredients and allergens to nutritional info and shelf life. This helps ensure compliance, supports traceability, and makes it easier to keep product data accurate and up to date across your business.
**Country of Manufacture**
Select the country the product was made in.
**Percentage Australian**
The percentage of this items ingredients that are Australian. Applicable to products made in Australia.
**Ingredients**
Add any ingredients contained in this product. Leave blank if not applicable.
**Allergens - Contains**
Enter any allergens that **are present** in this product, separated by a comma (eg. "dairy, nuts"). Don't include leading statements such as "Contains". Leave blank if not applicable.
**Allergens - May Contain**
Enter any allergens that **may be present** in this product, separated by a comma. Don't include leading statements such as "May contain". Leave blank if not applicable.
**Storage Type**
The type of storage required - **Ambient**, **Refrigerated** or **Frozen**.
**Recipe Goods Cost**
The total cost of all ingredients used in the recipe to produce this product.
**Recipe Labour Cost**
The cost of labor required to prepare the recipe.
**Recipe Total Cost**
The combined total of goods cost and labor cost. This gives the overall cost to produce the recipe.
**Recipe Size**
The total quantity or volume that the recipe produces (eg. number of units).
This helps in portioning and inventory planning.
**Recipe Expected Yield**
The standard or typical output quantity expected from the recipe.
This is the target amount you plan to produce under normal conditions.
**Recipe Min Yield**
The minimum quantity the recipe is expected to produce.
This accounts for natural variations in production.
**Recipe Max Yield**
The maximum quantity the recipe could produce.
This helps set realistic production limits and expectations.
**Recipe Yield Multiple**
Enter the multiple of units produced per batch. Production runs can only be scheduled in these multiples.
For example: If set to **5**, you can only schedule batches of 5, 10, 15, 20, etc.
* Leave blank to allow any batch size.
* Can be used in combination with **Minimum** and **Maximum Yield**.
{% hint style="success" %}
**Setting Yield for Bakers:** For bakers, it’s best to set the yield so that **1 yield = 1 deck (oven)**. This makes it easier to use **Deck Reports** to plan and track daily production.
{% endhint %}
**Recipe Unit Cost**
The cost to produce a single unit of the recipe.
It is calculated by dividing the **Recipe Total Cost** (ingredients + labor) by the number of units produced (**Recipe Size**).
**Default Smart Planner Method**
Enter the default method to apply when using the [Smart Production Plan](https://help.supplyd.co/production/smart-production-plan).
* **None:** To not set a default method for this product.
* **Made to Order:** Create production runs for each of your current Sales Orders.
* **Net Requirements:** Deduct your current Sales Orders and expiry from inventory throughout the date range, ensuring that stock stays above Min Hold.
* **Suggested:** Utilise your forecast rate of sale, stock expiry, and Min Stock Hold to keep you always in stock.
**Include in Deck Reports**
Whether to include this product in production deck reports. Enter "**Yes**" or "**No**".
{% hint style="info" %}
This field will only show when **Bakers Mode** is enabled in the [Production Defaults](https://help.supplyd.co/configuring-supplyd/settings/production-settings#production-defaults) section in your [Production Settings](https://help.supplyd.co/production/creating-a-production-product#production-settings).
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="success" %}
A **Deck Report** is a planning tool used in bakeries and production environments to organise daily production across ovens (or “decks”).
* The report helps optimise the baking schedule, making it easier to plan production, reduce bottlenecks, and ensure efficient use of resources.
* You can select which products appear on the report for a specific day.
* **1 deck = 1 oven**, so the report shows how many ovens are currently being used.
{% endhint %}
**Production Priority**
The **Production Priority** field is used to indicate the importance or urgency of producing a specific product.
**Nutrition - Servings Per Package**
This is the total number of servings in one full pack of your product.
For example, if a bottle contains 500ml and each serving is 250ml, then **Servings Per Package = 2**.
**Nutrition - Serving Size**
This is the amount of product in a single serving. It should reflect the typical portion someone would consume at one time.
**Nutrition - Remaining Fields**
The remaining fields capture the nutritional values of the product, both per serving and per 100g, as indicated in the field headings.
{% endtab %}
{% tab title="Sales Channel Info" %}
#### Sales Channel Info
**Sales Channel Name**
Specifies the sales platform(s) where the product will be available, such as Shopify, Square or your Supply'd store(s).
{% hint style="info" %}
You will need to have any third party sales platforms integrated with Supply’d.\
👉 See the [Integrations](/supplyd-erp/settings/integrations) documents for instructions on how to integrate each platform.
{% endhint %}
**Sku**
The SKU of the product.
**Barcode**
The barcode of the product.
**Brand**
The brand or the manufacturer of the product.
**Name**
The product name.
**Image**
Allows you to upload a product image to Supply'd.
We recommend a square image at least 640 x 640px with a transparent background such as a PNG file. JPG uploads are also supported if transparent images aren't available.
**Size**
The unit size of the product to be used in conjunction with the **Size Measure** field.
**Size Measure**
The unit size measurement, eg. g, oz, l etc., of the product to be used in conjunction with the **Size Unit** field.
**Category**
The category on your supplier profile that you would like this product to sit under.
**Is Discontinued**
Whether this item is discontinued. Type "**Yes**" if the product is discontinued.
**Sell Active**
Indicates whether the product is currently active for sale on this channel.
Type **Yes** if it is active.
**Is Sellable**
Indicates whether the product is allowed to be sold.
This helps differentiate between sellable products and non-sellable items (such as components or internal materials).
Type **Yes** if the product is sellable.
**Sell Price**
The default sell price for this product, including tax.
**Sell Sale Price**
If this product is on sale, enter the sale price here. Leave blank for no sale price.
**Sell Tax Type**
If tax, such as GST, is applicable to this product when selling, type the tax type, eg. "GST".
Leave blank if tax does not apply.
**Sell Currency**
The currency used to sell this product.
**Sell Pack in Carton**
Whether or not this item should be packed in a shipping carton when selling through this channel.
Type **Yes** this item is packed in a carton.
**Sell Carton Qty**
The number of units in a carton. Applicable to products sold by the carton.
**Minimum Qty**
The minimum order amount of this product required for a customer to buy.
Customers will be unable to order less than this quantity of an item.
Leave blank for no minimum.
**Qty Multiple**
The quantity multiple set for a customer to buy this product.
Customer orders can only be placed in multiples of this amount. For example if set to "5" customers will only be able to order 5, 10, 15, 20 etc.
Leave blank for no order multiple.
**Default Price**
The default sell price for this product, including tax.
Channel-specific prices can be set if needed.
**Default Sale Price**
If this product is on sale, enter the default sale price here. Leave blank for no sale price.
**Default Tax Type**
If tax, such as GST, is applicable to this product when selling, type the default tax type, eg. "GST".
Leave blank if tax does not apply.
**Default Pack In Carton**
Indicates whether this item should, by default, be packed in a shipping carton when shipped.
Enter **Yes** to set the default so this item is packed in a carton.
{% endtab %}
{% endtabs %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
### Export/Save the File
Once you have completed filling out the spreadsheet, ensure that you save or export it as a CSV file as this format is required for successful import into Supply’d.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
### Upload the File
On the **Products** page, click on the 3 dots in the top right and select **Import**, then **Products**.
The **Import Products** form will open.
In the **Upload CSV File** field, click on to select the CSV file you just completed.
{% hint style="warning" %}
After selecting the file please ensure you wait for the file to successfully upload before clicking Import.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
### Select Options
Select the options to apply during the import.
**Update Existing Products**
Select whether or not to update existing products in Supply'd.
{% hint style="info" %}
This option will only appear if you already have products in Supply'd.
{% endhint %}
* **Yes:** Select "Yes" if you want existing products to be updated when the SKUs match.
* **Skip:** Select this option if you want products with matching SKUs to be ignored.
{% hint style="success" %}
Selecting "**Yes**" is useful to bulk update products in Supply'd.
👉 See the [#bulk-updating-products](#bulk-updating-products "mention") section below.
{% endhint %}
#### Advanced
Optional data you would like to be used to populate the export.
**Auto Extract Data**
Choose whether or not to enable automatic data extraction.
Auto extracting data helps speed up product imports by automatically matching columns in your CSV to the correct fields in Supply’d.
It looks for common headers like “Product Name” or “SKU” and maps them for you, saving time and reducing errors, especially with large product lists.
**Run Other Product Importers**
Select whether or not to let Supply’d detect and automatically map CSV files from other platforms (such as Shopify or Square), making it faster to import products without reformatting your file.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
### Import the File
Once the file has successfully uploaded and you have selected your options, click to begin the import.
{% hint style="info" %}
Products will be imported immediately into Supply'd. If you have a lot of products, please be patient.
{% endhint %}
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 Once imported, the products can be managed as outlined in the [Managing Products](/supplyd-erp/products/managing-products) document.
{% endhint %}
***
## Bulk Updating Products
When bulk updating existing products in Supply'd via a CSV file, following a "lean" approach is recommended to prevent data loss or operational disruption.
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Export the Template
Following the steps above, but instead of selecting **Sample Data** in Step 3, select **Supply’d** (or the data source you want to update) to export your current product list. This ensures you have the correct formatting and system IDs before making updates.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Filter Columns
Remove all unnecessary columns from the CSV, keeping only the specific fields you wish to change (eg. Price or Category).
{% hint style="warning" %}
**Preserve Product IDs:** You must keep the ID column for every product you intend to modify. This ID tells the system exactly which existing record to overwrite.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Update the Fields
Update the required fields, following the guidelines outlined above for [#bulk-import-add-products](#bulk-import-add-products "mention").
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Import with Update
When re-uploading the file, ensure you select "**Yes**" for the **Update Existing Products** field.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
{% hint style="info" %}
**Why This Method is Best Practice**
* **Avoids User Conflict:** Keeping unnecessary columns in your file can potentially disrupt other team members who may be simultaneously editing those same products in the dashboard.
* **Prevents Data Deletion:** If you leave unnecessary columns in the file but clear the data inside them (leaving them blank), the system will interpret this as an instruction to wipe those fields clean in the database.
* **System Efficiency:** Importing a smaller file with fewer columns reduces processing time and the risk of import errors.
{% endhint %}
# Adding Products in Bulk
Adding products in bulk saves time and reduces manual data entry, making it easier to quickly build and maintain your product catalogue.
Bulk importing products into Supply’d is a quick and efficient way to add multiple products to your account at once. Instead of entering each product manually, you can enter your product details into a CSV (spreadsheet) file and upload the completed file to Supply’d. This saves time, reduces manual data entry errors, and helps keep your product catalogue accurate and up to date.
Products in Supply’d use a Simple Product methodology, meaning that each size, colour, or flavour of a product is created as a separate product. For example, if you sell a product in three different sizes, each size would be entered as its own product in the spreadsheet.
There are 2 ways to import products to Supply'd:
1. Manually add products to Supply'd \
👉 For instructions on how to do this see the [Adding Products](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products) document.
2. Bulk import products to Supply'd from a CSV template.
This document will guide you through bulk adding and updating of products to Supply'd.
* [#bulk-import-add-products](#bulk-import-add-products "mention")
* [#bulk-updating-products](#bulk-updating-products "mention")
***
## Bulk Import/Add Products
Supply'd makes it easy to import large sets of product from a spreadsheet. There is a specific template you will need to follow to do so in order to allow Supply'd to import the values correctly.
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
### Open the Import Products Form
To start an import, or to get the template:
1. Select **Products** from the menu.
2. Click on the three dots on the top right corner
3. Select **Import** then **Products**.
The **Import Products** form will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
### Download the Template
Click on **Download the template** to download our base template containing some sample products for your guidance.
The **Export Products** form will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
### Export Sample Data
Select **Sample Data** from the **Data Source** menu.
{% hint style="success" %}
If you have already started adding products to Supply'd, you will be given the option to export existing products from your various sales channels. This is particularly useful if you want to bulk update your products with additional information.
👉 See the [Updating Customers in Bulk](/supplyd-erp/customers/importing-customers-in-bulk/updating-customers-in-bulk) document for details.
{% endhint %}
#### **Fields**
The **Fields** section lets you select the types of data to include in the export.
* **Product Info:** Includes basic details about the product such as its name, description, SKU, category, and tags.
This information is used to create new products.
* **Purchasing Info:** If you buy this product, these fields cover supplier-related details, cost prices, minimum order quantities, and other purchasing data.
The products and suppliers must already exist.
* **Label Info :** Contains information used for food product labelling, including place of ingredients, allergens, and nutrition details. Helps with printing labels and regulatory compliance.
This will only update existing products.
* **Sales Channel Info:** Includes data related to what sales channels the product is sold on, pricing for different channels, inventory availability, and channel-specific settings. Useful for managing multi-channel sales.
Each product can be sold through multiple sales channels.
Click .
Once the data export is complete, you can open the downloaded template in any spreadsheet application, such as Excel or Numbers.
{% hint style="warning" %}
You should remove the sample products from the file before importing to Supply'd.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="info" %}
The more selections you make in the **Fields** section, the more data fields will be included in the spreadsheet.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
### Complete the Spreadsheet
Complete the template by opening it in a spreadsheet application, such as **Excel** or **Numbers**, and entering the required information. Follow the instructions provided for each section, using the downloaded sample data as a reference when entering your information.
The following documents contain information on completing the various fields for each template:
* [Product Info](/supplyd-erp/products/bulk-importing-of-products/product-info)
* [Label Info](/supplyd-erp/products/bulk-importing-of-products/label-info)
* [Purchasing Info](/supplyd-erp/products/bulk-importing-of-products/purchasing-info)
* [Sales Channel Info](/supplyd-erp/products/bulk-importing-of-products/sales-channel-info)
Be sure to review each document for the details you want to import, as each contains specific fields and examples to help you complete the template correctly.
{% hint style="warning" %}
* Follow the column headings carefully.
* Do not change column names.
* Leave **Product ID** fields blank for new records.
* Delete any sample data before importing.
* Double-check that all required fields are filled out correctly before uploading.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="danger" %}
**Important:** The title row should remain in the document in order for the system to match the columns when imported. You should remove the sample data before importing otherwise the system will create custom customers with the sample data.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="warning" %}
A product can be purchased from multiple suppliers. If you need to create a product with multiple suppliers in the import template, enter the product on a separate row for each supplier.
Make sure all product information that is not supplier-specific, such as the SKU, barcode, product name, and other relevant columns, is entered exactly the same on each row. Only the supplier-specific information should differ between rows.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
### Export/Save the File
Once you have completed filling out the spreadsheet, ensure that you save or export it as a CSV file as this format is required for successful import into Supply’d.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
### Upload the File
On the **Products** page, click on the 3 dots in the top right and select **Import**, then **Products**.
The **Import Products** form will open.
In the **Upload CSV File** field, click on to select the CSV file you just completed.
{% hint style="warning" %}
After selecting the file please ensure you wait for the file to successfully upload before clicking Import.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
### Select Options
Select the options to apply during the import.
**Update Existing Products**
Select whether or not to update existing products in Supply'd.
{% hint style="info" %}
This option will only appear if you already have products in Supply'd.
{% endhint %}
* **Yes:** Select "Yes" if you want existing products to be updated when the SKUs match.
* **Skip:** Select this option if you want products with matching SKUs to be ignored.
{% hint style="success" %}
Selecting "**Yes**" is useful to bulk update products in Supply'd.
👉 See the [#bulk-updating-products](#bulk-updating-products "mention") section below.
{% endhint %}
#### Advanced
Optional data you would like to be used to populate the export.
**Auto Extract Data**
Choose whether or not to enable automatic data extraction.
Auto extracting data helps speed up product imports by automatically matching columns in your CSV to the correct fields in Supply’d.
It looks for common headers like “Product Name” or “SKU” and maps them for you, saving time and reducing errors, especially with large product lists.
**Run Other Product Importers**
Select whether or not to let Supply’d detect and automatically map CSV files from other platforms (such as Shopify or Square), making it faster to import products without reformatting your file.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
### Import the File
Once the file has successfully uploaded and you have selected your options, click to begin the import.
{% hint style="info" %}
Products will be imported immediately into Supply'd. If you have a lot of products, please be patient.
{% endhint %}
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 Once imported, the products can be managed as outlined in the [Managing Products](/supplyd-erp/products/managing-products) document.
{% endhint %}
# Updating Products in Bulk
Bulk updating products saves time, reduces manual data entry, and makes it easier to keep your product catalogue accurate and up to date.
**Bulk Updating Products** allows you to update information for multiple products at once using a CSV spreadsheet, rather than editing each product individually. This is a quick and efficient way to maintain your product catalogue, particularly when making changes to a large number of products.
This document explains how to prepare the CSV, select the information you want to update, and import the changes into Supply’d while minimising the risk of unintended changes.
***
### Updating Products
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Open the Import Products Form
1. Select **Products** from the menu.
2. Click on the 3 dots on the top right corner
3. Select **Import** then **Products**.
The **Import Products** form will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Download the Template
Click on **Download the template** to download our base template containing some sample products for your guidance.
The **Export Products** form will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Export Your Data
**Data Source**
Select a sales channel from the menu to export your existing products and use them as the basis for your bulk update.
**Fields**
Select the type(s) of data to include in the export.
Click .
{% hint style="info" %}
The more selections you make in the **Fields** section, the more data fields will be included in the spreadsheet.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Remove Unwanted Columns
Remove all unnecessary columns from the CSV, keeping only the specific fields you wish to change (eg. Price or Category).
{% hint style="success" %}
When bulk updating existing products in Supply'd via a CSV file, following a "lean" approach is recommended to prevent data loss or operational disruption. Keeping only the fields you want to change makes the import easier to manage, reduces processing time, and minimises the risk of unintentionally changing other product information.
For example, if you only want to update **Price** and **Category**, keep the **Product ID**, **Price**, and **Category** columns and remove the others. Fields removed from the CSV will not be changed during the import.
**Important:** Keep the **ID** column for every product you want to modify. The **Product ID** identifies the specific product that Supply’d should update.
**Why This Method is Best Practice**
* **Avoids User Conflicts:** Helps prevent changes from interfering with team members editing the same products.
* **Prevents Data Deletion:** Leaving unnecessary fields blank can cause existing data to be cleared.
* **Improves Efficiency:** A smaller CSV reduces processing time and the risk of import errors.
Keeping only the fields you need ensures the import is focused and reduces unintended changes.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="danger" %}
**Important:** The title row should remain in the document in order for the system to match the columns when imported.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Complete the Spreadsheet
Open the CSV in **Excel** or **Numbers**, enter the information you want to update, and follow the guidance in the following documents for completing the various fields in each template.
* [Product Info](/supplyd-erp/products/bulk-importing-of-products/product-info)
* [Label Info](/supplyd-erp/products/bulk-importing-of-products/label-info)
* [Purchasing Info](/supplyd-erp/products/bulk-importing-of-products/purchasing-info)
* [Sales Channel Info](/supplyd-erp/products/bulk-importing-of-products/sales-channel-info)
{% hint style="warning" %}
* Follow the column headings carefully.
* Do not change column names.
* Leave **ID** field blank for new records.
* Delete any sample data before importing.
* Double-check that all required fields are filled out correctly before uploading.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Export/Save the File
Once you have completed your changes in the spreadsheet, save or export it as a CSV file as this format is required for successful import into Supply’d.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Upload the File
On the **Products** page, click on the 3 dots in the top right and select **Import**, then **Products**.
The **Import Products** form will open.
In the **Upload CSV File** field, click on to select the CSV file you just completed.
{% hint style="warning" %}
After selecting the file please ensure you wait for the file to successfully upload before clicking Import.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Select Options
**Update Existing Products**
Select **Yes** to update existing products when their SKUs match.
#### **Advanced**
Optional data you would like to be used to populate the export.
**Auto Extract Data**
Choose whether to enable **Automatic Extract Data**, which automatically matches CSV columns to the correct Supply’d fields, saving time and reducing errors.
**Run Other Product Importers**
Choose whether to let Supply’d automatically detect and map CSV files from platforms such as **Shopify** or **Square**, without reformatting the file.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Import the File
Once the file has successfully uploaded and you have selected your options, click to begin the import.
{% hint style="info" %}
Product data will be imported immediately into Supply'd. If you have a lot of products, please be patient.
{% endhint %}
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
# Label Info
Label Information helps ensure the correct product information is available for labels, making labelling more consistent and reducing the need for manual updates.
Adding **Label Details** to your product setup in Supply’d provides a central place to store and manage information related to your food products, including ingredients, allergens, nutritional information, ingredient origins, and shelf life. When adding products in bulk, this information is entered into the Label fields in the CSV spreadsheet before it is imported into Supply’d, helping ensure the correct information is available for printing product labels, supporting compliance and traceability, and keeping product data accurate, consistent, and up to date.
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 See the [Adding Products in Bulk](/supplyd-erp/products/bulk-importing-of-products/adding-products-in-bulk) document for details on downloading the template and importing the information into Supply’d.
\
👉 See the [Product Info](/supplyd-erp/products/bulk-importing-of-products/product-info), [Purchasing Info](/supplyd-erp/products/bulk-importing-of-products/purchasing-info), and [Sales Channel Info](/supplyd-erp/products/bulk-importing-of-products/sales-channel-info) documents for details on completing the respective information in Supply’d.
\
👉 For details on adding products one at a time, refer to the [Adding a Product](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products/adding-a-product) doc.
{% endhint %}
This document explains the labelling information required in the spreadsheet and provides guidance on completing each field.
***
### Completing the Label Info
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Select the Information
Following the instructions for [Adding Products in Bulk](/supplyd-erp/products/bulk-importing-of-products/adding-products-in-bulk), document, tick **Label Info** in the **Fields** section in **Step 3**.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Complete the Sales Channel Info
Complete the template by opening it in a spreadsheet application, such as **Excel** or **Numbers**, and entering the required information. Follow the instructions provided, using the downloaded sample data as a reference when entering your information.
{% hint style="warning" %}
* Follow the column headings carefully.
* Do not change column names.
* Leave **ID** field blank for new records.
* Delete any sample data before importing.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="success" %}
When updating product info, you can remove any columns from the CSV that you do not need to update. Keeping only the fields you want to change makes the import easier to manage and reduces the risk of unintentionally changing other product information.
For example, if you only want to update **Allergen Information** and **Nutrition Details**, keep the **Product ID**, **Allergen Information**, and **Nutrition Details** columns and remove the other fields from the CSV. Any fields that are removed from the CSV will not be changed during the import.
**Important:** Keep the **ID** column for every product you want to modify. The Product ID identifies the specific existing product that Supply’d should update when the CSV is imported.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="danger" %}
**Important:** The title row should remain in the document in order for the system to match the columns when imported. You should remove the sample data before importing otherwise the system will create custom customers with the sample data.
{% endhint %}
**Country of Manufacture**
Select the country the product was made in.
**Percentage Australian**
The percentage of this items ingredients that are Australian. Applicable to products made in Australia.
**Ingredients**
Add any ingredients contained in this product. Leave blank if not applicable.
**Allergens - Contains**
Enter any allergens that **are present** in this product, separated by a comma (eg. "dairy, nuts"). Don't include leading statements such as "Contains". Leave blank if not applicable.
{% hint style="warning" %}
Use consistent naming for allergens across all ingredients. For example, if **Egg** is used for one ingredient, avoid using **Eggs** for another. Supply’d treats differently named allergens as separate entries, so inconsistent naming may result in both **Egg** and **Eggs** appearing in the generated allergen field instead of being combined into a single allergen.
{% endhint %}
**Allergens - May Contain**
Enter any allergens that **may be present** in this product, separated by a comma. Don't include leading statements such as "May contain". Leave blank if not applicable.
{% hint style="warning" %}
Use consistent naming for **May Contain** allergens across all ingredients. For example, if **Egg** is used for one ingredient, avoid using **Eggs** for another. Supply’d treats differently named allergens as separate entries, so inconsistent naming may result in both **Egg** and **Eggs** appearing in the generated **May Contain** field instead of being combined into a single allergen.
{% endhint %}
**Storage Type**
The type of storage required - **Ambient**, **Refrigerated** or **Frozen**.
**Recipe Goods Cost**
The total cost of all ingredients used in the recipe to produce this product.
**Recipe Labour Cost**
The cost of labor required to prepare the recipe.
**Recipe Total Cost**
The combined total of goods cost and labor cost. This gives the overall cost to produce the recipe.
**Recipe Size**
The total quantity or volume that the recipe produces (eg. number of units).
This helps in portioning and inventory planning.
**Recipe Expected Yield**
The standard or typical output quantity expected from the recipe.
This is the target amount you plan to produce under normal conditions.
**Recipe Min Yield**
The minimum quantity the recipe is expected to produce.
This accounts for natural variations in production.
**Recipe Max Yield**
The maximum quantity the recipe could produce.
This helps set realistic production limits and expectations.
**Recipe Yield Multiple**
Enter the multiple of units produced per batch. Production runs can only be scheduled in these multiples.
For example: If set to **5**, you can only schedule batches of 5, 10, 15, 20, etc.
* Leave blank to allow any batch size.
* Can be used in combination with **Minimum** and **Maximum Yield**.
{% hint style="success" %}
**Setting Yield for Bakers:** For bakers, it’s best to set the yield so that **1 yield = 1 deck (oven)**. This makes it easier to use **Deck Reports** to plan and track daily production.
{% endhint %}
**Recipe Unit Cost**
The cost to produce a single unit of the recipe.
It is calculated by dividing the **Recipe Total Cost** (ingredients + labor) by the number of units produced (**Recipe Size**).
**Default Smart Planner Method**
Enter the default method to apply when using the [Smart Production Plan](https://help.supplyd.co/production/smart-production-plan).
* **None:** To not set a default method for this product.
* **Made to Order:** Create production runs for each of your current Sales Orders.
* **Net Requirements:** Deduct your current Sales Orders and expiry from inventory throughout the date range, ensuring that stock stays above Min Hold.
* **Suggested:** Utilise your forecast rate of sale, stock expiry, and Min Stock Hold to keep you always in stock.
**Include in Deck Reports**
Whether to include this product in production deck reports. Enter "**Yes**" or "**No**".
{% hint style="info" %}
This field will only show when **Bakers Mode** is enabled in the [Production Defaults](https://help.supplyd.co/configuring-supplyd/settings/production-settings#production-defaults) section in your [Production Settings](https://help.supplyd.co/production/creating-a-production-product#production-settings).
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="success" %}
A **Deck Report** is a planning tool used in bakeries and production environments to organise daily production across ovens (or “decks”).
* The report helps optimise the baking schedule, making it easier to plan production, reduce bottlenecks, and ensure efficient use of resources.
* You can select which products appear on the report for a specific day.
* **1 deck = 1 oven**, so the report shows how many ovens are currently being used.
{% endhint %}
**Production Priority**
The **Production Priority** field is used to indicate the importance or urgency of producing a specific product.
**Nutrition - Servings Per Package**
This is the total number of servings in one full pack of your product.
For example, if a bottle contains 500ml and each serving is 250ml, then **Servings Per Package = 2**.
**Nutrition - Serving Size**
This is the amount of product in a single serving. It should reflect the typical portion someone would consume at one time.
**Nutrition - Remaining Fields**
The remaining fields capture the nutritional values of the product, both per serving and per 100g, as indicated in the field headings.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
# Sales Channel Info
Sales Channel Information helps ensure products are available through the correct sales channels, making it easier to manage where and how products are sold..
When adding products in bulk, **Sales Channel** information is entered into the **CSV** spreadsheet before it is imported into Supply’d. **Sales Channel** information in the CSV spreadsheet controls where products are available for sale. Completing these fields helps ensure products are correctly configured for the appropriate sales channels.
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 See the [Adding Products in Bulk](/supplyd-erp/products/bulk-importing-of-products/adding-products-in-bulk) document for details on downloading the template and importing the information into Supply’d.
\
👉 See the [Product Info](/supplyd-erp/products/bulk-importing-of-products/product-info), [Label Info](/supplyd-erp/products/bulk-importing-of-products/label-info), and [Purchasing Info](/supplyd-erp/products/bulk-importing-of-products/purchasing-info) documents for details on completing the respective information in Supply’d.
\
👉 For details on adding products one at a time, refer to the [Adding a Product](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products/adding-a-product) doc.
{% endhint %}
This document explains the sales channel information required in the spreadsheet and provides guidance on completing each field.
***
### Completing the Sales Channel Info
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Select the Information
Following the instructions for [Adding Products in Bulk](/supplyd-erp/products/bulk-importing-of-products/adding-products-in-bulk), document, tick **Sales Channel Info** in the **Fields** section in **Step 3**.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Complete the Sales Channel Info
Complete the template by opening it in a spreadsheet application, such as **Excel** or **Numbers**, and entering the required information. Follow the instructions provided, using the downloaded sample data as a reference when entering your information.
{% hint style="warning" %}
* Follow the column headings carefully.
* Do not change column names.
* Leave **ID** field blank for new records.
* Delete any sample data before importing.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="success" %}
When updating sales channel info, you can remove any columns from the CSV that you do not need to update. Keeping only the fields you want to change makes the import easier to manage and reduces the risk of unintentionally changing other product information.
For example, if you only want to update the **Price** and **Category**, keep the **Product ID**, **Price**, and **Category** columns and remove the other fields from the CSV. Any fields that are removed from the CSV will not be changed during the import.
**Important:** Keep the **ID** column for every product you want to modify. The Product ID identifies the specific existing product that Supply’d should update when the CSV is imported.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="danger" %}
**Important:** The title row should remain in the document in order for the system to match the columns when imported. You should remove the sample data before importing otherwise the system will create custom customers with the sample data.
{% endhint %}
**Sales Channel Name**
Specifies the sales platform(s) where the product will be available, such as Shopify, Square or your Supply'd store(s).
{% hint style="info" %}
You will need to have any third party sales platforms integrated with Supply’d.\
👉 See the [Integrations](/supplyd-erp/settings/integrations) documents for instructions on how to integrate each platform.
{% endhint %}
**Sku**
The SKU of the product.
**Barcode**
The barcode of the product.
**Brand**
The brand or the manufacturer of the product.
**Name**
The product name.
**Image**
Allows you to upload a product image to Supply'd.
We recommend a square image at least 640 x 640px with a transparent background such as a PNG file. JPG uploads are also supported if transparent images aren't available.
**Size**
The unit size of the product to be used in conjunction with the **Size Measure** field.
**Size Measure**
The unit size measurement, eg. g, oz, l etc., of the product to be used in conjunction with the **Size Unit** field.
**Category**
The category on your supplier profile that you would like this product to sit under.
**Is Discontinued**
Whether this item is discontinued. Type "**Yes**" if the product is discontinued.
**Sell Active**
Indicates whether the product is currently active for sale on this channel.
Type **Yes** if it is active.
**Is Sellable**
Indicates whether the product is allowed to be sold.
This helps differentiate between sellable products and non-sellable items (such as components or internal materials).
Type **Yes** if the product is sellable.
**Sell Price**
The default sell price for this product, including tax.
**Sell Sale Price**
If this product is on sale, enter the sale price here. Leave blank for no sale price.
**Sell Tax Type**
If tax, such as GST, is applicable to this product when selling, type the tax type, eg. "GST".
Leave blank if tax does not apply.
**Sell Currency**
The currency used to sell this product.
**Sell Pack in Carton**
Whether or not this item should be packed in a shipping carton when selling through this channel.
Type **Yes** this item is packed in a carton.
**Sell Carton Qty**
The number of units in a carton. Applicable to products sold by the carton.
**Minimum Qty**
The minimum order amount of this product required for a customer to buy.
Customers will be unable to order less than this quantity of an item.
Leave blank for no minimum.
**Qty Multiple**
The quantity multiple set for a customer to buy this product.
Customer orders can only be placed in multiples of this amount. For example if set to "5" customers will only be able to order 5, 10, 15, 20 etc.
Leave blank for no order multiple.
**Default Price**
The default sell price for this product, including tax.
Channel-specific prices can be set if needed.
**Default Sale Price**
If this product is on sale, enter the default sale price here. Leave blank for no sale price.
**Default Tax Type**
If tax, such as GST, is applicable to this product when selling, type the default tax type, eg. "GST".
Leave blank if tax does not apply.
**Default Pack In Carton**
Indicates whether this item should, by default, be packed in a shipping carton when shipped.
Enter **Yes** to set the default so this item is packed in a carton.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
# Product Info
Product Information helps ensure products are created accurately and consistently, making it easier to maintain your product catalogue and reducing manual data entry.
When adding products in bulk, product information is entered into the **CSV** spreadsheet before it is imported into Supply’d. The **Product Information** fields contain the basic details about each product, including its name, description, SKU, category, and tags.
This information helps identify, classify, and organise products within Supply’d, making it easier to manage inventory, track items, search for products, and support accurate reporting. Completing the product information accurately ensures products are created consistently and correctly in your product catalogue.
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 See the [Adding Products in Bulk](/supplyd-erp/products/bulk-importing-of-products/adding-products-in-bulk) document for details on downloading the template and importing the information into Supply’d.
\
👉 See the [Product Info](/supplyd-erp/products/bulk-importing-of-products/product-info), [Label Info](/supplyd-erp/products/bulk-importing-of-products/label-info), and [Sales Channel Info](/supplyd-erp/products/bulk-importing-of-products/sales-channel-info) documents for details on completing the respective information in Supply’d.
\
👉 For details on adding products one at a time, refer to the [Adding a Product](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products/adding-a-product) doc.
{% endhint %}
This document explains the product information required in the spreadsheet and provides guidance on completing each field.
***
### Completing the Product Info
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Select the Information
Following the instructions for [Adding Products in Bulk](/supplyd-erp/products/bulk-importing-of-products/adding-products-in-bulk), document, tick **Product Info** in the **Fields** section in **Step 3**.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Complete the Product Info
Complete the template by opening it in a spreadsheet application, such as **Excel** or **Numbers**, and entering the required information. Follow the instructions provided, using the downloaded sample data as a reference when entering your information.
{% hint style="warning" %}
* Follow the column headings carefully.
* Do not change column names.
* Leave **ID** field blank for new records.
* Delete any sample data before importing.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="success" %}
When updating product info, you can remove any columns from the CSV that you do not need to update. Keeping only the fields you want to change makes the import easier to manage and reduces the risk of unintentionally changing other product information.
For example, if you only want to update the **Price** and **Category**, keep the **Product ID**, **Price**, and **Category** columns and remove the other fields from the CSV. Any fields that are removed from the CSV will not be changed during the import.
**Important:** Keep the **ID** column for every product you want to modify. The Product ID identifies the specific existing product that Supply’d should update when the CSV is imported.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="danger" %}
**Important:** The title row should remain in the document in order for the system to match the columns when imported. You should remove the sample data before importing otherwise the system will create custom customers with the sample data.
{% endhint %}
**Id**
The **ID** is the unique identifier of a product in Supply’d.
* **For existing products:** Enter the product’s ID to update it.
* **For new products:** Leave this tab blank so Supply’d can assign a new ID automatically.
This ensures Supply’d correctly matches updates to existing products while preventing conflicts for new products by letting the system generate a unique ID.
**SKU**
Enter the SKU of the product.
This should be a unique identifier for the product. The same SKU cannot be used on multiple products. The SKU is used to match products when updating so it is strongly recommended not to leave blank.
**Brand**
Enter the brand or the manufacturer of the product.
In the example of : Full Cream Milk 2lt, the brand would be "Sungold". The brand is optional if you do not sell the product.
**Name**
Add the product name.
As the brand and size can be entered in alternative field you would enter it without the extra details.
For example if you have a Sungold Full Cream Milk 2lt you would simply enter the name as "Full Cream Milk".
**Size**
Add the unit size of the product to be used in conjunction with the **Size Measure** field.
For example, with our product Sungold Full Cream Milk 2lt we would define the size as "2".
**Size Measure**
Enter the unit size measurement of the product to be used in conjunction with the **Size Unit** field.
For example with our product Sungold Full Cream Milk 2lt we would define the size measure as "Litres" or "l".
Possible values are:
* "Grams" or "g"
* "Kilograms" or "kg"
* "Millilitres" or "ml"
* "Litres" or "l"
* "Ounces" or "oz"
* "Pounds" or "lb"
Any alternative measures will be ignored.
{% hint style="info" %}
**Size & Size Measure**
These fields determine how items are tracked in Inventory and depends on how you want to manage them. For products you sell, make sure you keep the correct sizing as listed. For items used internally or in production, the requirements may differ depending on use.
For example, if you buy a 15 kg bag of sugar:
* If you want to track it as a single 15 kg bag, enter **15 kg**.
* If you want to track it in 1 kg units, enter **1 kg**.
It’s best to keep this consistent across your inventory, especially if you switch suppliers or use multiple suppliers with different package sizes, to avoid confusion and simplify reporting.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="success" %}
If you do not need a **Size** (and **Size Measure**), and you want to keep stock as simple units, leave these fields blank. The system will recognise this and track inventory in units rather than by weight or another measurement type.
This is useful when the measurement is not important, or when the item is too small for weight to be practical.
For example:
* **Cello bags** - Each bag weighs almost 0g, so tracking them by weight adds little value. It is much easier to count them as individual units for selling and production.
* **Sugar decorations for cupcakes or cookies** - These are also very light, and during production you usually count how many decorations are needed rather than weigh them. For example, you may place a specific number on each cupcake or cookie.
{% endhint %}
**Barcode**
Enter the barcode of the product.
This should be the barcode of an individual item in the carton. This allows customers to scan an item to find it quickly in Supply'd for ordering or re-ordering.
**Carton Barcode**
Add the barcode on the carton of this product (if different to the unit barcode).
**Description**
Enter a detailed description of the product.
This is useful to give customers extra information to assist them with making their purchasing decisions. For example, you may include any allergen information and/or ingredients as well as descriptive details of the product.
**Category**
Add the category on your supplier profile that you would like this product to sit under.
Supply'd is flexible with categories to allow you to define your own so you can group your products in any way you choose.
For example, with our product **Sungold Full Cream Milk 2lt**, if you are a milk distributor you may opt to have a **Full Cream Milk**"category, or if you sell lots of other products not just milk you may opt to have the category as simply **Milk**.
**Tags**
Enter any tags that suit the product, separated by a comma.
Supply’d provides a set of predefined tags used to classify and match specific product attributes, such as whether a product is vegan, vegetarian, nut-free, or gluten-free. These tags help customers filter and search for products more effectively. For example, customers can use tags to find all vegan products that match a specific search query.
Available options are:
* Biodegradeable
* Compostable
* Gluten Free
* Vegan
* Vegetarian
* Dairy Free
* Nut Free
* Egg Free
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 You can also add custom tags in the [Product Editing](https://help.supplyd.co/configuring-supplyd/settings/product-settings#product-editing) section in your [Product Settings](https://help.supplyd.co/configuring-supplyd/settings/product-settings).
{% endhint %}
**Width**
Enter the width of the carton in centimetres when shipped.
**Height**
Add the height of the carton in centimetres when shipped.
**Depth**
Enter the depth of the carton in centimetres when shipped.
**Weight (kg)**
Enter the weight of the carton in kilograms when shipped.
For example, if a product weighs 500 g on its own, but weighs 1 kg once the required shipping packaging is included, the weight entered should be **1**.
{% hint style="success" %}
For our example product, **Sungold Full Cream Milk 2L**, each bottle weighs 2 kg and is shipped in a crate of 9. The crate weighs 1kg. The total shipping weight is therefore **19 kg**, so **19** would be entered as the product weight.
{% endhint %}
This weight is used by third-party applications such as **Shippit** to provide accurate live shipping quotes. It should account for the product plus any packaging or shipping materials included in the shipment.
**Type**
Enter the type of product this is.
Options are:
* Breakdown
* Bundled
* Carton Container
* Gift Note/Card
* Production
* Recipe
* Shipping Carton
* Standard
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 For more details on **Product Types**, refer to the [Product Types Overview](/supplyd-erp/products/product-types/product-types-overview) document.
{% endhint %}
**Sell Product**
Whether or not you sell this product. Enter **Yes** or **No**.
**Price**
Enter the default sell price for this product, including tax.
**Sale Price**
If this product is on sale, enter the sale price here. Leave blank for no sale price.
**Tax Type**
If tax, such as GST, is applicable to this product when selling, enter the tax type, eg. "GST".
Leave blank if tax does not apply.
**Unit Rrp**
Enter the recommended retail price (RRP), including taxes, for a stockist to sell one unit of this product.
**Avg Unit Cost**
Add the average cost for one unit of the product.
**Pack In Carton**
Whether or not this item should be packed in a shipping carton when shipped.
Enter **Yes** or **No:**
* **Yes**: The item would be packed in an aggregated shipping carton during packing.
* **No:** The item would ship as is with no additional cartons.
**Version Of**
This field links a new product to an existing one when you're creating an updated version (like a recipe or packaging change). It helps you track changes while keeping the product history clear.
**Is Discontinued**
Whether this item is discontinued. Enter **Yes** if the product is discontinued.
**Notes**
Add any desired notes about this product - for internal reference only.
**Departments**
Enter the department(s) this product belongs to.
{% hint style="info" %}
This field will only appear if you’ve set up optional Departments within your [Locations](/supplyd-erp/settings/locations).
{% endhint %}
**Custom - Ambient Shelf Life**
This is an example of a custom field. The shelf life of this product.
**Custom - Ticket Name**
Another example of a custom field. The name that will appear on the shelf ticket for this item.
{% hint style="success" %}
Custom fields are additional fields you can create for yourself, and they may differ from those in our example above.
👉 See the [Product Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/product-settings#custom-fields) section of the [Product Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/product-settings) document for details on how to add these.
{% endhint %}
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
# Purchasing Info
Purchasing Information helps ensure products are correctly configured for purchasing and supplier processes, reducing manual setup and improving accuracy.
When adding products in bulk, **Purchasing** information is entered into the **CSV** spreadsheet before it is imported into Supply’d. These fields provide information about the supplier and purchasing arrangements for the product, including the supplier’s name, contact details, preferred status, and other relevant purchasing information. Completing these fields helps ensure products are correctly set up for purchasing and supplier-related processes.
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 See the [Adding Products in Bulk](/supplyd-erp/products/bulk-importing-of-products/adding-products-in-bulk) document for details on downloading the template and importing the information into Supply’d.
\
👉 See the [Product Info](/supplyd-erp/products/bulk-importing-of-products/product-info), [Label Info](/supplyd-erp/products/bulk-importing-of-products/label-info), and [Sales Channel Info](/supplyd-erp/products/bulk-importing-of-products/sales-channel-info) documents for details on completing the respective information in Supply’d.
\
👉 For details on adding products one at a time, refer to the [Adding a Product](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products/adding-a-product) doc.
{% endhint %}
This document explains the Purchasing fields and provides guidance on completing them in the spreadsheet.
***
### Completing the Purchasing Info
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Select the Information
Following the instructions for [Adding Products in Bulk](/supplyd-erp/products/bulk-importing-of-products/adding-products-in-bulk), document, tick **Purchasing Info** in the **Fields** section in **Step 3**.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Complete the Purchasing Info
Complete the template by opening it in a spreadsheet application, such as **Excel** or **Numbers**, and entering the required information. Follow the instructions provided, using the downloaded sample data as a reference when entering your information.
{% hint style="warning" %}
* Follow the column headings carefully.
* Do not change column names.
* Leave **ID** field blank for new records.
* Delete any sample data before importing.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="success" %}
When updating purchasing info, you can remove any columns from the CSV that you do not need to update. Keeping only the fields you want to change makes the import easier to manage and reduces the risk of unintentionally changing other product information.
For example, if you only want to update the **Price** and **Category**, keep the **Product ID**, **Price**, and **Category** columns and remove the other fields from the CSV. Any fields that are removed from the CSV will not be changed during the import.
**Important:** Keep the **ID** column for every product you want to modify. The Product ID identifies the specific existing product that Supply’d should update when the CSV is imported.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="danger" %}
**Important:** The title row should remain in the document in order for the system to match the columns when imported. You should remove the sample data before importing otherwise the system will create custom customers with the sample data.
{% endhint %}
**Supplier Name**
The name of the supplier for this product.
{% hint style="warning" %}
A product can be purchased from multiple suppliers. If you need to create a product with multiple suppliers, enter the product on a separate row for each supplier.
Make sure all product information that is not supplier-specific, such as the SKU, barcode, product name, and other relevant columns, is entered exactly the same on each row. Only the supplier-specific information should differ between rows.
{% endhint %}
**Sku**
The SKU of the product.
This should be a unique identifier for the product. The same SKU cannot be used on multiple products. The SKU is used to match products when updating so it is strongly recommended not to leave blank.
**Supplier Sku**
The SKU or unique identifier for this product to be used when sending orders to the supplier. Leave blank to use the SKU for the overall product.
**Barcode**
The barcode of the product.
**Supplier Barcode**
The suppler's barcode for this product used for receiving stock with this barcode. Leave blank to use the overall product barcode.
**Brand**
The brand or the manufacturer of the product.
**Supplier Brand**
The brand of the product being bought. Leave blank if the same brand as the product.
This is useful when you have the same product available from different brands or suppliers.
**Name**
The product name.
**Image**
Allows you to upload a product image to Supply'd.
We recommend a square image at least 640 x 640px with a transparent background such as a PNG file. JPG uploads are also supported if transparent images aren't available.
**Category**
The category on your supplier profile that you would like this product to sit under.
**Is Discontinued**
Whether this item is discontinued. Type "**Yes**" if the product is discontinued.
**Size**
The unit size of the product to be used in conjunction with the **Size Measure** field.
**Size Measure**
The unit size measurement, eg. g, oz, l etc., of the product to be used in conjunction with the **Size Unit** field.
**Supplier Size Measure**
The unit size measurement, eg. g, l, kg etc., of the product to be used in conjunction with the **Supplier Size** field.
{% hint style="info" %}
**Supplier Size & Supplier Size Measure**
These fields control how items are tracked in Inventory and should be decided based on how you want to manage stock.
For example, with a 15 kg bag of sugar:
* If you track it as a single 15 kg bag, set **Size = 15 kg** and leave **Supplier Size** blank.
* If you track it in 1 kg units, set **Size = 1 kg** and enter **Supplier Size = 15 kg**.
Keeping this consistent helps if you switch suppliers or use multiple suppliers with different package sizes, making inventory management and reporting simpler.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="success" %}
If you do not need a **Supplier Size** (and **Supplier Size** **Measure**), and you want to keep stock as simple units, leave these fields blank. The system will recognise this and track inventory in units rather than by weight or another measurement type.
This is useful when the measurement is not important, or when the item is too small for weight to be practical.
For example:
* **Cello bags** - Each bag weighs almost 0g, so tracking them by weight adds little value. It is much easier to count them as individual units for selling and production.
* **Sugar decorations for cupcakes or cookies** - These are also very light, and during production you usually count how many decorations are needed rather than weigh them. For example, you may place a specific number on each cupcake or cookie.
{% endhint %}
**Buy Carton Qty**
The number of units in a carton. Applicable to products purchased by the carton.
**Buy Price**
Enter the wholesale price for a unit or carton, excluding taxes (such as GST), depending on your choice in the **Purchase By** field.
**Buy Tax Type**
Whether tax (such as GST) applies to this product when purchasing. If it does, enter the type of tax, eg. **GST**.
**Supplier Size**
The weight/size of a single unit. Leave blank to ignore if the same size as the product.
**Buy Currency**
The currency used to buy this product.
**In Preferred**
Enter **Yes** if this supplier is the preferred source for purchasing this product."
If **Yes**, the system will add this supplier to your favourites, suggest them first when purchasing the product, and use their costs for product cost calculations
**Minimum Qty**
The minimum order required for this supplier.
You will be unable to order less than this quantity of an item.
Leave blank for no minimum.
**Qty Multiple**
The quantity multiple set for this supplier.
Orders can only be placed in multiples of this amount. For example if set to "5" you will only be able to order 5, 10, 15, 20 etc.
Leave blank for no order multiple.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
# Managing Products
Managing products effectively is essential for keeping your inventory organised and running smoothly. Supply'd makes managing your products simple.
Managing products in **Supply’d** helps you keep your product list accurate, organised, and up to date. From the **Products** page, you can view, edit, and update product details, manage pricing, stock levels, and packaging, and control how products appear in your marketplace. Efficient product management ensures that your listings are consistent, inventory is accurate, and customers always have the correct information when ordering.
The [Adding Products](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products) document describes how to add a product to Supply'd. This document describes how to manage the products in your product list, including:
* [#the-products-page](#the-products-page "mention")
* [#product-details](#product-details "mention")
* [#additional-options](#additional-options "mention")
* [#bulk-actions](#bulk-actions "mention")
* [#editing-products](#editing-products "mention")
* [#removing-products](#removing-products "mention")
* [#filtering-or-searching-the-products-list](#filtering-or-searching-the-products-list "mention")
***
## **The Products Page**
The **Products** page in Supply’d shows a list of all the products you buy, sell, or produce. From this page, you can view product details like name, SKU, supplier, price, and stock levels. You can also add new products, edit existing ones, or manage stock and pricing. It’s the main place to keep your product information up to date and organised.
{% hint style="success" %}
You will see colour-coded product types beside each product for easy identification.
**-** The most common product type. It is a single product with no advanced traits.
- A bundle of multiple products within one parent product.
**-** A product that is made up of a number ingredients produced at the time of sale, eg. a burger at a restaurant.
- A shipping carton that can be used at the packing stage.
**-** A gift note/card that can be configured to be automatically generated and printed.
- A product that can be manufactured using the production module. When "Production" is selected, additional sections will appear.
**-** A product that can be broken down within the production module to make other products.
{% endhint %}
Clicking on a product will show that product's page with all the information on that product.
👉 See [#product-details](#product-details "mention") below.
**Pricing Tab**
Under the **Pricing** tab, the **Pricing Schedule** displays all of your products with upcoming price changes.
👉 See the [Product Price Changes](/supplyd-erp/products/product-price-changes) document for more information.
**Offers Tab**
The **Offers** tab lists any product offers you've received from suppliers.
👉 See the [Accepting Offers from Suppliers](/supplyd-erp/products/offers/accepting-offers-from-suppliers) document for details.
{% hint style="success" %}
In the **Offers** tab, retailers can review offers. From there, they can range the product (which creates their own ranged version of the product), request samples, or reject the offer. All updates are reflected on the product page. Once a retailer ranges a product, they can begin purchasing it through Supply’d.
{% endhint %}
***
### Additional Options
Clicking on the 3 dots in the top right of the **Products** page will open a menu with additional options.
#### Import
Allows you to upload product information into Supply’d Hub using a CSV file. This is useful for adding new products or updating multiple products at once instead of editing them individually.
* **Products**: Import all your product information, including product details, descriptions, and other product settings.
* **Sales Channels**: Import product sales channel assignments to control which products are available in specific stores, channels, or marketplaces.
* **Pricing**: Import product pricing information, making it easy to create or update prices across multiple products and customers.
* **Production Stages**: Import production workflow stages used to track products through different steps of the manufacturing or preparation process.
* **Production Items**: Import the items, ingredients, or components used in production, helping maintain accurate production and inventory records.
#### Export
Lets you download your product data into a spreadsheet file. This is helpful for reviewing your product list, making offline changes, or keeping a backup of your product information.
* **Products**: Export your product list, including product details and settings, for reporting, review, or bulk updates.
* **Pricing**: Export product pricing information, including customer-specific pricing, for analysis, updates, or record-keeping.
* **Production Stages**: Export your production workflow stages to review or manage the steps used in your production processes.
* **Production Items**: Export production items, ingredients, or components used in production for reporting, planning, or inventory management.
#### Arrange Categories
This option lets you rearrange your product categories. Simply click and drag the 3 lines next to a category to move it into your preferred position.
***
## Product Details
Clicking on a product will open its page, displaying all the details about that product.
On the left you have :
**Product Photo**
A photo of the product.
**Locations**
A drop down box where you can select the location you would like to see the product information for.
Choose from 1 location or choose **All Locations**.
**Your Stock (Available)**
The number of that product that you have.
**On Order (Units)**
The number of units of that product that you currently have on order, including any stock being transferred from other locations.
**Predicted Sales (14 Days)**
Predicted sales for the product based on past sales figures.
**Suggested Order (Units)**
The suggested number of units of the products to order to fulfil the predicted sales.
**Actual Sales (14 Days)**
The number of the product you have sold in the last 14 days.
**Rate of Sale (Actual)**
How many on average you sell per day at the current time.
**Rate of Sale (Predicted)**
How many on average the system forecasts you will actually sell per day.
**Yellow Rectangle**
How much and when you last ordered the product.
On the right:
**Product Name**
The product brand, name and size.
**Purchasing** (If you purchase this product)
Name of the supplier(s) you purchase this product from as well as the names and stock levels of your other locations that you can it transfer.
Expanding the details on a supplier by hovering over it, will show additional information:
* SKU
* Unit Cost
* Unit Sell Price
* Unit Margin
{% hint style="success" %}
Clicking the **- 0 +** allows you easily add this product to your order list.
{% endhint %}
**Pricing** (If product is sold)
The pricing for this item on the various selling platforms you may use, such as Supply'd, Shopify etc., as well as the margins for the pricing on these platforms.
**Ranging**
If you have selected "**Yes**" in the **Place Product Offers To Customers** field in the [Company Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/company-settings#company-setting) section of your [Company Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/company-settings), you will see a **Ranging** section which displays all customers the product has been offered to, along with the prices set for each customer and the status of each offer. It will also list all customers who purchased, or had an order placed on their behalf for, that product with status.
Clicking on a customer will open the details of that offer. The button allows you to offer the product to customers.
👉 See the [Placing Offers to Customers](/supplyd-erp/products/offers/placing-offers-to-customers) document for more details.
{% hint style="success" %}
Offer statuses are colour-coded for easy identification:
* - The offer has been sent and is waiting for the customer to review and respond.
* - The customer has requested additional information or feedback before deciding whether to range the product.
* - The customer has requested product samples for evaluation.
* - The customer has accepted the product and added it to their product range, making it available for ordering.
* - The customer has decided not to range the product at this time.
* - The offer has been withdrawn and is no longer active or available for the customer to respond to.
{% endhint %}
**Details**
Details for the product that were entered when adding the product, such as, Category, Tags, SKU, Barcode, etc.
{% hint style="success" %}
Clicking the arrow (^) to the right of the "Details" will show/hide these details.
{% endhint %}
**Production Items**
If this is a production item, any items allocated to this production.
**Labelling**
If you have added the ingredients, nutrition etc. to a product, this section will show the ingredients, allergens and nutritional information associated to this product.
\
\
This section may say **Bundled**, if this is a bundled item, and will list the contents of the bundle. If this is a bundled item and you have entered the ingredients, then there will be both a **Bundled** section and an **Ingredients and Nutrition** section. The same applies to **Recipe** and **Production** items.
👉 For more details on product types, please refer to the [Product Types Overview](/supplyd-erp/products/product-types/product-types-overview) types document.
\
If you have set any custom fields in your **Product Settings,** you will also have a **Custom Fields** section.
***
## Additional Options
Clicking on the 3 dots in the top right corner, brings up a menu with the following options.
{% hint style="warning" %}
This may vary slightly, or have less options, depending on your account type and other variables.
{% endhint %}
***
### Edit Product
Opens the **Edit Product** form.
To edit the product, update any fields as needed, following the guidelines in the [Adding Products](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products) document.
***
### Duplicate Product
This will create a duplicate of the product in order to create a new product. This is very useful and time-saving if you want to create a similar product, using some of the same information, such as, the same product but in a different size or flavour.
Simply click on **Duplicate Product** to open a copy of the product and change any fields required for the new product, such as, names, barcodes (must be unique), descriptions, pricing etc.
👉 See the [Adding Products](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products#creating-products-using-the-duplicate-products-function) section of the [Adding Products](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products) document for more details on using this function.
***
### Manage Stock
This is where you can record stock numbers, locations, use by dates, batches etc.
👉 This is fully described in the [Managing Inventory](/supplyd-erp/inventory/managing-inventory) document.
***
### Download
***
### Download > Label
Opens the **Print Label** page, where you can generate labels for the product.
**Template\* \[required field]**
Select the template to use for generating the label, either a **Custom Label** (if you have created any label templates) or a **System Label**.
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 See the [Templates](/supplyd-erp/settings/templates) document for details on creating custom label templates.
{% endhint %}
**Batch**
Select the batch code to print on the labels. Leave at "None" to not include the code.
**Copies\* \[required field]**
Enter the number of copies to print.
#### **Customisation:**
Complete this section if you would to include extra details on the label. If left blank, only the product name and barcode will be printed. For price labels, the product name, price, and barcode will be included by default.
**Font\* \[required field]**
Select the desired font from the drop-down menu.
**Barcode**
Select the barcode type to use in the label. Leave at "None" to not print a barcode on the label.
**Logo**
Select the label logo to use on the label. Leave at "None" to not include a logo on the label.
{% hint style="warning" %}
Only applies to templates which utilise the logo\_image.
{% endhint %}
**Custom Text**
Add any custom text you would like to include on the label. Maximum of 20 characters.
{% hint style="warning" %}
Only applies to templates which utilise custom text.
{% endhint %}
Click to generate your label for printing.
***
### Download > Spec Sheet
This option allows you to download the product’s **Spec Sheet**, providing detailed information about the item for reference or printing.
**Template\* \[required field]**
Select the template to use to generate the Spec Sheet.
#### **Customisation:**
**Font\* \[required field]**
Select the font to use when generating this spec sheet.
**Logo**
Select the logo to use on the spec sheet for printing.
{% hint style="warning" %}
Only applies to templates that utilise the {{logo\_image}} tag.
{% endhint %}
Click to generate the Spec Sheet.
***
### Actions
***
### Actions > Attach File
Allows you to attach a file to the product.
**File Type**
Choose the file type you want to attach to this product.
**Upload File**
To attach a file to this product, click on and select the file you wish to upload from your device.
Any files attached to the product will appear under **Attachments** on the product page.
{% hint style="info" %}
The **Attachments** section will only be visible if there are files attached to the product.
{% endhint %}
***
### Actions > Recalculate Sales
If the sales data on the left becomes inaccurate or out of sync, clicking this will refresh and recalculate it.
You will be asked to confirm.
***
### Actions > Discontinue Product
This option lets you mark a product as discontinued, keeping it in the system for history and reference. Once discontinued, the product will no longer be available for orders in Supply’d, helping prevent accidental reordering.
You will be asked to confirm.
***
### View
{% hint style="info" %}
The available options in the menu will vary depending on whether the product is purchased, sold, used in production, or has a pricing schedule.
{% endhint %}
***
### View > Pricing Schedule
Opens the **Pricing Schedule** page where you can view and manage all pricing information for a product in Supply’d.
* **Status:** Select whether to view **Future** or **Past** pricing**.**\
\
* **Sales Channel:** Choose whether to view pricing from **All Sales Channels** or from a specific individual channel.\
\
***
### View > Recent Sales
This displays a list of recent sales orders for this product.
**Fulfilment Status**
Allows you to choose whether to view orders by their status - **All**, **Unfulfilled** or **Fulfilled**.
**Pick Location**
Lets you choose to view orders grouped by their Pick Location.
Clicking on an order will open its details.
{% hint style="success" %}
Refer to the [Managing Sales Orders](/supplyd-erp/sales/managing-sales-orders) document for guidance on managing these orders.
{% endhint %}
***
### View > Recent Purchases
This option will display a list of recent purchase orders for the product.
**Fulfilment Status**
Allows you to choose whether to view orders by their status - **All**, **On Order** or **Received**.
**Location**
Lets you choose to view orders grouped by their Location.
Clicking on an order will open its details.
{% hint style="success" %}
For instructions on managing purchase orders, see the [Managing Purchase Orders](/supplyd-erp/purchases/managing-purchase-orders) document.
{% endhint %}
***
### View > Stock Feed
Opens the Stockfeed page for this product, where you can view stock levels, inventory updates, and related activity.
***
### View > Related Recipes
Displays a list of recipes or bundles that include this product.
{% hint style="info" %}
This option will only show if the product is used in any related recipes.
{% endhint %}
In the example above, the Pink Chocolate Unicorn is included in the 3-Pack Chocolate Unicorns bundle. Clicking on the product will open its details page.
***
### View > Stats
Selecting this will open the **Product Stats** page, providing a detailed overview of the product’s pricing, stock levels, and sales performance.
***
### View > Changelog
This option will open a log of any changes made to the product. The **Changelog** also shows how the change was made, displayed in the smaller text under to the change - for example, via Product Edit, Expense Reconciliation, Bulk Import, etc.
Hover over a change to open a table showing the details of the update.
***
### Remove Product
Will remove the product. You will be asked to confirm.
{% hint style="warning" %}
If the product is used in any recipes or bundles, a warning will appear: Removing this product will also remove it from those recipes.
{% endhint %}
***
## Bulk Actions
Clicking the button on the **Products** page allows you to make changes and perform certain actions singularly or in bulk.
Selecting one or more products from the list, then clicking the button will open a menu with the options for those products.
{% hint style="info" %}
This button stays greyed out and inactive until at least one product is selected. After selecting products, the button turns green and becomes clickable.
{% endhint %}
Or, if you have selected "**Yes**" in the **Place Product Offers To Customers** field in the [Company Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/company-settings#company-setting) section of your [Company Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/company-settings), you will also have a **Create Offer** option.
{% hint style="success" %}
Ticking the square beside the button will select all products on the list.
The button stays grey and inactive until at least one product is selected. After selecting products, it turns green and becomes clickable.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="success" %}
Use the **Filter Products** form to narrow the list by specific criteria if you want to perform actions on matching products.
{% endhint %}
***
### Bulk
***
### Bulk > Edit
This will open the **Bulk Edit Products** form which is a very useful feature if you need to update multiple products with the same changes - such as price, supplier, category, availability etc. This allows you to apply consistent changes across a range of items all at once, saving time and reducing the chance of errors.
👉 For full details see the [Bulk Editing Products](/supplyd-erp/products/managing-products/bulk-editing-products) document.
***
### Bulk > Assign Tags
Lets you apply one or more tags to multiple products at the same time. This saves time by allowing you to categorise and organise products in bulk, rather than updating each product individually. Tags can then be used to help filter, group, and manage products more efficiently.
**Tags**
Select the department(s) you would like to add or replace existing ones with.
**Actions**
Choose how the tags are applied to the selected products.
* **Add:** The selected tags are added to the products, leaving any existing product tags still there.
* **Replace:** The product tags will be replaced with what's selected here.
Click to apply your selections.
***
### Bulk > Assign Departments
This will apply or update departments for multiple products at the same time. This helps you quickly organise your product list into the correct departments without needing to edit each product individually, making it easier to filter, manage, and structure your catalogue.
**Departments**
Select the department(s) you would like to add or replace existing ones with.
* **Add:** The selected departments are added to the products, leaving any existing product tags still there.
* **Replace:** The product departments will be replaced with what has been selected here.
Click to apply your selections.
***
### Create Offer
If you have a large number of products that you would like to offer to customers, you can use **Create Offer** to create offers for multiple products at once.
{% hint style="info" %}
This option will only appear if you have selected "**Yes**" in the **Place Product Offers To Customers** field in the [Company Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/company-settings#company-setting) section of your [Company Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/company-settings).
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 See the [Placing Offers to Customers](/supplyd-erp/products/offers/placing-offers-to-customers#bulk-actions) section of the [Placing Offers to Customers](/supplyd-erp/products/offers/placing-offers-to-customers) document fot more details.
{% endhint %}
***
### Export Products
This allows you to export the details of the selected products to a spreadsheet on your computer.
Select the fields you would like to include and click .
***
### Download
***
### Download > Product Label
Opens the **Print Label** page, where you can print labels for the selected products.
{% hint style="success" %}
To remove an item from the list, simply click the "x" to the right of the product.
{% endhint %}
**Template**
Select the label template you want to use, either a custom label or a system label.
**Customisation**
Allows you to select the font, choose whether to include the product’s barcode, add your logo, and include any custom text on the label.
Click to generate the labels.
***
### Download > Print Shelf Tickets
Opens the **Print Product Tickets** form, allowing you to print shelf tickets for the selected items.
Click to generate the labels.
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 See the [Templating](/supplyd-erp/settings/templating) document for information on creating templates for labels.
{% endhint %}
***
### Remove Products
Will remove the selected product(s). You will be asked to confirm.
Click .
{% hint style="danger" %}
If any of these products are used in any recipes or bundles, a warning will appear: Removing these product will also remove it from those recipes.
{% endhint %}
***
## Editing Products
If you would like to edit a product's details:
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Select **Products** from the main menu.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Choose the product you would like to edit. The product's page will open.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click on the three dots on the top right corner and select **Edit Product**.
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 This menu is discussed in more detail in the [Managing Products](/supplyd-erp/products/managing-products) document.
{% endhint %}
The **Edit Product** form will open. This form has the same fields as the **Add Product** form.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Update any fields as needed, following the steps above for [#manually-adding-products](#manually-adding-products "mention").
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click to apply the changes.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
## Removing Products
If you would like to remove a product:
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Select **Products** from the main menu.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Choose the product you want to remove.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click on the three dots on the top right corner and select **Remove Product**.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
You will be asked to confirm.
Click .
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
## Filtering or Searching the Products List
On the **Products** page, the 3 lines next to the 3 dots in the top right let you filter the product list, while the magnifying glass allows you to search for specific items.
Clicking on the magnifying glass, you can search the products list by product name or word.
Clicking the 3 lines opens the **Filter Products** form, giving you access to all available filtering options.
**Brand**
Select the brand or brands that you would like to filter the list by.
**Category**
Choose the category or categories that you would like to filter the list by.
**Tags**
Select the tag or tags that you would like to filter the list by from the drop-down menu, eg. gluten-free, vegan etc.
**Name**
Enter a name to search for in your product list.
**SKU**
Enter a SKU to search for in your product list.
**Barcode**
Enter a barcode to search for in your product list.
**Buy/Sell Status**
Filter your products by **Buy** for products you buy, or **Sell** for products you sell.
**Sale Status**
Filter products based on whether they have a sale price active.
**Product Type**
Filter your products by their type, such as, **Standard**, **Recipe**, **Gift Card** etc.
**Sales Channel**
Select the sales channel that you would like to filter the list by, eg. your Supply'd Store, Square, Shopify etc.
**Product Status**
Select the **Status** that you would like to filter the list by.
Click to apply your selections and filter the **Products** list.
# Managing a Product
Keeping product information accurate & up to date helps improve efficiency, reduce errors, & ensure products are correctly managed across stock, pricing, sales, & connected channels.
Managing a product in **Supply’d** allows you to keep its information accurate, organised, and up to date. From the product's page, you can view and edit product details, manage stock, pricing, labels, attachments, and other product settings.
Keeping product information current helps ensure accurate inventory, consistent product details, and reliable information across purchasing, sales, and connected sales channels.
This document explains how to manage a product, including:
* [#the-products-page](#the-products-page "mention")
* [#product-management-options](#product-management-options "mention")
* [#editing-a-product](#editing-a-product "mention")
* [#removing-a-product](#removing-a-product "mention")
***
## The Products Page
The **Products** page provides a central place to view, search, filter, and manage all products in **Supply’d**. From this page, you can quickly find products, view their details, and access actions for managing your product list.
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 The [The Products Page](/supplyd-erp/products/the-products-page) document describes the page and the additional options available for the **Products** list.
👉 The [Adding Products](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products) document explains how to add a product to Supply’d, while [Adding Products in Bulk](/supplyd-erp/products/bulk-importing-of-products/adding-products-in-bulk) provides guidelines for adding multiple products at once.
{% endhint %}
Clicking a product opens that product's page, where you can view all the product’s details. From this page, you can access a range of options to view, update, and manage the product.
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 The [Product Details Page](/supplyd-erp/products/product-details-page) document explains the information displayed on a product's page.
{% endhint %}
***
## Product Management Options
To access the available product management options, click the 3 dots in the top right.
The following sections outline each of the available product management options in more detail, explaining what each option does and how it can be used to manage your products in Supply’d.
* [#edit-product](#edit-product "mention")
* [#duplicate-product](#duplicate-product "mention")
* [#manage-stock](#manage-stock "mention")
* [#download](#download "mention")
* [#label](#label "mention")
* [#spec-sheet](#spec-sheet "mention")
* [#actions](#actions "mention")
* [#attach-file](#attach-file "mention")
* [#recalculate-sales](#recalculate-sales "mention")
* [#discontinue-product](#discontinue-product "mention")
* [#view](#view "mention")
* [#pricing-schedule](#pricing-schedule "mention")
* [#recent-sales](#recent-sales "mention")
* [#recent-purchases](#recent-purchases "mention")
* [#stock-feed](#stock-feed "mention")
* [#related-recipes](#related-recipes "mention")
* [#stats](#stats "mention")
* [#discontinue-product](#discontinue-product "mention")
* [#remove-product](#remove-product "mention")
***
### Edit Product
Selecting **Edit Product** opens the **Edit Product** form, where you can view and update the product’s details as needed.
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 To edit the product, update any fields as needed, following the guidelines in the [Adding Products](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products) documents.
{% endhint %}
***
### Duplicate Product
The **Duplicate Product** function lets you copy an existing product’s details, saving time when adding similar products with different sizes, flavours, or variations.
For example, to add a **Dairy-Free Blue Chocolate Unicorn**, we can duplicate the existing **Blue Chocolate Unicorn** and only update the name, SKU, barcode, description, and ingredients.
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 Refer to the [Duplicate Product Function](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products/duplicate-product-function) document for details on how to use this feature.
{% endhint %}
***
### Manage Stock
The **Manage Stock** option allows you to record and manage stock information for the product, including stock quantities, locations, use-by dates, and batch details. This provides a central place to keep track of the product’s stock and its associated information.
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 This is fully described in the [Managing Inventory](/supplyd-erp/inventory/managing-inventory) document.
{% endhint %}
***
### Download
{% hint style="info" %}
The options available under **Download** will vary depending on the product type. **Production** and **Recipe** products include an additional option to download a **Recipe Sheet**.\
{% endhint %}
***
#### Label
This option opens the **Print Label** page, where you can generate and print labels for the product.
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 See the [Printing Product Labels](/supplyd-erp/products/managing-products/printing-product-labels) document for more details.
{% endhint %}
***
#### Spec Sheet
This option allows you to download the product’s **Spec Sheet**, which provides detailed product information for reference, sharing, or printing.
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 The [Printing Product Spec Sheets](/supplyd-erp/products/managing-products/printing-product-spec-sheets) document provides more information.
{% endhint %}
***
#### Recipe Sheet
This option allows you to download the product’s **Recipe Sheet**, which provides detailed recipe information, including ingredients and preparation details, for reference, sharing, printing, or use during production.
{% hint style="info" %}
This option is only available for products with a **Product Type** of or .
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 The [Printing Recipe Sheets](/supplyd-erp/products/managing-products/printing-recipe-sheets) document provides more information.
{% endhint %}
***
### Actions
***
#### Attach File
Allows you to attach a file to the product record. This can be useful for storing supporting documents or product information alongside the product, making it easy to access relevant files when viewing or managing the product.
**File Type**
Select the type of file you want to attach to the product.
**Upload File**
To attach a file to this product, click on and select the file you wish to upload from your device.
Any files attached to the product will appear under **Attachments** on the product page, where they can be accessed when viewing or managing the product.
{% hint style="info" %}
The **Attachments** section will only be visible if there are files attached to the product.
{% endhint %}
***
#### Recalculate Sales
If the sales data on the left-hand side of the product's page becomes inaccurate or out of sync, select this option to refresh and recalculate the data.
You will be asked to confirm before the data is refreshed.
{% hint style="info" %}
You generally do not need to use **Recalculate Sales** as part of your regular workflow. This option is only required if you notice mismatches or inconsistencies in your sales data, which may occasionally occur due to system delays or temporary issues.
If you notice that the sales figures do not appear correct, select **Recalculate Sales** to refresh and recalculate the sales data.
{% endhint %}
***
#### Discontinue Product
This option lets you mark a product as discontinued, keeping it in the system for history and reference. Once discontinued, the product will no longer be available for orders in Supply’d, helping prevent accidental reordering.
You will be asked to confirm.
{% hint style="success" %}
Discontinued products can be **re-ranged** by selecting **Actions > Range** from the menu or by clicking the **Re-range Product** link at the top of the product’s page.
{% endhint %}
***
### View
{% hint style="info" %}
The available options in the menu will vary depending on whether the product is purchased, sold, used in production, or has a pricing schedule.
{% endhint %}
***
#### Pricing Schedule
Opens the **Pricing Schedule** page where you can view and manage all pricing information for a product in Supply’d.
**Status**
Select whether you want to view **Future** or **Past** pricing.\
\
**Sales Channel**
Select whether you want to view pricing for **All Sales Channels** or a specific sales channel.\
\
***
#### Recent Sales
This displays a list of recent sales orders for this product.
**Fulfilment Status**
Select whether you want to view orders by their fulfilment status - **All**, **Unfulfilled**, or **Fulfilled**.
**Pick Location**
Select a **Pick Location** to view orders grouped by where they are being picked.
Clicking on an order will open its details.
{% hint style="success" %}
Refer to the [Managing Sales Orders](/supplyd-erp/sales/managing-sales-orders) document for guidance on managing these orders.
{% endhint %}
***
#### Recent Purchases
This option will display a list of recent purchase orders for the product.
**Fulfilment Status**
Select whether you want to view orders by their fulfilment status - **All**, **On Order**, or **Received**.
**Location**
Select a **Location** to view orders grouped by their location.
Clicking an order will open its details.
{% hint style="success" %}
For instructions on managing purchase orders, see the [Managing Purchase Orders](/supplyd-erp/purchases/managing-purchase-orders) document.
{% endhint %}
***
#### Stock Feed
Opens the Stockfeed page for this product, where you can view stock levels, inventory updates, and related activity.
***
#### Related Recipes
Displays a list of recipes or bundles that include this product.
{% hint style="info" %}
This option will only show if the product is used in any related recipes.
{% endhint %}
In the example above, the Pink Chocolate Unicorn is included in the 3-Pack Chocolate Unicorns bundle. Clicking on the product will open its details page.
***
#### Stats
Selecting this option opens the **Product Stats** page, providing a detailed overview of the product’s pricing, stock levels, and sales performance.
***
#### Changelog
This option opens a log of all changes made to the product. The **Changelog** also shows how each change was made, displayed in the smaller text beneath the change, such as product edit, expense reconciliation, or bulk import.
Hover over a change to open a table showing the details of the update.
***
### Remove Product
Will remove the product. You will be asked to confirm.
👉 See [#removing-a-product](#removing-a-product "mention") below for more details
Click .
***
## Editing a Product
If you would like to edit a product's details:
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Select **Products** from the main menu.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Choose the product you would like to edit. The product's page will open.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click on the 3 dots in the top right corner and select **Edit Product**.
The **Edit Product** form will open. This form has the same fields as the **Add Product** form.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Update any fields as needed, following the steps for [Adding a Product](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products/adding-a-product).
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click to apply the changes.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
## Removing a Product
If you would like to remove a product:
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Select **Products** from the main menu.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Choose the product you want to remove.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click on the 3 dots in the top right and select **Remove Product**.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
You will be asked to confirm.
{% hint style="warning" %}
If the product is currently used in any **production**, **recipes** or **bundles**, a warning will appear before you can remove it: **Removing this product will also remove it from those recipes.**
Review this warning carefully before continuing, as removing the product may affect any recipes or bundles that rely on it. Removing the product will also remove its associated product record from those recipes or bundles.
{% endhint %}
Click .
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
# Bulk Actions for Products
Using Bulk Actions saves time and reduces repetitive tasks by allowing you to efficiently manage and update multiple products at once.
The **Bulk Action Options** on the **Products** page allow you to perform actions on multiple products at once, helping you manage product information more efficiently. By selecting multiple products, you can apply available actions in bulk rather than updating each product individually, saving time and reducing repetitive tasks.
This document explains how to use the **Bulk Action Options** on the **Products** page to manage and update multiple products at once.
* [#accessing-the-actions-menu](#accessing-the-actions-menu "mention")
* [#bulk](#bulk "mention")
* [#edit](#edit "mention")
* [#assign-tags](#assign-tags "mention")
* [#assign-departments](#assign-departments "mention")
* [#create-offer](#create-offer "mention")
* [#export-products](#export-products "mention")
* [#download](#download "mention")
* [#product-label](#product-label "mention")
* [#print-shelf-tickets](#print-shelf-tickets "mention")
* [#remove-products](#remove-products "mention")
***
## Accessing the Actions Menu
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Go to the Products Page
Select **Products** from the main menu. The **Products** page will open, showing a list of all your products.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Select the Products
Select the checkbox next to each product you want to perform a bulk action on.
{% hint style="success" %}
Use the **Filter Products** form (click on in the top right corner) to narrow the list by specific criteria if you want to perform actions on matching products.
For example, all our Chocolate Unicorns require updates, so if we type "Unicorn" in the **Name** field of the **Filter Products** form, only the unicorns will show on the product list.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="info" %}
The button stays greyed out and inactive until at least one product is selected. After selecting products, the button turns blue and becomes clickable.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="success" %}
Ticking the square beside the button will select all products on the list. \
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click Actions
Click on the button to open the available actions menu.
The available **Bulk Actions** options are explained below.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
## Bulk
***
### Edit
Select **Edit** to open the **Bulk Edit Products** form. This allows you to apply the same changes to multiple selected products at once, such as updating pricing, supplier, category, availability, and other product details.
Using **Bulk Edit** saves time, ensures information is updated consistently, and reduces the need to edit each product individually.
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 For full details see the [Bulk Editing Products](/supplyd-erp/products/managing-products/bulk-editing-products) document.
{% endhint %}
***
### Assign Tags
Select **Assign Tags** to apply one or more tags to multiple selected products at once. This allows you to quickly categorise and organise products without updating each product individually. Tags can then be used to filter, group, and manage products more efficiently.
**Tags**
Select the department(s) you would like to add or replace existing ones with.
**Actions**
Choose how the tags are applied to the selected products.
* **Add** - The selected tags are added to the products, leaving any existing product tags still there.
* **Replace** - The product tags will be replaced with what's selected here.
Click to apply your selections.
***
### Assign Departments
Select **Assign Departments** to apply or update departments for multiple selected products at once. This helps you organise products into the correct departments without editing each product individually, making your catalogue easier to filter, structure, and manage.
**Departments**
Select the department(s) you would like to add or replace existing ones with.
**Actions**
Choose how the **Departments** are applied to the selected products.
* **Add** - The selected departments are added to the products, leaving any existing product tags still there.
* **Replace** - The product departments will be replaced with what has been selected here.
Click to apply your selections.
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 For details on creating **Departments**, see the [Locations](/supplyd-erp/settings/locations#departments-tab) section of the [Locations](/supplyd-erp/settings/locations) document.
{% endhint %}
***
## Create Offer
Select **Create Offer** to create offers for multiple selected products at once. This is useful when you have a large number of products you would like to offer to customers, saving time by creating the offers in bulk rather than individually.
{% hint style="info" %}
The **Create Offer** option will only show if you have selected "**Yes**" in the **Place Product Offers To Customers** field in the [Company Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/company-settings#company-setting) section of your [Company Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/company-settings).
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 This option is explained in detail in the [Placing Offers to Customers](/supplyd-erp/products/offers/placing-offers-to-customers#bulk-actions) section of the [Placing Offers to Customers](/supplyd-erp/products/offers/placing-offers-to-customers).
{% endhint %}
***
## Export Products
Select **Export Products** to export the details of the selected products to a spreadsheet. This allows you to easily review, save, or work with product information outside of Supply’d.
Select the fields you would like to include and click .
***
## Download
***
### Product Label
Select **Product Label** to open the **Print Label** page, where you can generate and print labels for the selected products.
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 For full details, see the [Printing Product Labels in Bulk](/supplyd-erp/products/managing-products/printing-product-labels-in-bulk) document.
{% endhint %}
***
### Shelf Tickets
Select **Shelf Tickets** to open the **Print Product Tickets** form, where you can generate and print shelf tickets for the selected products.
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 See the [Printing Shelf Tickets in Bulk](/supplyd-erp/products/managing-products/printing-shelf-tickets-in-bulk) document for more details.
{% endhint %}
***
## Remove Products
Select **Remove Products** to remove the selected products from your product list. You will be asked to confirm the action before the products are removed.
Click .
{% hint style="danger" %}
If any of the selected products are used in a **Production**, **Recipe**, or **Bundled** products, a warning will appear. Removing these products will also remove them from any recipes or bundled products they are currently used in.\
{% endhint %}
# Bulk Editing Products
Bulk Editing Products in Supply’d saves time by letting you update multiple product details at once - like prices, suppliers, or categories - making product management faster and more efficient.
In Supply’d, you can edit products individually as outlined in [Adding Products](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products), but if you need to update multiple products with the same changes - such as price, supplier, category, or availability - you can use the **Bulk Edit** feature. This allows you to apply consistent changes across a range of items all at once, saving time and reducing the chance of errors.
This document will guide you through bulk editing of products.
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Go to the Products Page
Select **Products** from the main menu. The **Products** page will open, showing a list of all your products.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Select the Products
Tick the boxes next to the products you want to update.
{% hint style="success" %}
Use the **Filter Products** form (click on in the top right corner) to narrow the list by specific criteria if you want to perform actions on matching products.
For example, all our Chocolate Unicorns require updates, so if we type "Unicorn" in the **Name** field of the **Filter Products** form, only the unicorns will show on the product list.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="success" %}
Ticking the square beside the button will select all products on the list.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Choose Bulk Edit
Click on the button and select **Bulk Edit**.
{% hint style="info" %}
The button stays greyed out and inactive until at least one product is selected. After selecting products, the button turns blue and becomes clickable.
{% endhint %}
The **Bulk Edit Products** form will open.
{% hint style="success" %}
To open or close the sections on this form, click the little arrows to the right of the titles (as circled in red above).
{% endhint %}
Complete the sections as per the guidelines below:
{% hint style="warning" %}
**Only update the fields that need changes; leave any unchanged fields set to "No Change."**
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Product Details
The details about this product such as name, size, images, description etc.
**Brand**
Enter the brand of this product. If there is no brand, you can use your business name.
If the brand doesn’t need to be changed, leave the field as **No Change**.
**Name**
Enter the name of the product.
**Category**
Select the category you would like to group these products under.
**Size**
Enter the weight/size of a single unit. Leave blank to ignore.
In our example, our unicorns are changing from 20g to 25g, so we enter "25" in the **Size** field and select "Grams" as the unit.
**Tags**
Select any predefined tags that may be applicable to this product.
In this example, the recipe for our chocolate unicorns has changed, and they are now gluten-free and nut-free, so we can select those tags.
**Carton Size (cm)**
Enter the cubic dimensions of this product in cm when shipped.
**Carton Weight (kg)**
Enter the weight of this product in kg when shipped.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Food Product Details
Relevant details for food products such as ingredients, nutrition, storage type and more.
**Country of Manufacture**
Select the country the product was made in.
**Ingredients**
Enter any ingredients contained in this product.
In this example, the recipe for our chocolate unicorns has changed, so we would add the ingredients in this field.
**Allergens - Contains**
Enter any change in allergens that **are present** in this product, separated by a comma (eg. "dairy, nuts"). Don't include leading statements such as "Contains".
**Allergens - May Contain**
Enter any allergens that **may be present** in this product, separated by a comma. Don't include leading statements such as "May contain". Leave blank if not applicable.
**Storage Type**
Select the type of storage required (eg. ambient, refrigerated etc.).
**Shelf Life**
This field allows you to provide guidance on the shelf life of a product.
Enter the number then select **Days**, **Months** or **Years**, whichever is applicable.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Buy Settings
Settings for products you buy.
**Buy Product**
Select whether or not you buy this product as a supplier.
Leave on **No Change**, or select **Yes** or **No** if this has changed.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Sell Settings
The settings for products you sell.
**Price (inc tax)\* \[required]**
Enter the default sale price for a carton/unit of this product. This is used in place of each sales channel's price if they are left blank.
In our example, due to our unicorns increasing in size, our price is increasing from $1.50 to $1.75. We would enter "$1.75" in this field.
**Sale Price (inc tax)**
If this product is on sale, enter the sale price here.
**Tax**
Select whether or not tax (eg. GST) is applicable to this product when selling.
**Pack In Carton**
Select whether or not this item should be packed in a shipping carton when shipped.
* If **Yes**, the item would be packed in an aggregated shipping carton during packing.
* If **No**, the item would ship as is with no additional cartons.
**Unit RRP (inc tax)**
Enter the recommended retail price for stockist to sell a unit of this product at.
**Sell Product**
Select whether or not you sell this product from a supplier.
**Sell on Supply'd - "Supply'd Store Name"**
Select whether or not you’d like to sell this product in your Supply’d store, where “Supply’d Store Name” reflects the name you’ve chosen for your store.
If you have more than one store, a field will be shown for each one. If you don’t have any stores set up, this field will not show.
{% hint style="warning" %}
The following fields will depend on which third-party platforms you’ve integrated with your Supply’d account. Only those platforms will be shown.
{% endhint %}
**Sell on "Integration Name"**
For each listed integration, select whether or not to sync this product to the integration.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Notes
Add any notes about this product, for internal reference only. This will override any existing notes against a product.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Save
Click to finish editing the product.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
# Printing Product Labels
Printing product labels directly from the product page provides a quick and convenient way to generate labels using the product’s existing information.
You can print labels directly from a product’s page in **Supply’d**, making it quick and convenient to generate labels for individual products. The labels use the product information already stored in Supply’d, helping ensure the correct details are included and reducing the need to manually enter product information.
{% hint style="success" %}
To print labels for multiple products at once, refer to the [Products Page Bulk Actions](/supplyd-erp/products/managing-products/products-page-bulk-actions) document.
{% endhint %}
This document explains how to print labels from a product's page.
* [#printing-product-labels](#printing-product-labels "mention")
* [#examples](#examples "mention")
***
### Printing Product Labels
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Select the Product
1. Select **Products** from the main menu to view your list of products.
2. Select the product you want to print a label for.
{% hint style="success" %}
Use the search feature in the top right to quickly find the product you are looking for.\
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Select Download > Label
Click the 3 dots in the top right, then select **Download > Label**.
The **Print Label** form will open, allowing you to generate and print labels for the selected product.
{% hint style="success" %}
To open or close the **Customisation** section on this form, click the small arrow to the right of the section, as circled in red above.
{% endhint %}
Complete the fields following the guidelines below:
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Label & Print Details
**Template\* \[required field]**
Select the template to use when generating the label. Choose a **Custom** label if you have created a custom label template, or select a **System** label to use one of the standard templates provided by Supply’d.
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 See the [Templates](/supplyd-erp/settings/templates) document for details on creating custom label templates.
{% endhint %}
**Batch**
Select the batch code you want to include on the product labels. Leave the field set to **None** if you do not want to include a batch code on the labels.
{% hint style="success" %}
A **batch code** is a unique code used to identify a specific batch or production run of a product. It can help with stock traceability, allowing you to identify when or where a product was produced or received and to distinguish it from other batches of the same product.
{% endhint %}
**Action**
Select whether you want to download the labels as a PDF or print them directly from a Supply’d scanner.
**Printer**
Select the printer you want to use to print the product labels. The available printers will depend on the printers that have been connected and configured in your **Supply’d** account.
If no printer is selected, you can choose to generate the labels as a **PDF** instead, depending on the option selected in the **Actions** field.
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 The [Device Set-Up](/supplyd-erp/settings/device-set-up) document provides guidance on how to add, configure, and manage connected printers in Supply’d. It explains the steps required to set up printers and ensure they are ready to use for printing labels and other documents.
{% endhint %}
**Copies\* \[required field]**
Enter the number of copies of the label you want to print.
**Sales Channel**
Select the sales channel to use when printing the product label. The selected sales channel determines which carton quantity and pricing data are used on the label.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Customisation
Complete this section if you want to include additional information on the label. If left blank, the label will include only the **product name and barcode**.
For **price labels**, the **product name, price, and barcode** will be included by default.
**Font\* \[required field]**
Select the font you want to use for the label text.
**Barcode**
Select the barcode type you want to use on the label. Leave the field set to **None** if you do not want to print a barcode.
**Logo**
Select the logo you want to display on the label. Leave the field set to **None** if you do not want to include a logo on the label.
{% hint style="warning" %}
This setting only applies to label templates that use the **logo\_image** field.
{% endhint %}
**Custom Text**
Enter any custom text you want to include on the label. The maximum length is 20 characters.
{% hint style="warning" %}
This setting only applies to label templates that use **custom text**.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click Print
Click to generate the label for printing or downloading.
{% hint style="success" %}
Whether the label is printed directly or generated as a PDF depends on the option selected in the **Actions** field above.
{% endhint %}
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
### Examples
Supply’d provides different label types for displaying the product information you need. The label type you choose determines which information is included on the label.
Below are just a few examples of the different labels you can print in Supply’d.
**Product Label**
A general-purpose label that typically displays the product name and barcode. This is useful for identifying products and managing stock.
***
**Price Label**
A **Price Label** typically includes the product name, price, and barcode, making it useful for clearly displaying pricing information alongside product details.
***
**Food Label**
A label designed for food products and can include information such as the **p**roduct name, ingredients, allergens, nutritional information, and other relevant product details. The information displayed will depend on the selected label template and the [Labelling Details](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products/labelling-details) entered for the product.
***
**Batch Label**
A label that includes batch information to help identify and trace a specific batch of a product. This can be useful for stock management and traceability.
The QR Code can be scanned using a Supply’d handheld scanner to quickly access the **Stock Feed** information and view batch details for the product.
# Printing Product Labels in Bulk
Printing product labels in bulk saves time, reduces repetitive tasks, and helps ensure labels are prepared consistently across multiple products.
**Supply’d** allows you to print product labels for multiple products at once, making it quicker and easier to prepare labels when managing a large number of products. Select the products you need, choose your label options, and print the labels together in a single action.
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 Product labels can also be printed individually from a product’s page.See the [Printing Product Labels](/supplyd-erp/products/managing-products/printing-product-labels) document for details.
{% endhint %}
The following steps will guide you through the process:
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Go to the Products Page
Select **Products** from the main menu. The **Products** page will open, displaying a list of all your products.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Select the Products
Select the products you want to print labels or shelf tickets for by ticking the checkbox beside each product.
{% hint style="success" %}
Clicking the box beside the button will select all products on the list.\
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="success" %}
You can search or use the **Filter Products** form to narrow the list by specific criteria if you want to perform actions on matching products.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="info" %}
The button remains greyed out and inactive until at least one product is selected. Once you select one or more products, the button turns blue and becomes clickable, allowing you to access the available bulk actions.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Select Download > Product Labels
Click the button to open the menu and and select **Product Label**.
The **Print Label** form will open.
{% hint style="success" %}
To remove an item from the list, simply click the "x" to the right of the product.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="success" %}
To open or close the **Customisation** section on this form, click the small arrow to the right of the section, as circled in red above.
{% endhint %}
Complete the form by following the guidelines below:
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Label & Print Details
**Template\* \[required field]**
Select the template to use when generating the label. Choose a **Custom** label if you have created a custom label template, or select a **System** label to use one of the standard templates provided by Supply’d.
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 See the [Templates](/supplyd-erp/settings/templates) document for details on creating custom label templates.
{% endhint %}
**Action**
Select whether you want to download the labels as a PDF or print them directly from a Supply’d scanner.
**Printer**
Select the printer you want to use to print the product labels. The available printers will depend on the printers that have been connected and configured in your **Supply’d** account.
If no printer is selected, you can choose to generate the labels as a **PDF** instead, depending on the option selected in the **Actions** field.
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 The [Device Set-Up](/supplyd-erp/settings/device-set-up) document provides guidance on how to add, configure, and manage connected printers in Supply’d. It explains the steps required to set up printers and ensure they are ready to use for printing labels and other documents.
{% endhint %}
**Sales Channel**
Select the sales channel to use when printing the product label. The selected sales channel determines which carton quantity and pricing data are used on the label.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Customisation
Complete this section if you want to include additional information on the label. If left blank, the label will include only the **product name and barcode**.
For **price labels**, the **product name, price, and barcode** will be included by default.
**Font\* \[required field]**
Select the font you want to use for the label text.
**Barcode**
Select the barcode type you want to use on the label. Leave the field set to **None** if you do not want to print a barcode.
**Logo**
Select the logo you want to display on the label. Leave the field set to **None** if you do not want to include a logo on the label.
{% hint style="warning" %}
This setting only applies to label templates that use the **logo\_image** field.
{% endhint %}
**Custom Text**
Enter any custom text you want to include on the label. The maximum length is 20 characters.
{% hint style="warning" %}
This setting only applies to label templates that use **custom text**.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click Print
Click to generate the label for printing or downloading.
{% hint style="success" %}
Whether the label is printed directly or generated as a PDF depends on the option selected in the **Actions** field above.
{% endhint %}
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
# Printing Product Spec Sheets
Printing Product Spec Sheets provides a quick way to share detailed product information, ensuring customers, suppliers, & staff have accurate product details when needed.
**Supply’d** allows you to generate and print **Product Spec Sheets** directly from a product’s page. Spec Sheets provide a convenient way to present detailed product information for reference, sharing with customers or suppliers, or printing for use in your business.
{% hint style="success" %}
**What is a Spec Sheet?**
A **Spec Sheet** is a document that provides detailed information about a product in a clear, organised format. It can include key product details such as ingredients, allergens, nutritional information, packaging, pricing, and other product specifications, depending on the information recorded in Supply’d.
{% endhint %}
This document explains how to print a **Spec Sheet** from a product's page.
***
### Printing a Spec Sheet
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Select the Product
1. Select **Products** from the main menu to view your list of products.
2. Select the product you want to print a **Spec Sheet** for.
{% hint style="success" %}
Use the search feature in the top right to quickly find the product you are looking for.\
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Select Download > Spec Sheet
Click the 3 dots in the top right, then select **Download > Spec Sheet**.
The **Print Spec Sheet** form will open, allowing you to select your options for printing **Spec Sheets** for the selected product.
{% hint style="success" %}
To open or close the **Customisation** section on this form, click the small arrow to the right of the section, as circled in red above.
{% endhint %}
Complete the fields following the guidelines below:
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Template
**Template\* \[required field]**
Select the template to use when generating the **Spec Sheet**. Choose a **Custom** template if you have created your own spec sheet template, or select a **System** template to use the standard template provided by Supply’d.
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 See the [Templates](/supplyd-erp/settings/templates) document for details on creating custom templates.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Customisation
Complete this section if you want to customise the appearance of your **Spec Sheet**, such as using a different font or adding a logo (see note below).
**Font\* \[required field]**
Select the font you want to use for the text.
**Logo**
Select the logo you want to display on the spec sheet. Leave the field set to **None** if you do not want to include a logo on the sheet.
{% hint style="warning" %}
**Note -** This setting only applies to templates that utilise the {{logo\_image}} tag.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click Print
Click to generate the **Spec Sheet** for printing or downloading.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
# Printing Recipe Sheets
Printing Recipe Sheets provides a quick and convenient way to access recipe information, ensuring staff have accurate ingredients, quantities, and preparation details when needed.
**Supply’d** allows you to generate and print **Recipe Sheets** directly from a product’s page. Recipe Sheets provide a convenient way to view and present recipe information, including ingredients and preparation details, for reference or use during production.
{% hint style="success" %}
**What is a Recipe Sheet?**
A **Recipe Sheet** is a document that provides detailed information about a recipe in a clear, organised format. It can include key details such as ingredients, quantities, and preparation instructions recorded in Supply’d.
\
Recipe Sheets are only available for products with a Product Type of **Production** or **Recipe**.
{% endhint %}
This document explains how to print a **Recipe Sheet** from a product's page.
***
### Printing a Recipe Sheet
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Select the Product
1. Select **Products** from the main menu to view your list of products.
2. Select the product you want to print a **Recipe Sheet** for.
{% hint style="success" %}
Use the search feature in the top right to quickly find the product you are looking for.\
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Select Download > Recipe Sheet
Click the 3 dots in the top right, then select **Download > Recipe Sheet**.
The **Print Recipe Sheet** form will open, allowing you to select your options for printing **Recipe Sheets** for the selected product.
{% hint style="success" %}
To open or close the **Customisation** section on this form, click the small arrow to the right of the section, as circled in red above.
{% endhint %}
Complete the fields following the guidelines below:
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Template
**Template\* \[required field]**
Select the template to use when generating the **Product Recipe**. Choose a **Custom** template if you have created your own recipe template, or select a **System** template provided by Supply’d.
The available **System** templates are **Product Recipe** and **Product Recipe Costing**.
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 See the [Templates](/supplyd-erp/settings/templates) document for details on creating custom templates.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Customisation
Complete this section if you want to customise the appearance of your **Recipe Sheet**, such as using a different font or adding a logo (see note below).
**Font\* \[required field]**
Select the font you want to use for the text.
**Logo**
Select the logo you want to display on the recipe sheet. Leave the field set to **None** if you do not want to include a logo on the sheet.
{% hint style="warning" %}
**Note -** This setting only applies to templates that utilise the {{logo\_image}} tag.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click Print
Click to generate the **Recipe Sheet** for printing or downloading.
The **Product Recipe Costing** sheet provides a detailed breakdown of the costs associated with producing the product, including ingredient and labour costs.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
# Printing Shelf Tickets in Bulk
Printing shelf tickets in bulk saves time, reduces repetitive tasks, and makes it easier to keep pricing information consistent across multiple products.
**Supply’d** allows you to print shelf tickets for multiple products at once, saving time when updating or displaying pricing for a large number of products. Select the products you need, customise the shelf ticket options, and print them together in a single action.
The following steps will guide you through the process:
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Go to the Products Page
Select **Products** from the main menu. The **Products** page will open, displaying a list of all your products.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Select the Products
Select the products you want to print labels or shelf tickets for by ticking the checkbox beside each product.
{% hint style="success" %}
Clicking the box beside the button will select all products on the list.\
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="success" %}
You can search or use the **Filter Products** form to narrow the list by specific criteria if you want to perform actions on matching products.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="info" %}
The button remains greyed out and inactive until at least one product is selected. Once you select one or more products, the button turns blue and becomes clickable, allowing you to access the available bulk actions.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Select Download > Shelf Tickets
Click the button to open the menu and and select **Shelf Tickets**.
The **Print Product Tickets** form will open.
{% hint style="success" %}
To remove an item from the list, simply click the "x" to the right of the product.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="success" %}
To open or close the **Customisation** section on this form, click the small arrow to the right of the section, as circled in red above.
{% endhint %}
Complete the form by following the guidelines below:
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Label & Print Details
**Template\* \[required field]**
Select the template to use when generating the label. Choose a **Custom** label if you have created a custom label template, or select a **System** label to use one of the standard templates provided by Supply’d.
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 See the [Templates](/supplyd-erp/settings/templates) document for details on creating custom label templates.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Customisation
Complete this section if you want to include additional information on the label. If left blank, the product name, price, and barcode will be included by default.
**Font\* \[required field]**
Select the font you want to use for the label text.
**Promo Title\* \[required field]**
Enter the title you want to display for the promotion, such as **SALE**, **NEW**, or **SPECIAL**. The title can contain a maximum of **13 characters**.
**Promo Colour\* \[required field]**
Select the colour you want to use for the promotion on the label or shelf ticket.
**Promo Text Colour\* \[required field]**
Select the colour you want to use for the promotion text on the label or shelf ticket.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click Print
Click to generate the shelf tickets for printing or downloading.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
# Products Page Bulk Actions
Managing products effectively is essential for keeping your inventory organised and running smoothly. Supply'd makes managing your products simple.
Managing products in **Supply’d** helps you keep your product list accurate, organised, and up to date. From the **Products** page, you can view, edit, and update product details, manage pricing, stock levels, and packaging, and control how products appear in your marketplace. Efficient product management ensures that your listings are consistent, inventory is accurate, and customers always have the correct information when ordering.
The [Adding Products](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products) document describes how to add a product to Supply'd. This document describes how to manage the products in your product list, including:
* [#the-products-page](#the-products-page "mention")
* [#product-details](#product-details "mention")
* [#additional-options](#additional-options "mention")
* [#bulk-actions](#bulk-actions "mention")
* [#filtering-or-searching-the-products-list](#filtering-or-searching-the-products-list "mention")
***
## **The Products Page**
The **Products** page in Supply’d shows a list of all the products you buy, sell, or produce. From this page, you can view product details like name, SKU, supplier, price, and stock levels. You can also add new products, edit existing ones, or manage stock and pricing. It’s the main place to keep your product information up to date and organised.
{% hint style="success" %}
You will see colour-coded product types beside each product for easy identification.
**-** The most common product type. It is a single product with no advanced traits.
- A bundle of multiple products within one parent product.
**-** A product that is made up of a number ingredients produced at the time of sale, eg. a burger at a restaurant.
- A shipping carton that can be used at the packing stage.
**-** A gift note/card that can be configured to be automatically generated and printed.
- A product that can be manufactured using the production module. When "Production" is selected, additional sections will appear.
**-** A product that can be broken down within the production module to make other products.
{% endhint %}
Clicking on a product will show that product's page with all the information on that product.
👉 See [#product-details](#product-details "mention") below.
**Pricing Tab**
Under the **Pricing** tab, the **Pricing Schedule** displays all of your products with upcoming price changes.
👉 See the [Product Price Changes](/supplyd-erp/products/product-price-changes) document for more information.
**Offers Tab**
The **Offers** tab lists any product offers you've received from suppliers.
👉 See the [Accepting Offers from Suppliers](/supplyd-erp/products/offers/accepting-offers-from-suppliers) document for details.
{% hint style="success" %}
In the **Offers** tab, retailers can review offers. From there, they can range the product (which creates their own ranged version of the product), request samples, or reject the offer. All updates are reflected on the product page. Once a retailer ranges a product, they can begin purchasing it through Supply’d.
{% endhint %}
***
### Additional Options
Clicking on the 3 dots in the top right of the **Products** page will open a menu with additional options.
#### Import
Allows you to upload product information into Supply’d Hub using a CSV file. This is useful for adding new products or updating multiple products at once instead of editing them individually.
* **Products**: Import all your product information, including product details, descriptions, and other product settings.
* **Sales Channels**: Import product sales channel assignments to control which products are available in specific stores, channels, or marketplaces.
* **Pricing**: Import product pricing information, making it easy to create or update prices across multiple products and customers.
* **Production Stages**: Import production workflow stages used to track products through different steps of the manufacturing or preparation process.
* **Production Items**: Import the items, ingredients, or components used in production, helping maintain accurate production and inventory records.
#### Export
Lets you download your product data into a spreadsheet file. This is helpful for reviewing your product list, making offline changes, or keeping a backup of your product information.
* **Products**: Export your product list, including product details and settings, for reporting, review, or bulk updates.
* **Pricing**: Export product pricing information, including customer-specific pricing, for analysis, updates, or record-keeping.
* **Production Stages**: Export your production workflow stages to review or manage the steps used in your production processes.
* **Production Items**: Export production items, ingredients, or components used in production for reporting, planning, or inventory management.
#### Arrange Categories
This option lets you rearrange your product categories. Simply click and drag the 3 lines next to a category to move it into your preferred position.
***
## Product Details
Clicking on a product will open its page, displaying all the details about that product.
On the left you have :
**Product Photo**
A photo of the product.
**Locations**
A drop down box where you can select the location you would like to see the product information for.
Choose from 1 location or choose **All Locations**.
**Your Stock (Available)**
The number of that product that you have.
**On Order (Units)**
The number of units of that product that you currently have on order, including any stock being transferred from other locations.
**Predicted Sales (14 Days)**
Predicted sales for the product based on past sales figures.
**Suggested Order (Units)**
The suggested number of units of the products to order to fulfil the predicted sales.
**Actual Sales (14 Days)**
The number of the product you have sold in the last 14 days.
**Rate of Sale (Actual)**
How many on average you sell per day at the current time.
**Rate of Sale (Predicted)**
How many on average the system forecasts you will actually sell per day.
**Yellow Rectangle**
How much and when you last ordered the product.
On the right:
**Product Name**
The product brand, name and size.
**Purchasing** (If you purchase this product)
Name of the supplier(s) you purchase this product from as well as the names and stock levels of your other locations that you can it transfer.
Expanding the details on a supplier by hovering over it, will show additional information:
* SKU
* Unit Cost
* Unit Sell Price
* Unit Margin
{% hint style="success" %}
Clicking the **- 0 +** allows you easily add this product to your order list.
{% endhint %}
**Pricing** (If product is sold)
The pricing for this item on the various selling platforms you may use, such as Supply'd, Shopify etc., as well as the margins for the pricing on these platforms.
**Ranging**
If you have selected "**Yes**" in the **Place Product Offers To Customers** field in the [Company Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/company-settings#company-setting) section of your [Company Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/company-settings), you will see a **Ranging** section which displays all customers the product has been offered to, along with the prices set for each customer and the status of each offer. It will also list all customers who purchased, or had an order placed on their behalf for, that product with status.
Clicking on a customer will open the details of that offer. The button allows you to offer the product to customers.
👉 See the [Placing Offers to Customers](/supplyd-erp/products/offers/placing-offers-to-customers) document for more details.
{% hint style="success" %}
Offer statuses are colour-coded for easy identification:
* - The offer has been sent and is waiting for the customer to review and respond.
* - The customer has requested additional information or feedback before deciding whether to range the product.
* - The customer has requested product samples for evaluation.
* - The customer has accepted the product and added it to their product range, making it available for ordering.
* - The customer has decided not to range the product at this time.
* - The offer has been withdrawn and is no longer active or available for the customer to respond to.
{% endhint %}
**Details**
Details for the product that were entered when adding the product, such as, Category, Tags, SKU, Barcode, etc.
{% hint style="success" %}
Clicking the arrow (^) to the right of the "Details" will show/hide these details.
{% endhint %}
**Production Items**
If this is a production item, any items allocated to this production.
**Labelling**
If you have added the ingredients, nutrition etc. to a product, this section will show the ingredients, allergens and nutritional information associated to this product.
\
\
This section may say **Bundled**, if this is a bundled item, and will list the contents of the bundle. If this is a bundled item and you have entered the ingredients, then there will be both a **Bundled** section and an **Ingredients and Nutrition** section. The same applies to **Recipe** and **Production** items.
👉 For more details on product types, please refer to the [Product Types Overview](/supplyd-erp/products/product-types/product-types-overview) types document.
\
If you have set any custom fields in your **Product Settings,** you will also have a **Custom Fields** section.
***
## Additional Options
Clicking on the 3 dots in the top right corner, brings up a menu with the following options.
{% hint style="warning" %}
This may vary slightly, or have less options, depending on your account type and other variables.
{% endhint %}
***
### Edit Product
Opens the **Edit Product** form.
To edit the product, update any fields as needed, following the guidelines in the [Adding Products](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products) document.
***
### Duplicate Product
This will create a duplicate of the product in order to create a new product. This is very useful and time-saving if you want to create a similar product, using some of the same information, such as, the same product but in a different size or flavour.
Simply click on **Duplicate Product** to open a copy of the product and change any fields required for the new product, such as, names, barcodes (must be unique), descriptions, pricing etc.
👉 See the [Adding Products](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products#creating-products-using-the-duplicate-products-function) section of the [Adding Products](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products) document for more details on using this function.
***
### Manage Stock
This is where you can record stock numbers, locations, use by dates, batches etc.
👉 This is fully described in the [Managing Inventory](/supplyd-erp/inventory/managing-inventory) document.
***
### Download
***
### Download > Label
Opens the **Print Label** page, where you can generate labels for the product.
**Template\* \[required field]**
Select the template to use for generating the label, either a **Custom Label** (if you have created any label templates) or a **System Label**.
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 See the [Templates](/supplyd-erp/settings/templates) document for details on creating custom label templates.
{% endhint %}
**Batch**
Select the batch code to print on the labels. Leave at "None" to not include the code.
**Copies\* \[required field]**
Enter the number of copies to print.
#### **Customisation:**
Complete this section if you would to include extra details on the label. If left blank, only the product name and barcode will be printed. For price labels, the product name, price, and barcode will be included by default.
**Font\* \[required field]**
Select the desired font from the drop-down menu.
**Barcode**
Select the barcode type to use in the label. Leave at "None" to not print a barcode on the label.
**Logo**
Select the label logo to use on the label. Leave at "None" to not include a logo on the label.
{% hint style="warning" %}
Only applies to templates which utilise the logo\_image.
{% endhint %}
**Custom Text**
Add any custom text you would like to include on the label. Maximum of 20 characters.
{% hint style="warning" %}
Only applies to templates which utilise custom text.
{% endhint %}
Click to generate your label for printing.
***
### Download > Spec Sheet
This option allows you to download the product’s **Spec Sheet**, providing detailed information about the item for reference or printing.
**Template\* \[required field]**
Select the template to use to generate the Spec Sheet.
#### **Customisation:**
**Font\* \[required field]**
Select the font to use when generating this spec sheet.
**Logo**
Select the logo to use on the spec sheet for printing.
{% hint style="warning" %}
Only applies to templates that utilise the {{logo\_image}} tag.
{% endhint %}
Click to generate the Spec Sheet.
***
### Actions
***
### Actions > Attach File
Allows you to attach a file to the product.
**File Type**
Choose the file type you want to attach to this product.
**Upload File**
To attach a file to this product, click on and select the file you wish to upload from your device.
Any files attached to the product will appear under **Attachments** on the product page.
{% hint style="info" %}
The **Attachments** section will only be visible if there are files attached to the product.
{% endhint %}
***
### Actions > Recalculate Sales
If the sales data on the left becomes inaccurate or out of sync, clicking this will refresh and recalculate it.
You will be asked to confirm.
***
### Actions > Discontinue Product
This option lets you mark a product as discontinued, keeping it in the system for history and reference. Once discontinued, the product will no longer be available for orders in Supply’d, helping prevent accidental reordering.
You will be asked to confirm.
***
### View
{% hint style="info" %}
The available options in the menu will vary depending on whether the product is purchased, sold, used in production, or has a pricing schedule.
{% endhint %}
***
### View > Pricing Schedule
Opens the **Pricing Schedule** page where you can view and manage all pricing information for a product in Supply’d.
* **Status:** Select whether to view **Future** or **Past** pricing**.**\
\
* **Sales Channel:** Choose whether to view pricing from **All Sales Channels** or from a specific individual channel.\
\
***
### View > Recent Sales
This displays a list of recent sales orders for this product.
**Fulfilment Status**
Allows you to choose whether to view orders by their status - **All**, **Unfulfilled** or **Fulfilled**.
**Pick Location**
Lets you choose to view orders grouped by their Pick Location.
Clicking on an order will open its details.
{% hint style="success" %}
Refer to the [Managing Sales Orders](/supplyd-erp/sales/managing-sales-orders) document for guidance on managing these orders.
{% endhint %}
***
### View > Recent Purchases
This option will display a list of recent purchase orders for the product.
**Fulfilment Status**
Allows you to choose whether to view orders by their status - **All**, **On Order** or **Received**.
**Location**
Lets you choose to view orders grouped by their Location.
Clicking on an order will open its details.
{% hint style="success" %}
For instructions on managing purchase orders, see the [Managing Purchase Orders](/supplyd-erp/purchases/managing-purchase-orders) document.
{% endhint %}
***
### View > Stock Feed
Opens the Stockfeed page for this product, where you can view stock levels, inventory updates, and related activity.
***
### View > Related Recipes
Displays a list of recipes or bundles that include this product.
{% hint style="info" %}
This option will only show if the product is used in any related recipes.
{% endhint %}
In the example above, the Pink Chocolate Unicorn is included in the 3-Pack Chocolate Unicorns bundle. Clicking on the product will open its details page.
***
### View > Stats
Selecting this will open the **Product Stats** page, providing a detailed overview of the product’s pricing, stock levels, and sales performance.
***
### View > Changelog
This option will open a log of any changes made to the product. The **Changelog** also shows how the change was made, displayed in the smaller text under to the change - for example, via Product Edit, Expense Reconciliation, Bulk Import, etc.
Hover over a change to open a table showing the details of the update.
***
### Remove Product
Will remove the product. You will be asked to confirm.
{% hint style="warning" %}
If the product is used in any recipes or bundles, a warning will appear: Removing this product will also remove it from those recipes.
{% endhint %}
***
## Bulk Actions
Clicking the button on the **Products** page allows you to make changes and perform certain actions singularly or in bulk.
Selecting one or more products from the list, then clicking the button will open a menu with the options for those products.
{% hint style="info" %}
This button stays greyed out and inactive until at least one product is selected. After selecting products, the button turns green and becomes clickable.
{% endhint %}
Or, if you have selected "**Yes**" in the **Place Product Offers To Customers** field in the [Company Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/company-settings#company-setting) section of your [Company Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/company-settings), you will also have a **Create Offer** option.
{% hint style="success" %}
Ticking the square beside the button will select all products on the list.
The button stays grey and inactive until at least one product is selected. After selecting products, it turns green and becomes clickable.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="success" %}
Use the **Filter Products** form to narrow the list by specific criteria if you want to perform actions on matching products.
{% endhint %}
***
### Bulk
***
### Bulk > Edit
This will open the **Bulk Edit Products** form which is a very useful feature if you need to update multiple products with the same changes - such as price, supplier, category, availability etc. This allows you to apply consistent changes across a range of items all at once, saving time and reducing the chance of errors.
👉 For full details see the [Bulk Editing Products](/supplyd-erp/products/managing-products/bulk-editing-products) document.
***
### Bulk > Assign Tags
Lets you apply one or more tags to multiple products at the same time. This saves time by allowing you to categorise and organise products in bulk, rather than updating each product individually. Tags can then be used to help filter, group, and manage products more efficiently.
**Tags**
Select the department(s) you would like to add or replace existing ones with.
**Actions**
Choose how the tags are applied to the selected products.
* **Add:** The selected tags are added to the products, leaving any existing product tags still there.
* **Replace:** The product tags will be replaced with what's selected here.
Click to apply your selections.
***
### Bulk > Assign Departments
This will apply or update departments for multiple products at the same time. This helps you quickly organise your product list into the correct departments without needing to edit each product individually, making it easier to filter, manage, and structure your catalogue.
**Departments**
Select the department(s) you would like to add or replace existing ones with.
* **Add:** The selected departments are added to the products, leaving any existing product tags still there.
* **Replace:** The product departments will be replaced with what has been selected here.
Click to apply your selections.
***
### Create Offer
If you have a large number of products that you would like to offer to customers, you can use **Create Offer** to create offers for multiple products at once.
{% hint style="info" %}
This option will only appear if you have selected "**Yes**" in the **Place Product Offers To Customers** field in the [Company Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/company-settings#company-setting) section of your [Company Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/company-settings).
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 See the [Placing Offers to Customers](/supplyd-erp/products/offers/placing-offers-to-customers#bulk-actions) section of the [Placing Offers to Customers](/supplyd-erp/products/offers/placing-offers-to-customers) document fot more details.
{% endhint %}
***
### Export Products
This allows you to export the details of the selected products to a spreadsheet on your computer.
Select the fields you would like to include and click .
***
### Download
***
### Download > Product Label
Opens the **Print Label** page, where you can print labels for the selected products.
{% hint style="success" %}
To remove an item from the list, simply click the "x" to the right of the product.
{% endhint %}
**Template**
Select the label template you want to use, either a custom label or a system label.
**Customisation**
Allows you to select the font, choose whether to include the product’s barcode, add your logo, and include any custom text on the label.
Click to generate the labels.
***
### Download > Print Shelf Tickets
Opens the **Print Product Tickets** form, allowing you to print shelf tickets for the selected items.
Click to generate the labels.
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 See the [Templating](/supplyd-erp/settings/templating) document for information on creating templates for labels.
{% endhint %}
***
### Remove Products
Will remove the selected product(s). You will be asked to confirm.
Click .
{% hint style="danger" %}
If any of these products are used in any recipes or bundles, a warning will appear: Removing these product will also remove it from those recipes.
{% endhint %}
***
## Filtering or Searching the Products List
On the **Products** page, the 3 lines next to the 3 dots in the top right let you filter the product list, while the magnifying glass allows you to search for specific items.
Clicking on the magnifying glass, you can search the products list by product name or word.
Clicking the 3 lines opens the **Filter Products** form, giving you access to all available filtering options.
**Brand**
Select the brand or brands that you would like to filter the list by.
**Category**
Choose the category or categories that you would like to filter the list by.
**Tags**
Select the tag or tags that you would like to filter the list by from the drop-down menu, eg. gluten-free, vegan etc.
**Name**
Enter a name to search for in your product list.
**SKU**
Enter a SKU to search for in your product list.
**Barcode**
Enter a barcode to search for in your product list.
**Buy/Sell Status**
Filter your products by **Buy** for products you buy, or **Sell** for products you sell.
**Sale Status**
Filter products based on whether they have a sale price active.
**Product Type**
Filter your products by their type, such as, **Standard**, **Recipe**, **Gift Card** etc.
**Sales Channel**
Select the sales channel that you would like to filter the list by, eg. your Supply'd Store, Square, Shopify etc.
**Product Status**
Select the **Status** that you would like to filter the list by.
Click to apply your selections and filter the **Products** list.
# Offers
Offers in Supply’d make it easy for suppliers to share special pricing, promotions & new products with customers, while giving customers a simple way to review and accept offers that meet their needs.
# Placing Offers to Customers
Offers in Supply’d make it easy to showcase new products and provide customer-specific pricing, helping to increase sales and strengthen customer relationships.
**Offers** in Supply’d provide a simple way for suppliers to present products and share customer-specific pricing with your customers. You can create targeted offers for individual customers or groups, and highlight new or featured products from one place. Offers provide an effective way to increase product visibility, drive sales, and encourage customer engagement.
Customers can easily browse and range available offers, while you, as a supplier, can track performance and manage offers from a central location. This makes **Offers** a simple and powerful tool for growing sales and building stronger customer relationships.
This doc will guide you through the offer process, including:
* [#placing-an-offer](#placing-an-offer "mention")
* [#enable-placing-product-offers](#enable-placing-product-offers "mention")
* [#what-happens-next](#what-happens-next "mention")
* [#additional-options](#additional-options "mention")
* [#updating-an-offers-status](#updating-an-offers-status "mention")
* [#cancelling-an-offer](#cancelling-an-offer "mention")
* [#bulk-actions](#bulk-actions "mention")
***
## Placing an Offer
Offers on Supply’d help suppliers showcase selected products to a wider audience of retailers and active buyers. Connected retailers can browse available offers and, if interested, accept them directly through the platform.
To participate, the customer must be a Supply’d user and connected to the supplier. Once an offer is accepted, the customer can view the supplier’s product range and choose which products to range. Ranged products then become available for ordering through Supply’d, with purchases recorded as standard sales orders in the supplier’s account.
This provides a simple way for suppliers to gain exposure, attract new customers, and turn offers into ongoing business relationships.
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 See the [Adding Customers, Leads & Customer Groups](/supplyd-erp/customers/adding-customers-leads-and-customer-groups#connecting-to-a-supplyd-customer) & [Adding Customers, Leads & Customer Groups](/supplyd-erp/customers/adding-customers-leads-and-customer-groups#requests) docs for information on connecting with customers.
{% endhint %}
In the example below, we've introduced a new product - the **Rainbow Unicorn Cupcake** - and would like to let our customers know about it and offer it to them.
To create an offer:
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Enable Placing Product Offers
To be able to send offers to customers, you need to first enable it in the **Place Product Offers To Customers** field in the [Company Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/company-settings#company-setting) section of your [Company Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/company-settings).
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Open the Products Page
Select **Products** from the main menu to view a list of all your products. Then select the product you would like to offer. The product's details page will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Toggle On Sell on Supply'd
Click the 3 dots in the top right of the product's page and select **Edit Product**.
Scroll to the **Sell on Supply'd** section and ensure this option is enabled for the store you are sending the offer from.
Click to apply any changes.
{% hint style="info" %}
In the example above, the store name is "**Supply'd**". This will vary depending on the name you have assigned to your store.
👉 See the [Supply'd Stores](/supplyd-erp/settings/supplyd-stores) document for details on setting up and managing your stores
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click Offer to Customers
Click .
The **Create Offer** form will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Select the Store
Select the store this offer is coming from.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Select the Customer(s)
Type or click in the **Customers** field to view a list of your customers, then select the customers you would like to send the offer to.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Add Additional Products
You can choose additional products to add to this offer.
1. Click in the field that says "**Type Product Name**" and begin typing the product to bring up a list of matching products.
2. Select the product.
3. Click to add it to the offer.
4. Repeat for any other products you would like to include in the offer.
{% hint style="success" %}
You can remove a product from an offer by clicking the “**X**” to the right of the product.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Add Notes
The **Notes** section of the **Offers** form allows you to add any additional information or context about the offer for your customers. This could include details such as a product highlights or special pricing. Any text entered here will be visible to customers as part of the offer.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click Review
Click .
The **Review Offer** form will open, listing the product(s) to be offered, the product price(s), and customer(s) the offer will be sent to, and allow you to customise the offer for each individual customer.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Adjust Pricing & Edit Notes
**Discount**
The **Discount** fields allow you to set either a percentage (%) or dollar ($) discount for that particular customer. Select **%** or **$** from the first field, then enter the applicable percentage or dollar amount in the second field. The discounted price will be calculated automatically.
{% hint style="success" %}
Any [Customer Specific Pricing](/supplyd-erp/customers/customer-specific-pricing) will be automatically applied to these fields. This can be edited should you wish to make changes.
{% endhint %}
**Price**
The **Price** field shows the final price after the discount has been applied, helping you confirm what customers will actually pay.
{% hint style="success" %}
Alternatively, you can enter a price here and the system will automatically calculate the discount percentage or dollar amount for you.
{% endhint %}
**Notes**
The **Notes** field lets you edit the text you added in Step 5, tailoring it to be individual and specific for each customer.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click Send Offer
Click to send the offer to the customer.
{% hint style="info" %}
If you try to send an offer to a customer you’ve already sent one to, you will receive a warning. You can still proceed and send the offer again, if desired.
{% endhint %}
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
### What Happens Next ?
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### The Customer Receives an Email
Once you send the offer, the customer will receive an email with a link to review and respond to the offer.
The offer will also appear on their **Products** page under the **Offers** tab, where they can click and choose how they would like to respond or whether they would like to range or reject the product. The choices are:
* **Awaiting Feedback:** The product has been offered and is awaiting feedback or a decision from the recipient.
* **Awaiting Samples:** Samples have been requested or are expected before a decision can be made on the product offer.
* **Ranged:** The product offer has been accepted and added to the recipient's product range.
* **Rejected:** The product offer has been declined and will not be ranged.
They also have the option to include a message with their response.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### The Customer Responds
When the customer responds you will receive an email with that response.
{% hint style="success" %}
If the customer selects **Ranged** the product will be added to their **Products** list and they can start ordering it from you.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### You Respond
When you select an offered product from your **Products** list, the product's details page will display the customers you have sent offers to and the current status for that offer.
{% hint style="success" %}
Offer statuses are colour-coded for easy identification:
* - The offer has been sent and is waiting for the customer to review and respond.
* - The customer has requested additional information or feedback before deciding whether to range the product.
* - The customer has requested product samples for evaluation.
* - The customer has accepted the product and added it to their product range, making it available for ordering.
* - The customer has decided not to range the product at this time.
* - The offer has been withdrawn and is no longer active or available for the customer to respond to.
{% endhint %}
Click on the customer to open the offer details.
On this page, you can view the customer's response, including any message they may have provided, and send a reply. You can continue to exchange messages in this way until the customer decides to range or reject the offered product.
Any messages will appear here as a record of your correspondence.
{% hint style="success" %}
If the customer has chosen to range or reject the product, no response is required and a message field will not be displayed.
{% endhint %}
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
## Additional Options
For offers with an , or status, you will see 3 dots in the top right of the offer details page (the page titled **"\[Customer Name] Ranging"**)
Offers that are or will not have this option.
* **Mark As:** Allows you to update the offer status.\
👉 See [#updating-an-offers-status](#updating-an-offers-status "mention") below for more details.
* **Cancel Offer:** Allows you to withdraw the offer.\
👉 [#cancelling-an-offer](#cancelling-an-offer "mention") below goes into full details.
***
### Updating an Offer's Status
For any offers that have either a , or status, you will have the option to mark the product as **Awaiting Feedback**, **Awaiting Samples** or **Rejected**.
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Select **Products** from the main menu and select the product.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click on the supplier whose offer you would like to update the status for.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click on the 3 dots in the top right, select **Mark As**, and choose the desired status.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
### Cancelling an Offer
If you wish to cancel an offer for any reason:
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Select **Products** from the main menu and select the product.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click on the supplier whose offer you would like to cancel.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click on the 3 dots in the top right, select **Cancel Offer**.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
A form will open allowing you to send a message to the customer.
The offer's status will change to .
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
## Bulk Actions
If you have a large number of products that you would like to offer to customers, you can use the **Bulk Actions** feature to create offers for multiple products at once.
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Select the Products
On the **Products** page, select the products you would like to include in the offer by ticking the box to the left of each product name. To select all products in the list, tick the box beside the button.
{% hint style="success" %}
The button will remain greyed out until at least one product is selected. Once a product has been selected, it will turn green and become clickable.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Select Create Offer
Click on to open a menu. Select **Create Offer**.
The **Create Offer** form will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Complete the Form
As described above in [#creating-an-offer](#creating-an-offer "mention"), select the customer(s), add or remove products from the offer, and include any notes you wish to send with the offer, then click . The **Review Offer** form will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Review the Offer Details
Review the details, add any special pricing or customer-specific notes, and then proceed with the offer as described from Step 6 of the [#creating-an-offer](#creating-an-offer "mention") process.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
# Managing Offers
Managing offers makes it easier to track customer offers, monitor their status, and keep offers up to date.
Customer offers allow you to promote products directly to your customers and provide customer-specific pricing. Once offers have been created, you can monitor and manage them to keep track of which offers have been sent, accepted, or are no longer available.
This document explains how to manage customer offers in Supply’d. It covers how to view offer details, check and update their status, and cancel offers.
* [#ranging-details](#ranging-details "mention")
* [#options-for-customer-offers](#options-for-customer-offers "mention")
* [#updating-an-offers-status](#updating-an-offers-status "mention")
* [#cancelling-an-offer](#cancelling-an-offer "mention")
***
## Ranging Details
If you have placed an offer for a product with a customer, a **Ranging** section will be displayed on the product's page.
{% hint style="success" %}
Offer statuses are colour-coded for easy identification:
* - The offer has been sent and is waiting for the customer to review and respond.
* - The customer has requested additional information or feedback before deciding whether to range the product.
* - The customer has requested product samples for evaluation.
* - The customer has accepted the product and added it to their product range, making it available for ordering.
* - The customer has decided not to range the product at this time.
* - The offer has been withdrawn and is no longer active or available for the customer to respond to.
{% endhint %}
Clicking on a customer's name in the ranging section will open the details of the offer.
On this page, you can view the customer's response, including any message they may have provided, and send a reply. You can continue to exchange messages in this way until the customer decides to range or reject the offered product.
Any messages will appear here as a record of your correspondence.
{% hint style="success" %}
If the customer has chosen to range or reject the product, no response is required and a message field will not be displayed.
{% endhint %}
***
## Options for Customer Offers
For offers with an , or status, you will see 3 dots in the top right of the offer details page (the page titled "**\[Customer Name] Ranging**").
{% hint style="info" %}
Offers that have a or status will not have this option.
{% endhint %}
**Mark As**
Allows you to update the offer status.
👉 See [#updating-an-offers-status](#updating-an-offers-status "mention") below for more details.
**Cancel Offer**
Allows you to withdraw the offer.
👉 [#cancelling-an-offer](#cancelling-an-offer "mention") below goes into full details.
***
### Updating an Offer's Status
For any offers that have either a , or status, you will have the option to mark the product as **Awaiting Feedback**, **Awaiting Samples** or **Rejected**.
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Select **Products** from the main menu and select the product.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click on the supplier whose offer you would like to update the status for.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click on the 3 dots in the top right, select **Mark As**, and choose the desired status.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
### Cancelling an Offer
If you wish to cancel an offer for any reason:
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Select **Products** from the main menu and select the product.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click on the supplier whose offer you would like to cancel.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click on the 3 dots in the top right, select **Cancel Offer**.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
A form will open allowing you to send a message to the customer.
The offer's status will change to .
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
# Placing Offers
Offers in Supply’d make it easy to showcase new products and provide customer-specific pricing, helping to increase sales and strengthen customer relationships.
**Offers** in Supply’d provide a simple way for suppliers to present products and share customer-specific pricing with your customers. You can create targeted offers for individual customers or groups, and highlight new or featured products from one place. Offers provide an effective way to increase product visibility, drive sales, and encourage customer engagement.
Customers can easily browse and range available offers, while you, as a supplier, can track performance and manage offers from a central location. This makes **Offers** a simple and powerful tool for growing sales and building stronger customer relationships.
{% hint style="info" %}
While offers are commonly used by retailers purchasing products for resale, they can also be used by other businesses. For example, a supplier may send an offer to a manufacturer for ingredients or materials used in their production process.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="success" %}
If you have a large number of products to offer to customers, you can use the **Bulk Actions** feature to create offers for multiple products and customers at once, making it quick and easy to manage larger offers.
👉 See the [Placing Offers in Bulk](/supplyd-erp/products/offers/placing-offers-to-customers/placing-offers-in-bulk) for more information.
{% endhint %}
This doc will guide you through the process of placing offers from an individual product's page:
* [#placing-an-offer](#placing-an-offer "mention")
* [#enable-placing-product-offers](#enable-placing-product-offers "mention")
* [#what-happens-next](#what-happens-next "mention")
***
### Placing an Offer
Offers on Supply’d help suppliers showcase selected products to a wider audience of retailers and active buyers. Connected retailers can browse available offers and, if interested, accept them directly through the platform.
To participate, the customer must be a Supply’d user and connected to the supplier. Once an offer is accepted, the customer can view the supplier’s product range and choose which products to range. Ranged products then become available for ordering through Supply’d, with purchases recorded as standard sales orders in the supplier’s account.
This provides a simple way for suppliers to gain exposure, attract new customers, and turn offers into ongoing business relationships.
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 See the [Adding Customers, Leads & Customer Groups](/supplyd-erp/customers/adding-customers-leads-and-customer-groups#connecting-to-a-supplyd-customer) & [Adding Customers, Leads & Customer Groups](/supplyd-erp/customers/adding-customers-leads-and-customer-groups#requests) docs for information on connecting with customers.
{% endhint %}
In the example below, we've introduced a new product - the **Rainbow Unicorn Cupcake** - and would like to let our customers know about it and offer it to them.
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Enable Placing Product Offers
To be able to send offers to customers, you need to first enable it in the **Place Product Offers To Customers** field in the [Company Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/company-settings#company-setting) section of your [Company Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/company-settings).
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Open the Products Page
Select **Products** from the main menu to view a list of all your products. Then select the product you would like to offer. The product's details page will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Toggle On Sell on Supply'd
Click the 3 dots in the top right of the product's page and select **Edit Product**.
Scroll to the **Sell on Supply'd** section and ensure this option is enabled for the store you are sending the offer from.
Click to apply any changes.
{% hint style="info" %}
In the example above, the store name is "**Supply'd**". This will vary depending on the name you have assigned to your store.
👉 See the [Supply'd Stores](/supplyd-erp/settings/supplyd-stores) document for details on setting up and managing your stores
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click Offer to Customers
Click .
The **Create Offer** form will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Select the Store
Select the store this offer is coming from.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Select the Customer(s)
Type or click in the **Customers** field to view a list of your customers, then select the customers you would like to send the offer to.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Add Additional Products
You can choose additional products to add to this offer.
1. Click in the field that says "**Type Product Name**" and begin typing the product to bring up a list of matching products.
2. Select the product.
3. Click to add it to the offer.
4. Repeat for any other products you would like to include in the offer.
{% hint style="success" %}
You can remove a product from an offer by clicking the “**X**” to the right of the product.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Add Notes
The **Notes** section of the **Offers** form allows you to add any additional information or context about the offer for your customers. This could include details such as a product highlights or special pricing. Any text entered here will be visible to customers as part of the offer.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click Review
Click .
The **Review Offer** form will open, listing the product(s) to be offered, the product price(s), and customer(s) the offer will be sent to, and allow you to customise the offer for each individual customer.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Adjust Pricing & Edit Notes
**Discount**
The **Discount** fields allow you to set either a percentage (%) or dollar ($) discount for that particular customer. Select **%** or **$** from the first field, then enter the applicable percentage or dollar amount in the second field. The discounted price will be calculated automatically.
{% hint style="success" %}
Any [Customer Specific Pricing](/supplyd-erp/customers/customer-specific-pricing) will be automatically applied to these fields. This can be edited should you wish to make changes.
{% endhint %}
**Price**
The **Price** field shows the final price after the discount has been applied, helping you confirm what customers will actually pay.
{% hint style="success" %}
Alternatively, you can enter a price here and the system will automatically calculate the discount percentage or dollar amount for you.
{% endhint %}
**Notes**
The **Notes** field lets you edit the text you added in Step 5, tailoring it to be individual and specific for each customer.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click Send Offer
Click to send the offer to the customer.
{% hint style="info" %}
If you try to send an offer to a customer you’ve already sent one to, you will receive a warning. You can still proceed and send the offer again, if desired.
{% endhint %}
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
### What Happens Next ?
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### The Customer Receives an Email
Once you send the offer, the customer will receive an email with a link to review and respond to the offer.
The offer will also appear on their **Products** page under the **Offers** tab, where they can click and choose how they would like to respond or whether they would like to range or reject the product. The choices are:
* **Awaiting Feedback:** The product has been offered and is awaiting feedback or a decision from the recipient.
* **Awaiting Samples:** Samples have been requested or are expected before a decision can be made on the product offer.
* **Ranged:** The product offer has been accepted and added to the recipient's product range.
* **Rejected:** The product offer has been declined and will not be ranged.
They also have the option to include a message with their response.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### The Customer Responds
When the customer responds you will receive an email with that response.
{% hint style="success" %}
If the customer selects **Ranged** the product will be added to their **Products** list and they can start ordering it from you.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### You Respond
When you select an offered product from your **Products** list, the product's details page will display the customers you have sent offers to and the current status for that offer.
{% hint style="success" %}
Offer statuses are colour-coded for easy identification:
* - The offer has been sent and is waiting for the customer to review and respond.
* - The customer has requested additional information or feedback before deciding whether to range the product.
* - The customer has requested product samples for evaluation.
* - The customer has accepted the product and added it to their product range, making it available for ordering.
* - The customer has decided not to range the product at this time.
* - The offer has been withdrawn and is no longer active or available for the customer to respond to.
{% endhint %}
Click on the customer to open the offer details.
On this page, you can view the customer's response, including any message they may have provided, and send a reply. You can continue to exchange messages in this way until the customer decides to range or reject the offered product.
Any messages will appear here as a record of your correspondence.
{% hint style="success" %}
If the customer has chosen to range or reject the product, no response is required and a message field will not be displayed.
{% endhint %}
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
# Placing Offers in Bulk
Managing offers makes it easier to track customer offers, monitor their status, and keep customer-specific offer pricing up to date.
**Offers** in Supply’d provide a simple way for suppliers to showcase products and offer customer-specific pricing. Suppliers can create offers for individual customers or groups, helping increase product visibility, drive sales, and encourage customer engagement.
Once an offer is accepted, customers can choose which products to range, making them available to order through Supply’d. Purchases are then recorded as standard sales orders.
Offers provide an efficient way for suppliers to promote products, reach more customers, and turn offers into ongoing sales relationships.
{% hint style="success" %}
Customers must be **Supply’d users connected to the supplier** to receive and accept offers.
👉 See the [Adding Customers, Leads & Customer Groups](/supplyd-erp/customers/adding-customers-leads-and-customer-groups#connecting-to-a-supplyd-customer) & [Adding Customers, Leads & Customer Groups](/supplyd-erp/customers/adding-customers-leads-and-customer-groups#requests) docs for information on connecting with customers.
{% endhint %}
If you have a large number of products to offer to customers, you can use the **Bulk Actions** feature to create offers for multiple products and customers at once, making it quick and easy to manage larger offers.
{% hint style="success" %}
The [Placing Offers](/supplyd-erp/products/offers/placing-offers-to-customers/placing-offers) document explains how to place offers from an individual product's page.
{% endhint %}
***
### Placing Offers in Bulk
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Go to the Products Page
Select **Products** from the main menu. The **Products** page will open, showing a list of all your products.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Select the Products
On the **Products** page, select the products you would like to include in the offer by ticking the checkbox to the left of each product name.
{% hint style="success" %}
The button will remain greyed out until at least one product is selected. Once a product has been selected, it will turn green and become clickable.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="success" %}
Use the **Filter Products** form (click on in the top right corner) to narrow the list by specific criteria if you want to perform actions on matching products.
For example, all our Chocolate Unicorns require updates, so if we type "Unicorn" in the **Name** field of the **Filter Products** form, only the unicorns will show on the product list.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="success" %}
Ticking the square beside the button will select all products on the list. \
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Select Create Offer
Click on the button, then select **Create Offer** from the menu.
The **Create Offer** form will open.
Complete the form following the guidelines below:
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Add Customers
Type or click in the **Customers** field to view a list of your customers, then select the customers you would like to send the offer to.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Add or Remove Products
Review the list of products and add or remove products as required.
To add products:
1. Click in the field that says "**Type Product Name**" and begin typing the product to bring up a list of matching products.
2. Select the product.
3. Click to add it to the offer.
4. Repeat for any other products you would like to include in the offer.
{% hint style="success" %}
You can remove a product from an offer by clicking the “**X**” to the right of the product.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Add Notes
The **Notes** section of the **Offers** form allows you to add any additional information or context about the offer for your customers. This could include details such as a product highlights or special pricing. Any text entered here will be visible to customers as part of the offer.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click Review
Click .
The **Review Offer** form will open, listing the product(s) to be offered, the product price(s), and customer(s) the offer will be sent to, and allow you to customise the offer for each individual customer.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Adjust Pricing & Edit Notes
**Discount**
The **Discount** fields allow you to set either a percentage (%) or dollar ($) discount for that particular customer. Select **%** or **$** from the first field, then enter the applicable percentage or dollar amount in the second field. The discounted price will be calculated automatically.
{% hint style="success" %}
Any [Customer Specific Pricing](/supplyd-erp/customers/customer-specific-pricing) will be automatically applied to these fields. This can be edited should you wish to make changes.
{% endhint %}
**Price**
The **Price** field shows the final price after the discount has been applied, helping you confirm what customers will actually pay.
{% hint style="success" %}
Alternatively, you can enter a price here and the system will automatically calculate the discount percentage or dollar amount for you.
{% endhint %}
**Notes**
The **Notes** field lets you edit the text you added in Step 5, tailoring it to be individual and specific for each customer.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click Send Offer
Click to send the offer to the customer.
{% hint style="info" %}
If you try to send an offer to a customer you’ve already sent one to, you will receive a warning. You can still proceed and send the offer again, if desired.
{% endhint %}
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
{% hint style="success" %}
To find out what happens after an offer is sent, see the [Placing Offers](/supplyd-erp/products/offers/placing-offers-to-customers/placing-offers#what-happens-next) section of the [Placing Offers](/supplyd-erp/products/offers/placing-offers-to-customers/placing-offers) document.
{% endhint %}
# Accepting Offers from Suppliers
Receiving and accepting offers in Supply’d gives you access to special pricing, promotions, and new products, helping you make informed purchasing decisions and secure the best available deals.
**Offers** in Supply’d give you access to special pricing, promotions, and new products from your suppliers. From the **Offers** page, you can view offer details, compare pricing, and accept offers that suit your business needs. Whether you're looking to take advantage of a promotion, secure better pricing, or discover new products, offers provide a simple way to make informed purchasing decisions and maximise value.
In Supply’d ERP, you can receive offers from connected suppliers who use either Supply’d ERP or Supply’d Hub. These offers may include special pricing, promotions, or new products available for you to review and accept.
This document guides you through responding to offers, including how to accept, reject, and range offered products.
* [#the-offers-page](#the-offers-page "mention")
* [#connecting-with-a-hub-supplier](#connecting-with-a-hub-supplier "mention")
* [#responding-to-an-offer](#responding-to-an-offer "mention")
* [#ranging-the-offer-product](#ranging-the-offer-product "mention")
* [#bulk-actions](#bulk-actions "mention")
* [#filtering-or-searching-the-products-list](#filtering-or-searching-the-products-list "mention")
***
## The Offers Page
The **Offers** tab on the **Products** page shows all product offers you’ve received from suppliers. It provides a central place to review new products, view pricing and offer details, and track the status of each offer (such as awaiting feedback, awaiting samples, ranged, or rejected).
From this tab, you can open each offer to see full product information, communicate with suppliers, and decide whether to accept, reject, or request samples before adding the product to your range.
{% hint style="success" %}
The number of active offers you currently have will be indicated by the number in the red circle at the top right of the **Offers** tab.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="success" %}
Offer statuses are colour-coded for easy identification:
* - The offer has been sent and is waiting for the customer to review and respond.
* - The customer has requested additional information or feedback before deciding whether to range the product.
* - The customer has requested product samples for evaluation.
* - The customer has accepted the product and added it to their product range, making it available for ordering.
* - The customer has decided not to range the product at this time.
* - The offer has been withdrawn and is no longer active or available for the customer to respond to.
{% endhint %}
***
### Additional Options for the Offers Page
Clicking the 3 dots in the top right of the offer product's details page opens a menu with additional options.
**Edit Table Layout**
Opens the **Offers Layout** form, allowing you to choose what information is displayed on the **Offers** page and the order it appears in. To reorder the list, click the three lines next to a field and drag it into your preferred position.
***
## Connecting with a Supply'd Hub Supplier
**Supply’d Hub** is a platform that helps suppliers showcase their products and connect with retailers. Suppliers can list their products, build relationships with current and potential customers, and present their product range for consideration and future ordering opportunities.
To receive offers from suppliers using **Supply’d Hub**, you must first enable Hub connections and establish a connection with the supplier.
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Enable Hub Connections
To receive offers from Supply’d Hub suppliers, you must first connect with them. To enable this, ensure that the **Accept Hub Connections** option is set to "**Yes**" in the [Company Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/company-settings#company-setting) section of your [Company Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/company-settings).
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Connect with the Supplier
A connection can be established in one of two ways:
* The supplier sends you a connection request, which you accept.
* You send a connection request to the supplier, which they accept.
👉 See the [Adding Suppliers & Supplier Groups](/supplyd-erp/suppliers/adding-suppliers-and-supplier-groups#connecting-with-a-supplyd-supplier) and [Adding Suppliers & Supplier Groups](/supplyd-erp/suppliers/adding-suppliers-and-supplier-groups#supplier-requests) sections of the [Adding Suppliers & Supplier Groups](/supplyd-erp/suppliers/adding-suppliers-and-supplier-groups) document.
Once the connection has been established, the supplier can send you product offers through Supply’d.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
## Responding to an Offer
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### You Receive an Offer
When a supplier sends you an offer, you will receive an email showing the product and the price offered, along with a link to review the product(s) and respond to the offer.
The offer will also appear on your **Products** page under the **Offers** tab.
{% hint style="success" %}
The number of active offers you currently have will be indicated by the number in the red circle at the top right of the **Offers** tab.
{% endhint %}
Clicking on a product opens its details and pricing, along with any message from the supplier regarding the offer.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### You Respond
Click to choose how you would like to respond or whether you would like to range or reject the product.
**Status**
Choose how you would like to respond to the offer.
* **No Change:** No changes will be made to the current status of the offer.
* **Awaiting Feedback:** You are reviewing the offer, discussing it internally or waiting for more details and haven’t made a decision yet.
* **Awaiting Samples:** You’re interested in the product but would like samples before deciding.
* **Rejected:** You’ve declined the offer and chosen not to list the product.
You also have the option to include a message with your response.
All messages between you and your supplier are shown on the offer details page as a record of your correspondence. You can continue messaging until you choose to range or reject the product. Your supplier will receive an email for each response, and you’ll also be notified via email when they reply.
{% hint style="success" %}
If, at any stage, you would like to range a product that you have previously rejected, you can do this easily by accessing the rejected product and selecting the option to range it again.\
1. Select **Products** from the main menu.
2. Go to the **Offers** tab.
3. Select the product you would like to range. The product will have the status displayed beside it.
4. Click the 3 dots in the top right and select **Range Product**.
{% endhint %}
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
## Additional Options
Clicking the 3 dots in the top right of the offer details page opens a menu with additional options.
#### Range Product
Selecting this option opens the **Add Product** form, where you can enter the required product details and add the product to the range.
#### Add To Favourites
Ranges the offered product and adds it to your [Favourites](/supplyd-erp/favourites/favourites) list, making it easy to find, review, and order later.
***
## Ranging the Offer Product
If you decide you would like to range the product being offered, and have selected **Ranged** when responding to the offer, the **Add Product** form will open allowing you to add it to your **Products** page.
Any details provided by the supplier will already be filled in. You just need to review them and add any additional information required.
👉 See the [Adding Products](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products) document for full details on completing the form.
Once the offered product has been ranged and added to your **Products** page, it becomes part of your catalogue and can be ordered from the supplier through the normal purchasing process.
👉 For details on purchasing products from a supplier, refer to the [Placing a Purchase Order](/supplyd-erp/purchases/placing-a-purchase-order) document.
***
## Bulk Actions
Clicking the button on the **Products** page allows you to make changes and perform certain actions singularly or in bulk.
Selecting one or more products from the list, then clicking the button will open a menu with the options for those products.
{% hint style="info" %}
The button stays grey and inactive until at least one product is selected. After selecting products, it turns green and becomes clickable.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="success" %}
Ticking the square beside the button will select all products on the list.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="success" %}
Use the **Filter Products** form to narrow the list by specific criteria if you want to perform actions on matching products.
{% endhint %}
***
### Respond
This opens the **Respond to Offers** form, allowing you to apply and send the same response to all selected offers at once.
{% hint style="warning" %}
Offer products can only be ranged individually and cannot be ranged in bulk, so **Ranged** will not be an option when more than one product is selected.
{% endhint %}
Complete the form as explained in the [#responding-to-an-offer](#responding-to-an-offer "mention") section above.
***
## Searching & Filtering the Offers List
On the **Products** page, under the **Offers** tab, the 3 lines next to the 3 dots in the top right let you filter the offers list, while the magnifying glass allows you to search for specific items or suppliers.
Clicking on the magnifying glass, you can search the products list by product name, word or supplier.
Clicking the 3 lines opens the **Filter Offers** form, giving you access to all available filtering options.
**Supplier**
Filter offers to show only those received from selected suppliers. This makes it easier to review offers from a specific supplier.
**Issue Date Range**
Filter offers based on when they were issued. Select a date range to view offers sent within a specific period.
Click to apply your selections and filter the **Products** list.
# Accepting Offers
Receiving and accepting offers in Supply’d gives you access to special pricing, promotions, and new products, helping you make informed purchasing decisions and secure the best available deals.
**Offers** in Supply’d give you access to special pricing, promotions, and new products from your suppliers. From the **Offers** page, you can view offer details, compare pricing, and accept offers that suit your business needs. Whether you're looking to take advantage of a promotion, secure better pricing, or discover new products, offers provide a simple way to make informed purchasing decisions and maximise value.
In Supply’d ERP, you can receive offers from connected suppliers who use either Supply’d ERP or Supply’d Hub. These offers may include special pricing, promotions, or new products available for you to review and accept.
This document guides you through responding to offers, including how to accept, reject, and range offered products.
* [#the-offers-page](#the-offers-page "mention")
* [#connecting-with-a-hub-supplier](#connecting-with-a-hub-supplier "mention")
* [#responding-to-an-offer](#responding-to-an-offer "mention")
* [#ranging-the-offer-product](#ranging-the-offer-product "mention")
***
## The Offers Page
The **Offers** tab on the **Products** page shows all product offers you’ve received from suppliers. It provides a central place to review new products, view pricing and offer details, and track the status of each offer (such as awaiting feedback, awaiting samples, ranged, or rejected).
From this tab, you can open each offer to see full product information, communicate with suppliers, and decide whether to accept, reject, or request samples before adding the product to your range.
{% hint style="success" %}
The number of active offers you currently have will be indicated by the number in the red circle at the top right of the **Offers** tab.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="success" %}
Offer statuses are colour-coded for easy identification:
* - The offer has been sent and is waiting for the customer to review and respond.
* - The customer has requested additional information or feedback before deciding whether to range the product.
* - The customer has requested product samples for evaluation.
* - The customer has accepted the product and added it to their product range, making it available for ordering.
* - The customer has decided not to range the product at this time.
* - The offer has been withdrawn and is no longer active or available for the customer to respond to.
{% endhint %}
***
## Connecting with a Supply'd Hub Supplier
**Supply’d Hub** is a platform that helps suppliers showcase their products and connect with retailers. Suppliers can list their products, build relationships with current and potential customers, and present their product range for consideration and future ordering opportunities.
To receive offers from suppliers using **Supply’d Hub**, you must first enable Hub connections and establish a connection with the supplier.
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Enable Hub Connections
To receive offers from Supply’d Hub suppliers, you must first connect with them. To enable this, ensure that the **Accept Hub Connections** option is set to "**Yes**" in the [Company Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/company-settings#company-setting) section of your [Company Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/company-settings).
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Connect with the Supplier
A connection can be established in one of two ways:
* The supplier sends you a connection request, which you accept.
* You send a connection request to the supplier, which they accept.
👉 See the [Adding Suppliers & Supplier Groups](/supplyd-erp/suppliers/adding-suppliers-and-supplier-groups#connecting-with-a-supplyd-supplier) and [Adding Suppliers & Supplier Groups](/supplyd-erp/suppliers/adding-suppliers-and-supplier-groups#supplier-requests) sections of the [Adding Suppliers & Supplier Groups](/supplyd-erp/suppliers/adding-suppliers-and-supplier-groups) document.
Once the connection has been established, the supplier can send you product offers through Supply’d.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
## Responding to an Offer
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### You Receive an Offer
When a supplier sends you an offer, you will receive an email showing the product and the price offered, along with a link to review the product(s) and respond to the offer.
The offer will also appear on your **Products** page under the **Offers** tab.
{% hint style="success" %}
The number of active offers you currently have will be indicated by the number in the red circle at the top right of the **Offers** tab.
{% endhint %}
Clicking on a product opens its details and pricing, along with any message from the supplier regarding the offer.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### You Respond
Click to choose how you would like to respond or whether you would like to range or reject the product.
**Status**
Choose how you would like to respond to the offer.
* **No Change:** No changes will be made to the current status of the offer.
* **Awaiting Feedback:** You are reviewing the offer, discussing it internally or waiting for more details and haven’t made a decision yet.
* **Awaiting Samples:** You’re interested in the product but would like samples before deciding.
* **Rejected:** You’ve declined the offer and chosen not to list the product.
You also have the option to include a message with your response.
All messages between you and your supplier are shown on the offer details page as a record of your correspondence. You can continue messaging until you choose to range or reject the product. Your supplier will receive an email for each response, and you’ll also be notified via email when they reply.
{% hint style="success" %}
If, at any stage, you would like to range a product that you have previously rejected, you can do this easily by accessing the rejected product and selecting the option to range it again.\
1. Select **Products** from the main menu.
2. Go to the **Offers** tab.
3. Select the product you would like to range. The product will have the status displayed beside it.
4. Click the 3 dots in the top right and select **Range Product**.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="success" %}
The **Add To Favourites** option ranges the offered product and adds it to your [Favourites](/supplyd-erp/favourites/favourites) list, making it easy to find, review, and order later.
{% endhint %}
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
{% hint style="success" %}
You can respond to multiple offers at the same time, rather than responding to each offer individually. From the **Offers List**, select the products you would like to respond to by ticking the checkbox next to each product. Once you have selected all the offers you want to respond to, click the button and select **Respond**.
This will allow you to review and respond to the selected offers together, making it quicker and easier to manage multiple supplier offers.
**Note:** Offer products can only be ranged individually and cannot be ranged in bulk, so **Ranged** will not be an option.
{% endhint %}
***
## Ranging the Offer Product
If you decide you would like to range the product being offered, and have selected **Ranged** when responding to the offer, the **Add Product** form will open allowing you to add it to your **Products** page.
Any details provided by the supplier will already be filled in. You just need to review them and add any additional information required.
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 See the [Adding Products](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products) document for full details on completing the form.
{% endhint %}
Once the offered product has been ranged and added to your **Products** page, it becomes part of your catalogue and can be ordered from the supplier through the normal purchasing process.
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 For details on purchasing products from a supplier, refer to the [Placing a Purchase Order](/supplyd-erp/purchases/placing-a-purchase-order) document.
{% endhint %}
# Managing Supplier Offers
Managing supplier offers makes it easier to discover new products, access special pricing and promotions, and expand your product range.
**Offers** in Supply’d allow you to receive special pricing, promotions, and new products from connected suppliers using **Supply’d ERP** or **Supply’d Hub**. From the **Offers** page, you can review offer details and pricing, check their status, and accept offers that suit your business needs. You can then choose which products to add to your range.
This document explains how to manage offers from suppliers in Supply’d.
* [#the-offers-page](#the-offers-page "mention")
* [#editing-the-layout-of-the-offers-page](#editing-the-layout-of-the-offers-page "mention")
* [#offer-details](#offer-details "mention")
* [#additional-options-for-an-offer](#additional-options-for-an-offer "mention")
* [#range-product](#range-product "mention")
* [#respond](#respond "mention")
***
## The Offers Page
The **Offers** tab on the **Products** page shows all product offers you’ve received from suppliers. It provides a central place to review new products, view pricing and offer details, and track the status of each offer (such as awaiting feedback, awaiting samples, ranged, or rejected).
From this tab, you can open each offer to see full product information, communicate with suppliers, and decide whether to accept, reject, or request samples before adding the product to your range.
{% hint style="success" %}
The number of active offers you currently have will be indicated by the number in the red circle at the top right of the **Offers** tab.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="success" %}
Offer statuses are colour-coded for easy identification:
* - The offer has been sent and is waiting for the customer to review and respond.
* - The customer has requested additional information or feedback before deciding whether to range the product.
* - The customer has requested product samples for evaluation.
* - The customer has accepted the product and added it to their product range, making it available for ordering.
* - The customer has decided not to range the product at this time.
* - The offer has been withdrawn and is no longer active or available for the customer to respond to.
{% endhint %}
***
### Editing the Layout of the Offers Page
Clicking the 3 dots in the top right of the offer product's details page opens a menu with additional options.
**Edit Table Layout**
Selecting this opens the **Offers Layout** form, where you can choose which information is displayed on the **Offers** page and the order in which it appears. To reorder the fields, click and hold the three lines next to a field, then drag it to your preferred position.
Click to save the layout.
***
### Offer Details
Selecting an **Offer** opens the offer details, including information about the product being offered and the details of the offer.
***
## Additional Options for an Offer
Clicking the 3 dots in the top right of the offer details page opens a menu with additional options.
***
### Range Product
Selecting this option opens the **Add Product** form, where you can enter the required product details and add the product to the range.
{% hint style="info" %}
Products can also be ranged by clicking the **Range Product** link in the **Purchasing** section of the offer product's details page.\
{% endhint %}
If you decide you would like to range the product being offered, and have selected **Ranged** when responding to the offer, the **Add Product** form will open allowing you to add it to your **Products** page.
Any details provided by the supplier will already be filled in. You just need to review them and add any additional information required.
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 See the [Adding a Product](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products/adding-a-product) document for full details on completing the form.
{% endhint %}
Once the offered product has been ranged and added to your **Products** page, it becomes part of your catalogue and can be ordered from the supplier through the normal purchasing process.
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 For details on purchasing products from a supplier, refer to the [Placing a Purchase Order](/supplyd-erp/purchases/placing-a-purchase-order) document.
{% endhint %}
***
### Add To Favourites
Ranges the offered product and adds it to your [Favourites](/supplyd-erp/favourites/favourites) list, making it easy to find, review, and order later.
***
## Bulk Actions
Clicking the button on the **Products** page allows you to make changes and perform certain actions singularly or in bulk.
Selecting one or more products from the list, then clicking the button will open a menu with the options for those products.
{% hint style="info" %}
The button stays grey and inactive until at least one product is selected. After selecting products, it turns green and becomes clickable.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="success" %}
Ticking the square beside the button will select all products on the list.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="success" %}
Use the **Filter Products** form to narrow the list by specific criteria if you want to perform actions on matching products.
{% endhint %}
***
### Respond
This opens the **Respond to Offers** form, allowing you to apply and send the same response to all selected offers at once.
**Status**
Choose how you would like to respond to the offer.
* **No Change** - No changes will be made to the current status of the offer.
* **Awaiting Feedback** - You are reviewing the offer, discussing it internally or waiting for more details and haven’t made a decision yet.
* **Awaiting Samples** - You’re interested in the product but would like samples before deciding.
* **Rejected** - You’ve declined the offer and chosen not to range the product.
{% hint style="warning" %}
Offer products can only be ranged individually and cannot be ranged in bulk, so **Ranged** will not be an option.
{% endhint %}
You also have the option to include a message with your response.
All messages between you and your supplier are shown on the offer details page as a record of your correspondence. You can continue messaging until you choose to range or reject the product. Your supplier will receive an email for each response, and you’ll also be notified via email when they reply.
# Searching & Filtering the Offers List
Searching and filtering the Offers List makes it easier to quickly find specific offers and focus on the products, customers, or offer statuses you need.
The **Offers Page** provides a central place to quickly find, view, and manage offers in Supply’d. Using the search and filter options, you can narrow the list to locate a specific offer or view a group of offers that meet particular criteria. This makes it easier to find the offers you need without having to manually browse through the entire list.
On the **Offers** tab of the **Products** page, select the magnifying glass to search for a specific offer by product or supplier name or keyword.
To narrow the list based on specific criteria, select the 3 lines beside the 3 dots in the top right to open the **Filter Offers** form. You can use multiple filters together to quickly find the offers relevant to the task you are completing.
**Supplier**
Filter offers to show only those received from selected suppliers. This makes it easier to review offers from a specific supplier.
**Issue Date Range**
Filter offers based on when they were issued. Select a date range to view offers issued within a specific period.
Click to apply your selections and filter the **Offers** list.
# Product Price Changes
Adding price changes in Supply’d ensures up-to-date costs, better margin control, and smarter purchasing decisions.
In Supply’d, you can easily manage product pricing by applying changes to individual products, entire categories, or your full product range. Price adjustments can be made as a set price, a percentage increase or decrease, or a fixed dollar amount - giving you full flexibility in how you update prices. You can also schedule these changes to start on a specific date, making it easy to plan ahead for promotions or supplier price updates. Additionally, bulk price updates allow you to save time by adjusting multiple products at once instead of editing each one manually.
This feature is especially useful when suppliers update their pricing, seasonal promotions are planned, or you need to adjust prices across a whole product category, eg. increasing all chocolate products by 5% before Easter or reducing discontinued items by $1 to clear stock.
This document explains how to apply price changes to your products and schedule when the new prices will take effect.
* [#products-page-pricing-tab](#products-page-pricing-tab "mention")
* [#adding-a-price-change](#adding-a-price-change "mention")
* [#bulk-adding-price-changes](#bulk-adding-price-changes "mention")
* [#editing-a-price-change](#editing-a-price-change "mention")
* [#removing-a-price-change](#removing-a-price-change "mention")
* [#bulk-actions](#bulk-actions "mention") - Print Shelf Tickets, Export, Remove
* [#exporting-the-pricing-schedule](#exporting-the-pricing-schedule "mention")
* [#searching-and-filtering-the-pricing-list](#searching-and-filtering-the-pricing-list "mention")
***
## Products Page - Pricing Tab
Selecting **Products** from the main menu opens the **Products** page. The **Products** page in Supply’d shows a list of all the products you buy, sell, or produce.
Under the **Pricing** tab, the **Pricing Schedule** list displays all of your products with upcoming price changes.
***
## Adding a Price Change
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Go to the Products Pricing Page
1. Select **Products** from the main menu. The **Products** page will open, showing a list of all your products.
2. Open the **Pricing** tab to see a list of your products with any upcoming price changes, if added.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click Add+
To add a new price change, click the **Add +** button in the top right.
The **Add Price Change** form will open.
{% hint style="success" %}
To open or close the sections on this form, click the little arrows to the right of the titles (as circled in red above).
{% endhint %}
Complete the sections as per the guidelines below:
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Products & Channels
Define the products and sales channels affected by this price change.
**Sales Channels**
Limit the price change to specific sales channel(s) by selecting one or more channels.
Leave it set to **Default Pricing** to update pricing to your defaults.
{% hint style="info" %}
Your list will vary depending on your sales channels.
👉 See the [Integrations](/supplyd-erp/settings/integrations) for information on connecting third-party platforms with Supply’d.
👉 Refer to the [Supply'd Stores](/supplyd-erp/settings/supplyd-stores) for details on creating and managing stores within Supply'd.
{% endhint %}
**Apply To**
Choose how you want to select the products to update pricing for.
* **Selected Products:** Apply the price changes to only the selected products.
* **Selected Categories:** Apply the price changes to products in selected categories.
* **All Products:** Apply the price changes to all your products.
**Products**
This field will show when **Selected Products** is selected the **Apply** to field.
Clicking on or typing in the **Products** field will display a list of your products to choose from.
**Categories**
This field will show when **Selected Categories** is selected the **Apply** to field.
Clicking on or typing in the **Categories** field will display a list of your categories to choose from.
{% hint style="success" %}
For example, we want to run a sale on our Unicorn Chocolates across all our sales channels.
We would:
* Leave **Sales Channels** set to "Default Pricing".
* Choose "Selected Products" in the **Apply To** field.
* Add all our Unicorn Chocolates to the **Products** field.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Price Adjustment
Defines how the product prices are being changed.
**Price Action**
Select how you want to modify the product prices.
* **No Change:** No change to the product's price.
* **Reset to Default:** Will reset to the default price.
* **Set New Price:** Set a specific new price. \
\
When this is selected an additional field - **Price (inc tax)** - will appear for you to enter the new price.
* **% Increase:** Set the price(s) to increase by a certain percentage. \
\
When this is selected an additional field - **Price Adjustment (%)** - will appear for you to add the percentage.
* **$ Increase:** Set the price(s) to increase by a certain dollar amount. \
\
When this is selected an additional field - **Price (inc tax)** - will appear for you to enter the amount.
* **% Decrease:** Set the price(s) to decrease by a certain percentage. \
\
When this is selected an additional field - **Price Adjustment (%)** - will appear for you to add the percentage.
* **$ Decrease:** Set the price(s) to decrease by a certain dollar amount. \
\
When this is selected an additional field - **Price** - will appear for you to enter the amount.
**Sales Price Action**
Select how you'll modify the product prices. This is calculated after the price adjustment.
The options and additional fields for the **Sales Price Action** are the same as those for the **Price Action** above.
* **No Change:** No change to the product's sales price.
* **Reset to Default:** Will reset to the default sale price.
* **Set New Price:** Set a specific new sale price.
* **% Increase:** Set the sale price(s) to increase by a certain percentage.
* **$ Increase:** Set the sale price(s) to increase by a certain dollar amount.
* **% Decrease:** Set the sale price(s) to decrease by a certain percentage.
* **$ Decrease:** Set the sale price(s) to decrease by a certain dollar amount.
{% hint style="success" %}
In our example, our sale will have 10% off the price of all Unicorn Chocolates.
In this case we would:
* Leave the **Price Action** set to "No Change".
* Enter "10" in the **Price Adjustment (%)** field for the **Sales Price Action**.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Effective Period
Defines when the price change will take effect.
**Start Date**
Select the date this price change occurs. Leave blank to update prices immediately.
Clicking on the field will open a calendar for you to select the start date.
**End Date**
Select the date when the price will revert to its original value - for example, after a limited-time sale.
Leave blank for an indefinite price change.
{% hint style="info" %}
If you have added both a start and end date for the price change, then the items will appear on the **Pricing Schedule** twice - once for the pricing on the start date and again for the pricing on the end date.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="success" %}
For example, if we want our Unicorn sale to run for one week.
We would:
* Select the start date, eg. 12 January, from the **Start Date** calendar.
* Choose the end date 7 days later, eg. 18 January, from the **End Date** calendar.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Save
Click to apply the price change. You will be asked to confirm.
Click .
The products will appear on the **Pricing Schedule** under the **Pricing** tab.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
## Bulk Adding Price Changes
If you have multiple varying price changes to apply, you can bulk import them from a spreadsheet. You must use a specific template so Supply’d can correctly import the values.
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Go to the Products Pricing Page
To start and to get the template:
1. Select **Products** from the main menu.
2. Open the **Pricing** tab.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Select Import
Click on the three dots on the top right, then select **Import > Pricing**.
The **Import Product Price Changes** form will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click on Download Template
1. Click on **Download the template** to download our base template containing some sample products for your guidance.
2. The **Export Product Price Changes** form will open.
3. Select "Sample Data" from the **Status** menu.
4. Click .
You can open the downloaded template in any spreadsheet application such as Excel or Numbers.
{% hint style="warning" %}
You should remove the sample products from the file before importing to Supply'd.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="success" %}
You can also export all, future or past price changes to your computer by selecting the relevant option from the menu. This is useful when updating pricing across a large number of products. In this case, you can also choose the **sales channel** for which you want to export the pricing data.
👉 See [#exporting-the-pricing-schedule](#exporting-the-pricing-schedule "mention") below.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Complete the Template
Complete the template by entering the required information as described in the guidance below:
**ID**
Unique Supply'd product ID.
**SKU**
Enter the product's SKU.
**Barcode**
Enter the product's barcode.
**Product (ignored)**
Enter the product's name.
**Tax (ignored)**
Include whether or not the price includes taxes such as GST.
**Price**
Add the current price or, if the item isn't on sale, the new price.
**Sale Price**
If the product is on sale, add the sale price.
**Start Date**
Enter the date this price change occurs. Leave blank to update prices immediately.
**End Date**
Enter the date the price reverts back to what it was, for example, if you're running a limited-time sale.
Leave blank for an indefinite price change.
{% hint style="warning" %}
**Important:** The Pricing CSV works differently from most other bulk imports in Supply’d. When importing products or other data, a blank field means the field will be imported as empty. If the field already contains a value in Supply’d, that existing value will be cleared when the CSV is imported. For **Price Changes**, a blank field means **leave the existing value unchanged**.
This is because the CSV allows you to update both the **Price** and **Sale Price** at the same time. For example, you may want to add or change a sale price without changing the product’s standard price, or update the standard price while keeping the current sale price.
* **Leave blank** – The existing price remains unchanged.
* **Enter `$0`** – Resets that price to the default/no value.
* **Enter an amount** – Updates the price to the specified amount.
For example, if a product currently has a **Sale Price** and you want to remove it, enter **`$0`** in the Sale Price column. Do not leave the field blank, as a blank field will leave the current Sale Price unchanged.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Import the Price Changes
As above, click on the 3 dots in the top right, then select **Import** > **Pricing**.
The **Import Product Price Changes** form will open.
**Upload CSV File \[required field]**
This allows you to select the CSV file to upload.
Click on to select the CSV file you just completed.
{% hint style="warning" %}
After selecting the file please ensure you wait for the file to successfully upload before clicking Import.
{% endhint %}
**Sales Channel**
Select the **Sales Channel** that you are importing the pricing for.
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 See the [Integrations](/supplyd-erp/settings/integrations) for information on connecting third-party platforms with Supply’d.
👉 Refer to the [Supply'd Stores](/supplyd-erp/settings/supplyd-stores) for details on creating and managing stores within Supply'd.
{% endhint %}
Once the file has successfully uploaded, click to begin the import. Price changes will be imported into Supply'd so if you have a lot of price changes please be patient.
{% hint style="info" %}
The price changes process runs automatically on a 15-minute schedule. Changes may therefore take up to 15 minutes to be applied.
{% endhint %}
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
## Editing a Price Change
To edit a Price Change:
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Select **Products** from the main menu, then go to the **Pricing** tab.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click on the **Price Change** you would like to edit. The **Edit Price Change** form will appear.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Change the data as required following the guidelines above for [#adding-a-price-change](#adding-a-price-change "mention"), noting fewer options in the **Price Adjustment** menus.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click to apply the changes.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
### Edit Price Change - Additional Options
Prior to saving a price change, clicking on the 3 dots on the top right of the **Edit Price Change** form will open a menu with additional options:
***
#### View >
**Product**
Opens the product page for the selected item, allowing you to view or edit its details.
**Pricing Schedule**
Opens the Pricing Schedule for the item, where you can view its price changes.\
\
\
* **Status:** Choose to view **Future** or **Past** pricing schedules.
* **Sales Channel:** Allows you view the **Pricing Schedule** on your various **Sales Channels**.\
\
\
Clicking on the 3 dots in the top right of the **Pricing Schedule** page will open a menu with the option to **Add Price Change** for the item. Follow the steps above for [#adding-a-price-change](#adding-a-price-change "mention") to do this.\
\
***
#### Download >
**Product Label**
Opens the **Print Label** form, allowing you to generate and print labels for the product.
* **Template\* \[required field]:** Select the label template you want to use, either a custom label or a system label.\
👉 See the [Templating](/supplyd-erp/settings/templating) document for information on creating templates for labels.
* **Batch:** Select the batch code to print on the label. Leave as "None" to not include the code.
* **Copies:** Select the number of copies to print.
**Customisation**
* **Font\* \[required field]:** Select the font to use.
* **Barcode:** Select the barcode format to use. Leave as "None" to not include a barcode.
* **Logo:** Select the logo to use on the label.
* **Custom Text:** Add any custom text you may want ot include.
Click to generate the label.
***
#### Remove
Will remove the price change.
👉 See [#removing-a-price-change](#removing-a-price-change "mention") below for full details.
***
## Removing a Price Change
To remove a Price Change:
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Select **Products** from the main menu, then go to the **Pricing** tab.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click on the **Price Change** you would like to remove. The **Edit Price Change** form will appear.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click on the 3 dots in the top right and select **Remove**.
You will be asked to confirm.
Click .
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
## Bulk Actions
The **Actions** button on the **Pricing Schedule** page gives you further options to perform actions in bulk - **Print Shelf Tickets**, **Export**, **Remove**.
Select one or more products from the list, then click the button to open the menu with options for the selected products.
{% hint style="success" %}
Clicking the box beside the button will select all products on the list.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="success" %}
Use the **Filter Product Pricing** form to narrow the list by specific criteria if you want to perform actions on matching products.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="info" %}
This button stays greyed out and inactive until at least one product is selected. After selecting products, the button turns blue and becomes clickable.
{% endhint %}
***
### Download
***
### Download > Product Labels
Opens the **Print Label** page, where you can print labels for the selected products.
{% hint style="success" %}
To remove an item from the list, simply click the "x" to the right of the product.
{% endhint %}
**Template**
Select the label template you want to use, either a custom label or a system label.
**Customisation**
Allows you to select the font, choose whether to include the product’s barcode, add your logo, and include any custom text on the label.
Click to generate the labels.
***
### Download > Print Shelf Tickets
Opens the **Print Product Tickets** form, allowing you to print shelf tickets for the selected items.
Click to generate the labels.
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 See the [Templating](/supplyd-erp/settings/templating) document for information on creating templates for labels.
{% endhint %}
***
### Export
Exports the pricing schedule for the selected items to your computer as a spreadsheet, as above in [#exporting-the-pricing-schedule](#exporting-the-pricing-schedule "mention").
***
### Remove
Will remove the price change for the selected item(s). You will be asked to confirm.
Click .
***
## Exporting the Pricing Schedule
**Price Change** details can be exported in a spreadsheet format if you’d like to view or print a copy.
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Select Export > Pricing
Click on the 3 dots in the top right of the page and select **Export** then **Pricing**.
The **Export Price Changes** form will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Complete the Form
**Status**
Select whether you want to export **All Price Changes**, **Past** or **Future** price changes.
* **All price changes**: Will include all price changes, past and future.
* **Past**: Includes all product price changes that have already taken effect.
* **Future**: Includes product price changes that are scheduled to take effect at a later date.
{% hint style="info" %}
Selecting the appropriate status ensures that your export contains only the price changes relevant to your needs, making it easier to review or report on historical or upcoming pricing adjustments.
{% endhint %}
**Sales Channel**
Select the **Sales Channel** that you are exporting the pricing for.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click Export
Click the button.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Close the Export Form
To close the form, click the **“X”** located at the top right corner of the form.
The price change details will be downloaded to your computer as a spreadsheet.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
## Searching & Filtering the Pricing List
On the **Products** page **Pricing** tab, the three lines next to the three dots in the top right allow you to filter the **Pricing Schedule** list, while the magnifying glass lets you search for specific items.
Clicking on the magnifying glass, you can search the products list by product name or word.
Clicking the three lines opens the **Filter Pricing Schedule** form, where you can access all available filtering options.
**Status**
Select the status, either **Future** or **Past**, to filter the list.
**Sales Channel**
Select the **Sales Channel**(s) that you would like to filter the list by.
**Start Date Range**
Select the date range you want to filter by.
Clicking the field will open a calendar to choose your dates. Click to set the range.
**Product**
Select the specific product(s) you would like to filter by.
**Brand**
Select the brand(s) you would like to filter by.
**Category**
Select the categories you would like to filter by.
**Tags**
Select the tag(s) that you would like to filter the list by from the drop-down menu, eg. gluten-free, vegan, etc.
Click to apply your selected criteria and view the filtered list of items.
# Adding a Price Change
Adding price changes in Supply’d ensures up-to-date costs, better margin control, and smarter purchasing decisions.
**Supply’d** allows you to schedule price changes in advance, making it easier to plan and manage pricing updates across your products and sales channels. You can set future pricing to take effect on a specific date, helping ensure that price changes are applied at the right time without needing to update them manually.
Scheduling price changes is particularly useful for planned price increases, promotions, seasonal pricing, or other changes that need to take effect at a future date.
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 Price changes can also be added for multiple products at once. See the [Adding Price Changes in Bulk](/supplyd-erp/products/product-price-changes/adding-price-changes-in-bulk) document for more details.
{% endhint %}
This document explains how to apply price changes to your products and schedule when the new prices will take effect.
***
### How to Add a Price Change
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Go to the Products Pricing Page
1. Select **Products** from the main menu. The **Products** page will open, displaying a list of all your products.
2. Go to the **Pricing** tab to view a list of products with any upcoming price changes that have been added.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click Add+
To add a new price change, click the **Add +** button in the top right.
The **Add Price Change** form will open.
{% hint style="success" %}
To open or close the sections on this form, click the little arrows to the right of the titles (as circled in red above).
{% endhint %}
Complete the sections as per the guidelines below:
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Products & Channels
This section defines the sales channels and products that the price change will apply to.
**Sales Channels**
Select one or more **Sales Channels** to limit which channels the price change will apply to.
Leave this set to **Default Pricing** to apply the change to your default pricing.
{% hint style="info" %}
Your list will vary depending on your sales channels.
👉 See the [Integrations](/supplyd-erp/settings/integrations) for information on connecting third-party platforms with Supply’d.
👉 Refer to the [Supply'd Stores](/supplyd-erp/settings/supplyd-stores) for details on creating and managing stores within Supply'd.
{% endhint %}
**Apply To**
Choose how you want to select the products that the price change will apply to.
* **Selected Products** - Apply the price change only to the specific products you select.
* **Selected Categories** - Apply the price change to all products within the categories you select.
* **All Products** - Apply the price change to all products in your product list.
{% hint style="info" %}
The next field will vary depending on your selection in the **Apply To** field.
{% endhint %}
**Products**
The **Products** field is displayed when **Selected Products** is selected in the **Apply To** field.
Click or type in the **Products** field to view and search the list of available products.
**Categories**
This field is displayed when **Selected Categories** is selected in the **Apply To** field.
Clicking on or typing in the **Categories** field will display a list of your categories to choose from.
{% hint style="success" %}
For example, we want to run a sale on our Unicorn Chocolates across all our sales channels.
We would:
* Leave **Sales Channels** set to "Default Pricing".
* Choose "Selected Products" in the **Apply To** field.
* Add all our Unicorn Chocolates to the **Products** field.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Price Adjustment
Define how the product prices will be changed, including the type and amount of the adjustment.
{% hint style="success" %}
**Price Action vs Sales Price Action**
* **Price Action** - Defines the change to the product’s **base/default price**. This is the starting price used when calculating any sales price adjustment.
* **Sales Price Action** - Defines the change to the product’s **sales price**. This adjustment is calculated **after the Price Action** has been applied.
For example, if the base price is increased by **10%** using **Price Action**, the **Sales Price Action** can then apply an additional increase or decrease to the resulting price.
{% endhint %}
***
**Price Action**
Select how you want to modify the product prices, including whether to increase, decrease, reset, or set a new price.
* **No Change** - No change to the product's price.
* **Reset to Default** - Will reset to the default price.
* **Set New Price** - Set a specific new price. \
\
When this option is selected, a **Price (inc tax)** field will appear, allowing you to enter the new price.
* **% Increase** - Increase the price(s) by a specified percentage. \
\
When this option is selected, a **Price Adjustment (%)** field will appear, allowing you to enter the percentage increase.
* **$ Increase** - Increase the price(s) by a specified dollar amount. \
\
When this option is selected, a **Price Adjustment ($)** field will appear, allowing you to enter the amount of the increase.
* **% Decrease** - Decrease the price(s) by a specified percentage. \
\
When this option is selected, a **Price Adjustment (%)** field will appear, allowing you to enter the percentage decrease.
* **$ Decrease** - Decrease the price(s) by a specified dollar amount. \
\
When this option is selected, a **Price Adjustment ($)** field will appear, allowing you to enter the amount of the decrease.
***
**Sales Price Action**
Select how you want to modify the product’s sales prices. The sales price adjustment is applied after the **Price Action** has been calculated.
The available options and additional fields for **Sales Price Action** are the same as those available for **Price Action** above.
* **No Change** - Make no change to the product's sales price.
* **Reset to Default** - Reset the sales price(s) to the default sale price.
* **Set New Price** - Set a specific new sales price.
* **% Increase** - Increase the sales price(s) by a specified percentage.
* **$ Increase** - Increase the sales price(s) by a specified dollar amount.
* **% Decrease** - Decrease the sales price(s) by a specified percentage.
* **$ Decrease** - Decrease the sales price(s) by a specified dollar amount.
{% hint style="success" %}
In our example, our sale will have 10% off the price of all Unicorn Chocolates.
In this case we would:
* Leave the **Price Action** set to "No Change".
* Enter "10" in the **Price Adjustment (%)** field for the **Sales Price Action**.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Effective Period
Define when the price change will take effect and, if applicable, when it will end. This allows you to schedule pricing changes for a specific period.
**Start Date**
Select the date when the price change will take effect. Leave this field blank if you want the price change to take effect immediately.
Click the field to open the calendar and select the required start date.
**End Date**
Select the date when the price will revert to its original value, such as when a limited-time sale ends.
Leave this field blank if the price change should remain in effect indefinitely.
{% hint style="info" %}
If you have added both a start and end date for the price change, then the items will appear on the **Pricing Schedule** twice - once for the pricing on the start date and again for the pricing on the end date.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="success" %}
For example, if we want our Unicorn sale to run for one week.
We would:
* Select the start date, eg. 12 January, from the **Start Date** calendar.
* Choose the end date 7 days later, eg. 18 January, from the **End Date** calendar.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Save
Click to apply the price change. You will be asked to confirm.
Click .
The products will appear on the **Pricing Schedule** under the **Pricing** tab, where you can view the scheduled price changes and their effective dates.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
# Adding Price Changes in Bulk
Bulk price changes save time, reduce manual updates, and help ensure pricing is applied consistently and accurately across multiple products.
**Supply’d** allows you to apply price changes to multiple products at once using a specific CSV spreadsheet template, making it easier to manage large numbers of pricing updates efficiently. Instead of updating each product individually, you can prepare the required changes in a CSV file and import them in bulk.
Bulk price changes are useful for managing planned price increases, decreases, promotions, or other pricing updates across multiple products and sales channels.
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 Price changes can also be added individually from a product’s page. See the [Adding a Price Change](/supplyd-erp/products/product-price-changes/adding-a-price-change) document for details on how to do this.
{% endhint %}
The following steps will guide you through the process:
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Go to the Products Pricing Page
To begin the bulk price change process and download the CSV template:
1. Select **Products** from the main menu.
2. Open the **Pricing** tab to view a list of products with any upcoming price changes that have been added.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Select Import
Click on the 3 dots on the top right, then select **Import > Pricing**.
The **Import Product Price Changes** form will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click on Download Template
1. Click on **Download the template** to download our base template containing some sample products for your guidance.
2. The **Export Product Price Changes** form will open.
3. Select "Sample Data" from the **Status** menu.
4. Click .
You can open the downloaded template in any spreadsheet application such as Excel or Numbers.
{% hint style="success" %}
You can also export all, future, or past price changes to your computer by selecting the relevant option from the menu. When exporting pricing data, you can also select the **Sales Channel** you want to export. This is particularly useful when reviewing or updating pricing for a large number of products.
👉 See [#exporting-the-pricing-schedule](#exporting-the-pricing-schedule "mention") below.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Complete the Template
Complete the template by entering the required information as described in the guidance below:
{% hint style="warning" %}
* Follow the column headings carefully.
* Do not change column names.
* Delete any sample data before importing.
* Double-check that all required fields are filled out correctly before uploading.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="danger" %}
**Important:** The title row should remain in the document in order for the system to match the columns when imported.
{% endhint %}
**ID**
The unique **Supply’d product ID** used to identify the product.
**SKU**
Enter the product's SKU.
**Barcode**
Enter the product's barcode.
**Product (ignored)**
Enter the product's name.
**Tax (ignored)**
Indicate whether the price includes taxes, such as **GST**.
**Price**
Enter the current price or, if the product is not currently on sale, enter the new price.
**Sale Price**
If the product is currently on sale, enter the sale price.
**Start Date**
Enter the date this price change occurs. Leave blank to update prices immediately.
**End Date**
Enter the date the price reverts back to what it was, for example, if you're running a limited-time sale.
Leave blank for an indefinite price change.
{% hint style="warning" %}
**Important:** The Pricing CSV works differently from most other bulk imports in Supply’d. When importing products or other data, a blank field means the field will be imported as empty. If the field already contains a value in Supply’d, that existing value will be cleared when the CSV is imported. For **Price Changes**, a blank field means **leave the existing value unchanged**.
This is because the CSV allows you to update both the **Price** and **Sale Price** at the same time. For example, you may want to add or change a sale price without changing the product’s standard price, or update the standard price while keeping the current sale price.
* **Leave blank** – The existing price remains unchanged.
* **Enter `$0`** – Resets that price to the default/no value.
* **Enter an amount** – Updates the price to the specified amount.
For example, if a product currently has a **Sale Price** and you want to remove it, enter **`$0`** in the Sale Price column. Do not leave the field blank, as a blank field will leave the current Sale Price unchanged.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Save/Export the File as a CSV File
Once you have completed the template, save or export the file in **CSV format**. This ensures the file is in the correct format for uploading into **Supply’d**.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Import the Price Changes
Click on the 3 dots in the top right, then select **Import** > **Pricing**.
The **Import Product Price Changes** form will open.
**Upload CSV File \[required field]**
Select the completed CSV file you want to upload.
Click on to browse your computer and select the CSV file you have completed.
{% hint style="warning" %}
After selecting the file please ensure you wait for the file to successfully upload before clicking Import.
{% endhint %}
**Sales Channel**
Select the **Sales Channel** that the pricing information is being imported for.
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 See the [Integrations](/supplyd-erp/settings/integrations) for information on connecting third-party platforms with Supply’d.
👉 Refer to the [Supply'd Stores](/supplyd-erp/settings/supplyd-stores) for details on creating and managing stores within Supply'd.
{% endhint %}
Once the file has successfully uploaded, click to begin the import process. Supply’d will process the file and import the price changes into the system. If you are importing a large number of price changes, the process may take some time, so please be patient.
{% hint style="info" %}
The price changes process runs automatically on a 15-minute schedule. Changes may therefore take up to 15 minutes to be applied.
{% endhint %}
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
# Exporting the Pricing Schedule
Exporting the Pricing Schedule makes it easier to review, share, and manage pricing information outside of Supply’d, saving time when working with multiple scheduled price changes.
Supply’d allows you to export your **Pricing Schedule** as a spreadsheet, making it easy to review and manage scheduled price changes outside of Supply’d. You can export pricing information for selected products or the entire schedule, providing a convenient way to review upcoming and past price changes.
{% hint style="success" %}
You can also export the **Pricing Schedule** for selected products using the **Export** option in the menu.
👉 Refer to the [Pricing Schedule Bulk Actions](/supplyd-erp/products/product-price-changes/pricing-schedule-bulk-actions) document for details.
{% endhint %}
The following steps will guide you through the process:
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Go to the Products Pricing Page
1. Select **Products** from the main menu. The **Products** page will open, displaying a list of all your products.
2. Go to the **Pricing** tab to view a list of products with any upcoming price changes that have been added.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Select Export > Pricing
Click on the 3 dots in the top right and select **Export** then **Pricing**.
The **Export Product Price Changes** form will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Complete the Form
**Status**
Select whether you want to export **All Price Changes**, **Past** or **Future** price changes.
* **All Price Changes** - Includes all price changes, including those that have already taken effect and those scheduled for the future.
* **Past** - Includes all product price changes that have already taken effect.
* **Future** - Includes product price changes that are scheduled to take effect at a later date.
{% hint style="info" %}
Selecting the appropriate status ensures that your export contains only the price changes relevant to your needs, making it easier to review or report on historical or upcoming pricing adjustments.
👉 The **Sample Data** option is used when [Adding Price Changes in Bulk](/supplyd-erp/products/product-price-changes/adding-price-changes-in-bulk).
{% endhint %}
**Sales Channel**
Select the **Sales Channel** for which you want to export the pricing information.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click Export
Click the button.
The **Product Price Changes** will be downloaded to your computer in spreadsheet format.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
# Managing Price Changes
Adding price changes in Supply’d ensures up-to-date costs, better margin control, and smarter purchasing decisions.
Managing price changes in **Supply’d** allows you to review and manage pricing updates that have been applied or scheduled for your products. From the **Pricing Schedule**, you can view upcoming and past price changes, make adjustments, and perform actions across multiple pricing records.
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 The [#adding-a-price-change](#adding-a-price-change "mention") and [Adding Price Changes in Bulk](/supplyd-erp/products/product-price-changes/adding-price-changes-in-bulk) documents outline how to add price changes for your products.
{% endhint %}
This section explains how to review and manage scheduled price changes, including updating, exporting, and removing price changes as needed.
* [#products-page-pricing-tab](#products-page-pricing-tab "mention")
* [#price-change-additional-options](#price-change-additional-options "mention")
* [#bulk-actions](#bulk-actions "mention")
* [#editing-a-price-change](#editing-a-price-change "mention")
* [#removing-a-price-change](#removing-a-price-change "mention")
***
## Products Page Pricing Tab
Selecting **Products** from the main menu opens the **Products** page, which displays a list of all the products you buy, sell, or produce in Supply’d.
Under the **Pricing** tab, the **Pricing Schedule** list displays the products with upcoming price changes, allowing you to view and manage scheduled pricing updates.
***
## Price Change Additional Options
Clicking a price change in the **Pricing Schedule** list opens the **Edit Price Change** form with the details for that price change populated.
Clicking the 3 dots in the top right of the **Edit Price Change** form opens a menu with additional options:
***
### View
#### Product
Opens the product page for the selected item, allowing you to view or edit its details.
#### Pricing Schedule
Opens the Pricing Schedule for the item, where you can view its price changes.\
\
\
**Status**
Choose to view **Future** or **Past** pricing schedules.
**Sales Channel**
Allows you view the **Pricing Schedule** on your various **Sales Channels**.\
\
{% hint style="success" %}
Clicking on the 3 dots in the top right of the **Pricing Schedule** page will open a menu with the option to **Add Price Change** for the item.
👉 Follow the steps above for [Adding a Price Change](/supplyd-erp/products/product-price-changes/adding-a-price-change) to do this.
{% endhint %}
***
### Download
#### Product Label
Opens the **Print Label** form, allowing you to generate and print labels for the product.
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 See the [Printing Product Labels](/supplyd-erp/products/managing-products/printing-product-labels) document for full details on printing labels.
{% endhint %}
***
### Remove
Will remove the price change.
👉 See [#removing-a-price-change](#removing-a-price-change "mention") below for full details.
***
## Bulk Actions
The button on the **Pricing Schedule** page provides options for performing actions in bulk, including printing labels and shelf tickets, exporting the schedule, and removing price changes.
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 These options are described in detail in the [Pricing Schedule Bulk Actions](/supplyd-erp/products/product-price-changes/pricing-schedule-bulk-actions) document.
{% endhint %}
***
## Editing a Price Change
To edit a Price Change:
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Select **Products** from the main menu, then go to the **Pricing** tab.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click on the **Price Change** you would like to edit. The **Edit Price Change** form will appear.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Change the data as required following the guidelines for [Adding a Price Change](/supplyd-erp/products/product-price-changes/adding-a-price-change), noting fewer options in the **Price Adjustment** menus.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click to apply the changes.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
## Removing a Price Change
To remove a Price Change:
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Select **Products** from the main menu, then go to the **Pricing** tab.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click on the **Price Change** you would like to remove. The **Edit Price Change** form will appear.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click on the 3 dots in the top right and select **Remove**.
You will be asked to confirm.
Click .
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
# Pricing Schedule Bulk Actions
Using Bulk Actions saves time, reduces repetitive tasks, and makes it easier to manage multiple pricing changes efficiently.
**Supply’d** allows you to manage multiple scheduled price changes at once using **Bulk Actions**. Select multiple pricing records to perform actions such as printing shelf tickets, exporting pricing information, or removing scheduled price changes, saving time when managing large numbers of pricing updates.
This document explains how to use **Bulk Actions** to manage scheduled price changes in the **Pricing Schedule**.
* [#accessing-the-actions-menu](#accessing-the-actions-menu "mention")
* [#actions-options](#actions-options "mention")
* [#download](#download "mention")
* [#product-labels](#product-labels "mention")
* [#print-shelf-tickets](#print-shelf-tickets "mention")
* [#export](#export "mention")
* [#remove](#remove "mention")
***
## Accessing the Actions Menu
The button on the **Pricing Schedule** page provides options for performing actions in bulk, including printing labels and shelf tickets, exporting the schedule, and removing price changes.
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Go to the Products Pricing Page
1. Select **Products** from the main menu. The **Products** page will open, displaying a list of all your products.
2. Go to the **Pricing** tab to view a list of products with any upcoming price changes that have been added.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Select the Products
Select one or more products from the list by ticking the checkbox beside each product.
{% hint style="success" %}
Clicking the box beside the button will select all products on the list.\
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="success" %}
Use the **Filter Product Pricing** form to narrow the list by specific criteria if you want to perform actions on matching products.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="info" %}
The button remains greyed out and inactive until at least one product is selected. Once you select one or more products, the button turns blue and becomes clickable, allowing you to access the available bulk actions.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Open the Actions Menu
Click the button to open the menu and view the available options for the selected products.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
## Actions Options
### Download
***
#### Product Labels
Opens the **Print Label** page, where you can print labels for the selected products.
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 See the [Printing Product Labels in Bulk](/supplyd-erp/products/managing-products/printing-product-labels-in-bulk) document for full details.
{% endhint %}
***
#### Print Shelf Tickets
Opens the **Print Product Tickets** form, allowing you to print shelf tickets for the selected items.
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 See the [Printing Shelf Tickets in Bulk](/supplyd-erp/products/managing-products/printing-shelf-tickets-in-bulk) document for full details.
{% endhint %}
***
### Export
Exports the pricing schedule for the selected products to your computer as a spreadsheet, allowing you to review or manage the pricing information outside of Supply’d.
***
### Remove
Will remove the price change for the selected item(s). You will be asked to confirm.
Click .
# Searching & Filtering the Pricing Schedule List
Using the search and filter options makes it quicker and easier to find the pricing information you need, helping you manage pricing efficiently and keep records organised.
The **Pricing Schedule List** allows you to quickly find and manage pricing records in Supply’d. Using the **search** and **filter** options, you can locate specific pricing records or narrow the list to view pricing that meets particular criteria, making it easier to manage and maintain your **Pricing Schedule** information.
On the **Pricing** page, select the magnifying glass to search for a specific **Pricing Schedule** record by name or keyword.
To narrow the list based on specific criteria, select the 3 lines beside the 3 dots in the top right to open the available filters. You can use these options together to quickly find the pricing records relevant to the task you are completing.
Clicking the 3 lines opens the **Filter Pricing Schedule** form, giving you access to all available filtering options.
**Status**
Select the status you want to use to filter the **Pricing Schedule** list. Choose **Future** to view pricing that is scheduled to take effect, or **Past** to view pricing that has already ended.
**Sales Channel**
Select one or more **Sales Channels** to filter the **Pricing Schedule** list by where the pricing applies. This allows you to quickly view pricing associated with a specific sales channel or group of channels.
**Start Date Range**
Select the date range you want to use to filter the **Pricing Schedule** list by the pricing start date. This is useful for finding pricing records that begin within a specific period.
Click the field to open the calendar, then select the required start and end dates. Click to set the range.
**Product**
Select one or more specific **Products** to filter the **Pricing Schedule** list. This allows you to quickly view pricing records associated with the selected products.
**Brand**
Select one or more **Brands** to filter the **Pricing Schedule** list. This is useful when you want to view pricing for products from a specific brand or group of brands.
**Category**
Select one or more **Categories** to filter the **Pricing Schedule** list. This allows you to narrow the results to pricing records for products within the selected categories.
**Tags**
Select one or more **Tags** to filter the **Pricing Schedule** list by specific product attributes. For example, you can select **Gluten Free**, **Vegan**, or other tags to view the pricing for products with those tags.
Click to apply your selections and update the **Pricing Schedule** list to display only the records that match your chosen criteria.
# Promotions
Supply’d Product Promotions enable you to create and manage special offers across your sales channels, helping boost sales, increase customer engagement, and promote selected products with ease.
# Customer Promotions
Supply’d Product Promotions enable you to create and manage special offers across your sales channels, helping boost sales, increase customer engagement, and promote selected products with ease.
**Customer Promotions** allow you to create and manage special offers that encourage customers to purchase more and increase sales. Supply’d makes it easy to set up targeted promotions for selected products, customer groups, or sales channels, ensuring discounts and offers are applied consistently and automatically.
This doc will guide you through the Promotions process, including:
* [#the-customer-promotions-page](#the-customer-promotions-page "mention")
* [#creating-a-promotion](#creating-a-promotion "mention")
* [#what-happens-next](#what-happens-next "mention")
* [#removing-a-promotion](#removing-a-promotion "mention")
***
## The Customer Promotions Page
From the **Customer Promotions** page, you can create promotional offers, define eligibility and pricing, manage active and upcoming promotions, and review expired offers. Whether you are running a limited-time sale, promoting new products, or rewarding loyal customers, Customer Promotions help you deliver targeted offers while simplifying promotion management and maintaining control over your promotional pricing.
To view the Customer Promotions page, select **Customers** from the main menu and go to the **Promotions** tab.
{% hint style="info" %}
The number in the grey box to the right of each promotion - - indicates how many customers that the promotion has been sent to.
{% endhint %}
Alternatively, to view promotions assigned to a specific customer, select the customer from the **Customers** list, then open the **Promotions** tab on the customer's page.
***
#### Promotion Details
Clicking on a promotion displays its details, including the offer information, description, customers the promotion has been sent to, its status, and any other relevant promotion details.
{% hint style="success" %}
Promotion Statuses are colour-coded for easy identification:\
* - The customer has been sent the promotion.
* - The customer has removed the promotion.
{% endhint %}
***
## Creating a Promotion
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Go to the Promotions Tab
Select **Customers** from the main menu, then open the **Promotions** tab.
{% hint style="success" %}
Alternatively, you can select a customer from the **Customers** list, then open the **Promotions** tab on the customer's page.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click Add +
Click **Add+** in the top right corner.
The **Create Promotion** form will open.
{% hint style="success" %}
To open or close the sections on this form click the little arrows to the right of the titles (as circled in red above).
{% endhint %}
Complete the sections as per the guidelines below:
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Promotion Details
**Store**
Select which store the promotion is coming from. This is useful when managing promotions across multiple stores, allowing you to control where the offer is available.
**Customers**
Select the customers you would like to send the promotion to.
{% hint style="success" %}
If you open the **Create Promotion** form from a specific customer's page, that customer will be automatically selected. You can add additional customers to this field if you want to send the promotion to multiple customers.
{% endhint %}
**Description**
Add any additional details about the promotion. Use this field to explain the offer, highlight key benefits, or provide any information customers may need to understand the promotion, such as eligible products, special conditions, or promotional messaging.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Adjustment
**Adjustment Type\* \[required field]**
Select how the promotion discount will be applied. Depending on the option selected, additional fields will be displayed to configure the promotion details, such as the discount value, eligible products, or other adjustment settings.
This allows you to create different types of promotions, such as percentage discounts, fixed amount discounts, or other promotional adjustments, depending on how you want the offer to be applied.
* **Price Override:** Override the price to a new price, eg. $9.90.\
* **Increase $:** Increase by a fixed dollar amount, eg. $5 increase.
* **Increase %:** Increase by a percentage amount, eg. 10% increase.
* **Discount $:** Discount by a fixed dollar amount, eg. $5 off.
* **Discount %:** Discount by a percentage amount, eg. 10% off..
* **Buy X Save Y%:** Enter the percentage discount that customers receive when they purchase the required quantity of eligible items.
For example, a **Buy 3, Save 10%** promotion applies a **10%** discount when the **Minimum Qty** is set to **3** and the customer purchases three qualifying items.
\
\
{% hint style="success" %}
**Buy X Save Y%** is a quantity-based promotion where customers receive a percentage discount after purchasing a specified number of qualifying items.
**Examples:**
* **Buy 2, Save 10%:** Purchase any two eligible products and receive 10% off those items.
* **Buy 3, Save 20%:** Purchase three qualifying items and receive a 20% discount.
* **Buy 6, Save 15%:** Purchase six eligible products and save 15% on the qualifying items.
This promotion encourages customers to buy larger quantities by rewarding them with a percentage discount once the minimum purchase quantity is met. It can apply to a single product or a group of eligible products, depending on how the promotion is configured.
{% endhint %}
* **BOGO (Buy one, get one):** Enter the number of qualifying items required (**Minimum Qty**) and the number of free items to award (**Gifted Qty**). For example, if **Minimum Qty** is **2** and **Gifted Qty** is **1**, the customer receives 1 free item when they purchase 2 qualifying items.\
{% hint style="success" %}
**BOGO (Buy One, Get One)** is a promotional offer where purchasing a qualifying product entitles the customer to receive another product at a discount or for free.
**Examples:**
* **Buy One, Get One Free (BOGO):** Buy one loaf of bread and receive a second loaf free.
* **Buy Two, Get One Free:** Buy two qualifying items and receive a third item free.
BOGO promotions are commonly used to increase sales volume, encourage customers to purchase multiple items, and promote specific products or product ranges. They can apply to the same product or a group of eligible products, depending on how the promotion is configured.
\
\
**Best Practice:** \
Encourage customers to order the **total quantity they expect to receive**, including any free items. For example, with a **Buy 10, Get 10 Free** promotion, customers should order **20 items**, rather than ordering 10 and expecting an additional 10 to be added later.\
\
Ordering the full quantity ensures the promotion is applied correctly and provides greater accuracy throughout the fulfilment process. It also helps warehouse staff during **Pick & Pack**, as the pick list will show the full quantity to be picked (20 items in this example), reducing the risk of errors or missed free items.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Apply Adjustment
**Apply Adjustment To\* \[required field]**
Select whether the promotion adjustment should apply to all products or only selected products. This field determines the products, categories, or brands that will receive the promotion.
Depending on the option selected, additional fields will be displayed as follows:
* **All Products:** Applies the promotion to all products you sell.
* **Products:** Applies the promotion only to the selected products chosen from your product list.
* **Categories:** Applies the promotion to all products within selected product categories.
* **Brands:** Applies the promotion to products from selected brands.
**Start Date**
Select the date from which the promotion becomes active and the adjustment will be applied. Leave this field blank to make the promotion available immediately.
**End Date**
Select the date on which the promotion will no longer be active. Leave this field blank to keep the promotion running indefinitely.
{% hint style="warning" %}
Customer promotions are applied **after** any [Customer Specific Pricing](/supplyd-erp/customers/customer-specific-pricing). If a customer has a special price for a product, the promotion will stack on top of that price rather than the standard product price.\
\
For Example: If a product normally costs **$12.00**, but a customer has a special price of **$10.00**, and you create a **Buy 10, Get 10 Free** promotion, the promotion will be calculated using the customer's special price. This means the effective price becomes **$5.00 per item**, not **$6.00** based on the standard price.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click Send
Click to send the promotion to the selected customer(s).
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
### What Happens Next ?
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### The Customer Receives an Email
Once you send the promotion, the customer(s) will receive an email with details about the promotion.
Any promotions will also appear on the customer's **Suppliers** page under the **Promotions** tab, automatically marked as .
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Promotion is Applied
The promotional price will be displayed on your and the customer's **Products** page, **Favourites**, and other relevant areas throughout Supply’d. The customer will be able to purchase the product at the promotional price for the duration of the promotion.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
## Removing a Promotion
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Select the Promotion:
1. Select **Customers** from the main menu.
2. Go to the **Promotions** tab.
3. Select the promotion you would like to remove.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click on the 3 dots in the top right and select **Remove Promotion**.
You will be asked to confirm.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click .
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
# Creating a Customer Promotion
Supply’d Product Promotions enable you to create and manage special offers across your sales channels, helping boost sales, increase customer engagement, and promote selected products with ease.
**Customer Promotions** allow you to create and manage special offers that encourage customers to purchase more and increase sales. Supply’d makes it easy to set up targeted promotions for selected products, customer groups, or sales channels, ensuring discounts and offers are applied consistently and automatically.
This doc will guide you through the Promotions process, including:
* [#creating-a-promotion](#creating-a-promotion "mention")
* [#what-happens-next](#what-happens-next "mention")
***
## Creating a Promotion
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Go to the Promotions Tab
Select **Customers** from the main menu, then open the **Promotions** tab.
{% hint style="success" %}
Alternatively, you can select a customer from the **Customers** list, then open the **Promotions** tab on the customer's page.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click Add +
Click **Add+** in the top right corner.
The **Create Promotion** form will open.
{% hint style="success" %}
To open or close the sections on this form click the little arrows to the right of the titles (as circled in red above).
{% endhint %}
Complete the sections as per the guidelines below:
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Promotion Details
**Store**
Select which store the promotion is coming from. This is useful when managing promotions across multiple stores, allowing you to control where the offer is available.
**Customers**
Select the customers you would like to send the promotion to.
{% hint style="success" %}
If you open the **Create Promotion** form from a specific customer's page, that customer will be automatically selected. You can add additional customers to this field if you want to send the promotion to multiple customers.
{% endhint %}
**Description**
Add any additional details about the promotion. Use this field to explain the offer, highlight key benefits, or provide any information customers may need to understand the promotion, such as eligible products, special conditions, or promotional messaging.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Adjustment
**Adjustment Type\* \[required field]**
Select how the promotion discount will be applied. Depending on the option selected, additional fields will be displayed to configure the promotion details, such as the discount value, eligible products, or other adjustment settings.
This allows you to create different types of promotions, such as percentage discounts, fixed amount discounts, or other promotional adjustments, depending on how you want the offer to be applied.
* **Price Override:** Override the price to a new price, eg. $9.90.\
* **Increase $:** Increase by a fixed dollar amount, eg. $5 increase.
* **Increase %:** Increase by a percentage amount, eg. 10% increase.
* **Discount $:** Discount by a fixed dollar amount, eg. $5 off.
* **Discount %:** Discount by a percentage amount, eg. 10% off..
* **Buy X Save Y%:** Enter the percentage discount that customers receive when they purchase the required quantity of eligible items.
For example, a **Buy 3, Save 10%** promotion applies a **10%** discount when the **Minimum Qty** is set to **3** and the customer purchases three qualifying items.
\
\
{% hint style="success" %}
**Buy X Save Y%** is a quantity-based promotion where customers receive a percentage discount after purchasing a specified number of qualifying items.
**Examples:**
* **Buy 2, Save 10%:** Purchase any two eligible products and receive 10% off those items.
* **Buy 3, Save 20%:** Purchase three qualifying items and receive a 20% discount.
* **Buy 6, Save 15%:** Purchase six eligible products and save 15% on the qualifying items.
This promotion encourages customers to buy larger quantities by rewarding them with a percentage discount once the minimum purchase quantity is met. It can apply to a single product or a group of eligible products, depending on how the promotion is configured.
{% endhint %}
* **BOGO (Buy one, get one):** Enter the number of qualifying items required (**Minimum Qty**) and the number of free items to award (**Gifted Qty**). For example, if **Minimum Qty** is **2** and **Gifted Qty** is **1**, the customer receives 1 free item when they purchase 2 qualifying items.\
{% hint style="success" %}
**BOGO (Buy One, Get One)** is a promotional offer where purchasing a qualifying product entitles the customer to receive another product at a discount or for free.
**Examples:**
* **Buy One, Get One Free (BOGO):** Buy one loaf of bread and receive a second loaf free.
* **Buy Two, Get One Free:** Buy two qualifying items and receive a third item free.
BOGO promotions are commonly used to increase sales volume, encourage customers to purchase multiple items, and promote specific products or product ranges. They can apply to the same product or a group of eligible products, depending on how the promotion is configured.
\
\
**Best Practice:** \
Encourage customers to order the **total quantity they expect to receive**, including any free items. For example, with a **Buy 10, Get 10 Free** promotion, customers should order **20 items**, rather than ordering 10 and expecting an additional 10 to be added later.\
\
Ordering the full quantity ensures the promotion is applied correctly and provides greater accuracy throughout the fulfilment process. It also helps warehouse staff during **Pick & Pack**, as the pick list will show the full quantity to be picked (20 items in this example), reducing the risk of errors or missed free items.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Apply Adjustment
**Apply Adjustment To\* \[required field]**
Select whether the promotion adjustment should apply to all products or only selected products. This field determines the products, categories, or brands that will receive the promotion.
Depending on the option selected, additional fields will be displayed as follows:
* **All Products:** Applies the promotion to all products you sell.
* **Products:** Applies the promotion only to the selected products chosen from your product list.
* **Categories:** Applies the promotion to all products within selected product categories.
* **Brands:** Applies the promotion to products from selected brands.
**Start Date**
Select the date from which the promotion becomes active and the adjustment will be applied. Leave this field blank to make the promotion available immediately.
**End Date**
Select the date on which the promotion will no longer be active. Leave this field blank to keep the promotion running indefinitely.
{% hint style="warning" %}
Customer promotions are applied **after** any [Customer Specific Pricing](/supplyd-erp/customers/customer-specific-pricing). If a customer has a special price for a product, the promotion will stack on top of that price rather than the standard product price.\
\
For Example: If a product normally costs **$12.00**, but a customer has a special price of **$10.00**, and you create a **Buy 10, Get 10 Free** promotion, the promotion will be calculated using the customer's special price. This means the effective price becomes **$5.00 per item**, not **$6.00** based on the standard price.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click Send
Click to send the promotion to the selected customer(s).
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
### What Happens Next ?
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### The Customer Receives an Email
Once you send the promotion, the customer(s) will receive an email with details about the promotion.
Any promotions will also appear on the customer's **Suppliers** page under the **Promotions** tab, automatically marked as .
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Promotion is Applied
The promotional price will be displayed on your and the customer's **Products** page, **Favourites**, and other relevant areas throughout Supply’d. The customer will be able to purchase the product at the promotional price for the duration of the promotion.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
{% hint style="success" %}
For information on how to view and manage customer promotions, see the [Managing Customer Promotions](/supplyd-erp/products/promotions/customer-promotions/managing-customer-promotions) document.
{% endhint %}
# Managing Customer Promotions
Supply’d Product Promotions enable you to create and manage special offers across your sales channels, helping boost sales, increase customer engagement, and promote selected products with ease.
**Customer Promotions** allow you to create and manage special offers that encourage customers to purchase more and increase sales. Supply’d makes it easy to set up targeted promotions for selected products, customer groups, or sales channels, ensuring discounts and offers are applied consistently and automatically.
{% hint style="success" %}
To learn how to create a customer promotion, see the [Creating a Customer Promotion](/supplyd-erp/products/promotions/customer-promotions/creating-a-customer-promotion) document.
{% endhint %}
This document explains how to view and manage **Customer Promotions**, including how to review the details and status of promotions you have sent to your customers.
* [#viewing-promotions](#viewing-promotions "mention")
* [#id-1-all-customer-promotions](#id-1-all-customer-promotions "mention")
* [#id-2-promotions-sent-to-a-specific-customer](#id-2-promotions-sent-to-a-specific-customer "mention")
* [#promotion-details](#promotion-details "mention")
* [#removing-a-promotion](#removing-a-promotion "mention")
***
## Viewing Promotions
Customer promotions can be viewed in two ways:
#### 1 - All Customer Promotions
To view all promotions you have sent to your customers, select **Customers** from the main menu, then go to the **Promotions** tab.
#### 2 - Promotions Sent to a Specific Customer
To view promotions you have sent to a specific customer:
1. Select **Customers** from the main menu.
2. Select a customer to open their details.
3. Select the **Promotions** tab.
The **Promotions** tab on a customer’s page lists the promotions available to the customer, providing a central location to view and manage customer-specific promotions and related information.
{% hint style="success" %}
Promotion Statuses are colour-coded for easy identification:
* - The customer has been sent the promotion.
* - The promotion has been removed by either you or the customer.
The number in the grey box to the right of each promotion - - indicates how many customers that the promotion has been sent to. This will automatically change to .
{% endhint %}
***
### Promotion Details
Select a **Promotion** to open and view its details, including the applicable products, pricing or discount information, and any relevant dates.
***
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Select the Promotion:
1. Select **Customers** from the main menu.
2. Go to the **Promotions** tab.
3. Select the promotion you would like to remove.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click on the 3 dots in the top right and select **Remove Promotion**.
You will be asked to confirm.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click .
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
# Supplier Promotions
Supply’d Promotions allow you to accept & manage special offers from your suppliers. These promotions may include discounted pricing, buy-one-get-one offers, bonus stock, & other incentives.
The **Supplier Promotions** page provides a central location for managing promotional offers from your suppliers. From here, you can view available promotions, review offer details and eligibility, accept or decline promotions, and monitor active, upcoming, or expired offers. Managing supplier promotions in one place helps ensure eligible products are promoted correctly and allows you to take full advantage of supplier-funded offers.
This doc will guide you through the Promotions process, including:
* [#the-promotions-page](#the-promotions-page "mention")
* [#creating-a-promotion](#creating-a-promotion "mention")
* [#editing-a-promotion](#editing-a-promotion "mention")
* [#removing-a-promotion](#removing-a-promotion "mention")
***
## The Promotions Page
The **Promotions** page displays all current and upcoming promotions available from your suppliers. From here, you can view promotion details, including the products included, promotional pricing, supplier, and the promotion start and end dates. This page makes it easy to find supplier offers and take advantage of promotional pricing when placing orders.
To view the suppliers **Promotions** page, select **Suppliers** from the main menu and go to the **Promotions** tab.
To view a specific supplier's promotions, select **Suppliers** from the main menu, choose the supplier, then open the **Promotions** tab on the supplier's page.
***
#### Supplier Promotion Details
Clicking on a promotion will display all available details, including the promotion settings, products, pricing, dates, and other relevant information.
Supplier promotions are displayed throughout Supply’d, including on the **Product** page, **Favourites** page, when creating a **Purchase Order**, and during **Expense Reconciliation**. Promotional products are identified by a green promotion badge beneath the product name, which also displays the promotion dates. This helps you take advantage of available promotions when ordering and verify that your supplier has honoured the promotional pricing during expense reconciliation.
***
## Creating a Promotion
Promotions for suppliers are created and managed by the supplier and cannot be added or edited manually. For suppliers, you can create and manage your own promotions as required.
{% hint style="warning" %}
You can only create promotions for suppliers. Promotions for suppliers are created and managed by the supplier and cannot be added manually.
{% endhint %}
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Go the Supplier's Promotions Tab
1. Select **Suppliers** from the main menu.
2. Select the supplier you would like to the promotion for.
3. On the supplier's page, open the **Promotions** tab.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click Add +
To add a Promotion for a supplier, click on or **Add +** in the top right.
{% hint style="success" %}
The button is only available when no promotions have been sent or created. Once a promotion exists, use **Add+** to create additional promotions.
{% endhint %}
The **Add Promotion** form will open.
{% hint style="warning" %}
If you try to add a promotion for a supplier, an error message will appear preventing you from proceeding. Promotions for suppliers are managed by the supplier and cannot be added manually.
{% endhint %}
Complete the form as follows:
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Adjustment
**Adjustment Type\* \[required field]**
Select how the promotion discount will be applied. Depending on the option selected, additional fields will be displayed to configure the promotion.
* **Price Override:** Override the price to a new price, eg. $9.90.\
* **Increase $:** Increase by a fixed dollar amount, eg. $5 increase.
* **Increase %:** Increase by a percentage amount, eg. 10% increase.
* **Discount $:** Discount by a fixed dollar amount, eg. $5 off.\
* **Discount %:** Discount by a percentage amount, eg. 10% off..
* **Buy X Save Y%:** Enter the percentage discount that you receive when you purchase the required quantity of eligible items.
For example, a **Buy 3, Save 10%** promotion applies a **10%** discount when the **Minimum Qty** is set to **3** and the you purchase three qualifying items.
{% hint style="success" %}
**Buy X Save Y%** is a quantity-based promotion where you receive a percentage discount after purchasing a specified number of qualifying items.
**Examples:**
* **Buy 2, Save 10%:** Purchase any two eligible products and receive 10% off those items.
* **Buy 3, Save 20%:** Purchase three qualifying items and receive a 20% discount.
* **Buy 6, Save 15%:** Purchase six eligible products and save 15% on the qualifying items.\
{% endhint %}
* **BOGO (Buy one, get one):** Enter the number of qualifying items required (**Minimum Qty**) and the number of free items to award (**Gifted Qty**). For example, if **Minimum Qty** is **2** and **Gifted Qty** is **1**, you will receive 1 free item when you purchase 2 qualifying items.
{% hint style="success" %}
**BOGO (Buy One, Get One)** is a promotional offer where purchasing a qualifying product entitles the you to receive another product at a discount or for free.
**Examples:**
* **Buy One, Get One Free (BOGO):** Buy one loaf of bread and receive a second loaf free.
* **Buy Two, Get One Free:** Buy two qualifying items and receive a third item free.
\
\
**Best Practice:** \
It is best to order the **total quantity you expect to receive**, including any free items. For example, with a **Buy 10, Get 10 Free** promotion, you should order **20 items**, rather than ordering 10 and expecting an additional 10 to be added later.
This helps ensure your order is processed correctly and reduces the risk of missing free items.
This also helps during **Purchase Order Receiving**, where you'll receive the full quantity (20 items in this example), and during **Expense Reconciliation**, where the full quantity is displayed at the discounted price.\
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Apply Adjustment
**Apply Adjustment To\* \[required field]**
Select whether the promotion should apply to **All Products** or only **Specific Products**, **Specific Categories,** or **Specific Brands**.
Depending on the option selected, additional fields will be displayed as follows:
* **All Products:** Applies the promotion to all products you buy from this supplier.
* **Products:** Applies the promotion only to the selected products chosen from your supplier's product list.
* **Categories:** Applies the promotion to all products within selected product categories.
* **Brands:** Applies the promotion to products from selected brands.
**Start Date**
Select the date the promotion starts. Leave this field blank to make the promotion active immediately.
**End Date**
Select the date on which the promotion ends. Leave this field blank to keep the promotion running indefinitely.
{% hint style="warning" %}
Promotions are applied after any [Customer Specific Pricing](/supplyd-erp/customers/customer-specific-pricing). If you have a special price set for a product, the promotion will stack on top of that price rather than the standard product price.
**Example:** If a product normally costs **$12.00**, but you have a special price of **$10.00**, and you create a **Buy 10, Get 10 Free** promotion, the promotion will be calculated using the special price. This means the effective price becomes **$5.00 per item**, not **$6.00** based on the standard price.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click Save
Click to create the promotion.
The promotion will appear on the **Products** tab, **Product** page, **Favourites** page and when creating a purchase order.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
### Editing a Promotion
Promotions that you have created yourself for a supplier can be edited if required. Promotions sent from your suppliers cannot be edited.
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Open the supplier's **Promotions** page:
1. Select **Suppliers** from the main menu.
2. Select the supplier whose promotion you want to edit.
3. Open the **Promotions** tab.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Select the promotion you would like to edit. The **Edit Supplier Pricing** form will open.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Edit the required details, following the guidelines in [#creating-a-promotion](#creating-a-promotion "mention") above.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click to apply the changes.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
## Removing a Promotion
Promotions received from suppliers, as well as promotions you have created for suppliers, can be removed if required.
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Open the supplier's **Promotions** page:
1. Select **Suppliers** from the main menu.
2. Select the supplier whose promotion you want to remove.
3. Open the **Promotions** tab.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Select the promotion you would like to remove.
* For promotions sent from a supplier, the **View Supplier Promotion** page will open.
* For promotions you have **added yourself**, the **Edit Supplier Pricing** form will open.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click on the 3 dots in the top right and select **Remove Pricing**.
* For promotions sent from a supplier.
* For supplier promotions you have **added yourself**.
You will be asked to confirm.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click .
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
# Creating a Supplier Promotion
Creating a Supplier Promotion helps you accurately track supplier promotions, take advantage of special pricing, and make more informed purchasing decisions.
**Supplier Promotions** in Supply’d allow you to create promotions based on special pricing and offers provided to you by your suppliers. You can select the products included, enter the promotional pricing, and set the applicable start and end dates.
This document explains how to create a promotion in Supply’d and configure the relevant promotion details.
* [#creating-a-promotion](#creating-a-promotion "mention")
* [#editing-a-promotion](#editing-a-promotion "mention")
* [#removing-a-promotion](#removing-a-promotion "mention")
***
## Creating a Promotion
Promotions for suppliers are created and managed by the supplier and cannot be added or edited manually. For suppliers, you can create and manage your own promotions as required.
{% hint style="warning" %}
You can only create promotions for suppliers. Promotions for suppliers are created and managed by the supplier and cannot be added manually.
{% endhint %}
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Select the Supplier
Select **Suppliers** from the main menu, then choose the supplier you would like to the promotion for.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Go the Supplier's Promotions Tab
On the supplier's page, open the **Promotions** tab.
{% hint style="success" %}
The **Promotions** tab on a supplier’s page lists all promotions available from that particular supplier.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click Add +
To add a Promotion for a supplier, click on or **Add +** in the top right.
{% hint style="success" %}
The button is only available when no promotions have been sent or created. Once a promotion exists, use **Add+** to create additional promotions.
{% endhint %}
The **Add Promotion** form will open.
{% hint style="warning" %}
If you try to add a promotion for a supplier, an error message will appear preventing you from proceeding. Promotions for suppliers are managed by the supplier and cannot be added manually.
{% endhint %}
Complete the form as follows:
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Adjustment
**Adjustment Type\* \[required field]**
Select how the promotion discount will be applied. Depending on the option selected, additional fields will be displayed to configure the promotion.
* **Price Override:** Override the price to a new price, eg. $9.90.\
* **Increase $:** Increase by a fixed dollar amount, eg. $5 increase.
* **Increase %:** Increase by a percentage amount, eg. 10% increase.
* **Discount $:** Discount by a fixed dollar amount, eg. $5 off.\
* **Discount %:** Discount by a percentage amount, eg. 10% off..
* **Buy X Save Y%:** Enter the percentage discount that you receive when you purchase the required quantity of eligible items.
For example, a **Buy 3, Save 10%** promotion applies a **10%** discount when the **Minimum Qty** is set to **3** and the you purchase three qualifying items.
{% hint style="success" %}
**Buy X Save Y%** is a quantity-based promotion where you receive a percentage discount after purchasing a specified number of qualifying items.
**Examples:**
* **Buy 2, Save 10%:** Purchase any two eligible products and receive 10% off those items.
* **Buy 3, Save 20%:** Purchase three qualifying items and receive a 20% discount.
* **Buy 6, Save 15%:** Purchase six eligible products and save 15% on the qualifying items.\
{% endhint %}
* **BOGO (Buy one, get one):** Enter the number of qualifying items required (**Minimum Qty**) and the number of free items to award (**Gifted Qty**). For example, if **Minimum Qty** is **2** and **Gifted Qty** is **1**, you will receive 1 free item when you purchase 2 qualifying items.
{% hint style="success" %}
**BOGO (Buy One, Get One)** is a promotional offer where purchasing a qualifying product entitles the you to receive another product at a discount or for free.
**Examples:**
* **Buy One, Get One Free (BOGO):** Buy one loaf of bread and receive a second loaf free.
* **Buy Two, Get One Free:** Buy two qualifying items and receive a third item free.
\
\
**Best Practice:** \
It is best to order the **total quantity you expect to receive**, including any free items. For example, with a **Buy 10, Get 10 Free** promotion, you should order **20 items**, rather than ordering 10 and expecting an additional 10 to be added later.
This helps ensure your order is processed correctly and reduces the risk of missing free items.
This also helps during **Purchase Order Receiving**, where you'll receive the full quantity (20 items in this example), and during **Expense Reconciliation**, where the full quantity is displayed at the discounted price.\
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Apply Adjustment
**Apply Adjustment To\* \[required field]**
Select whether the promotion should apply to **All Products** or only **Specific Products**, **Specific Categories,** or **Specific Brands**.
Depending on the option selected, additional fields will be displayed as follows:
* **All Products:** Applies the promotion to all products you buy from this supplier.
* **Products:** Applies the promotion only to the selected products chosen from your supplier's product list.
* **Categories:** Applies the promotion to all products within selected product categories.
* **Brands:** Applies the promotion to products from selected brands.
**Start Date**
Select the date the promotion starts. Leave this field blank to make the promotion active immediately.
**End Date**
Select the date on which the promotion ends. Leave this field blank to keep the promotion running indefinitely.
{% hint style="warning" %}
Promotions are applied after any [Customer Specific Pricing](/supplyd-erp/customers/customer-specific-pricing). If you have a special price set for a product, the promotion will stack on top of that price rather than the standard product price.
**Example:** If a product normally costs **$12.00**, but you have a special price of **$10.00**, and you create a **Buy 10, Get 10 Free** promotion, the promotion will be calculated using the special price. This means the effective price becomes **$5.00 per item**, not **$6.00** based on the standard price.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click Save
Click to create the promotion.
The promotion will appear on the **Products** tab, **Product** page, **Favourites** page and when creating a purchase order.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
# Managing Supplier Promotions
Supply’d Promotions allow you to accept & manage special offers from your suppliers. These promotions may include discounted pricing, buy-one-get-one offers, bonus stock, & other incentives.
The **Promotions** tab of the **Suppliers** page provides a central location for managing promotional offers from your suppliers. From here, you can review current and upcoming promotions, view details such as the supplier, included products, promotional pricing, and promotion dates, check eligibility, and accept or decline offers. You can also track active, upcoming, and expired promotions, making it easy to stay on top of available supplier offers.
This document explains how to view and manage promotions, including how to review the details of each promotion.
* [#viewing-promotions](#viewing-promotions "mention")
* [#supplier-promotion-details](#supplier-promotion-details "mention")
* [#editing-a-promotion](#editing-a-promotion "mention")
* [#removing-a-promotion](#removing-a-promotion "mention")
***
## Viewing Promotions
Supplier promotions can be viewed in two ways:
#### 1 - All Supplier Promotions
To view all promotions from all suppliers, select **Suppliers** from the main menu and go to the **Promotions** tab.
#### 2 - Promotions from a Specific Supplier
To view promotions from a specific supplier, select **Suppliers** from the main menu, choose the supplier, then open the **Promotions** tab on the supplier's page.
***
### Supplier Promotion Details
Clicking on a promotion will display all available details, including the promotion settings, products, pricing, dates, and other relevant information.
***
Supplier promotions are displayed throughout Supply’d, including on the **Product** page, **Favourites** page, when creating a **Purchase Order**, and during **Expense Reconciliation**. Promotional products are identified by a green promotion badge beneath the product name, which also displays the promotion dates. This helps you take advantage of available promotions when ordering and verify that your supplier has honoured the promotional pricing during expense reconciliation.
***
## Editing a Promotion
Promotions that you have created yourself for a supplier can be edited if required. Promotions sent from your suppliers cannot be edited.
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Open the supplier's **Promotions** page:
1. Select **Suppliers** from the main menu.
2. Select the supplier whose promotion you want to edit.
3. Open the **Promotions** tab.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Select the promotion you would like to edit. The **Edit Supplier Pricing** form will open.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Edit the required details, following the guidelines in [#creating-a-promotion](#creating-a-promotion "mention") above.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click to apply the changes.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
## Removing a Promotion
Promotions received from suppliers, as well as promotions you have created for suppliers, can be removed if required.
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Open the supplier's **Promotions** page:
1. Select **Suppliers** from the main menu.
2. Select the supplier whose promotion you want to remove.
3. Open the **Promotions** tab.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Select the promotion you would like to remove.
* For promotions sent from a supplier, the **View Supplier Promotion** page will open.
* For promotions you have **added yourself**, the **Edit Supplier Pricing** form will open.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click on the 3 dots in the top right and select **Remove Pricing**.
* For promotions sent from a supplier.
* For supplier promotions you have **added yourself**.
You will be asked to confirm.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click .
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
# Product Types
Product types in Supply’d help you organise, manage, and filter products more efficiently, making it easier to track and streamline your inventory.
# Product Types Overview
Product types in Supply’d help you organise, manage, and filter products more efficiently, making it easier to track and streamline your inventory.
**Product Types** in Supply’d are a powerful way to categorise and manage your products. By assigning types, you can group similar items, filter product lists, and apply settings or rules more efficiently. This helps streamline inventory management, simplifies reporting, and ensures greater accuracy across your product catalogue. **Product Types** are selected when [Adding Products](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products).
**Standard**
The most common product type. It is a single product with no advanced traits.
**Bundled**
A bundle of multiple products within one parent product. An additional section, **Bundled Items**, will show when this is selected.
**Recipe**
A product that is made up of a number ingredients produced at the time of sale, eg. a burger at a restaurant. An additional section, **Recipe Items**, will show when this is selected.
**Shipping Carton**
A shipping carton used during the packing stage, such as a bread tray, bread crate, produce crate, carton or box.
**Carton Container**
A pallet, trolley, stillage, etc that shipping cartons may be packed into for shipping.
**Gift Note/Card**
A gift note/card that can be configured to be automatically generated and printed. An additional section, **Gift Note/Card Settings**, will show when this is selected.
**Production**
A product that can be manufactured using the production module. When "Production" is selected, additional sections will appear.
**Breakdown**
A product that can be broken down within the production module to make other products.
We will explore the types in more detail in the sections below:
* [#standard](#standard "mention")
* [#bundled](#bundled "mention")
* [#recipe](#recipe "mention")
* [#shipping-carton](#shipping-carton "mention")
* [#gift-note-card](#gift-note-card "mention")
* [#production-product](#production-product "mention")
* [#breakdown-product](#breakdown-product "mention")
* [#labelling-details](#labelling-details "mention")
***
## Standard
A **Standard** product type refers to a regular, standalone product that you buy and use or sell as-is. It is not made up of other products (like a bundle) and isn’t something you produce (like a production item).
In Supply’d, a Standard Product can be:
* Purchased and sold directly to customers.
* Purchased and used in production, such as food ingredients or packaging.
* Purchased for internal use only, like cleaning supplies.
In general, any item that you want to keep in inventory and that doesn’t require changes or assembly can be classified as a Standard Product.
👉 For full details on completing this section see the [Adding Products](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products) document.
***
## Bundled
In Supply’d, the Bundled Product type lets you combine multiple individual products into a single package for sale. Bundled items appear as a single line item in orders and are ideal for meal deals, promotions, or pre-set combos, allowing you to sell several items together as one product while keeping order entry simple and convenient.
**Why Use Bundled Items?**
1. **Simplified Sales**
* Bundles appear as one line item in a sales order, making order entry quick and customer-friendly.
* Example: Instead of entering Coffee, Croissant, and Juice separately, you can sell them as a Breakfast Bundle.
2. **Flexible Pricing**
* Set a fixed price for the whole bundle (eg. “Breakfast Combo – $18”)
* Great for discounts, promotions, and upselling.
3. **Order Management**
* Bundles keep orders tidy by showing as one product.
* You can expand the bundle in the system to see the individual components if needed.
**Examples:**
\
**Unicorn Bundle** – 1 Pink Chocolate Unicorn + 1 White Chocolate Unicorn + 1 Blue Chocolate Unicorn.
**Breakfast Bundle** - 1 Coffee + 1 Croissant + 1 Juice.
**Burger Combo** - 1 Burger + 1 Small Chips + 1 Drink.
**Gift Hamper** – Assorted Chocolates, Biscuits, Tea, Jam.
👉 For full details on creating a Bundled Product see the [Bundled Products](/supplyd-erp/products/product-types/bundled-products) document.
***
## Recipe
A **Recipe Product** is a product that is made up of multiple components (ingredients or items) and is designed for situations where selling the finished product should also deduct the required quantities of each component from inventory.
It’s especially useful for foodservice or retail where products are built from ingredients or parts, and you need accurate stock tracking.
**Key Features**
1. **Defined Components (Ingredients)**
* A Recipe Product has a list of items (with specific quantities) that make up the final product.
* Example: A “Burger” recipe might include a bun, patty, lettuce, onion, tomato and sauce.
2. **Automatic Inventory Deduction**
* When you sell a Recipe Product, Supply’d automatically deducts the right amounts of each ingredient from stock.
* This keeps inventory levels accurate without manual adjustments.
3. **Cost Tracking**
* The cost of the Recipe Product is calculated from the costs of its components.
* This helps with pricing, profit analysis, and cost control.
4. **Flexibility**
* Recipe Products can be used in sales orders, production runs, or bundled with other items.
* Great for cafes or restaurants who need to manage raw materials and finished goods.
**For Example:**
Burger:
* 1 × 50g Burger Bun
* 1 × 86g Beef Patty
* 50g Lettuce
* 20g tomato
* 15g onion
* 7ml Tomato Sauce
👉 For a full step-by-step guide on how to add and configure a Recipe Product, refer to the [Recipe Products](/supplyd-erp/products/product-types/recipe-products) document.
***
## Shipping Carton
**Shipping Carton** product type is used to represent the packaging materials (like trays, boxes, crates or cartons) used to ship customer orders.
Key points about Shipping Cartons:
* They're not sold to customers but are part of the fulfilment process.
* Can be assigned in [Adding Products](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products#fulfilment-rules) to determine how products are packed for picking and dispatch.
* You can track their stock levels to ensure you don’t run out of packaging.
* Useful for planning and managing dispatch operations efficiently.
Use this type to keep control over the materials that help get your products out the door.
***
## Carton Container
A **Carton Container** is a larger transport unit used to hold one or more shipping cartons during staging, transport, and delivery. Common examples include pallets, trolleys, stillages, roll cages, and dollies.
Key points:
* Holds one or more shipping cartons.
* Used to consolidate cartons for easier handling and transport.
* Typically moved through the warehouse and loaded onto delivery vehicles.
* Can represent reusable equipment such as trolleys or pallets.
* Can be used in [Adding Products](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products#fulfilment-rules) to determine the appropriate transport container based on the shipment size or volume.
***
## Gift Note/Card
**Gift Card/Note** product type is used for items like gift cards, gift notes, or messages that can be added to a customer's order.
These products:
* Can still be added to orders like any other product.
* Are helpful for personalised customer experiences or promotions.
👉 Refer to the [Gift Notes & Cards](/supplyd-erp/products/product-types/gift-notes-and-cards) for more details.
***
## Production Product
A **Production Product** is a product that can be manufactured within Supply’d using the **Production Module**. This is typically used for items you make in-house from raw materials or components (for example, baking bread, blending coffee, or assembling a kit).
When you select “**Production**” as the product type, additional sections and settings will appear. These allow you to:
* **Define the Bill of Materials (BOM):** List all ingredients or components required to produce the item.
* **Set Production Steps:** Outline the processes or stages involved in making the product.
* **Track Costs:** Capture both material and labor costs to calculate accurate production expenses.
* **Manage Inventory Movements:** Automatically deduct raw materials from stock and add the finished product into inventory once production is completed.
This setup ensures accurate stock control, clear visibility of production costs, and smooth management of internally manufactured products.
👉 For a full step-by-step guide on how to add and configure a Production Product, refer to the [Creating a Production Product](/supplyd-erp/production/creating-a-production-product) document.
***
## Breakdown Product
The **Breakdown** feature in Supply’d’s **Production** module lets you split one product into several different ones. It’s a simple, one-step process that’s great for businesses like butchers or oil producers, where one item comes in and gets turned into multiple usable products.
Here's a few examples where this feature may be useful :
**Butcher**
* **Input:** 1 whole animal carcass.
* **Output:** Various cuts (eg. steaks, mince, bones, fat).
* **Why it’s useful:** Allows accurate tracking of yield and component inventory.
**Oil Producer**
* **Input:** Bulk seeds or raw oil.
* **Output:** Refined oil, meal, husk, waste.
* **Why it’s useful:** Splits raw input into sellable products and by-products.
👉 The [Creating a Breakdown Product](/supplyd-erp/production/creating-a-breakdown-product) document takes you through the process of adding a **Breakdown Product**.
***
## Labelling Details
The **Labelling Details** section appears when you select **Standard, Bundled, Recipe, Production**, or **Breakdown** product types. It captures all information needed for accurate product labelling, especially for food items.
**Key Information Included:**
1. **Ingredients** – Lists all ingredients, including allergens. For Recipe or Production items, this can be auto-populated from components.
2. **Nutrition Information** – Displays values like calories, fat, protein, and sugar for regulatory compliance and customer transparency. This can also be automatically populated from the components of Recipe and Production products.
3. **Storage Type** – Indicates recommended storage conditions (e.g., refrigerated, frozen, ambient).
4. **Additional Details** – Can include serving suggestions, preparation instructions, or warnings.
👉 For full details on adding the labelling details information, see the [Labelling Details](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products/labelling-details) document.
***
# Bundled Products
The Bundles product type in Supply’d lets you group items into one package, making combos, promotions, and order entry faster and easier.
In Supply’d, the Bundled Product type lets you combine multiple individual products into a single package for sale. Bundled items appear as a single line item in orders and are ideal for meal deals, promotions, or pre-set combos, allowing you to sell several items together as one product while keeping order entry simple and convenient.
**Why Use Bundled Items?**
1. **Simplified Sales**
* Bundles appear as one line item in a sales order, making order entry quick and customer-friendly.
* Example: Instead of entering Coffee, Croissant, and Juice separately, you can sell them as a Breakfast Bundle.
2. **Flexible Pricing**
* Set a fixed price for the whole bundle (eg. “Breakfast Combo – $18”)
* Great for discounts, promotions, and upselling.
3. **Order Management**
* Bundles keep orders tidy by showing as one product.
* You can expand the bundle in the system to see the individual components if needed.
**Examples**
* **Unicorn Bundle** – 1 Pink Chocolate Unicorn + 1 White Chocolate Unicorn + 1 Blue Chocolate Unicorn.
* **Breakfast Bundle** - 1 Coffee + 1 Croissant + 1 Juice.
* **Burger Combo** - 1 Burger + 1 Small Chips + 1 Drink.
* **Gift Hamper** – Assorted Chocolates, Biscuits, Tea, Jam.
This document takes you through the process of adding a **Bundled Product**.
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 For details on adding other types of products, please refer to the [Adding Products](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products) and the [Product Types](/supplyd-erp/products/product-types) documents.
{% endhint %}
***
## Creating a Bundled Product
{% hint style="warning" %}
Before adding a Bundled product, you must first set up the individual products that will be included in it.
In our example below, we are creating a Chocolate Unicorn Bundle that contains:
* 1 Pink Chocolate Unicorn
* 1 Blue Chocolate Unicorn
* 1 White Chocolate Unicorn
So we have set these up as individual products in Supply’d.
{% endhint %}
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Open the Products Page
Select **Products** from the main menu. The **Products** page will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click Add +
To create a new product, click the **Add +** in the top right corner.
The **Add Product** form will appear.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Complete Product Details & Custom Fields
Complete the **Product Details** and any optional **Custom Fields** sections, as explained in the [Adding Products](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products) document.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Select the Product Type
Select **Bundled** from the **Product Type\*** menu.
{% hint style="info" %}
👉 For a description of the other choices see the [Adding Products](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products) and [Product Types](/supplyd-erp/products/product-types) documents.
{% endhint %}
When **Bundled** is selected additional sections will show. Complete the sections as follows:
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Labelling Details
👉 Refer to the [Labelling Details](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products/labelling-details) document for instructions on how to complete this section.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Bundled Items
{% hint style="info" %}
This section will only show when **Bundled** is selected as the **Product Type**.
{% endhint %}
1. To add items to a bundle, click **Edit Items**.
\
You will be prompted to save your product before adding/editing any items. Click .
2. The **Edit Bundled Items** form will open. \
\
3. Click on, or type in, the field that says **Type Product Name** to display a list of your products and ingredients.\
\
For our example of a 3-Pack bundle of chocolate unicorns, we need to add a white, a pink and a blue unicorn. In the example below, we are adding the white unicorn.
Select the first item and click .
\
A form will open for you to add the quantity.
4. In the **Quantity** field, add the quantity of this item that is required for this bundle. In our case this is "**1**".\
\
The top field, **Bundle Cost**, displays the total cost of the bundle. As you add items, this figure updates to show the combined cost.
5. In the **Tolerance** field, specify the acceptable variance from the target quantity or weight. Quantities that fall within the tolerance range are considered acceptable, helping ensure consistency while allowing for minor variations.
For example, if the target weight is **100g** and the tolerance is **±5g**, any weight between **95g and 105g** will be accepted.
6. Repeat the above steps for all items to be included in the bundle.
{% hint style="success" %}
Clicking the 3 dots to the right of a product's name will open a menu with the option **Substitute Product**.
Use this option to quickly replace an ingredient with another product. The recipe is updated automatically, and related food labelling information will also be updated, eliminating the need to make multiple manual changes.
This provides a faster and more efficient way to update recipes while keeping product information accurate.
👉 See [#editing-a-bundled-product](#editing-a-bundled-product "mention") below for full details.
{% endhint %}
6. Click to add all the selected items to the bundle.
The items will appear in the **Bundled Items** section with the amount and cost of each item used and the total **Bundled Cost**.
***
#### Additional Options for Bundled Items
Prior to saving, or when editing the **Bundled Items**, clicking on the 3 dots in the top right will display a menu.
**Save Items**
Saves the bundled items. This is an alternative to using the button at the bottom of the page.
**Copy Items From**
The **Copy Items From** option lets you copy bundled items and their quantities from an existing product into the current bundled product. This is helpful when creating a new bundle that is similar to an existing one.
Instead of manually adding each bundle item, you can select an existing product and automatically duplicate its bundled items. Once copied, you can adjust the quantities or remove items as needed to match the new bundle.
Benefits:
* Saves time by copying items and quantities from an existing bundle.
* Reduces errors and ensures consistency.
* Makes it easy to create similar bundled products quickly.
Example:
You already have a bundled product called “**Office Starter Pack**” that includes:
* 2 × Notebooks
* 1 × Pen Set
* 1 × Desk Organizer
When creating a new bundled product called “**Office Starter Pack - Premium**”, you can use the **Copy Items From** option to copy all items and quantities from the original bundle. You then simply add or adjust items (for example, upgrade the pen set or add a planner) instead of building the bundle from scratch.
1. Click on or type in the **Copy From Product\*** field to show a list of your products to choose from.
2. Click to add these items to the current bundle.
3. You will be asked to confirm as this will override any items you may have already entered.
4. Edit any changes required after the items have been copied.
**Import Items**
Selecting this opens the **Import Production Items** form allowing you to upload a list of production items from a CSV file, instead of entering them one by one. This is a quick way to set up or update items in bulk, especially helpful when working with a large number of products.
1. Click **Download the template**. The **Export Production Items** form will open.\
2. Select **Sample Data** from the **Data Source** menu and click to download the template.
3. Open the template in a spreadsheet application such as Excel or Numbers and complete the fields in the spreadsheet.
{% hint style="warning" %}
You should remove the sample products from the file before importing it into Supply’d to prevent them from being added to your bundle.
{% endhint %}
4. Once completed, export or save the file as a **CSV** (comma-separated values) file.
5. Return to Supply’d, open the **Import Production Items**, upload the completed CSV file, click and follow the on-screen prompts to confirm the import.
6. After the import completes, review the details to ensure the information has been imported correctly and make any changes required.
👉 The import process is explained in more detail in the [Production Items](https://help.supplyd.co/production/creating-a-production-product#production-items) section of the [Creating a Production Product](https://help.supplyd.co/production/creating-a-production-product) document.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Sell Product? & Remaining Sections
👉 Refer to the [Adding & Updating Products](https://help.supplyd.co/products/adding-and-updating-products) document for details on how to complete this and all remaining sections.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Save
Click to finish creating the product.
The product will appear on your **Products** page, with displayed beside its name for easy identification.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
## Editing a Bundled Product
If you would like to edit a product:
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Select **Products** from the main menu.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click on the product you want to edit.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click on the 3 dots in the top right and select **Edit Product**.
The **Edit Product** form will open.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Change any details as required following the guidelines above for [#creating-a-bundled-product](#creating-a-bundled-product "mention").
**Substituting Products**
Use the **Substitute Product** option to quickly replace an ingredient. The recipe updates automatically, and all related food labelling (ingredients, allergens, nutrition) is refreshed for you - no manual changes needed.
1. Click the 3 dots to the right of a product's name and select **Substitute Product**.\
\
\
\
2\. The **Substitute Product** form will open.\
\
Select the product you would like to use as a substitute.
3. If you would like to update any labelling details, tick **Regenerate Food Labelling?**.\
4. Click .
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click to apply the changes.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
## Removing a Bundled Product
If you would like to remove a product:
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Select **Products** from the main menu.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click on the product you want to remove.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click on the 3 dots in the top right and select **Remove Product**.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
You will be asked to confirm.
Click .
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
# Gift Notes & Cards
Including gift notes or cards with sales in Supply’d ensures customer messages are captured and included with orders for a better customer experience.
**Gift Notes and Cards** allow you to include personalised messages with customer orders, creating a more thoughtful and professional delivery experience. Supply’d captures gift notes from supported sales channels or allows them to be added during order processing, ensuring the correct message is included when packing the order. This helps streamline fulfilment, reduces the risk of missed messages, and enhances the overall customer experience for gift purchases and special occasions.
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Open the Products Page
Select **Products** from the main menu. The **Products** page will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click Add +
To create a new product, click the **Add +** button in the top right corner.
The **Add Product** form will appear.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Complete Product Details & Custom Fields
Complete the **Product Details** and any optional **Custom Fields** sections, as explained in the [Adding Products](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products) document.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Select the Product Type
Select **Gift Card/Note** from the **Product Type\*** menu.
{% hint style="success" %}
The **Gift Card/Note** product type is used for items like gift cards, gift notes, or messages that can be added to a customer's order.
These products:
* Can still be added to orders like any other product.
* Are helpful for personalised customer experiences or promotions.
{% endhint %}
When **Gift Card/Note** is selected as the product type, an additional section - **Gift Card/Note** - will appear (after the **Buy Product** section).
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### **Gift Card/Note**
{% hint style="warning" %}
This section will only show if **Gift Note/Card** is selected as the **Product Type**.
{% endhint %}
**Gift Note Template**
Select the template size of the gift note to generate.
**Font**
Select the font to use on the gift note/card.
**Font Size (mm)**
Enter the font size, in millimetres (mm), to use on the gift note or card.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Complete Remaining Sections
👉 Refer to the [Adding & Updating Products](https://help.supplyd.co/products/adding-and-updating-products) document for details on how to complete all remaining sections.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Save
Click to finish creating the product.
The product will appear on your **Products** page, with displayed beside its name for easy identification.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
# Recipe Products
Creating a Recipe Product type in Supply’d lets you accurately track ingredient usage and costs, ensuring precise inventory control and better visibility of margins.
A **Recipe Product** is a product that is made up of multiple components (ingredients or items) and is designed for situations where selling the finished product should also deduct the required quantities of each component from inventory.
It’s especially useful for foodservice or retail where products are built from ingredients or parts, and you need accurate stock tracking.
**Key Features**
1. **Defined Components (Ingredients)**
* A Recipe Product has a list of items (with specific quantities) that make up the final product.
* Example: A “Burger” recipe might include a bun, patty, lettuce, onion, tomato and sauce.
2. **Automatic Inventory Deduction**
* When you sell a Recipe Product, Supply’d automatically deducts the right amounts of each ingredient from stock.
* This keeps inventory levels accurate without manual adjustments.
3. **Cost Tracking**
* The cost of the Recipe Product is calculated from the costs of its components.
* This helps with pricing, profit analysis, and cost control.
4. **Flexibility**
* Recipe Products can be used in sales orders, production runs, or bundled with other items.
* Great for cafes or restaurants who need to manage raw materials and finished goods.
**For Example:**
A burger can be made up of:
* 1 × 50g Burger Bun
* 1 × 86g Beef Patty
* 20g Lettuce
* 20g Tomato
* 30ml Burger Sauce
This document takes you through the process of adding a **Recipe Product**.
{% hint style="info" %}
👉 For details on adding other types of products, please refer to the [Adding Products](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products) and the [Product Types](/supplyd-erp/products/product-types) documents.
{% endhint %}
***
## Creating a Recipe Product
{% hint style="warning" %}
Before adding a Recipe product, you must first set up the individual components/products that will be included in it.
In our example below, we are creating a Burger that is made up:
* 1 × Burger Bun
* 1 × Beef Burger Patty
* Cos Lettuce
* Tomato
* Burger Sauce
So we have set all these up as individual products in Supply’d.
{% endhint %}
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Open the Products Page
Select **Products** from the main menu. The **Products** page will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click Add +
To create a new product, click the **Add +** button in the top right corner.
The **Add Product** form will appear.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Complete Product Details & Custom Fields
Complete the **Product Details** and any optional **Custom Fields** sections, as explained in the [Adding Products](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products) document.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Select the Product Type
Select **Recipe** from the **Product Type\*** menu.
{% hint style="info" %}
👉 For a description of the other choices see the [Adding Products](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products) and [Product Types](/supplyd-erp/products/product-types) documents.
{% endhint %}
When **Recipe** is selected additional sections will show. Complete the sections as follows:
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
### Labelling Details
👉 Refer to the [Labelling Details](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products/labelling-details) document for instructions on how to complete this section.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
### Recipe Versions
Within a product, you can create different versions of a recipe, each with its own ingredient quantities and costings. You can select a **Primary Recipe**, which Supply'd will use by default when generating ingredients, nutrition, margins, and costings. You can also optionally assign specific recipe versions to individual locations.
For example, A burger could have different recipe versions for different locations:
* **Standard:** 150g beef patty, standard sauce and toppings.
* **Narrewarren:** Same burger with a different sauce quantity.
* **Olinda:** 160g beef patty with adjusted ingredient quantities.
Each location can use its own recipe version, while the **Primary Recipe** is used as the default when no location-specific version is assigned.
To add a version, click .
You will be prompted to save the changes you have made so far.
Click . The **Add Recipe** form will open.
Complete the form following the guidelines below:
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
### Recipe Version Settings
**Recipe Name\* \[required field]**
Enter a name for this recipe.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
### Stages
In Supply'd, stages represent the step-by-step process of preparing a product. Each stage breaks the recipe into manageable steps, such as mixing, assembling, cooking, or packaging, depending on your product setup.
Here’s how stages work:
* Each stage can have its own components (ingredients or items) and instructions.
* You must complete each stage in order - you can’t skip ahead.
* Once a stage is finalised, Supply’d records the consumption of inventory for that stage.
* Only when all stages are finalised is the finished product added to your inventory.
This structured approach ensures accuracy in tracking materials, labour, and output throughout the preparation process.
{% hint style="info" %}
As this is a **Recipe Type Product** that is made at the point of sale and does not go through a production run, Stages are optional. However, you must add at least one stage to add recipe items. Stages also allow you to optionally add labour time for more accurate costings.
{% endhint %}
To add the stages, click or **Add a Stage**.
You will be prompted to save your product before adding/editing any stages. Click .
The **Edit Production Stages** form will appear.
Complete the form:
**Stage Name**
Enter the name of this stage of production.
{% hint style="success" %}
Choose a name that best describes each stage so that each part of the production flow is immediately identifiable and meaningful to anyone reading the procedure.
{% endhint %}
**Stage Colour**
Select the colour to use for this stage of production.
**Labour**
To include labour costs for this stage, enter the time it takes to complete it in hours and minutes. Supply'd will calculate and display the total cost of labour for this stage.
{% hint style="warning" %}
To be able to track labour costs for a Production item, you’ll first need to set up [Production Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/production-settings#labour-tracking) in your [Production Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/production-settings). On the **Production Settings** page, in the **Labour Tracking** section, select "Yes" in the **Enable Tracking** field and enter a **Default Hourly Rate**. In the example above, the rate has been set to $50.00 per hour.
{% endhint %}
**Processing**
Enter the estimated processing time once staff have completed their part, eg. time spent in oven.
**Department**
Select the department(s) this product belongs to.
{% hint style="info" %}
This field will only appear if you’ve set up optional [Locations](/supplyd-erp/settings/locations#departments) within your [Locations](/supplyd-erp/settings/locations).
Your list may look different from the example, depending on how you've named your departments.
{% endhint %}
**Stage Instructions**
Any instructions for completing this stage of production.
Click to add the next stage (if required), and repeat the process for any additional stages needed.
When you have finished add all the stages, click .
**Production Stages** will now look something like this, each stage with its own unique name and colour depending on what you chose. The stage colours make it easy to identify each stage of production a product is at and will show in the **Production Batch** list.
{% hint style="success" %}
Should you need to edit a stage at any time, click and make the required changes following the guidelines above.
To remove a stage, click and then click the "**X**" beside the stage name.\
{% endhint %}
***
#### Additional Options for Production Stages
Prior to saving or when editing the **Production Stages**, clicking on the 3 dots in the top right will display a menu.
**Copy Stages From**
The **Copy Stages** **From** option allows you to reuse an existing production stage from another product when creating a new Recipe Product. Instead of manually creating the stage again, you can copy the stage, saving time and ensuring consistency in your production workflow.
How it works:
* When adding a Recipe Product, select **Copy Stages From**.
* Choose an existing product that has the stage you want to reuse.
* The stage (names, colours, and sequence) are copied to the new product.
* You can then edit or adjust the stages as needed for the new product.
Benefits:
* Saves time by avoiding repetitive setup.
* Maintains consistency across similar products.
* Reduces errors by using an already-tested stage setup
1. Click on, or type in, the field to show a list of your products to choose from.
2. Click to add the stage to the current product.
3. You will be asked to confirm as this will override any stage you may have already entered.
4. Make any changes required after the stage has been copied.
**Import Stages**
This option allows you to upload a list of production stages from a CSV file, instead of entering them one by one. This is a quick way to set up or update stages in bulk, especially helpful when working with lots of products or complex processes.
👉 The process is described in detail in the [Creating a Production Product](/supplyd-erp/production/creating-a-production-product#importing-production-stages) section of the [Creating a Production Product](/supplyd-erp/production/creating-a-production-product) document.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
### Recipe Items
These are the items and quantities of products to make this recipe.
{% hint style="warning" %}
This section will only show when **Recipe** is selected as the **Product Type**.
{% endhint %}
The stages you added in the last step will appear something similar to the screenshot below.
1. To add items to a recipe, click **Edit Items**.
\
You will be prompted to save your product before adding/editing any items. Click .
2. The **Edit Recipe Items** form will open.
3. Click on, or type in, the field that says **Type Product Name** to display a list of your products and ingredients.\
\
For our example of a Classic Beef Burger, we need to add a bun, a burger, lettuce, tomato and burger sauce. In the example below, we are adding the bun.
Select the first item and click .
\
A form will open for you to add the quantity.
4. Complete the fields as follows:
\
The top fields display the total size and cost of the recipe. As you add items, these figures update to show the combined size and cost.
**Stage**
Select the stage where this ingredient is used.
\
\
**Quantity**
Enter the number of units that will be reduced from stock when this item is used or sold.
For example, you use 20g of a 100g lettuce in this stage. The Quantity would be 0.2.\
**Measurement**
Enter the actual amount of the ingredient used in this stage. For example, you use 20g of lettuce in this stage.
You can enter the amount here and the Quantity will automatically calculate for you.
**Scales**
Select whether to use integrated scales and, if enabled, choose the scale to use for weighing during production.
{% hint style="info" %}
**Note**: Scales are primarily used for guided weigh-ups when producing Production Type Products, so they are generally not required for Recipe Type Products.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="success" %}
Clicking the 3 dots to the right of a products name will open a menu with the option **Substitute Product**.
Use this option to quickly replace an ingredient with another product. The recipe is updated automatically, and related food labelling information can also be updated, eliminating the need to make multiple manual changes.
This provides a faster and more efficient way to update recipes while keeping product information accurate.
👉 See [#editing-a-recipe-product](#editing-a-recipe-product "mention") below for more details.
{% endhint %}
4. Repeat the above steps for all items in the recipe.
6. Click at the bottom of the page to add all the selected items to the recipe.
The items will appear in the **Recipe Items** section under the stages, showing the quantity and cost of each item used, along with the total **Recipe Cost**.
{% hint style="success" %}
Should you need to edit an item at any time, click and make the required changes following the guidelines above.
To remove a item, click and then click the "**X**" beside the item name.
{% endhint %}
***
#### Additional Options for Recipe Items
Prior to saving, or when editing the **Recipe Items**, clicking on the 3 dots in the top right will display a menu.
**Copy Items From**
The **Copy Items From** option lets you copy recipe items and their quantities from an existing product into the current recipe product. This is helpful when creating a new recipe that is similar to an existing one.
Instead of manually adding each recipe item, you can select an existing product and automatically duplicate its items. Once copied, you can adjust the quantities or remove items as needed to match the new recipe.
Benefits:
* Saves time by copying items and quantities from an existing recipe.
* Reduces errors and ensures consistency.
* Makes it easy to create similar recipe products quickly.
Example:
You already have a recipe product called “**Cheeseburger**” that includes:
* 1 × 50g Burger Bun
* 1 × 86g Beef Patty
* 20g Lettuce
* 20g Tomato
* 20g Cheese
* 30g Onion
* 20ml Burger Sauce
When creating the new recipe product called "**Classic Beef Burger**", you can use the **Copy Items From** option to copy all items and quantities from the original recipe. You then simply add or adjust items (for example, remove the cheese and onion, and change the sauce quantity) instead of building the recipe from scratch.
1. Click on, or type in, the **Copy From Product\*** field to show a list of your products to choose from, eg. Cheeseburger.
2. Click to add these items to the current recipe.
3. You will be asked to confirm as this will override any items you may have already entered.
4. Edit any changes required after the items have been copied.
**Import Items**
Selecting this opens the **Import Production Items** form allowing you to upload a list of production items from a CSV file, instead of entering them one by one. This is a quick way to set up or update items in bulk, especially helpful when working with a large number of products.
1. Click **Download the template**. The **Export Production Items** form will open.\
2. Select **Sample Data** from the **Data Source** menu and click to download the template.
3. Open the template in a spreadsheet application such as Excel or Numbers and complete the fields in the spreadsheet.
{% hint style="warning" %}
You should remove the sample products from the file before importing it into Supply’d to prevent them from being added to your bundle.
{% endhint %}
4. Once completed, export or save the file as a **CSV** (comma-separated values) file.
5. Return to Supply’d, open the **Import Production Items**, upload the completed CSV file, click and follow the on-screen prompts to confirm the import.
6. After the import completes, review the details to ensure the information has been imported correctly and make any changes required.
👉 The import process is explained in more detail in the [Production Items](https://help.supplyd.co/production/creating-a-production-product#production-items) section of the [Creating a Production Product](https://help.supplyd.co/production/creating-a-production-product) document.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
### Add Additional Versions (Optional)
Repeat steps 6 to 9 if you would like to create any additional additional versions.
The versions will appear in the **Recipe Versions** section, along with their current statuses. Click on a version to view its details.
{% hint style="success" %}
Versions have colour-coded statuses for easy identification:
* - Indicates the default recipe version used by the system for generating ingredients, nutrition, margins, and costings, unless a different version has been assigned to a specific location.
* - A recipe version assigned specifically to a particular location.
* - A recipe version that is not currently assigned to or used by any location.
{% endhint %}
You can select which recipe version you would like to use for each of your locations.
To change the **Primary Recipe**, simply select the desired version from the drop-down menu.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click Save
Click to add the stages and items for the **Recipe Version**.
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 For any additional action options for Recipe Versions, see the [#additional-options-for-a-recipe-version](#additional-options-for-a-recipe-version "mention") section below.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Sell Product? & Remaining Sections
👉 Refer to the [Adding & Updating Products](https://help.supplyd.co/products/adding-and-updating-products) document for details on how to complete this and all remaining sections.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Save
Click to finish creating the product.
The product will appear on your **Products** page, with displayed beside its name for easy identification.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
## Additional Options for a Recipe Version
After selecting a recipe version, clicking on the 3 dots in the top right will open a menu.
***
### Download > Recipe Sheet
The **Recipe Sheet** option allows you to download a copy of the selected **Recipe Version**.
Selecting this will open the **Print Recipe Sheet** form.
***
#### Template
Select the template containing the information you would like to download for this **Recipe Version**.
**Product Recipe**
Downloads the recipe details for the selected Recipe Version, including the ingredients and quantities used to make the product.
\
\
\
\
**Product Recipe Costing**
Downloads the recipe details with the cost of each ingredient and the total recipe cost, providing a detailed breakdown of how the product cost is calculated.
***
#### Customisation
**Font**
Select the font you would like to use on the Recipe Sheet.
**Logo**
Select the logo you would like to display on the Recipe Sheet. Select **None** to not include a logo.
Click to generate the Recipe Sheet.
***
### Remove Recipe
Removes the Recipe Version from the product. Other Recipe Versions will not be affected.
You will be asked to confirm.
Click .
{% hint style="warning" %}
You cannot delete the **Primary Recipe** version. If you try to delete it, a warning will be displayed across the top.\
{% endhint %}
***
## Editing a Recipe Product
If you would like to edit a product:
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Select **Products** from the main menu.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click on the product you want to edit.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click on the 3 dots in the top right and select **Edit Product**.
The **Edit Product** form will open.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Change any details as required following the guidelines above for [#creating-a-recipe-product](#creating-a-recipe-product "mention").
**Substituting Products**
Use the **Substitute Product** option to quickly replace an ingredient. The recipe updates automatically, and all related food labelling (ingredients, allergens, nutrition) is refreshed for you - no manual changes needed.
1. Click the 3 dots to the right of a product's name and select **Substitute Product**.\
\
\
\
2\. The **Substitute Product** form will open.\
\
Select the product you would like to use as a substitute.
3. If you would like to update any labelling details, tick **Regenerate Food Labelling?**.\
4. Click .
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click to apply the changes.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
## Removing a Recipe Product
If you would like to remove a product:
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Select **Products** from the main menu.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click on the product you want to remove.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click on the 3 dots in the top right and select **Remove Product**.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
You will be asked to confirm.
Click .
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
# Understanding Product Costing & Margins
Understanding costings and margins helps you make informed pricing decisions, accurately track profitability, and identify where costs are impacting your overall business performance.
If your margins don’t match what you expect, it’s usually due to how costs are calculated in Supply’d. This article explains how costing works and why margins can vary.
{% hint style="success" %}
**Costings** refer to the actual cost of a product or item, including what it costs to purchase or produce it. In Supply’d, this cost is based on inventory batches, meaning it can vary depending on when and how the stock was acquired.
**Margins** refer to the difference between the sale price and the cost of the product. It shows how much profit is made on each sale after the actual cost has been deducted.
{% endhint %}
***
#### Buy Price vs Actual Cost
The **Buy Price** is recorded when you purchase a product, but it is not always the cost used to calculate margins.
Supply’d uses **Inventory Batches** to determine the actual cost of goods.
{% hint style="success" %}
If a product has more than one supplier, the margins shown on its details page will depend on whether a preferred supplier has been set. The costing displayed is based on the preferred supplier assigned to that product, so margin calculations will reflect that supplier’s pricing.
👉 See the [Adding Products](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products#sell-product) section of the [Adding Products](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products) document.
{% endhint %}
***
#### What Are Inventory Batches?
A **batch** is a specific quantity of a product that is produced or received together at the same time, or have the same expiry date.
Each time stock is received, it is stored as a separate batch. Each batch can have its own:
* Purchase price
* Supplier
* Date received
* Quantity
This means the same product can have multiple costs at the same time.
{% hint style="success" %}
Batches are the backbone of Supply’d inventory and are used to group products that share the same production or delivery history. Each batch is tracked separately and contains key information such as cost of goods, batch codes, production dates, expiry dates, quality control checks, temperature checks, and other relevant details. Every batch has its own inventory level, which increases when stock is received and decreases when stock is sold or used, based on matching batch details. This structure allows you to accurately trace production, manage expiry dates, monitor stock levels, and handle recalls or quality issues when needed.
{% endhint %}
***
#### How Costs Are Applied
When a product is sold or used in production, Supply’d:
1. Selects stock from a specific batch or batches.
2. Applies those batches' costs to the transaction.
This is typically based on FIFO (First In, First Out), depending on your setup.
***
#### Why Margins Change
Margins can vary because different batches of the same product may have different costs.
* The same product can have different costs over time.
* Margins will vary depending on which batch is used.
***
#### Simple Example
You purchase:
* 100 units at $10 (Batch 1)
* 100 units at $12 (Batch 2)
You sell 150 units at $20.
**Result:**
* First 100 units use $10 cost → higher margin (50%)
* Next 50 units use $12 cost → lower margin (40%)
Even though the sale price is the same, the margin changes.
***
#### How It Works (Flow)
***
#### Key Points
* Buy Price is a guide, not the final cost used.
* Costs come from inventory batches.
* Different batches can have different costs.
* Margins will vary based on batch usage.
# Searching & Filtering the Products List
Using the search and filter options makes it quicker and easier to find and manage products.
The **Products Page** provides a central place to quickly find, view, and manage products in Supply’d. Using the search and filter options, you can narrow the list to locate a specific product or view a group of products that meet particular criteria. This makes it easier to access the right product information without having to manually browse through the entire list.
On the **Products** page, select the magnifying glass to search for a specific product by name or keyword.
To narrow the list based on specific criteria, select the 3 lines beside the 3 dots in the top right to open the **Filter Offers** form. You can use multiple filters together to quickly find the offers relevant to the task you are completing.
{% hint style="success" %}
You can combine multiple filters to further narrow the product list and quickly find the products you are looking for.
{% endhint %}
**Brand**
Select one or more brands to filter the product list. This is useful when you want to view products from a specific brand or compare products across selected brands.
**Category**
Select one or more categories to filter the product list. This allows you to quickly view products belonging to specific categories without searching through the entire product list.
**Tags**
Select one or more tags from the drop-down menu to filter the product list by specific product attributes. For example, you can select **Gluten Free**, **Vegan**, or other tags to display only products with those tags.
**Department**
Select one or more departments to filter the product list by. This allows you to quickly view products assigned to a specific department or group of departments.
**Name**
Enter a product name or keyword to search the product list. This is useful when you want to quickly find a specific product without browsing the entire list.
**SKU**
Enter a SKU to search the product list. Use this option to quickly locate a product using its unique SKU.
**Barcode**
Enter a barcode to search the product list. This allows you to quickly find a product using its barcode.t.
**Buy/Sell Status**
Filter the product list by **Buy** or **Sell** to view products based on how they are used. Select **Buy** to display products you purchase from suppliers, or **Sell** to display products you sell to customers.
**Sale Status**
Filter products based on whether they currently have a sale price active. This allows you to quickly view products that are on sale or products that are not currently on sale.
**Product Type**
Filter products by their product type, such as **Standard**, **Recipe**, **Gift Card**, or other available product types. This is useful when you want to view or manage products of a specific type.
**Sales Channel**
Select a sales channel to filter the product list by where products are sold. For example, you can filter by your **Supply’d Store**, **Square**, **Shopify**, or other available sales channels.
**Product Status**
Select the **Status** you want to filter the product list by. This allows you to view products based on their current status.
Click to apply your selections and filter the **Products** list.
# Suppliers
Managing suppliers in Supply’d offers enhanced visibility and control over supplier performance, streamlining communication, improving collaboration, and ensuring a more efficient and reliable supply
# The Suppliers Page
Supply’d lets you order from all suppliers in one place. Add suppliers to include non-registered ones seamlessly.
At the heart of Supply'd is a powerful, yet easy ordering system that lets you order from all of your suppliers quickly and easily. To order from suppliers who are not yet on Supply'd you can quickly and easily add a supplier and their products and order from them at the same time as ordering from other suppliers. Suppliers can be added individually or imported in bulk using a CSV file.
👉 Refer to the [Bulk Importing Suppliers](/supplyd-erp/suppliers/bulk-importing-suppliers) document for instructions on importing suppliers in bulk.
\
This document will guide you through adding suppliers individually, including:
* [#the-suppliers-page](#the-suppliers-page "mention")
* [#adding-a-custom-supplier](#adding-a-custom-supplier "mention")
* [#adding-suppliers-products](#adding-suppliers-products "mention")
* [#adding-products-individually](#adding-products-individually "mention")
* [#adding-products-in-bulk](#adding-products-in-bulk "mention")
* [#connecting-with-a-supplyd-supplier](#connecting-with-a-supplyd-supplier "mention")
* [#supplier-requests](#supplier-requests "mention")
* [#supplier-groups](#supplier-groups "mention")
***
## The Suppliers Page
Selecting **Suppliers** from the main menu will open the **Suppliers** page.
The **Suppliers** page is where you manage all your suppliers. It displays a list of every supplier linked to your account, including both Supply’d-connected suppliers and any custom suppliers you’ve added manually.
From this page, you can:
* **Search and filter suppliers** to quickly find the one you need.
* **View supplier details**, such as contact information, ordering methods, and delivery preferences.
* **Add new suppliers**, either individually or by bulk import.
* **Edit supplier information** if details change.
* **Set up delivery schedules and ordering rules** to streamline your purchasing.
This page acts as your central hub for supplier management, ensuring that all supplier details are accurate and up to date.
Clicking on a supplier will display that supplier's page with all their details. Here, you can view their contact details, payment terms, and delivery schedules, as well as see your order history with them. You’ll also find tabs for things like pricing, products, invoices, and notes related to that supplier. From this page, you can easily place new orders, manage existing ones, and keep track of all interactions with that supplier in one place.
{% hint style="success" %}
Supplier statuses will appear on the **Suppliers** list in various colours for easy identification of the supplier type:
- A business that is already on Supply'd.
- A supplier that is not on Supply'd and that you have added to your Supply'd account.
- A supplier you’ve requested to connect with, but who has not yet approved your request.
{% endhint %}
👉 To learn how to add custom suppliers, see [#adding-a-custom-supplier](#adding-a-custom-supplier "mention") below.
***
**Connect Tab**
The **Connect** tab lists all suppliers available to connect with on Supply’d. Clicking on a supplier allows you to view all their information.
👉 See [#connecting-with-a-supplyd-supplier](#connecting-with-a-supplyd-supplier "mention") below for more information.
***
**Requests Tab**
The **Requests** tab lists any supplier connection requests. You can approve or decline suppliers you would like to trade with on Supply'd.
{% hint style="success" %}
The number of active requests you currently have will be indicated by the number in the red circle at the top right of the **Requests** tab.
{% endhint %}
👉 See [#supplier-requests](#supplier-requests "mention") below for more information.
***
**Promotions Tab**
The **Promotions** tab displays all promotions sent to you from your connected Supply'd suppliers. From this tab, you can view current and upcoming promotions, including the products included, promotional pricing, and promotion dates.
This provides a central location for managing and reviewing all promotions offered by your suppliers.
Clicking on a promotion opens the promotion details, where you can view all information associated with the selected promotion.
👉 See the [Supplier Promotions](/supplyd-erp/products/promotions/supplier-promotions) document for full details.
***
**Groups Tab**
While the **Suppliers** tab lists all your individual suppliers, the **Groups** tab shows the suppliers you’ve organised into groups. A **Supplier Group** in Supply’d lets you manage multiple suppliers together in one place. This is especially useful if you regularly order from the same set of suppliers, as it saves time and keeps your ordering process more organised.
For example, you could create a Supplier Group for *“Refrigerated Suppliers”* or *“Local Suppliers”*. When placing an order, instead of adding suppliers one-by-one, you can select the whole group and quickly order from everyone in it.
Clicking on a group will show all the suppliers in that group. Selecting a supplier will open their page, displaying all their details.
👉 To learn how to add supplier groups, see [#supplier-groups](#supplier-groups "mention") below.
***
## Adding a Custom Supplier
Adding a custom supplier in Supply’d is quick and simple - it takes less than a minute. The steps below will guide you through manually adding a supplier. If you need to add many suppliers at once, you can also bulk import them using a CSV file.
👉 You can find the instructions on importing suppliers in bulk in the [Bulk Importing Suppliers](/supplyd-erp/suppliers/bulk-importing-suppliers) document.
{% hint style="warning" %}
You can only add custom suppliers to Supply’d. Suppliers that are already connected through the Supply’d platform cannot be added manually, as their information and products are synced automatically. Custom suppliers give you the flexibility to enter and manage supplier details, contacts, and products that are unique to your business.
{% endhint %}
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Go to the Suppliers Page
Select **Suppliers** from the main menu. The **Suppliers** page will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click Add+
Click **Add +** in the top right.
The **Add Supplier** form will appear.
{% hint style="success" %}
To open or close the sections on this form click the little arrows to the right of the titles (as circled in red above).
{% endhint %}
Complete the sections as outlined below:
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Company Details
**Trading Name\* \[required field]**
Enter the trading name of the supplier you are adding.
{% hint style="success" %}
If while typing, the system finds a match in Supply'd, it will automatically suggest connecting to that supplier instead of creating a custom one. In this case, you will be connecting to a **Supply’d supplier** rather than creating a **custom supplier**.
👉 Proceed as explained from **Step 3** onwards in [#connecting-with-a-supplyd-supplier](#connecting-with-a-supplyd-supplier "mention") below for details on how to do this.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="success" %}
You can also add yourself as a Supplier. This is useful for franchises or businesses with multiple stores ordering from a single production facility.
When you type your name, Supply’d will recognise it and suggest connecting to your account.
If you add yourself as a supplier, you will automatically be added as a customer, so there’s no need to add yourself separately as both a supplier and a customer.
{% endhint %}
**Company Logo**
Optionally, upload the supplier’s logo.
1. Click **Choose File**.
2. **Select the image** file from your computer (usually JPG or PNG).
3. Once uploaded, the logo will appear on the supplier’s page and in lists where the supplier is displayed.
{% hint style="success" %}
Uploading a logo is optional, but it makes it easier to visually identify suppliers in your lists and reports.
{% endhint %}
**Business Number**
Enter the supplier's business number (eg. their ABN or NZBN).
**Company Legal Name**
Enter the supplier’s legal name, ie. the name registered with the business registry.
**Groups**
Select any **Supplier Groups** you would like to assign this supplier to.
👉 See [#supplier-groups](#supplier-groups "mention") below.
**Account Number**
Enter an optional account number that you have with this supplier. This will show on purchase orders.
**Website**
Add the supplier's website.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Custom Fields
Complete any custom fields you may have created.
{% hint style="info" %}
**Custom Fields** are user-defined fields that let you track additional information about a supplier that isn’t included in the default fields. You can name the field whatever you like and enter the data that’s relevant to your business.
👉 See the [Supplier Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/supplier-settings) document for information on creating custom fields for suppliers.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Address
Enter the address details for the supplier.
**Billing Address**
Enter the supplier's street address.
**Billing Suburb**
Enter the supplier's suburb.
**Billing State/Province**
Select the supplier's state.
**Billing Postcode**
Enter the supplier's postcode.
**Billing Country**
Select the supplier's country.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Contact
Enter the details of the supplier’s primary contact.
**First Name**
Enter the first name of a representative/contact of the supplier.
**Last Name**
Enter the last name of a representative/contact of the supplier.
**Role/Department**
Add the role or department of the contact, eg. Sales Rep, Accounts etc.
**Email**
Enter the email address for the contact.
**Mobile**
Add a mobile number for the contact.
**Phone**
Add a phone number for this contact.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Settings
Enter additional settings for the supplier.
**Order Minimums**
Often suppliers require a minimum order. Select whether to enforce a **Minimum Spend** or a **Minimum Carton Quantity**. When enabled, Supply’d will prevent orders from being sent unless the minimum requirement is met
* **Minimum Spend:** When "Minimum Spend" is selected an additional field, **Minimum Spend**, will show where you can enter a dollar amount.\
* **Minimum Carton Qty:** When "Minimum Carton Qty" is selected an additional field, **Minimum Qty**, will show where you can number amount.\
**Payment Terms**
Enter the supplier’s payment terms. First, enter the number of days the supplier gives you to pay, then select one of the following options:
* **Days:** Payment is due within a set number of days after the invoice date (eg. 7 days, 30 days).
* **Days EOM** (End of Month): Payment is due within a certain number of days after the end of the month in which the invoice was issued (eg. “30 Days EOM” means payment is due 30 days after the last day of that month.)
* **Days EOW** (End of Week): Payment is due within a set number of days after the end of the week in which the invoice was issued.
* **Pre-paid:** Payment is due before the goods are supplied, ie. the order must be paid for upfront.
Leave the payment term number blank to use the default term set in your [Supplier Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/supplier-settings).
**Currency**
Select the currency used to purchase from this supplier.
**Buyers Rep**
Select a buyers rep to assign this supplier.
**Default Sales Period (Days)**
You can override the default delivery period for products purchased from this supplier if they take shorter or longer than usual. Enter the number of days to apply.
**Notes**
Add any notes about this supplier. These are for internal reference only and are not visible to the supplier.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Payment Details
Add the supplier's bank account details for ABA generation when using **Expenses**.
**BSB**
Enter the BSB for the supplier's bank account. Max 6 digits.
**Account Number**
Enter the account number of the bank account. Max 9 digits.
***
{% hint style="warning" %}
The following sections - **MYOB & Xero** - will only show if you have these platforms integrated with your Supply'd account.
**NOTE:** The name "**MYOB Test**" will actually reflect whatever names you chose during the integration setup.
👉 See the [Integrations](/supplyd-erp/settings/integrations) help section for information on integrating various platforms with Supply'd.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Myob - "MYOB Test" Settings
Myob - "MYOB Test" settings for this supplier, where "MYOB Test" represents the name given to the integration during setup. Your integration name will reflect whatever name you chose when configuring it.
**MYOB "Test Contact"**
Select/enter the MYOB contact for this supplier.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Xero - "Xero Settings"
Xero settings for this supplier.
**Xero Contact**
Select/enter the MYOB contact for this supplier.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Advanced
Advanced settings for this supplier.
**Order Alert**
Add an internal alert to show when creating an order for this supplier. This alert is not visible to suppliers.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Save
Click to add your supplier.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
## Adding Suppliers' Products
After adding your custom supplier you may want to add or import their products.
Products can be added from the **Products** page (👉 see [Adding Products](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products)) or from the **Suppliers** page.
{% hint style="warning" %}
Products can only be added for custom suppliers. Supply’d-connected suppliers automatically sync their product lists, so you can’t manually add products for them. For custom suppliers you create, however, you have full control to add and manage their products, including pricing, descriptions, and other details.
{% endhint %}
***
### Adding Products Individually
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Select the Supplier
Select Suppliers from the main menu. The Suppliers list will open.
Click on the Supplier you would like to add products to.
The supplier's detail page will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Go to the Products Tab
Go to the products tab. This tab list all the Supplier's products that you may have added.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click on Add +
Click on **Add +** in the top right.
The **Add Product** form will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Complete the Form
Complete the form following the guidelines in the [Adding Products](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products) document.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
### Adding Products in Bulk
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Select the Supplier
Select Suppliers from the main menu. The Suppliers list will open.
Click on the Supplier you would like to add products to.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Go to the Products Tab
Go to the products tab.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Select Import > Products
Click on the 3 dots in the top right, select **Import**, then **Products**.
**The Import Products** form will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Continue the Process
Follow the instructions in the [Bulk Importing of Products](/supplyd-erp/products/bulk-importing-of-products) document to continue with the process.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
## Connecting with a Supply'd Supplier
The **Connect** tab lists all suppliers available to connect with on Supply’d. Clicking on a supplier allows you to view all their information and request to connect with them.
To connect with a Supply'd supplier:
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Open the Suppliers Page
Select **Suppliers** from the main menu. The **Suppliers** page will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Go to the Connect Tab
Go to the **Connect** tab to see a list of all suppliers available to connect with on Supply’d. Only suppliers that have made their stores public will appear; invite-only stores will not be visible.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Select the Supplier
Select the supplier that you would like to connect with. The supplier's details will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click Connect
To send a connection request to the supplier, click .
You will be asked to confirm.
The supplier will review your request and either approve or reject it. If approved, the supplier will appear in your **Suppliers** list.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
## Supplier Requests
The **Requests** tab lists any connection requests from suppliers. You can approve or decline suppliers you would like to trade with on Supply'd.
To review, accept or reject a request from a supplier:
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Open the Suppliers Page
Select **Suppliers** from the main menu. The **Suppliers** page will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Go to the Requests Tab
Go to the **Requests** tab to see a list all connection requests from suppliers.
{% hint style="success" %}
The number of active requests you currently have will be indicated by the number in the red circle at the top right of the **Requests** tab.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Select the Supplier
Select the supplier that you would like to review. The supplier's details will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Approve or Reject the Request
If you would like to connect with this supplier, click . Click **Reject** if you do not want to connect with this supplier.
You will be asked to confirm.
Click .
The supplier will show on your **Suppliers** list.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
## Supplier Groups
**Supplier Groups** in Supply’d help you organise suppliers into categories, such as product type, location, or performance, making it easier to manage and find the right suppliers. Create a group, then assign suppliers to it when setting up or editing a supplier.
### Creating a Supplier Group
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Go to the Suppliers Groups Page
1. Select **Suppliers** from the main menu.
2. Go to the **Groups** tab. The **Groups** page will open, listing any groups that may have been set up.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click Add+
Click **Add +** in the top right.
The **Add Supplier Group** form will appear.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Enter a Name
**Group Name\* \[required field]**
Enter a name for the group.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Save
Click to create the group.
The group will show in the **Supplier Groups** list.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
### Editing a Supplier Group
To edit a **Supplier Group**:
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Select **Suppliers** from the main menu and go to the **Groups** tab.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Select the group.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click on the 3 dots in the top right. Select **Edit Group**.
The **Edit Supplier Group** form will appear where you can edit the group name.
{% hint style="success" %}
Group members can be edited at an individual supplier level.
👉 See [Managing Suppliers](/supplyd-erp/suppliers/managing-suppliers) for more information.
{% endhint %}
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
### Removing a Supplier Group
To remove a **Supplier Group:**
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Select **Suppliers** from the main menu and go to the **Groups** tab.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Select the group.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click on the 3 dots in the top right. Select **Remove Group**.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
You will be asked to confirm.
Click .
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
{% hint style="success" %}
For more information on managing your suppliers, refer to the [Managing Suppliers](/supplyd-erp/suppliers/managing-suppliers) document.
{% endhint %}
# Adding Suppliers & Supplier Groups
Supply’d lets you order from all suppliers in one place. Add suppliers to include non-registered ones seamlessly.
At the heart of Supply'd is a powerful, yet easy ordering system that lets you order from all of your suppliers quickly and easily. To order from suppliers who are not yet on Supply'd you can quickly and easily add a supplier and their products and order from them at the same time as ordering from other suppliers. Suppliers can be added individually or imported in bulk using a CSV file.
👉 Refer to the [Bulk Importing Suppliers](/supplyd-erp/suppliers/bulk-importing-suppliers) document for instructions on importing suppliers in bulk.
\
This document will guide you through adding suppliers individually, including:
* [#the-suppliers-page](#the-suppliers-page "mention")
* [#adding-a-custom-supplier](#adding-a-custom-supplier "mention")
* [#adding-suppliers-products](#adding-suppliers-products "mention")
* [#adding-products-individually](#adding-products-individually "mention")
* [#adding-products-in-bulk](#adding-products-in-bulk "mention")
* [#connecting-with-a-supplyd-supplier](#connecting-with-a-supplyd-supplier "mention")
* [#supplier-requests](#supplier-requests "mention")
* [#supplier-groups](#supplier-groups "mention")
***
## The Suppliers Page
Selecting **Suppliers** from the main menu will open the **Suppliers** page.
The **Suppliers** page is where you manage all your suppliers. It displays a list of every supplier linked to your account, including both Supply’d-connected suppliers and any custom suppliers you’ve added manually.
From this page, you can:
* **Search and filter suppliers** to quickly find the one you need.
* **View supplier details**, such as contact information, ordering methods, and delivery preferences.
* **Add new suppliers**, either individually or by bulk import.
* **Edit supplier information** if details change.
* **Set up delivery schedules and ordering rules** to streamline your purchasing.
This page acts as your central hub for supplier management, ensuring that all supplier details are accurate and up to date.
Clicking on a supplier will display that supplier's page with all their details. Here, you can view their contact details, payment terms, and delivery schedules, as well as see your order history with them. You’ll also find tabs for things like pricing, products, invoices, and notes related to that supplier. From this page, you can easily place new orders, manage existing ones, and keep track of all interactions with that supplier in one place.
{% hint style="success" %}
Supplier statuses will appear on the **Suppliers** list in various colours for easy identification of the supplier type:
- A business that is already on Supply'd.
- A supplier that is not on Supply'd and that you have added to your Supply'd account.
- A supplier you’ve requested to connect with, but who has not yet approved your request.
{% endhint %}
👉 To learn how to add custom suppliers, see [#adding-a-custom-supplier](#adding-a-custom-supplier "mention") below.
***
**Connect Tab**
The **Connect** tab lists all suppliers available to connect with on Supply’d. Clicking on a supplier allows you to view all their information.
👉 See [#connecting-with-a-supplyd-supplier](#connecting-with-a-supplyd-supplier "mention") below for more information.
***
**Requests Tab**
The **Requests** tab lists any supplier connection requests. You can approve or decline suppliers you would like to trade with on Supply'd.
{% hint style="success" %}
The number of active requests you currently have will be indicated by the number in the red circle at the top right of the **Requests** tab.
{% endhint %}
👉 See [#supplier-requests](#supplier-requests "mention") below for more information.
***
**Promotions Tab**
The **Promotions** tab displays all promotions sent to you from your connected Supply'd suppliers. From this tab, you can view current and upcoming promotions, including the products included, promotional pricing, and promotion dates.
This provides a central location for managing and reviewing all promotions offered by your suppliers.
Clicking on a promotion opens the promotion details, where you can view all information associated with the selected promotion.
👉 See the [Supplier Promotions](/supplyd-erp/products/promotions/supplier-promotions) document for full details.
***
**Groups Tab**
While the **Suppliers** tab lists all your individual suppliers, the **Groups** tab shows the suppliers you’ve organised into groups. A **Supplier Group** in Supply’d lets you manage multiple suppliers together in one place. This is especially useful if you regularly order from the same set of suppliers, as it saves time and keeps your ordering process more organised.
For example, you could create a Supplier Group for *“Refrigerated Suppliers”* or *“Local Suppliers”*. When placing an order, instead of adding suppliers one-by-one, you can select the whole group and quickly order from everyone in it.
Clicking on a group will show all the suppliers in that group. Selecting a supplier will open their page, displaying all their details.
👉 To learn how to add supplier groups, see [#supplier-groups](#supplier-groups "mention") below.
***
## Adding a Custom Supplier
Adding a custom supplier in Supply’d is quick and simple - it takes less than a minute. The steps below will guide you through manually adding a supplier. If you need to add many suppliers at once, you can also bulk import them using a CSV file.
👉 You can find the instructions on importing suppliers in bulk in the [Bulk Importing Suppliers](/supplyd-erp/suppliers/bulk-importing-suppliers) document.
{% hint style="warning" %}
You can only add custom suppliers to Supply’d. Suppliers that are already connected through the Supply’d platform cannot be added manually, as their information and products are synced automatically. Custom suppliers give you the flexibility to enter and manage supplier details, contacts, and products that are unique to your business.
{% endhint %}
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Go to the Suppliers Page
Select **Suppliers** from the main menu. The **Suppliers** page will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click Add+
Click **Add +** in the top right.
The **Add Supplier** form will appear.
{% hint style="success" %}
To open or close the sections on this form click the little arrows to the right of the titles (as circled in red above).
{% endhint %}
Complete the sections as outlined below:
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Company Details
**Trading Name\* \[required field]**
Enter the trading name of the supplier you are adding.
{% hint style="success" %}
If while typing, the system finds a match in Supply'd, it will automatically suggest connecting to that supplier instead of creating a custom one. In this case, you will be connecting to a **Supply’d supplier** rather than creating a **custom supplier**.
👉 Proceed as explained from **Step 3** onwards in [#connecting-with-a-supplyd-supplier](#connecting-with-a-supplyd-supplier "mention") below for details on how to do this.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="success" %}
You can also add yourself as a Supplier. This is useful for franchises or businesses with multiple stores ordering from a single production facility.
When you type your name, Supply’d will recognise it and suggest connecting to your account.
If you add yourself as a supplier, you will automatically be added as a customer, so there’s no need to add yourself separately as both a supplier and a customer.
{% endhint %}
**Company Logo**
Optionally, upload the supplier’s logo.
1. Click **Choose File**.
2. **Select the image** file from your computer (usually JPG or PNG).
3. Once uploaded, the logo will appear on the supplier’s page and in lists where the supplier is displayed.
{% hint style="success" %}
Uploading a logo is optional, but it makes it easier to visually identify suppliers in your lists and reports.
{% endhint %}
**Business Number**
Enter the supplier's business number (eg. their ABN or NZBN).
**Company Legal Name**
Enter the supplier’s legal name, ie. the name registered with the business registry.
**Groups**
Select any **Supplier Groups** you would like to assign this supplier to.
👉 See [#supplier-groups](#supplier-groups "mention") below.
**Account Number**
Enter an optional account number that you have with this supplier. This will show on purchase orders.
**Website**
Add the supplier's website.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Custom Fields
Complete any custom fields you may have created.
{% hint style="info" %}
**Custom Fields** are user-defined fields that let you track additional information about a supplier that isn’t included in the default fields. You can name the field whatever you like and enter the data that’s relevant to your business.
👉 See the [Supplier Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/supplier-settings) document for information on creating custom fields for suppliers.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Address
Enter the address details for the supplier.
**Billing Address**
Enter the supplier's street address.
**Billing Suburb**
Enter the supplier's suburb.
**Billing State/Province**
Select the supplier's state.
**Billing Postcode**
Enter the supplier's postcode.
**Billing Country**
Select the supplier's country.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Contact
Enter the details of the supplier’s primary contact.
**First Name**
Enter the first name of a representative/contact of the supplier.
**Last Name**
Enter the last name of a representative/contact of the supplier.
**Role/Department**
Add the role or department of the contact, eg. Sales Rep, Accounts etc.
**Email**
Enter the email address for the contact.
**Mobile**
Add a mobile number for the contact.
**Phone**
Add a phone number for this contact.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Settings
Enter additional settings for the supplier.
**Order Minimums**
Often suppliers require a minimum order. Select whether to enforce a **Minimum Spend** or a **Minimum Carton Quantity**. When enabled, Supply’d will prevent orders from being sent unless the minimum requirement is met
* **Minimum Spend:** When "Minimum Spend" is selected an additional field, **Minimum Spend**, will show where you can enter a dollar amount.\
* **Minimum Carton Qty:** When "Minimum Carton Qty" is selected an additional field, **Minimum Qty**, will show where you can number amount.\
**Payment Terms**
Enter the supplier’s payment terms. First, enter the number of days the supplier gives you to pay, then select one of the following options:
* **Days:** Payment is due within a set number of days after the invoice date (eg. 7 days, 30 days).
* **Days EOM** (End of Month): Payment is due within a certain number of days after the end of the month in which the invoice was issued (eg. “30 Days EOM” means payment is due 30 days after the last day of that month.)
* **Days EOW** (End of Week): Payment is due within a set number of days after the end of the week in which the invoice was issued.
* **Pre-paid:** Payment is due before the goods are supplied, ie. the order must be paid for upfront.
Leave the payment term number blank to use the default term set in your [Supplier Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/supplier-settings).
**Currency**
Select the currency used to purchase from this supplier.
**Buyers Rep**
Select a buyers rep to assign this supplier.
**Default Sales Period (Days)**
You can override the default delivery period for products purchased from this supplier if they take shorter or longer than usual. Enter the number of days to apply.
**Notes**
Add any notes about this supplier. These are for internal reference only and are not visible to the supplier.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Payment Details
Add the supplier's bank account details for ABA generation when using **Expenses**.
**BSB**
Enter the BSB for the supplier's bank account. Max 6 digits.
**Account Number**
Enter the account number of the bank account. Max 9 digits.
***
{% hint style="warning" %}
The following sections - **MYOB & Xero** - will only show if you have these platforms integrated with your Supply'd account.
**NOTE:** The name "**MYOB Test**" will actually reflect whatever names you chose during the integration setup.
👉 See the [Integrations](/supplyd-erp/settings/integrations) help section for information on integrating various platforms with Supply'd.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Myob - "MYOB Test" Settings
Myob - "MYOB Test" settings for this supplier, where "MYOB Test" represents the name given to the integration during setup. Your integration name will reflect whatever name you chose when configuring it.
**MYOB "Test Contact"**
Select/enter the MYOB contact for this supplier.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Xero - "Xero Settings"
Xero settings for this supplier.
**Xero Contact**
Select/enter the MYOB contact for this supplier.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Advanced
Advanced settings for this supplier.
**Order Alert**
Add an internal alert to show when creating an order for this supplier. This alert is not visible to suppliers.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Save
Click to add your supplier.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
## Adding Suppliers' Products
After adding your custom supplier you may want to add or import their products.
Products can be added from the **Products** page (👉 see [Adding Products](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products)) or from the **Suppliers** page.
{% hint style="warning" %}
Products can only be added for custom suppliers. Supply’d-connected suppliers automatically sync their product lists, so you can’t manually add products for them. For custom suppliers you create, however, you have full control to add and manage their products, including pricing, descriptions, and other details.
{% endhint %}
***
### Adding Products Individually
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Select the Supplier
Select Suppliers from the main menu. The Suppliers list will open.
Click on the Supplier you would like to add products to.
The supplier's detail page will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Go to the Products Tab
Go to the products tab. This tab list all the Supplier's products that you may have added.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click on Add +
Click on **Add +** in the top right.
The **Add Product** form will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Complete the Form
Complete the form following the guidelines in the [Adding Products](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products) document.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
### Adding Products in Bulk
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Select the Supplier
Select Suppliers from the main menu. The Suppliers list will open.
Click on the Supplier you would like to add products to.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Go to the Products Tab
Go to the products tab.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Select Import > Products
Click on the 3 dots in the top right, select **Import**, then **Products**.
**The Import Products** form will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Continue the Process
Follow the instructions in the [Bulk Importing of Products](/supplyd-erp/products/bulk-importing-of-products) document to continue with the process.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
## Connecting with a Supply'd Supplier
The **Connect** tab lists all suppliers available to connect with on Supply’d. Clicking on a supplier allows you to view all their information and request to connect with them.
To connect with a Supply'd supplier:
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Open the Suppliers Page
Select **Suppliers** from the main menu. The **Suppliers** page will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Go to the Connect Tab
Go to the **Connect** tab to see a list of all suppliers available to connect with on Supply’d. Only suppliers that have made their stores public will appear; invite-only stores will not be visible.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Select the Supplier
Select the supplier that you would like to connect with. The supplier's details will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click Connect
To send a connection request to the supplier, click .
You will be asked to confirm.
The supplier will review your request and either approve or reject it. If approved, the supplier will appear in your **Suppliers** list.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
## Supplier Requests
The **Requests** tab lists any connection requests from suppliers. You can approve or decline suppliers you would like to trade with on Supply'd.
To review, accept or reject a request from a supplier:
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Open the Suppliers Page
Select **Suppliers** from the main menu. The **Suppliers** page will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Go to the Requests Tab
Go to the **Requests** tab to see a list all connection requests from suppliers.
{% hint style="success" %}
The number of active requests you currently have will be indicated by the number in the red circle at the top right of the **Requests** tab.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Select the Supplier
Select the supplier that you would like to review. The supplier's details will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Approve or Reject the Request
If you would like to connect with this supplier, click . Click **Reject** if you do not want to connect with this supplier.
You will be asked to confirm.
Click .
The supplier will show on your **Suppliers** list.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
## Supplier Groups
**Supplier Groups** in Supply’d help you organise suppliers into categories, such as product type, location, or performance, making it easier to manage and find the right suppliers. Create a group, then assign suppliers to it when setting up or editing a supplier.
### Creating a Supplier Group
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Go to the Suppliers Groups Page
1. Select **Suppliers** from the main menu.
2. Go to the **Groups** tab. The **Groups** page will open, listing any groups that may have been set up.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click Add+
Click **Add +** in the top right.
The **Add Supplier Group** form will appear.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Enter a Name
**Group Name\* \[required field]**
Enter a name for the group.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Save
Click to create the group.
The group will show in the **Supplier Groups** list.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
### Editing a Supplier Group
To edit a **Supplier Group**:
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Select **Suppliers** from the main menu and go to the **Groups** tab.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Select the group.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click on the 3 dots in the top right. Select **Edit Group**.
The **Edit Supplier Group** form will appear where you can edit the group name.
{% hint style="success" %}
Group members can be edited at an individual supplier level.
👉 See [Managing Suppliers](/supplyd-erp/suppliers/managing-suppliers) for more information.
{% endhint %}
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
### Removing a Supplier Group
To remove a **Supplier Group:**
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Select **Suppliers** from the main menu and go to the **Groups** tab.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Select the group.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click on the 3 dots in the top right. Select **Remove Group**.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
You will be asked to confirm.
Click .
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
{% hint style="success" %}
For more information on managing your suppliers, refer to the [Managing Suppliers](/supplyd-erp/suppliers/managing-suppliers) document.
{% endhint %}
# Adding a Custom Supplier
Supply’d lets you order from all suppliers in one place. Add suppliers to include non-registered ones seamlessly.
At the heart of Supply'd is a powerful, yet easy ordering system that lets you order from all of your suppliers quickly and easily. To order from suppliers who are not yet on Supply'd you can quickly and easily add a supplier and their products and order from them at the same time as ordering from other suppliers. Suppliers can be added individually or imported in bulk using a CSV file.
👉 Refer to the [Bulk Importing Suppliers](/supplyd-erp/suppliers/bulk-importing-suppliers) document for instructions on importing suppliers in bulk.
\
This document will guide you through adding suppliers individually, including:
* [#the-suppliers-page](#the-suppliers-page "mention")
* [#adding-a-custom-supplier](#adding-a-custom-supplier "mention")
* [#adding-suppliers-products](#adding-suppliers-products "mention")
* [#adding-products-individually](#adding-products-individually "mention")
* [#adding-products-in-bulk](#adding-products-in-bulk "mention")
* [#connecting-with-a-supplyd-supplier](#connecting-with-a-supplyd-supplier "mention")
* [#supplier-requests](#supplier-requests "mention")
* [#supplier-groups](#supplier-groups "mention")
***
## The Suppliers Page
Selecting **Suppliers** from the main menu will open the **Suppliers** page.
The **Suppliers** page is where you manage all your suppliers. It displays a list of every supplier linked to your account, including both Supply’d-connected suppliers and any custom suppliers you’ve added manually.
From this page, you can:
* **Search and filter suppliers** to quickly find the one you need.
* **View supplier details**, such as contact information, ordering methods, and delivery preferences.
* **Add new suppliers**, either individually or by bulk import.
* **Edit supplier information** if details change.
* **Set up delivery schedules and ordering rules** to streamline your purchasing.
This page acts as your central hub for supplier management, ensuring that all supplier details are accurate and up to date.
Clicking on a supplier will display that supplier's page with all their details. Here, you can view their contact details, payment terms, and delivery schedules, as well as see your order history with them. You’ll also find tabs for things like pricing, products, invoices, and notes related to that supplier. From this page, you can easily place new orders, manage existing ones, and keep track of all interactions with that supplier in one place.
{% hint style="success" %}
Supplier statuses will appear on the **Suppliers** list in various colours for easy identification of the supplier type:
- A business that is already on Supply'd.
- A supplier that is not on Supply'd and that you have added to your Supply'd account.
- A supplier you’ve requested to connect with, but who has not yet approved your request.
{% endhint %}
👉 To learn how to add custom suppliers, see [#adding-a-custom-supplier](#adding-a-custom-supplier "mention") below.
***
**Connect Tab**
The **Connect** tab lists all suppliers available to connect with on Supply’d. Clicking on a supplier allows you to view all their information.
👉 See [#connecting-with-a-supplyd-supplier](#connecting-with-a-supplyd-supplier "mention") below for more information.
***
**Requests Tab**
The **Requests** tab lists any supplier connection requests. You can approve or decline suppliers you would like to trade with on Supply'd.
{% hint style="success" %}
The number of active requests you currently have will be indicated by the number in the red circle at the top right of the **Requests** tab.
{% endhint %}
👉 See [#supplier-requests](#supplier-requests "mention") below for more information.
***
**Promotions Tab**
The **Promotions** tab displays all promotions sent to you from your connected Supply'd suppliers. From this tab, you can view current and upcoming promotions, including the products included, promotional pricing, and promotion dates.
This provides a central location for managing and reviewing all promotions offered by your suppliers.
Clicking on a promotion opens the promotion details, where you can view all information associated with the selected promotion.
👉 See the [Supplier Promotions](/supplyd-erp/products/promotions/supplier-promotions) document for full details.
***
**Groups Tab**
While the **Suppliers** tab lists all your individual suppliers, the **Groups** tab shows the suppliers you’ve organised into groups. A **Supplier Group** in Supply’d lets you manage multiple suppliers together in one place. This is especially useful if you regularly order from the same set of suppliers, as it saves time and keeps your ordering process more organised.
For example, you could create a Supplier Group for *“Refrigerated Suppliers”* or *“Local Suppliers”*. When placing an order, instead of adding suppliers one-by-one, you can select the whole group and quickly order from everyone in it.
Clicking on a group will show all the suppliers in that group. Selecting a supplier will open their page, displaying all their details.
👉 To learn how to add supplier groups, see [#supplier-groups](#supplier-groups "mention") below.
***
## Adding a Custom Supplier
Adding a custom supplier in Supply’d is quick and simple - it takes less than a minute. The steps below will guide you through manually adding a supplier. If you need to add many suppliers at once, you can also bulk import them using a CSV file.
👉 You can find the instructions on importing suppliers in bulk in the [Bulk Importing Suppliers](/supplyd-erp/suppliers/bulk-importing-suppliers) document.
{% hint style="warning" %}
You can only add custom suppliers to Supply’d. Suppliers that are already connected through the Supply’d platform cannot be added manually, as their information and products are synced automatically. Custom suppliers give you the flexibility to enter and manage supplier details, contacts, and products that are unique to your business.
{% endhint %}
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Go to the Suppliers Page
Select **Suppliers** from the main menu. The **Suppliers** page will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click Add+
Click **Add +** in the top right.
The **Add Supplier** form will appear.
{% hint style="success" %}
To open or close the sections on this form click the little arrows to the right of the titles (as circled in red above).
{% endhint %}
Complete the sections as outlined below:
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Company Details
**Trading Name\* \[required field]**
Enter the trading name of the supplier you are adding.
{% hint style="success" %}
If while typing, the system finds a match in Supply'd, it will automatically suggest connecting to that supplier instead of creating a custom one. In this case, you will be connecting to a **Supply’d supplier** rather than creating a **custom supplier**.
👉 Proceed as explained from **Step 3** onwards in [#connecting-with-a-supplyd-supplier](#connecting-with-a-supplyd-supplier "mention") below for details on how to do this.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="success" %}
You can also add yourself as a Supplier. This is useful for franchises or businesses with multiple stores ordering from a single production facility.
When you type your name, Supply’d will recognise it and suggest connecting to your account.
If you add yourself as a supplier, you will automatically be added as a customer, so there’s no need to add yourself separately as both a supplier and a customer.
{% endhint %}
**Company Logo**
Optionally, upload the supplier’s logo.
1. Click **Choose File**.
2. **Select the image** file from your computer (usually JPG or PNG).
3. Once uploaded, the logo will appear on the supplier’s page and in lists where the supplier is displayed.
{% hint style="success" %}
Uploading a logo is optional, but it makes it easier to visually identify suppliers in your lists and reports.
{% endhint %}
**Business Number**
Enter the supplier's business number (eg. their ABN or NZBN).
**Company Legal Name**
Enter the supplier’s legal name, ie. the name registered with the business registry.
**Groups**
Select any **Supplier Groups** you would like to assign this supplier to.
👉 See [#supplier-groups](#supplier-groups "mention") below.
**Account Number**
Enter an optional account number that you have with this supplier. This will show on purchase orders.
**Website**
Add the supplier's website.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Custom Fields
Complete any custom fields you may have created.
{% hint style="info" %}
**Custom Fields** are user-defined fields that let you track additional information about a supplier that isn’t included in the default fields. You can name the field whatever you like and enter the data that’s relevant to your business.
👉 See the [Supplier Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/supplier-settings) document for information on creating custom fields for suppliers.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Address
Enter the address details for the supplier.
**Billing Address**
Enter the supplier's street address.
**Billing Suburb**
Enter the supplier's suburb.
**Billing State/Province**
Select the supplier's state.
**Billing Postcode**
Enter the supplier's postcode.
**Billing Country**
Select the supplier's country.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Contact
Enter the details of the supplier’s primary contact.
**First Name**
Enter the first name of a representative/contact of the supplier.
**Last Name**
Enter the last name of a representative/contact of the supplier.
**Role/Department**
Add the role or department of the contact, eg. Sales Rep, Accounts etc.
**Email**
Enter the email address for the contact.
**Mobile**
Add a mobile number for the contact.
**Phone**
Add a phone number for this contact.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Settings
Enter additional settings for the supplier.
**Order Minimums**
Often suppliers require a minimum order. Select whether to enforce a **Minimum Spend** or a **Minimum Carton Quantity**. When enabled, Supply’d will prevent orders from being sent unless the minimum requirement is met
* **Minimum Spend:** When "Minimum Spend" is selected an additional field, **Minimum Spend**, will show where you can enter a dollar amount.\
* **Minimum Carton Qty:** When "Minimum Carton Qty" is selected an additional field, **Minimum Qty**, will show where you can number amount.\
**Payment Terms**
Enter the supplier’s payment terms. First, enter the number of days the supplier gives you to pay, then select one of the following options:
* **Days:** Payment is due within a set number of days after the invoice date (eg. 7 days, 30 days).
* **Days EOM** (End of Month): Payment is due within a certain number of days after the end of the month in which the invoice was issued (eg. “30 Days EOM” means payment is due 30 days after the last day of that month.)
* **Days EOW** (End of Week): Payment is due within a set number of days after the end of the week in which the invoice was issued.
* **Pre-paid:** Payment is due before the goods are supplied, ie. the order must be paid for upfront.
Leave the payment term number blank to use the default term set in your [Supplier Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/supplier-settings).
**Currency**
Select the currency used to purchase from this supplier.
**Buyers Rep**
Select a buyers rep to assign this supplier.
**Default Sales Period (Days)**
You can override the default delivery period for products purchased from this supplier if they take shorter or longer than usual. Enter the number of days to apply.
**Notes**
Add any notes about this supplier. These are for internal reference only and are not visible to the supplier.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Payment Details
Add the supplier's bank account details for ABA generation when using **Expenses**.
**BSB**
Enter the BSB for the supplier's bank account. Max 6 digits.
**Account Number**
Enter the account number of the bank account. Max 9 digits.
***
{% hint style="warning" %}
The following sections - **MYOB & Xero** - will only show if you have these platforms integrated with your Supply'd account.
**NOTE:** The name "**MYOB Test**" will actually reflect whatever names you chose during the integration setup.
👉 See the [Integrations](/supplyd-erp/settings/integrations) help section for information on integrating various platforms with Supply'd.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Myob - "MYOB Test" Settings
Myob - "MYOB Test" settings for this supplier, where "MYOB Test" represents the name given to the integration during setup. Your integration name will reflect whatever name you chose when configuring it.
**MYOB "Test Contact"**
Select/enter the MYOB contact for this supplier.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Xero - "Xero Settings"
Xero settings for this supplier.
**Xero Contact**
Select/enter the MYOB contact for this supplier.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Advanced
Advanced settings for this supplier.
**Order Alert**
Add an internal alert to show when creating an order for this supplier. This alert is not visible to suppliers.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Save
Click to add your supplier.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
## Adding Suppliers' Products
After adding your custom supplier you may want to add or import their products.
Products can be added from the **Products** page (👉 see [Adding Products](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products)) or from the **Suppliers** page.
{% hint style="warning" %}
Products can only be added for custom suppliers. Supply’d-connected suppliers automatically sync their product lists, so you can’t manually add products for them. For custom suppliers you create, however, you have full control to add and manage their products, including pricing, descriptions, and other details.
{% endhint %}
***
### Adding Products Individually
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Select the Supplier
Select Suppliers from the main menu. The Suppliers list will open.
Click on the Supplier you would like to add products to.
The supplier's detail page will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Go to the Products Tab
Go to the products tab. This tab list all the Supplier's products that you may have added.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click on Add +
Click on **Add +** in the top right.
The **Add Product** form will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Complete the Form
Complete the form following the guidelines in the [Adding Products](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products) document.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
### Adding Products in Bulk
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Select the Supplier
Select Suppliers from the main menu. The Suppliers list will open.
Click on the Supplier you would like to add products to.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Go to the Products Tab
Go to the products tab.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Select Import > Products
Click on the 3 dots in the top right, select **Import**, then **Products**.
**The Import Products** form will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Continue the Process
Follow the instructions in the [Bulk Importing of Products](/supplyd-erp/products/bulk-importing-of-products) document to continue with the process.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
## Connecting with a Supply'd Supplier
The **Connect** tab lists all suppliers available to connect with on Supply’d. Clicking on a supplier allows you to view all their information and request to connect with them.
To connect with a Supply'd supplier:
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Open the Suppliers Page
Select **Suppliers** from the main menu. The **Suppliers** page will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Go to the Connect Tab
Go to the **Connect** tab to see a list of all suppliers available to connect with on Supply’d. Only suppliers that have made their stores public will appear; invite-only stores will not be visible.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Select the Supplier
Select the supplier that you would like to connect with. The supplier's details will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click Connect
To send a connection request to the supplier, click .
You will be asked to confirm.
The supplier will review your request and either approve or reject it. If approved, the supplier will appear in your **Suppliers** list.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
## Supplier Requests
The **Requests** tab lists any connection requests from suppliers. You can approve or decline suppliers you would like to trade with on Supply'd.
To review, accept or reject a request from a supplier:
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Open the Suppliers Page
Select **Suppliers** from the main menu. The **Suppliers** page will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Go to the Requests Tab
Go to the **Requests** tab to see a list all connection requests from suppliers.
{% hint style="success" %}
The number of active requests you currently have will be indicated by the number in the red circle at the top right of the **Requests** tab.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Select the Supplier
Select the supplier that you would like to review. The supplier's details will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Approve or Reject the Request
If you would like to connect with this supplier, click . Click **Reject** if you do not want to connect with this supplier.
You will be asked to confirm.
Click .
The supplier will show on your **Suppliers** list.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
## Supplier Groups
**Supplier Groups** in Supply’d help you organise suppliers into categories, such as product type, location, or performance, making it easier to manage and find the right suppliers. Create a group, then assign suppliers to it when setting up or editing a supplier.
### Creating a Supplier Group
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Go to the Suppliers Groups Page
1. Select **Suppliers** from the main menu.
2. Go to the **Groups** tab. The **Groups** page will open, listing any groups that may have been set up.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click Add+
Click **Add +** in the top right.
The **Add Supplier Group** form will appear.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Enter a Name
**Group Name\* \[required field]**
Enter a name for the group.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Save
Click to create the group.
The group will show in the **Supplier Groups** list.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
### Editing a Supplier Group
To edit a **Supplier Group**:
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Select **Suppliers** from the main menu and go to the **Groups** tab.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Select the group.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click on the 3 dots in the top right. Select **Edit Group**.
The **Edit Supplier Group** form will appear where you can edit the group name.
{% hint style="success" %}
Group members can be edited at an individual supplier level.
👉 See [Managing Suppliers](/supplyd-erp/suppliers/managing-suppliers) for more information.
{% endhint %}
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
### Removing a Supplier Group
To remove a **Supplier Group:**
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Select **Suppliers** from the main menu and go to the **Groups** tab.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Select the group.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click on the 3 dots in the top right. Select **Remove Group**.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
You will be asked to confirm.
Click .
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
{% hint style="success" %}
For more information on managing your suppliers, refer to the [Managing Suppliers](/supplyd-erp/suppliers/managing-suppliers) document.
{% endhint %}
# Adding a Supplier Group
Supply’d lets you order from all suppliers in one place. Add suppliers to include non-registered ones seamlessly.
At the heart of Supply'd is a powerful, yet easy ordering system that lets you order from all of your suppliers quickly and easily. To order from suppliers who are not yet on Supply'd you can quickly and easily add a supplier and their products and order from them at the same time as ordering from other suppliers. Suppliers can be added individually or imported in bulk using a CSV file.
👉 Refer to the [Bulk Importing Suppliers](/supplyd-erp/suppliers/bulk-importing-suppliers) document for instructions on importing suppliers in bulk.
\
This document will guide you through adding suppliers individually, including:
* [#the-suppliers-page](#the-suppliers-page "mention")
* [#adding-a-custom-supplier](#adding-a-custom-supplier "mention")
* [#adding-suppliers-products](#adding-suppliers-products "mention")
* [#adding-products-individually](#adding-products-individually "mention")
* [#adding-products-in-bulk](#adding-products-in-bulk "mention")
* [#connecting-with-a-supplyd-supplier](#connecting-with-a-supplyd-supplier "mention")
* [#supplier-requests](#supplier-requests "mention")
* [#supplier-groups](#supplier-groups "mention")
***
## The Suppliers Page
Selecting **Suppliers** from the main menu will open the **Suppliers** page.
The **Suppliers** page is where you manage all your suppliers. It displays a list of every supplier linked to your account, including both Supply’d-connected suppliers and any custom suppliers you’ve added manually.
From this page, you can:
* **Search and filter suppliers** to quickly find the one you need.
* **View supplier details**, such as contact information, ordering methods, and delivery preferences.
* **Add new suppliers**, either individually or by bulk import.
* **Edit supplier information** if details change.
* **Set up delivery schedules and ordering rules** to streamline your purchasing.
This page acts as your central hub for supplier management, ensuring that all supplier details are accurate and up to date.
Clicking on a supplier will display that supplier's page with all their details. Here, you can view their contact details, payment terms, and delivery schedules, as well as see your order history with them. You’ll also find tabs for things like pricing, products, invoices, and notes related to that supplier. From this page, you can easily place new orders, manage existing ones, and keep track of all interactions with that supplier in one place.
{% hint style="success" %}
Supplier statuses will appear on the **Suppliers** list in various colours for easy identification of the supplier type:
- A business that is already on Supply'd.
- A supplier that is not on Supply'd and that you have added to your Supply'd account.
- A supplier you’ve requested to connect with, but who has not yet approved your request.
{% endhint %}
👉 To learn how to add custom suppliers, see [#adding-a-custom-supplier](#adding-a-custom-supplier "mention") below.
***
**Connect Tab**
The **Connect** tab lists all suppliers available to connect with on Supply’d. Clicking on a supplier allows you to view all their information.
👉 See [#connecting-with-a-supplyd-supplier](#connecting-with-a-supplyd-supplier "mention") below for more information.
***
**Requests Tab**
The **Requests** tab lists any supplier connection requests. You can approve or decline suppliers you would like to trade with on Supply'd.
{% hint style="success" %}
The number of active requests you currently have will be indicated by the number in the red circle at the top right of the **Requests** tab.
{% endhint %}
👉 See [#supplier-requests](#supplier-requests "mention") below for more information.
***
**Promotions Tab**
The **Promotions** tab displays all promotions sent to you from your connected Supply'd suppliers. From this tab, you can view current and upcoming promotions, including the products included, promotional pricing, and promotion dates.
This provides a central location for managing and reviewing all promotions offered by your suppliers.
Clicking on a promotion opens the promotion details, where you can view all information associated with the selected promotion.
👉 See the [Supplier Promotions](/supplyd-erp/products/promotions/supplier-promotions) document for full details.
***
**Groups Tab**
While the **Suppliers** tab lists all your individual suppliers, the **Groups** tab shows the suppliers you’ve organised into groups. A **Supplier Group** in Supply’d lets you manage multiple suppliers together in one place. This is especially useful if you regularly order from the same set of suppliers, as it saves time and keeps your ordering process more organised.
For example, you could create a Supplier Group for *“Refrigerated Suppliers”* or *“Local Suppliers”*. When placing an order, instead of adding suppliers one-by-one, you can select the whole group and quickly order from everyone in it.
Clicking on a group will show all the suppliers in that group. Selecting a supplier will open their page, displaying all their details.
👉 To learn how to add supplier groups, see [#supplier-groups](#supplier-groups "mention") below.
***
## Adding a Custom Supplier
Adding a custom supplier in Supply’d is quick and simple - it takes less than a minute. The steps below will guide you through manually adding a supplier. If you need to add many suppliers at once, you can also bulk import them using a CSV file.
👉 You can find the instructions on importing suppliers in bulk in the [Bulk Importing Suppliers](/supplyd-erp/suppliers/bulk-importing-suppliers) document.
{% hint style="warning" %}
You can only add custom suppliers to Supply’d. Suppliers that are already connected through the Supply’d platform cannot be added manually, as their information and products are synced automatically. Custom suppliers give you the flexibility to enter and manage supplier details, contacts, and products that are unique to your business.
{% endhint %}
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Go to the Suppliers Page
Select **Suppliers** from the main menu. The **Suppliers** page will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click Add+
Click **Add +** in the top right.
The **Add Supplier** form will appear.
{% hint style="success" %}
To open or close the sections on this form click the little arrows to the right of the titles (as circled in red above).
{% endhint %}
Complete the sections as outlined below:
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Company Details
**Trading Name\* \[required field]**
Enter the trading name of the supplier you are adding.
{% hint style="success" %}
If while typing, the system finds a match in Supply'd, it will automatically suggest connecting to that supplier instead of creating a custom one. In this case, you will be connecting to a **Supply’d supplier** rather than creating a **custom supplier**.
👉 Proceed as explained from **Step 3** onwards in [#connecting-with-a-supplyd-supplier](#connecting-with-a-supplyd-supplier "mention") below for details on how to do this.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="success" %}
You can also add yourself as a Supplier. This is useful for franchises or businesses with multiple stores ordering from a single production facility.
When you type your name, Supply’d will recognise it and suggest connecting to your account.
If you add yourself as a supplier, you will automatically be added as a customer, so there’s no need to add yourself separately as both a supplier and a customer.
{% endhint %}
**Company Logo**
Optionally, upload the supplier’s logo.
1. Click **Choose File**.
2. **Select the image** file from your computer (usually JPG or PNG).
3. Once uploaded, the logo will appear on the supplier’s page and in lists where the supplier is displayed.
{% hint style="success" %}
Uploading a logo is optional, but it makes it easier to visually identify suppliers in your lists and reports.
{% endhint %}
**Business Number**
Enter the supplier's business number (eg. their ABN or NZBN).
**Company Legal Name**
Enter the supplier’s legal name, ie. the name registered with the business registry.
**Groups**
Select any **Supplier Groups** you would like to assign this supplier to.
👉 See [#supplier-groups](#supplier-groups "mention") below.
**Account Number**
Enter an optional account number that you have with this supplier. This will show on purchase orders.
**Website**
Add the supplier's website.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Custom Fields
Complete any custom fields you may have created.
{% hint style="info" %}
**Custom Fields** are user-defined fields that let you track additional information about a supplier that isn’t included in the default fields. You can name the field whatever you like and enter the data that’s relevant to your business.
👉 See the [Supplier Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/supplier-settings) document for information on creating custom fields for suppliers.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Address
Enter the address details for the supplier.
**Billing Address**
Enter the supplier's street address.
**Billing Suburb**
Enter the supplier's suburb.
**Billing State/Province**
Select the supplier's state.
**Billing Postcode**
Enter the supplier's postcode.
**Billing Country**
Select the supplier's country.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Contact
Enter the details of the supplier’s primary contact.
**First Name**
Enter the first name of a representative/contact of the supplier.
**Last Name**
Enter the last name of a representative/contact of the supplier.
**Role/Department**
Add the role or department of the contact, eg. Sales Rep, Accounts etc.
**Email**
Enter the email address for the contact.
**Mobile**
Add a mobile number for the contact.
**Phone**
Add a phone number for this contact.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Settings
Enter additional settings for the supplier.
**Order Minimums**
Often suppliers require a minimum order. Select whether to enforce a **Minimum Spend** or a **Minimum Carton Quantity**. When enabled, Supply’d will prevent orders from being sent unless the minimum requirement is met
* **Minimum Spend:** When "Minimum Spend" is selected an additional field, **Minimum Spend**, will show where you can enter a dollar amount.\
* **Minimum Carton Qty:** When "Minimum Carton Qty" is selected an additional field, **Minimum Qty**, will show where you can number amount.\
**Payment Terms**
Enter the supplier’s payment terms. First, enter the number of days the supplier gives you to pay, then select one of the following options:
* **Days:** Payment is due within a set number of days after the invoice date (eg. 7 days, 30 days).
* **Days EOM** (End of Month): Payment is due within a certain number of days after the end of the month in which the invoice was issued (eg. “30 Days EOM” means payment is due 30 days after the last day of that month.)
* **Days EOW** (End of Week): Payment is due within a set number of days after the end of the week in which the invoice was issued.
* **Pre-paid:** Payment is due before the goods are supplied, ie. the order must be paid for upfront.
Leave the payment term number blank to use the default term set in your [Supplier Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/supplier-settings).
**Currency**
Select the currency used to purchase from this supplier.
**Buyers Rep**
Select a buyers rep to assign this supplier.
**Default Sales Period (Days)**
You can override the default delivery period for products purchased from this supplier if they take shorter or longer than usual. Enter the number of days to apply.
**Notes**
Add any notes about this supplier. These are for internal reference only and are not visible to the supplier.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Payment Details
Add the supplier's bank account details for ABA generation when using **Expenses**.
**BSB**
Enter the BSB for the supplier's bank account. Max 6 digits.
**Account Number**
Enter the account number of the bank account. Max 9 digits.
***
{% hint style="warning" %}
The following sections - **MYOB & Xero** - will only show if you have these platforms integrated with your Supply'd account.
**NOTE:** The name "**MYOB Test**" will actually reflect whatever names you chose during the integration setup.
👉 See the [Integrations](/supplyd-erp/settings/integrations) help section for information on integrating various platforms with Supply'd.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Myob - "MYOB Test" Settings
Myob - "MYOB Test" settings for this supplier, where "MYOB Test" represents the name given to the integration during setup. Your integration name will reflect whatever name you chose when configuring it.
**MYOB "Test Contact"**
Select/enter the MYOB contact for this supplier.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Xero - "Xero Settings"
Xero settings for this supplier.
**Xero Contact**
Select/enter the MYOB contact for this supplier.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Advanced
Advanced settings for this supplier.
**Order Alert**
Add an internal alert to show when creating an order for this supplier. This alert is not visible to suppliers.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Save
Click to add your supplier.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
## Adding Suppliers' Products
After adding your custom supplier you may want to add or import their products.
Products can be added from the **Products** page (👉 see [Adding Products](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products)) or from the **Suppliers** page.
{% hint style="warning" %}
Products can only be added for custom suppliers. Supply’d-connected suppliers automatically sync their product lists, so you can’t manually add products for them. For custom suppliers you create, however, you have full control to add and manage their products, including pricing, descriptions, and other details.
{% endhint %}
***
### Adding Products Individually
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Select the Supplier
Select Suppliers from the main menu. The Suppliers list will open.
Click on the Supplier you would like to add products to.
The supplier's detail page will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Go to the Products Tab
Go to the products tab. This tab list all the Supplier's products that you may have added.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click on Add +
Click on **Add +** in the top right.
The **Add Product** form will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Complete the Form
Complete the form following the guidelines in the [Adding Products](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products) document.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
### Adding Products in Bulk
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Select the Supplier
Select Suppliers from the main menu. The Suppliers list will open.
Click on the Supplier you would like to add products to.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Go to the Products Tab
Go to the products tab.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Select Import > Products
Click on the 3 dots in the top right, select **Import**, then **Products**.
**The Import Products** form will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Continue the Process
Follow the instructions in the [Bulk Importing of Products](/supplyd-erp/products/bulk-importing-of-products) document to continue with the process.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
## Connecting with a Supply'd Supplier
The **Connect** tab lists all suppliers available to connect with on Supply’d. Clicking on a supplier allows you to view all their information and request to connect with them.
To connect with a Supply'd supplier:
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Open the Suppliers Page
Select **Suppliers** from the main menu. The **Suppliers** page will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Go to the Connect Tab
Go to the **Connect** tab to see a list of all suppliers available to connect with on Supply’d. Only suppliers that have made their stores public will appear; invite-only stores will not be visible.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Select the Supplier
Select the supplier that you would like to connect with. The supplier's details will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click Connect
To send a connection request to the supplier, click .
You will be asked to confirm.
The supplier will review your request and either approve or reject it. If approved, the supplier will appear in your **Suppliers** list.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
## Supplier Requests
The **Requests** tab lists any connection requests from suppliers. You can approve or decline suppliers you would like to trade with on Supply'd.
To review, accept or reject a request from a supplier:
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Open the Suppliers Page
Select **Suppliers** from the main menu. The **Suppliers** page will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Go to the Requests Tab
Go to the **Requests** tab to see a list all connection requests from suppliers.
{% hint style="success" %}
The number of active requests you currently have will be indicated by the number in the red circle at the top right of the **Requests** tab.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Select the Supplier
Select the supplier that you would like to review. The supplier's details will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Approve or Reject the Request
If you would like to connect with this supplier, click . Click **Reject** if you do not want to connect with this supplier.
You will be asked to confirm.
Click .
The supplier will show on your **Suppliers** list.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
## Supplier Groups
**Supplier Groups** in Supply’d help you organise suppliers into categories, such as product type, location, or performance, making it easier to manage and find the right suppliers. Create a group, then assign suppliers to it when setting up or editing a supplier.
### Creating a Supplier Group
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Go to the Suppliers Groups Page
1. Select **Suppliers** from the main menu.
2. Go to the **Groups** tab. The **Groups** page will open, listing any groups that may have been set up.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click Add+
Click **Add +** in the top right.
The **Add Supplier Group** form will appear.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Enter a Name
**Group Name\* \[required field]**
Enter a name for the group.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Save
Click to create the group.
The group will show in the **Supplier Groups** list.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
### Editing a Supplier Group
To edit a **Supplier Group**:
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Select **Suppliers** from the main menu and go to the **Groups** tab.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Select the group.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click on the 3 dots in the top right. Select **Edit Group**.
The **Edit Supplier Group** form will appear where you can edit the group name.
{% hint style="success" %}
Group members can be edited at an individual supplier level.
👉 See [Managing Suppliers](/supplyd-erp/suppliers/managing-suppliers) for more information.
{% endhint %}
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
### Removing a Supplier Group
To remove a **Supplier Group:**
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Select **Suppliers** from the main menu and go to the **Groups** tab.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Select the group.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click on the 3 dots in the top right. Select **Remove Group**.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
You will be asked to confirm.
Click .
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
{% hint style="success" %}
For more information on managing your suppliers, refer to the [Managing Suppliers](/supplyd-erp/suppliers/managing-suppliers) document.
{% endhint %}
# Connecting to a Supply'd Supplier
Supply’d lets you order from all suppliers in one place. Add suppliers to include non-registered ones seamlessly.
At the heart of Supply'd is a powerful, yet easy ordering system that lets you order from all of your suppliers quickly and easily. To order from suppliers who are not yet on Supply'd you can quickly and easily add a supplier and their products and order from them at the same time as ordering from other suppliers. Suppliers can be added individually or imported in bulk using a CSV file.
👉 Refer to the [Bulk Importing Suppliers](/supplyd-erp/suppliers/bulk-importing-suppliers) document for instructions on importing suppliers in bulk.
\
This document will guide you through adding suppliers individually, including:
* [#the-suppliers-page](#the-suppliers-page "mention")
* [#adding-a-custom-supplier](#adding-a-custom-supplier "mention")
* [#adding-suppliers-products](#adding-suppliers-products "mention")
* [#adding-products-individually](#adding-products-individually "mention")
* [#adding-products-in-bulk](#adding-products-in-bulk "mention")
* [#connecting-with-a-supplyd-supplier](#connecting-with-a-supplyd-supplier "mention")
* [#supplier-requests](#supplier-requests "mention")
* [#supplier-groups](#supplier-groups "mention")
***
## The Suppliers Page
Selecting **Suppliers** from the main menu will open the **Suppliers** page.
The **Suppliers** page is where you manage all your suppliers. It displays a list of every supplier linked to your account, including both Supply’d-connected suppliers and any custom suppliers you’ve added manually.
From this page, you can:
* **Search and filter suppliers** to quickly find the one you need.
* **View supplier details**, such as contact information, ordering methods, and delivery preferences.
* **Add new suppliers**, either individually or by bulk import.
* **Edit supplier information** if details change.
* **Set up delivery schedules and ordering rules** to streamline your purchasing.
This page acts as your central hub for supplier management, ensuring that all supplier details are accurate and up to date.
Clicking on a supplier will display that supplier's page with all their details. Here, you can view their contact details, payment terms, and delivery schedules, as well as see your order history with them. You’ll also find tabs for things like pricing, products, invoices, and notes related to that supplier. From this page, you can easily place new orders, manage existing ones, and keep track of all interactions with that supplier in one place.
{% hint style="success" %}
Supplier statuses will appear on the **Suppliers** list in various colours for easy identification of the supplier type:
- A business that is already on Supply'd.
- A supplier that is not on Supply'd and that you have added to your Supply'd account.
- A supplier you’ve requested to connect with, but who has not yet approved your request.
{% endhint %}
👉 To learn how to add custom suppliers, see [#adding-a-custom-supplier](#adding-a-custom-supplier "mention") below.
***
**Connect Tab**
The **Connect** tab lists all suppliers available to connect with on Supply’d. Clicking on a supplier allows you to view all their information.
👉 See [#connecting-with-a-supplyd-supplier](#connecting-with-a-supplyd-supplier "mention") below for more information.
***
**Requests Tab**
The **Requests** tab lists any supplier connection requests. You can approve or decline suppliers you would like to trade with on Supply'd.
{% hint style="success" %}
The number of active requests you currently have will be indicated by the number in the red circle at the top right of the **Requests** tab.
{% endhint %}
👉 See [#supplier-requests](#supplier-requests "mention") below for more information.
***
**Promotions Tab**
The **Promotions** tab displays all promotions sent to you from your connected Supply'd suppliers. From this tab, you can view current and upcoming promotions, including the products included, promotional pricing, and promotion dates.
This provides a central location for managing and reviewing all promotions offered by your suppliers.
Clicking on a promotion opens the promotion details, where you can view all information associated with the selected promotion.
👉 See the [Supplier Promotions](/supplyd-erp/products/promotions/supplier-promotions) document for full details.
***
**Groups Tab**
While the **Suppliers** tab lists all your individual suppliers, the **Groups** tab shows the suppliers you’ve organised into groups. A **Supplier Group** in Supply’d lets you manage multiple suppliers together in one place. This is especially useful if you regularly order from the same set of suppliers, as it saves time and keeps your ordering process more organised.
For example, you could create a Supplier Group for *“Refrigerated Suppliers”* or *“Local Suppliers”*. When placing an order, instead of adding suppliers one-by-one, you can select the whole group and quickly order from everyone in it.
Clicking on a group will show all the suppliers in that group. Selecting a supplier will open their page, displaying all their details.
👉 To learn how to add supplier groups, see [#supplier-groups](#supplier-groups "mention") below.
***
## Adding a Custom Supplier
Adding a custom supplier in Supply’d is quick and simple - it takes less than a minute. The steps below will guide you through manually adding a supplier. If you need to add many suppliers at once, you can also bulk import them using a CSV file.
👉 You can find the instructions on importing suppliers in bulk in the [Bulk Importing Suppliers](/supplyd-erp/suppliers/bulk-importing-suppliers) document.
{% hint style="warning" %}
You can only add custom suppliers to Supply’d. Suppliers that are already connected through the Supply’d platform cannot be added manually, as their information and products are synced automatically. Custom suppliers give you the flexibility to enter and manage supplier details, contacts, and products that are unique to your business.
{% endhint %}
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Go to the Suppliers Page
Select **Suppliers** from the main menu. The **Suppliers** page will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click Add+
Click **Add +** in the top right.
The **Add Supplier** form will appear.
{% hint style="success" %}
To open or close the sections on this form click the little arrows to the right of the titles (as circled in red above).
{% endhint %}
Complete the sections as outlined below:
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Company Details
**Trading Name\* \[required field]**
Enter the trading name of the supplier you are adding.
{% hint style="success" %}
If while typing, the system finds a match in Supply'd, it will automatically suggest connecting to that supplier instead of creating a custom one. In this case, you will be connecting to a **Supply’d supplier** rather than creating a **custom supplier**.
👉 Proceed as explained from **Step 3** onwards in [#connecting-with-a-supplyd-supplier](#connecting-with-a-supplyd-supplier "mention") below for details on how to do this.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="success" %}
You can also add yourself as a Supplier. This is useful for franchises or businesses with multiple stores ordering from a single production facility.
When you type your name, Supply’d will recognise it and suggest connecting to your account.
If you add yourself as a supplier, you will automatically be added as a customer, so there’s no need to add yourself separately as both a supplier and a customer.
{% endhint %}
**Company Logo**
Optionally, upload the supplier’s logo.
1. Click **Choose File**.
2. **Select the image** file from your computer (usually JPG or PNG).
3. Once uploaded, the logo will appear on the supplier’s page and in lists where the supplier is displayed.
{% hint style="success" %}
Uploading a logo is optional, but it makes it easier to visually identify suppliers in your lists and reports.
{% endhint %}
**Business Number**
Enter the supplier's business number (eg. their ABN or NZBN).
**Company Legal Name**
Enter the supplier’s legal name, ie. the name registered with the business registry.
**Groups**
Select any **Supplier Groups** you would like to assign this supplier to.
👉 See [#supplier-groups](#supplier-groups "mention") below.
**Account Number**
Enter an optional account number that you have with this supplier. This will show on purchase orders.
**Website**
Add the supplier's website.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Custom Fields
Complete any custom fields you may have created.
{% hint style="info" %}
**Custom Fields** are user-defined fields that let you track additional information about a supplier that isn’t included in the default fields. You can name the field whatever you like and enter the data that’s relevant to your business.
👉 See the [Supplier Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/supplier-settings) document for information on creating custom fields for suppliers.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Address
Enter the address details for the supplier.
**Billing Address**
Enter the supplier's street address.
**Billing Suburb**
Enter the supplier's suburb.
**Billing State/Province**
Select the supplier's state.
**Billing Postcode**
Enter the supplier's postcode.
**Billing Country**
Select the supplier's country.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Contact
Enter the details of the supplier’s primary contact.
**First Name**
Enter the first name of a representative/contact of the supplier.
**Last Name**
Enter the last name of a representative/contact of the supplier.
**Role/Department**
Add the role or department of the contact, eg. Sales Rep, Accounts etc.
**Email**
Enter the email address for the contact.
**Mobile**
Add a mobile number for the contact.
**Phone**
Add a phone number for this contact.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Settings
Enter additional settings for the supplier.
**Order Minimums**
Often suppliers require a minimum order. Select whether to enforce a **Minimum Spend** or a **Minimum Carton Quantity**. When enabled, Supply’d will prevent orders from being sent unless the minimum requirement is met
* **Minimum Spend:** When "Minimum Spend" is selected an additional field, **Minimum Spend**, will show where you can enter a dollar amount.\
* **Minimum Carton Qty:** When "Minimum Carton Qty" is selected an additional field, **Minimum Qty**, will show where you can number amount.\
**Payment Terms**
Enter the supplier’s payment terms. First, enter the number of days the supplier gives you to pay, then select one of the following options:
* **Days:** Payment is due within a set number of days after the invoice date (eg. 7 days, 30 days).
* **Days EOM** (End of Month): Payment is due within a certain number of days after the end of the month in which the invoice was issued (eg. “30 Days EOM” means payment is due 30 days after the last day of that month.)
* **Days EOW** (End of Week): Payment is due within a set number of days after the end of the week in which the invoice was issued.
* **Pre-paid:** Payment is due before the goods are supplied, ie. the order must be paid for upfront.
Leave the payment term number blank to use the default term set in your [Supplier Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/supplier-settings).
**Currency**
Select the currency used to purchase from this supplier.
**Buyers Rep**
Select a buyers rep to assign this supplier.
**Default Sales Period (Days)**
You can override the default delivery period for products purchased from this supplier if they take shorter or longer than usual. Enter the number of days to apply.
**Notes**
Add any notes about this supplier. These are for internal reference only and are not visible to the supplier.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Payment Details
Add the supplier's bank account details for ABA generation when using **Expenses**.
**BSB**
Enter the BSB for the supplier's bank account. Max 6 digits.
**Account Number**
Enter the account number of the bank account. Max 9 digits.
***
{% hint style="warning" %}
The following sections - **MYOB & Xero** - will only show if you have these platforms integrated with your Supply'd account.
**NOTE:** The name "**MYOB Test**" will actually reflect whatever names you chose during the integration setup.
👉 See the [Integrations](/supplyd-erp/settings/integrations) help section for information on integrating various platforms with Supply'd.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Myob - "MYOB Test" Settings
Myob - "MYOB Test" settings for this supplier, where "MYOB Test" represents the name given to the integration during setup. Your integration name will reflect whatever name you chose when configuring it.
**MYOB "Test Contact"**
Select/enter the MYOB contact for this supplier.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Xero - "Xero Settings"
Xero settings for this supplier.
**Xero Contact**
Select/enter the MYOB contact for this supplier.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Advanced
Advanced settings for this supplier.
**Order Alert**
Add an internal alert to show when creating an order for this supplier. This alert is not visible to suppliers.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Save
Click to add your supplier.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
## Adding Suppliers' Products
After adding your custom supplier you may want to add or import their products.
Products can be added from the **Products** page (👉 see [Adding Products](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products)) or from the **Suppliers** page.
{% hint style="warning" %}
Products can only be added for custom suppliers. Supply’d-connected suppliers automatically sync their product lists, so you can’t manually add products for them. For custom suppliers you create, however, you have full control to add and manage their products, including pricing, descriptions, and other details.
{% endhint %}
***
### Adding Products Individually
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Select the Supplier
Select Suppliers from the main menu. The Suppliers list will open.
Click on the Supplier you would like to add products to.
The supplier's detail page will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Go to the Products Tab
Go to the products tab. This tab list all the Supplier's products that you may have added.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click on Add +
Click on **Add +** in the top right.
The **Add Product** form will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Complete the Form
Complete the form following the guidelines in the [Adding Products](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products) document.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
### Adding Products in Bulk
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Select the Supplier
Select Suppliers from the main menu. The Suppliers list will open.
Click on the Supplier you would like to add products to.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Go to the Products Tab
Go to the products tab.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Select Import > Products
Click on the 3 dots in the top right, select **Import**, then **Products**.
**The Import Products** form will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Continue the Process
Follow the instructions in the [Bulk Importing of Products](/supplyd-erp/products/bulk-importing-of-products) document to continue with the process.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
## Connecting with a Supply'd Supplier
The **Connect** tab lists all suppliers available to connect with on Supply’d. Clicking on a supplier allows you to view all their information and request to connect with them.
To connect with a Supply'd supplier:
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Open the Suppliers Page
Select **Suppliers** from the main menu. The **Suppliers** page will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Go to the Connect Tab
Go to the **Connect** tab to see a list of all suppliers available to connect with on Supply’d. Only suppliers that have made their stores public will appear; invite-only stores will not be visible.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Select the Supplier
Select the supplier that you would like to connect with. The supplier's details will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click Connect
To send a connection request to the supplier, click .
You will be asked to confirm.
The supplier will review your request and either approve or reject it. If approved, the supplier will appear in your **Suppliers** list.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
## Supplier Requests
The **Requests** tab lists any connection requests from suppliers. You can approve or decline suppliers you would like to trade with on Supply'd.
To review, accept or reject a request from a supplier:
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Open the Suppliers Page
Select **Suppliers** from the main menu. The **Suppliers** page will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Go to the Requests Tab
Go to the **Requests** tab to see a list all connection requests from suppliers.
{% hint style="success" %}
The number of active requests you currently have will be indicated by the number in the red circle at the top right of the **Requests** tab.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Select the Supplier
Select the supplier that you would like to review. The supplier's details will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Approve or Reject the Request
If you would like to connect with this supplier, click . Click **Reject** if you do not want to connect with this supplier.
You will be asked to confirm.
Click .
The supplier will show on your **Suppliers** list.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
## Supplier Groups
**Supplier Groups** in Supply’d help you organise suppliers into categories, such as product type, location, or performance, making it easier to manage and find the right suppliers. Create a group, then assign suppliers to it when setting up or editing a supplier.
### Creating a Supplier Group
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Go to the Suppliers Groups Page
1. Select **Suppliers** from the main menu.
2. Go to the **Groups** tab. The **Groups** page will open, listing any groups that may have been set up.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click Add+
Click **Add +** in the top right.
The **Add Supplier Group** form will appear.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Enter a Name
**Group Name\* \[required field]**
Enter a name for the group.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Save
Click to create the group.
The group will show in the **Supplier Groups** list.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
### Editing a Supplier Group
To edit a **Supplier Group**:
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Select **Suppliers** from the main menu and go to the **Groups** tab.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Select the group.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click on the 3 dots in the top right. Select **Edit Group**.
The **Edit Supplier Group** form will appear where you can edit the group name.
{% hint style="success" %}
Group members can be edited at an individual supplier level.
👉 See [Managing Suppliers](/supplyd-erp/suppliers/managing-suppliers) for more information.
{% endhint %}
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
### Removing a Supplier Group
To remove a **Supplier Group:**
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Select **Suppliers** from the main menu and go to the **Groups** tab.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Select the group.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click on the 3 dots in the top right. Select **Remove Group**.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
You will be asked to confirm.
Click .
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
{% hint style="success" %}
For more information on managing your suppliers, refer to the [Managing Suppliers](/supplyd-erp/suppliers/managing-suppliers) document.
{% endhint %}
# Supplier Requests
Supply’d lets you order from all suppliers in one place. Add suppliers to include non-registered ones seamlessly.
At the heart of Supply'd is a powerful, yet easy ordering system that lets you order from all of your suppliers quickly and easily. To order from suppliers who are not yet on Supply'd you can quickly and easily add a supplier and their products and order from them at the same time as ordering from other suppliers. Suppliers can be added individually or imported in bulk using a CSV file.
👉 Refer to the [Bulk Importing Suppliers](/supplyd-erp/suppliers/bulk-importing-suppliers) document for instructions on importing suppliers in bulk.
\
This document will guide you through adding suppliers individually, including:
* [#the-suppliers-page](#the-suppliers-page "mention")
* [#adding-a-custom-supplier](#adding-a-custom-supplier "mention")
* [#adding-suppliers-products](#adding-suppliers-products "mention")
* [#adding-products-individually](#adding-products-individually "mention")
* [#adding-products-in-bulk](#adding-products-in-bulk "mention")
* [#connecting-with-a-supplyd-supplier](#connecting-with-a-supplyd-supplier "mention")
* [#supplier-requests](#supplier-requests "mention")
* [#supplier-groups](#supplier-groups "mention")
***
## The Suppliers Page
Selecting **Suppliers** from the main menu will open the **Suppliers** page.
The **Suppliers** page is where you manage all your suppliers. It displays a list of every supplier linked to your account, including both Supply’d-connected suppliers and any custom suppliers you’ve added manually.
From this page, you can:
* **Search and filter suppliers** to quickly find the one you need.
* **View supplier details**, such as contact information, ordering methods, and delivery preferences.
* **Add new suppliers**, either individually or by bulk import.
* **Edit supplier information** if details change.
* **Set up delivery schedules and ordering rules** to streamline your purchasing.
This page acts as your central hub for supplier management, ensuring that all supplier details are accurate and up to date.
Clicking on a supplier will display that supplier's page with all their details. Here, you can view their contact details, payment terms, and delivery schedules, as well as see your order history with them. You’ll also find tabs for things like pricing, products, invoices, and notes related to that supplier. From this page, you can easily place new orders, manage existing ones, and keep track of all interactions with that supplier in one place.
{% hint style="success" %}
Supplier statuses will appear on the **Suppliers** list in various colours for easy identification of the supplier type:
- A business that is already on Supply'd.
- A supplier that is not on Supply'd and that you have added to your Supply'd account.
- A supplier you’ve requested to connect with, but who has not yet approved your request.
{% endhint %}
👉 To learn how to add custom suppliers, see [#adding-a-custom-supplier](#adding-a-custom-supplier "mention") below.
***
**Connect Tab**
The **Connect** tab lists all suppliers available to connect with on Supply’d. Clicking on a supplier allows you to view all their information.
👉 See [#connecting-with-a-supplyd-supplier](#connecting-with-a-supplyd-supplier "mention") below for more information.
***
**Requests Tab**
The **Requests** tab lists any supplier connection requests. You can approve or decline suppliers you would like to trade with on Supply'd.
{% hint style="success" %}
The number of active requests you currently have will be indicated by the number in the red circle at the top right of the **Requests** tab.
{% endhint %}
👉 See [#supplier-requests](#supplier-requests "mention") below for more information.
***
**Promotions Tab**
The **Promotions** tab displays all promotions sent to you from your connected Supply'd suppliers. From this tab, you can view current and upcoming promotions, including the products included, promotional pricing, and promotion dates.
This provides a central location for managing and reviewing all promotions offered by your suppliers.
Clicking on a promotion opens the promotion details, where you can view all information associated with the selected promotion.
👉 See the [Supplier Promotions](/supplyd-erp/products/promotions/supplier-promotions) document for full details.
***
**Groups Tab**
While the **Suppliers** tab lists all your individual suppliers, the **Groups** tab shows the suppliers you’ve organised into groups. A **Supplier Group** in Supply’d lets you manage multiple suppliers together in one place. This is especially useful if you regularly order from the same set of suppliers, as it saves time and keeps your ordering process more organised.
For example, you could create a Supplier Group for *“Refrigerated Suppliers”* or *“Local Suppliers”*. When placing an order, instead of adding suppliers one-by-one, you can select the whole group and quickly order from everyone in it.
Clicking on a group will show all the suppliers in that group. Selecting a supplier will open their page, displaying all their details.
👉 To learn how to add supplier groups, see [#supplier-groups](#supplier-groups "mention") below.
***
## Adding a Custom Supplier
Adding a custom supplier in Supply’d is quick and simple - it takes less than a minute. The steps below will guide you through manually adding a supplier. If you need to add many suppliers at once, you can also bulk import them using a CSV file.
👉 You can find the instructions on importing suppliers in bulk in the [Bulk Importing Suppliers](/supplyd-erp/suppliers/bulk-importing-suppliers) document.
{% hint style="warning" %}
You can only add custom suppliers to Supply’d. Suppliers that are already connected through the Supply’d platform cannot be added manually, as their information and products are synced automatically. Custom suppliers give you the flexibility to enter and manage supplier details, contacts, and products that are unique to your business.
{% endhint %}
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Go to the Suppliers Page
Select **Suppliers** from the main menu. The **Suppliers** page will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click Add+
Click **Add +** in the top right.
The **Add Supplier** form will appear.
{% hint style="success" %}
To open or close the sections on this form click the little arrows to the right of the titles (as circled in red above).
{% endhint %}
Complete the sections as outlined below:
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Company Details
**Trading Name\* \[required field]**
Enter the trading name of the supplier you are adding.
{% hint style="success" %}
If while typing, the system finds a match in Supply'd, it will automatically suggest connecting to that supplier instead of creating a custom one. In this case, you will be connecting to a **Supply’d supplier** rather than creating a **custom supplier**.
👉 Proceed as explained from **Step 3** onwards in [#connecting-with-a-supplyd-supplier](#connecting-with-a-supplyd-supplier "mention") below for details on how to do this.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="success" %}
You can also add yourself as a Supplier. This is useful for franchises or businesses with multiple stores ordering from a single production facility.
When you type your name, Supply’d will recognise it and suggest connecting to your account.
If you add yourself as a supplier, you will automatically be added as a customer, so there’s no need to add yourself separately as both a supplier and a customer.
{% endhint %}
**Company Logo**
Optionally, upload the supplier’s logo.
1. Click **Choose File**.
2. **Select the image** file from your computer (usually JPG or PNG).
3. Once uploaded, the logo will appear on the supplier’s page and in lists where the supplier is displayed.
{% hint style="success" %}
Uploading a logo is optional, but it makes it easier to visually identify suppliers in your lists and reports.
{% endhint %}
**Business Number**
Enter the supplier's business number (eg. their ABN or NZBN).
**Company Legal Name**
Enter the supplier’s legal name, ie. the name registered with the business registry.
**Groups**
Select any **Supplier Groups** you would like to assign this supplier to.
👉 See [#supplier-groups](#supplier-groups "mention") below.
**Account Number**
Enter an optional account number that you have with this supplier. This will show on purchase orders.
**Website**
Add the supplier's website.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Custom Fields
Complete any custom fields you may have created.
{% hint style="info" %}
**Custom Fields** are user-defined fields that let you track additional information about a supplier that isn’t included in the default fields. You can name the field whatever you like and enter the data that’s relevant to your business.
👉 See the [Supplier Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/supplier-settings) document for information on creating custom fields for suppliers.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Address
Enter the address details for the supplier.
**Billing Address**
Enter the supplier's street address.
**Billing Suburb**
Enter the supplier's suburb.
**Billing State/Province**
Select the supplier's state.
**Billing Postcode**
Enter the supplier's postcode.
**Billing Country**
Select the supplier's country.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Contact
Enter the details of the supplier’s primary contact.
**First Name**
Enter the first name of a representative/contact of the supplier.
**Last Name**
Enter the last name of a representative/contact of the supplier.
**Role/Department**
Add the role or department of the contact, eg. Sales Rep, Accounts etc.
**Email**
Enter the email address for the contact.
**Mobile**
Add a mobile number for the contact.
**Phone**
Add a phone number for this contact.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Settings
Enter additional settings for the supplier.
**Order Minimums**
Often suppliers require a minimum order. Select whether to enforce a **Minimum Spend** or a **Minimum Carton Quantity**. When enabled, Supply’d will prevent orders from being sent unless the minimum requirement is met
* **Minimum Spend:** When "Minimum Spend" is selected an additional field, **Minimum Spend**, will show where you can enter a dollar amount.\
* **Minimum Carton Qty:** When "Minimum Carton Qty" is selected an additional field, **Minimum Qty**, will show where you can number amount.\
**Payment Terms**
Enter the supplier’s payment terms. First, enter the number of days the supplier gives you to pay, then select one of the following options:
* **Days:** Payment is due within a set number of days after the invoice date (eg. 7 days, 30 days).
* **Days EOM** (End of Month): Payment is due within a certain number of days after the end of the month in which the invoice was issued (eg. “30 Days EOM” means payment is due 30 days after the last day of that month.)
* **Days EOW** (End of Week): Payment is due within a set number of days after the end of the week in which the invoice was issued.
* **Pre-paid:** Payment is due before the goods are supplied, ie. the order must be paid for upfront.
Leave the payment term number blank to use the default term set in your [Supplier Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/supplier-settings).
**Currency**
Select the currency used to purchase from this supplier.
**Buyers Rep**
Select a buyers rep to assign this supplier.
**Default Sales Period (Days)**
You can override the default delivery period for products purchased from this supplier if they take shorter or longer than usual. Enter the number of days to apply.
**Notes**
Add any notes about this supplier. These are for internal reference only and are not visible to the supplier.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Payment Details
Add the supplier's bank account details for ABA generation when using **Expenses**.
**BSB**
Enter the BSB for the supplier's bank account. Max 6 digits.
**Account Number**
Enter the account number of the bank account. Max 9 digits.
***
{% hint style="warning" %}
The following sections - **MYOB & Xero** - will only show if you have these platforms integrated with your Supply'd account.
**NOTE:** The name "**MYOB Test**" will actually reflect whatever names you chose during the integration setup.
👉 See the [Integrations](/supplyd-erp/settings/integrations) help section for information on integrating various platforms with Supply'd.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Myob - "MYOB Test" Settings
Myob - "MYOB Test" settings for this supplier, where "MYOB Test" represents the name given to the integration during setup. Your integration name will reflect whatever name you chose when configuring it.
**MYOB "Test Contact"**
Select/enter the MYOB contact for this supplier.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Xero - "Xero Settings"
Xero settings for this supplier.
**Xero Contact**
Select/enter the MYOB contact for this supplier.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Advanced
Advanced settings for this supplier.
**Order Alert**
Add an internal alert to show when creating an order for this supplier. This alert is not visible to suppliers.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Save
Click to add your supplier.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
## Adding Suppliers' Products
After adding your custom supplier you may want to add or import their products.
Products can be added from the **Products** page (👉 see [Adding Products](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products)) or from the **Suppliers** page.
{% hint style="warning" %}
Products can only be added for custom suppliers. Supply’d-connected suppliers automatically sync their product lists, so you can’t manually add products for them. For custom suppliers you create, however, you have full control to add and manage their products, including pricing, descriptions, and other details.
{% endhint %}
***
### Adding Products Individually
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Select the Supplier
Select Suppliers from the main menu. The Suppliers list will open.
Click on the Supplier you would like to add products to.
The supplier's detail page will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Go to the Products Tab
Go to the products tab. This tab list all the Supplier's products that you may have added.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click on Add +
Click on **Add +** in the top right.
The **Add Product** form will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Complete the Form
Complete the form following the guidelines in the [Adding Products](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products) document.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
### Adding Products in Bulk
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Select the Supplier
Select Suppliers from the main menu. The Suppliers list will open.
Click on the Supplier you would like to add products to.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Go to the Products Tab
Go to the products tab.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Select Import > Products
Click on the 3 dots in the top right, select **Import**, then **Products**.
**The Import Products** form will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Continue the Process
Follow the instructions in the [Bulk Importing of Products](/supplyd-erp/products/bulk-importing-of-products) document to continue with the process.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
## Connecting with a Supply'd Supplier
The **Connect** tab lists all suppliers available to connect with on Supply’d. Clicking on a supplier allows you to view all their information and request to connect with them.
To connect with a Supply'd supplier:
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Open the Suppliers Page
Select **Suppliers** from the main menu. The **Suppliers** page will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Go to the Connect Tab
Go to the **Connect** tab to see a list of all suppliers available to connect with on Supply’d. Only suppliers that have made their stores public will appear; invite-only stores will not be visible.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Select the Supplier
Select the supplier that you would like to connect with. The supplier's details will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click Connect
To send a connection request to the supplier, click .
You will be asked to confirm.
The supplier will review your request and either approve or reject it. If approved, the supplier will appear in your **Suppliers** list.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
## Supplier Requests
The **Requests** tab lists any connection requests from suppliers. You can approve or decline suppliers you would like to trade with on Supply'd.
To review, accept or reject a request from a supplier:
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Open the Suppliers Page
Select **Suppliers** from the main menu. The **Suppliers** page will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Go to the Requests Tab
Go to the **Requests** tab to see a list all connection requests from suppliers.
{% hint style="success" %}
The number of active requests you currently have will be indicated by the number in the red circle at the top right of the **Requests** tab.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Select the Supplier
Select the supplier that you would like to review. The supplier's details will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Approve or Reject the Request
If you would like to connect with this supplier, click . Click **Reject** if you do not want to connect with this supplier.
You will be asked to confirm.
Click .
The supplier will show on your **Suppliers** list.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
## Supplier Groups
**Supplier Groups** in Supply’d help you organise suppliers into categories, such as product type, location, or performance, making it easier to manage and find the right suppliers. Create a group, then assign suppliers to it when setting up or editing a supplier.
### Creating a Supplier Group
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Go to the Suppliers Groups Page
1. Select **Suppliers** from the main menu.
2. Go to the **Groups** tab. The **Groups** page will open, listing any groups that may have been set up.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click Add+
Click **Add +** in the top right.
The **Add Supplier Group** form will appear.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Enter a Name
**Group Name\* \[required field]**
Enter a name for the group.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Save
Click to create the group.
The group will show in the **Supplier Groups** list.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
### Editing a Supplier Group
To edit a **Supplier Group**:
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Select **Suppliers** from the main menu and go to the **Groups** tab.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Select the group.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click on the 3 dots in the top right. Select **Edit Group**.
The **Edit Supplier Group** form will appear where you can edit the group name.
{% hint style="success" %}
Group members can be edited at an individual supplier level.
👉 See [Managing Suppliers](/supplyd-erp/suppliers/managing-suppliers) for more information.
{% endhint %}
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
### Removing a Supplier Group
To remove a **Supplier Group:**
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Select **Suppliers** from the main menu and go to the **Groups** tab.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Select the group.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click on the 3 dots in the top right. Select **Remove Group**.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
You will be asked to confirm.
Click .
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
{% hint style="success" %}
For more information on managing your suppliers, refer to the [Managing Suppliers](/supplyd-erp/suppliers/managing-suppliers) document.
{% endhint %}
# Adding Supplier's Products
Supply’d lets you order from all suppliers in one place. Add suppliers to include non-registered ones seamlessly.
At the heart of Supply'd is a powerful, yet easy ordering system that lets you order from all of your suppliers quickly and easily. To order from suppliers who are not yet on Supply'd you can quickly and easily add a supplier and their products and order from them at the same time as ordering from other suppliers. Suppliers can be added individually or imported in bulk using a CSV file.
👉 Refer to the [Bulk Importing Suppliers](/supplyd-erp/suppliers/bulk-importing-suppliers) document for instructions on importing suppliers in bulk.
\
This document will guide you through adding suppliers individually, including:
* [#the-suppliers-page](#the-suppliers-page "mention")
* [#adding-a-custom-supplier](#adding-a-custom-supplier "mention")
* [#adding-suppliers-products](#adding-suppliers-products "mention")
* [#adding-products-individually](#adding-products-individually "mention")
* [#adding-products-in-bulk](#adding-products-in-bulk "mention")
* [#connecting-with-a-supplyd-supplier](#connecting-with-a-supplyd-supplier "mention")
* [#supplier-requests](#supplier-requests "mention")
* [#supplier-groups](#supplier-groups "mention")
***
## The Suppliers Page
Selecting **Suppliers** from the main menu will open the **Suppliers** page.
The **Suppliers** page is where you manage all your suppliers. It displays a list of every supplier linked to your account, including both Supply’d-connected suppliers and any custom suppliers you’ve added manually.
From this page, you can:
* **Search and filter suppliers** to quickly find the one you need.
* **View supplier details**, such as contact information, ordering methods, and delivery preferences.
* **Add new suppliers**, either individually or by bulk import.
* **Edit supplier information** if details change.
* **Set up delivery schedules and ordering rules** to streamline your purchasing.
This page acts as your central hub for supplier management, ensuring that all supplier details are accurate and up to date.
Clicking on a supplier will display that supplier's page with all their details. Here, you can view their contact details, payment terms, and delivery schedules, as well as see your order history with them. You’ll also find tabs for things like pricing, products, invoices, and notes related to that supplier. From this page, you can easily place new orders, manage existing ones, and keep track of all interactions with that supplier in one place.
{% hint style="success" %}
Supplier statuses will appear on the **Suppliers** list in various colours for easy identification of the supplier type:
- A business that is already on Supply'd.
- A supplier that is not on Supply'd and that you have added to your Supply'd account.
- A supplier you’ve requested to connect with, but who has not yet approved your request.
{% endhint %}
👉 To learn how to add custom suppliers, see [#adding-a-custom-supplier](#adding-a-custom-supplier "mention") below.
***
**Connect Tab**
The **Connect** tab lists all suppliers available to connect with on Supply’d. Clicking on a supplier allows you to view all their information.
👉 See [#connecting-with-a-supplyd-supplier](#connecting-with-a-supplyd-supplier "mention") below for more information.
***
**Requests Tab**
The **Requests** tab lists any supplier connection requests. You can approve or decline suppliers you would like to trade with on Supply'd.
{% hint style="success" %}
The number of active requests you currently have will be indicated by the number in the red circle at the top right of the **Requests** tab.
{% endhint %}
👉 See [#supplier-requests](#supplier-requests "mention") below for more information.
***
**Promotions Tab**
The **Promotions** tab displays all promotions sent to you from your connected Supply'd suppliers. From this tab, you can view current and upcoming promotions, including the products included, promotional pricing, and promotion dates.
This provides a central location for managing and reviewing all promotions offered by your suppliers.
Clicking on a promotion opens the promotion details, where you can view all information associated with the selected promotion.
👉 See the [Supplier Promotions](/supplyd-erp/products/promotions/supplier-promotions) document for full details.
***
**Groups Tab**
While the **Suppliers** tab lists all your individual suppliers, the **Groups** tab shows the suppliers you’ve organised into groups. A **Supplier Group** in Supply’d lets you manage multiple suppliers together in one place. This is especially useful if you regularly order from the same set of suppliers, as it saves time and keeps your ordering process more organised.
For example, you could create a Supplier Group for *“Refrigerated Suppliers”* or *“Local Suppliers”*. When placing an order, instead of adding suppliers one-by-one, you can select the whole group and quickly order from everyone in it.
Clicking on a group will show all the suppliers in that group. Selecting a supplier will open their page, displaying all their details.
👉 To learn how to add supplier groups, see [#supplier-groups](#supplier-groups "mention") below.
***
## Adding a Custom Supplier
Adding a custom supplier in Supply’d is quick and simple - it takes less than a minute. The steps below will guide you through manually adding a supplier. If you need to add many suppliers at once, you can also bulk import them using a CSV file.
👉 You can find the instructions on importing suppliers in bulk in the [Bulk Importing Suppliers](/supplyd-erp/suppliers/bulk-importing-suppliers) document.
{% hint style="warning" %}
You can only add custom suppliers to Supply’d. Suppliers that are already connected through the Supply’d platform cannot be added manually, as their information and products are synced automatically. Custom suppliers give you the flexibility to enter and manage supplier details, contacts, and products that are unique to your business.
{% endhint %}
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Go to the Suppliers Page
Select **Suppliers** from the main menu. The **Suppliers** page will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click Add+
Click **Add +** in the top right.
The **Add Supplier** form will appear.
{% hint style="success" %}
To open or close the sections on this form click the little arrows to the right of the titles (as circled in red above).
{% endhint %}
Complete the sections as outlined below:
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Company Details
**Trading Name\* \[required field]**
Enter the trading name of the supplier you are adding.
{% hint style="success" %}
If while typing, the system finds a match in Supply'd, it will automatically suggest connecting to that supplier instead of creating a custom one. In this case, you will be connecting to a **Supply’d supplier** rather than creating a **custom supplier**.
👉 Proceed as explained from **Step 3** onwards in [#connecting-with-a-supplyd-supplier](#connecting-with-a-supplyd-supplier "mention") below for details on how to do this.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="success" %}
You can also add yourself as a Supplier. This is useful for franchises or businesses with multiple stores ordering from a single production facility.
When you type your name, Supply’d will recognise it and suggest connecting to your account.
If you add yourself as a supplier, you will automatically be added as a customer, so there’s no need to add yourself separately as both a supplier and a customer.
{% endhint %}
**Company Logo**
Optionally, upload the supplier’s logo.
1. Click **Choose File**.
2. **Select the image** file from your computer (usually JPG or PNG).
3. Once uploaded, the logo will appear on the supplier’s page and in lists where the supplier is displayed.
{% hint style="success" %}
Uploading a logo is optional, but it makes it easier to visually identify suppliers in your lists and reports.
{% endhint %}
**Business Number**
Enter the supplier's business number (eg. their ABN or NZBN).
**Company Legal Name**
Enter the supplier’s legal name, ie. the name registered with the business registry.
**Groups**
Select any **Supplier Groups** you would like to assign this supplier to.
👉 See [#supplier-groups](#supplier-groups "mention") below.
**Account Number**
Enter an optional account number that you have with this supplier. This will show on purchase orders.
**Website**
Add the supplier's website.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Custom Fields
Complete any custom fields you may have created.
{% hint style="info" %}
**Custom Fields** are user-defined fields that let you track additional information about a supplier that isn’t included in the default fields. You can name the field whatever you like and enter the data that’s relevant to your business.
👉 See the [Supplier Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/supplier-settings) document for information on creating custom fields for suppliers.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Address
Enter the address details for the supplier.
**Billing Address**
Enter the supplier's street address.
**Billing Suburb**
Enter the supplier's suburb.
**Billing State/Province**
Select the supplier's state.
**Billing Postcode**
Enter the supplier's postcode.
**Billing Country**
Select the supplier's country.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Contact
Enter the details of the supplier’s primary contact.
**First Name**
Enter the first name of a representative/contact of the supplier.
**Last Name**
Enter the last name of a representative/contact of the supplier.
**Role/Department**
Add the role or department of the contact, eg. Sales Rep, Accounts etc.
**Email**
Enter the email address for the contact.
**Mobile**
Add a mobile number for the contact.
**Phone**
Add a phone number for this contact.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Settings
Enter additional settings for the supplier.
**Order Minimums**
Often suppliers require a minimum order. Select whether to enforce a **Minimum Spend** or a **Minimum Carton Quantity**. When enabled, Supply’d will prevent orders from being sent unless the minimum requirement is met
* **Minimum Spend:** When "Minimum Spend" is selected an additional field, **Minimum Spend**, will show where you can enter a dollar amount.\
* **Minimum Carton Qty:** When "Minimum Carton Qty" is selected an additional field, **Minimum Qty**, will show where you can number amount.\
**Payment Terms**
Enter the supplier’s payment terms. First, enter the number of days the supplier gives you to pay, then select one of the following options:
* **Days:** Payment is due within a set number of days after the invoice date (eg. 7 days, 30 days).
* **Days EOM** (End of Month): Payment is due within a certain number of days after the end of the month in which the invoice was issued (eg. “30 Days EOM” means payment is due 30 days after the last day of that month.)
* **Days EOW** (End of Week): Payment is due within a set number of days after the end of the week in which the invoice was issued.
* **Pre-paid:** Payment is due before the goods are supplied, ie. the order must be paid for upfront.
Leave the payment term number blank to use the default term set in your [Supplier Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/supplier-settings).
**Currency**
Select the currency used to purchase from this supplier.
**Buyers Rep**
Select a buyers rep to assign this supplier.
**Default Sales Period (Days)**
You can override the default delivery period for products purchased from this supplier if they take shorter or longer than usual. Enter the number of days to apply.
**Notes**
Add any notes about this supplier. These are for internal reference only and are not visible to the supplier.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Payment Details
Add the supplier's bank account details for ABA generation when using **Expenses**.
**BSB**
Enter the BSB for the supplier's bank account. Max 6 digits.
**Account Number**
Enter the account number of the bank account. Max 9 digits.
***
{% hint style="warning" %}
The following sections - **MYOB & Xero** - will only show if you have these platforms integrated with your Supply'd account.
**NOTE:** The name "**MYOB Test**" will actually reflect whatever names you chose during the integration setup.
👉 See the [Integrations](/supplyd-erp/settings/integrations) help section for information on integrating various platforms with Supply'd.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Myob - "MYOB Test" Settings
Myob - "MYOB Test" settings for this supplier, where "MYOB Test" represents the name given to the integration during setup. Your integration name will reflect whatever name you chose when configuring it.
**MYOB "Test Contact"**
Select/enter the MYOB contact for this supplier.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Xero - "Xero Settings"
Xero settings for this supplier.
**Xero Contact**
Select/enter the MYOB contact for this supplier.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Advanced
Advanced settings for this supplier.
**Order Alert**
Add an internal alert to show when creating an order for this supplier. This alert is not visible to suppliers.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Save
Click to add your supplier.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
## Adding Suppliers' Products
After adding your custom supplier you may want to add or import their products.
Products can be added from the **Products** page (👉 see [Adding Products](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products)) or from the **Suppliers** page.
{% hint style="warning" %}
Products can only be added for custom suppliers. Supply’d-connected suppliers automatically sync their product lists, so you can’t manually add products for them. For custom suppliers you create, however, you have full control to add and manage their products, including pricing, descriptions, and other details.
{% endhint %}
***
### Adding Products Individually
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Select the Supplier
Select Suppliers from the main menu. The Suppliers list will open.
Click on the Supplier you would like to add products to.
The supplier's detail page will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Go to the Products Tab
Go to the products tab. This tab list all the Supplier's products that you may have added.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click on Add +
Click on **Add +** in the top right.
The **Add Product** form will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Complete the Form
Complete the form following the guidelines in the [Adding Products](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products) document.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
### Adding Products in Bulk
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Select the Supplier
Select Suppliers from the main menu. The Suppliers list will open.
Click on the Supplier you would like to add products to.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Go to the Products Tab
Go to the products tab.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Select Import > Products
Click on the 3 dots in the top right, select **Import**, then **Products**.
**The Import Products** form will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Continue the Process
Follow the instructions in the [Bulk Importing of Products](/supplyd-erp/products/bulk-importing-of-products) document to continue with the process.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
## Connecting with a Supply'd Supplier
The **Connect** tab lists all suppliers available to connect with on Supply’d. Clicking on a supplier allows you to view all their information and request to connect with them.
To connect with a Supply'd supplier:
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Open the Suppliers Page
Select **Suppliers** from the main menu. The **Suppliers** page will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Go to the Connect Tab
Go to the **Connect** tab to see a list of all suppliers available to connect with on Supply’d. Only suppliers that have made their stores public will appear; invite-only stores will not be visible.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Select the Supplier
Select the supplier that you would like to connect with. The supplier's details will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click Connect
To send a connection request to the supplier, click .
You will be asked to confirm.
The supplier will review your request and either approve or reject it. If approved, the supplier will appear in your **Suppliers** list.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
## Supplier Requests
The **Requests** tab lists any connection requests from suppliers. You can approve or decline suppliers you would like to trade with on Supply'd.
To review, accept or reject a request from a supplier:
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Open the Suppliers Page
Select **Suppliers** from the main menu. The **Suppliers** page will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Go to the Requests Tab
Go to the **Requests** tab to see a list all connection requests from suppliers.
{% hint style="success" %}
The number of active requests you currently have will be indicated by the number in the red circle at the top right of the **Requests** tab.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Select the Supplier
Select the supplier that you would like to review. The supplier's details will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Approve or Reject the Request
If you would like to connect with this supplier, click . Click **Reject** if you do not want to connect with this supplier.
You will be asked to confirm.
Click .
The supplier will show on your **Suppliers** list.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
## Supplier Groups
**Supplier Groups** in Supply’d help you organise suppliers into categories, such as product type, location, or performance, making it easier to manage and find the right suppliers. Create a group, then assign suppliers to it when setting up or editing a supplier.
### Creating a Supplier Group
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Go to the Suppliers Groups Page
1. Select **Suppliers** from the main menu.
2. Go to the **Groups** tab. The **Groups** page will open, listing any groups that may have been set up.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click Add+
Click **Add +** in the top right.
The **Add Supplier Group** form will appear.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Enter a Name
**Group Name\* \[required field]**
Enter a name for the group.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Save
Click to create the group.
The group will show in the **Supplier Groups** list.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
### Editing a Supplier Group
To edit a **Supplier Group**:
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Select **Suppliers** from the main menu and go to the **Groups** tab.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Select the group.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click on the 3 dots in the top right. Select **Edit Group**.
The **Edit Supplier Group** form will appear where you can edit the group name.
{% hint style="success" %}
Group members can be edited at an individual supplier level.
👉 See [Managing Suppliers](/supplyd-erp/suppliers/managing-suppliers) for more information.
{% endhint %}
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
### Removing a Supplier Group
To remove a **Supplier Group:**
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Select **Suppliers** from the main menu and go to the **Groups** tab.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Select the group.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click on the 3 dots in the top right. Select **Remove Group**.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
You will be asked to confirm.
Click .
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
{% hint style="success" %}
For more information on managing your suppliers, refer to the [Managing Suppliers](/supplyd-erp/suppliers/managing-suppliers) document.
{% endhint %}
# Adding a Supplier's Products
Supply’d lets you order from all suppliers in one place. Add suppliers to include non-registered ones seamlessly.
At the heart of Supply'd is a powerful, yet easy ordering system that lets you order from all of your suppliers quickly and easily. To order from suppliers who are not yet on Supply'd you can quickly and easily add a supplier and their products and order from them at the same time as ordering from other suppliers. Suppliers can be added individually or imported in bulk using a CSV file.
👉 Refer to the [Bulk Importing Suppliers](/supplyd-erp/suppliers/bulk-importing-suppliers) document for instructions on importing suppliers in bulk.
\
This document will guide you through adding suppliers individually, including:
* [#the-suppliers-page](#the-suppliers-page "mention")
* [#adding-a-custom-supplier](#adding-a-custom-supplier "mention")
* [#adding-suppliers-products](#adding-suppliers-products "mention")
* [#adding-products-individually](#adding-products-individually "mention")
* [#adding-products-in-bulk](#adding-products-in-bulk "mention")
* [#connecting-with-a-supplyd-supplier](#connecting-with-a-supplyd-supplier "mention")
* [#supplier-requests](#supplier-requests "mention")
* [#supplier-groups](#supplier-groups "mention")
***
## The Suppliers Page
Selecting **Suppliers** from the main menu will open the **Suppliers** page.
The **Suppliers** page is where you manage all your suppliers. It displays a list of every supplier linked to your account, including both Supply’d-connected suppliers and any custom suppliers you’ve added manually.
From this page, you can:
* **Search and filter suppliers** to quickly find the one you need.
* **View supplier details**, such as contact information, ordering methods, and delivery preferences.
* **Add new suppliers**, either individually or by bulk import.
* **Edit supplier information** if details change.
* **Set up delivery schedules and ordering rules** to streamline your purchasing.
This page acts as your central hub for supplier management, ensuring that all supplier details are accurate and up to date.
Clicking on a supplier will display that supplier's page with all their details. Here, you can view their contact details, payment terms, and delivery schedules, as well as see your order history with them. You’ll also find tabs for things like pricing, products, invoices, and notes related to that supplier. From this page, you can easily place new orders, manage existing ones, and keep track of all interactions with that supplier in one place.
{% hint style="success" %}
Supplier statuses will appear on the **Suppliers** list in various colours for easy identification of the supplier type:
- A business that is already on Supply'd.
- A supplier that is not on Supply'd and that you have added to your Supply'd account.
- A supplier you’ve requested to connect with, but who has not yet approved your request.
{% endhint %}
👉 To learn how to add custom suppliers, see [#adding-a-custom-supplier](#adding-a-custom-supplier "mention") below.
***
**Connect Tab**
The **Connect** tab lists all suppliers available to connect with on Supply’d. Clicking on a supplier allows you to view all their information.
👉 See [#connecting-with-a-supplyd-supplier](#connecting-with-a-supplyd-supplier "mention") below for more information.
***
**Requests Tab**
The **Requests** tab lists any supplier connection requests. You can approve or decline suppliers you would like to trade with on Supply'd.
{% hint style="success" %}
The number of active requests you currently have will be indicated by the number in the red circle at the top right of the **Requests** tab.
{% endhint %}
👉 See [#supplier-requests](#supplier-requests "mention") below for more information.
***
**Promotions Tab**
The **Promotions** tab displays all promotions sent to you from your connected Supply'd suppliers. From this tab, you can view current and upcoming promotions, including the products included, promotional pricing, and promotion dates.
This provides a central location for managing and reviewing all promotions offered by your suppliers.
Clicking on a promotion opens the promotion details, where you can view all information associated with the selected promotion.
👉 See the [Supplier Promotions](/supplyd-erp/products/promotions/supplier-promotions) document for full details.
***
**Groups Tab**
While the **Suppliers** tab lists all your individual suppliers, the **Groups** tab shows the suppliers you’ve organised into groups. A **Supplier Group** in Supply’d lets you manage multiple suppliers together in one place. This is especially useful if you regularly order from the same set of suppliers, as it saves time and keeps your ordering process more organised.
For example, you could create a Supplier Group for *“Refrigerated Suppliers”* or *“Local Suppliers”*. When placing an order, instead of adding suppliers one-by-one, you can select the whole group and quickly order from everyone in it.
Clicking on a group will show all the suppliers in that group. Selecting a supplier will open their page, displaying all their details.
👉 To learn how to add supplier groups, see [#supplier-groups](#supplier-groups "mention") below.
***
## Adding a Custom Supplier
Adding a custom supplier in Supply’d is quick and simple - it takes less than a minute. The steps below will guide you through manually adding a supplier. If you need to add many suppliers at once, you can also bulk import them using a CSV file.
👉 You can find the instructions on importing suppliers in bulk in the [Bulk Importing Suppliers](/supplyd-erp/suppliers/bulk-importing-suppliers) document.
{% hint style="warning" %}
You can only add custom suppliers to Supply’d. Suppliers that are already connected through the Supply’d platform cannot be added manually, as their information and products are synced automatically. Custom suppliers give you the flexibility to enter and manage supplier details, contacts, and products that are unique to your business.
{% endhint %}
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Go to the Suppliers Page
Select **Suppliers** from the main menu. The **Suppliers** page will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click Add+
Click **Add +** in the top right.
The **Add Supplier** form will appear.
{% hint style="success" %}
To open or close the sections on this form click the little arrows to the right of the titles (as circled in red above).
{% endhint %}
Complete the sections as outlined below:
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Company Details
**Trading Name\* \[required field]**
Enter the trading name of the supplier you are adding.
{% hint style="success" %}
If while typing, the system finds a match in Supply'd, it will automatically suggest connecting to that supplier instead of creating a custom one. In this case, you will be connecting to a **Supply’d supplier** rather than creating a **custom supplier**.
👉 Proceed as explained from **Step 3** onwards in [#connecting-with-a-supplyd-supplier](#connecting-with-a-supplyd-supplier "mention") below for details on how to do this.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="success" %}
You can also add yourself as a Supplier. This is useful for franchises or businesses with multiple stores ordering from a single production facility.
When you type your name, Supply’d will recognise it and suggest connecting to your account.
If you add yourself as a supplier, you will automatically be added as a customer, so there’s no need to add yourself separately as both a supplier and a customer.
{% endhint %}
**Company Logo**
Optionally, upload the supplier’s logo.
1. Click **Choose File**.
2. **Select the image** file from your computer (usually JPG or PNG).
3. Once uploaded, the logo will appear on the supplier’s page and in lists where the supplier is displayed.
{% hint style="success" %}
Uploading a logo is optional, but it makes it easier to visually identify suppliers in your lists and reports.
{% endhint %}
**Business Number**
Enter the supplier's business number (eg. their ABN or NZBN).
**Company Legal Name**
Enter the supplier’s legal name, ie. the name registered with the business registry.
**Groups**
Select any **Supplier Groups** you would like to assign this supplier to.
👉 See [#supplier-groups](#supplier-groups "mention") below.
**Account Number**
Enter an optional account number that you have with this supplier. This will show on purchase orders.
**Website**
Add the supplier's website.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Custom Fields
Complete any custom fields you may have created.
{% hint style="info" %}
**Custom Fields** are user-defined fields that let you track additional information about a supplier that isn’t included in the default fields. You can name the field whatever you like and enter the data that’s relevant to your business.
👉 See the [Supplier Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/supplier-settings) document for information on creating custom fields for suppliers.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Address
Enter the address details for the supplier.
**Billing Address**
Enter the supplier's street address.
**Billing Suburb**
Enter the supplier's suburb.
**Billing State/Province**
Select the supplier's state.
**Billing Postcode**
Enter the supplier's postcode.
**Billing Country**
Select the supplier's country.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Contact
Enter the details of the supplier’s primary contact.
**First Name**
Enter the first name of a representative/contact of the supplier.
**Last Name**
Enter the last name of a representative/contact of the supplier.
**Role/Department**
Add the role or department of the contact, eg. Sales Rep, Accounts etc.
**Email**
Enter the email address for the contact.
**Mobile**
Add a mobile number for the contact.
**Phone**
Add a phone number for this contact.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Settings
Enter additional settings for the supplier.
**Order Minimums**
Often suppliers require a minimum order. Select whether to enforce a **Minimum Spend** or a **Minimum Carton Quantity**. When enabled, Supply’d will prevent orders from being sent unless the minimum requirement is met
* **Minimum Spend:** When "Minimum Spend" is selected an additional field, **Minimum Spend**, will show where you can enter a dollar amount.\
* **Minimum Carton Qty:** When "Minimum Carton Qty" is selected an additional field, **Minimum Qty**, will show where you can number amount.\
**Payment Terms**
Enter the supplier’s payment terms. First, enter the number of days the supplier gives you to pay, then select one of the following options:
* **Days:** Payment is due within a set number of days after the invoice date (eg. 7 days, 30 days).
* **Days EOM** (End of Month): Payment is due within a certain number of days after the end of the month in which the invoice was issued (eg. “30 Days EOM” means payment is due 30 days after the last day of that month.)
* **Days EOW** (End of Week): Payment is due within a set number of days after the end of the week in which the invoice was issued.
* **Pre-paid:** Payment is due before the goods are supplied, ie. the order must be paid for upfront.
Leave the payment term number blank to use the default term set in your [Supplier Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/supplier-settings).
**Currency**
Select the currency used to purchase from this supplier.
**Buyers Rep**
Select a buyers rep to assign this supplier.
**Default Sales Period (Days)**
You can override the default delivery period for products purchased from this supplier if they take shorter or longer than usual. Enter the number of days to apply.
**Notes**
Add any notes about this supplier. These are for internal reference only and are not visible to the supplier.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Payment Details
Add the supplier's bank account details for ABA generation when using **Expenses**.
**BSB**
Enter the BSB for the supplier's bank account. Max 6 digits.
**Account Number**
Enter the account number of the bank account. Max 9 digits.
***
{% hint style="warning" %}
The following sections - **MYOB & Xero** - will only show if you have these platforms integrated with your Supply'd account.
**NOTE:** The name "**MYOB Test**" will actually reflect whatever names you chose during the integration setup.
👉 See the [Integrations](/supplyd-erp/settings/integrations) help section for information on integrating various platforms with Supply'd.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Myob - "MYOB Test" Settings
Myob - "MYOB Test" settings for this supplier, where "MYOB Test" represents the name given to the integration during setup. Your integration name will reflect whatever name you chose when configuring it.
**MYOB "Test Contact"**
Select/enter the MYOB contact for this supplier.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Xero - "Xero Settings"
Xero settings for this supplier.
**Xero Contact**
Select/enter the MYOB contact for this supplier.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Advanced
Advanced settings for this supplier.
**Order Alert**
Add an internal alert to show when creating an order for this supplier. This alert is not visible to suppliers.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Save
Click to add your supplier.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
## Adding Suppliers' Products
After adding your custom supplier you may want to add or import their products.
Products can be added from the **Products** page (👉 see [Adding Products](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products)) or from the **Suppliers** page.
{% hint style="warning" %}
Products can only be added for custom suppliers. Supply’d-connected suppliers automatically sync their product lists, so you can’t manually add products for them. For custom suppliers you create, however, you have full control to add and manage their products, including pricing, descriptions, and other details.
{% endhint %}
***
### Adding Products Individually
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Select the Supplier
Select Suppliers from the main menu. The Suppliers list will open.
Click on the Supplier you would like to add products to.
The supplier's detail page will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Go to the Products Tab
Go to the products tab. This tab list all the Supplier's products that you may have added.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click on Add +
Click on **Add +** in the top right.
The **Add Product** form will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Complete the Form
Complete the form following the guidelines in the [Adding Products](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products) document.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
### Adding Products in Bulk
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Select the Supplier
Select Suppliers from the main menu. The Suppliers list will open.
Click on the Supplier you would like to add products to.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Go to the Products Tab
Go to the products tab.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Select Import > Products
Click on the 3 dots in the top right, select **Import**, then **Products**.
**The Import Products** form will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Continue the Process
Follow the instructions in the [Bulk Importing of Products](/supplyd-erp/products/bulk-importing-of-products) document to continue with the process.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
## Connecting with a Supply'd Supplier
The **Connect** tab lists all suppliers available to connect with on Supply’d. Clicking on a supplier allows you to view all their information and request to connect with them.
To connect with a Supply'd supplier:
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Open the Suppliers Page
Select **Suppliers** from the main menu. The **Suppliers** page will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Go to the Connect Tab
Go to the **Connect** tab to see a list of all suppliers available to connect with on Supply’d. Only suppliers that have made their stores public will appear; invite-only stores will not be visible.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Select the Supplier
Select the supplier that you would like to connect with. The supplier's details will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click Connect
To send a connection request to the supplier, click .
You will be asked to confirm.
The supplier will review your request and either approve or reject it. If approved, the supplier will appear in your **Suppliers** list.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
## Supplier Requests
The **Requests** tab lists any connection requests from suppliers. You can approve or decline suppliers you would like to trade with on Supply'd.
To review, accept or reject a request from a supplier:
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Open the Suppliers Page
Select **Suppliers** from the main menu. The **Suppliers** page will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Go to the Requests Tab
Go to the **Requests** tab to see a list all connection requests from suppliers.
{% hint style="success" %}
The number of active requests you currently have will be indicated by the number in the red circle at the top right of the **Requests** tab.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Select the Supplier
Select the supplier that you would like to review. The supplier's details will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Approve or Reject the Request
If you would like to connect with this supplier, click . Click **Reject** if you do not want to connect with this supplier.
You will be asked to confirm.
Click .
The supplier will show on your **Suppliers** list.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
## Supplier Groups
**Supplier Groups** in Supply’d help you organise suppliers into categories, such as product type, location, or performance, making it easier to manage and find the right suppliers. Create a group, then assign suppliers to it when setting up or editing a supplier.
### Creating a Supplier Group
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Go to the Suppliers Groups Page
1. Select **Suppliers** from the main menu.
2. Go to the **Groups** tab. The **Groups** page will open, listing any groups that may have been set up.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click Add+
Click **Add +** in the top right.
The **Add Supplier Group** form will appear.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Enter a Name
**Group Name\* \[required field]**
Enter a name for the group.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Save
Click to create the group.
The group will show in the **Supplier Groups** list.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
### Editing a Supplier Group
To edit a **Supplier Group**:
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Select **Suppliers** from the main menu and go to the **Groups** tab.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Select the group.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click on the 3 dots in the top right. Select **Edit Group**.
The **Edit Supplier Group** form will appear where you can edit the group name.
{% hint style="success" %}
Group members can be edited at an individual supplier level.
👉 See [Managing Suppliers](/supplyd-erp/suppliers/managing-suppliers) for more information.
{% endhint %}
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
### Removing a Supplier Group
To remove a **Supplier Group:**
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Select **Suppliers** from the main menu and go to the **Groups** tab.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Select the group.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click on the 3 dots in the top right. Select **Remove Group**.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
You will be asked to confirm.
Click .
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
{% hint style="success" %}
For more information on managing your suppliers, refer to the [Managing Suppliers](/supplyd-erp/suppliers/managing-suppliers) document.
{% endhint %}
# Adding a Supplier's Products in Bulk
Supply’d lets you order from all suppliers in one place. Add suppliers to include non-registered ones seamlessly.
At the heart of Supply'd is a powerful, yet easy ordering system that lets you order from all of your suppliers quickly and easily. To order from suppliers who are not yet on Supply'd you can quickly and easily add a supplier and their products and order from them at the same time as ordering from other suppliers. Suppliers can be added individually or imported in bulk using a CSV file.
👉 Refer to the [Bulk Importing Suppliers](/supplyd-erp/suppliers/bulk-importing-suppliers) document for instructions on importing suppliers in bulk.
\
This document will guide you through adding suppliers individually, including:
* [#the-suppliers-page](#the-suppliers-page "mention")
* [#adding-a-custom-supplier](#adding-a-custom-supplier "mention")
* [#adding-suppliers-products](#adding-suppliers-products "mention")
* [#adding-products-individually](#adding-products-individually "mention")
* [#adding-products-in-bulk](#adding-products-in-bulk "mention")
* [#connecting-with-a-supplyd-supplier](#connecting-with-a-supplyd-supplier "mention")
* [#supplier-requests](#supplier-requests "mention")
* [#supplier-groups](#supplier-groups "mention")
***
## The Suppliers Page
Selecting **Suppliers** from the main menu will open the **Suppliers** page.
The **Suppliers** page is where you manage all your suppliers. It displays a list of every supplier linked to your account, including both Supply’d-connected suppliers and any custom suppliers you’ve added manually.
From this page, you can:
* **Search and filter suppliers** to quickly find the one you need.
* **View supplier details**, such as contact information, ordering methods, and delivery preferences.
* **Add new suppliers**, either individually or by bulk import.
* **Edit supplier information** if details change.
* **Set up delivery schedules and ordering rules** to streamline your purchasing.
This page acts as your central hub for supplier management, ensuring that all supplier details are accurate and up to date.
Clicking on a supplier will display that supplier's page with all their details. Here, you can view their contact details, payment terms, and delivery schedules, as well as see your order history with them. You’ll also find tabs for things like pricing, products, invoices, and notes related to that supplier. From this page, you can easily place new orders, manage existing ones, and keep track of all interactions with that supplier in one place.
{% hint style="success" %}
Supplier statuses will appear on the **Suppliers** list in various colours for easy identification of the supplier type:
- A business that is already on Supply'd.
- A supplier that is not on Supply'd and that you have added to your Supply'd account.
- A supplier you’ve requested to connect with, but who has not yet approved your request.
{% endhint %}
👉 To learn how to add custom suppliers, see [#adding-a-custom-supplier](#adding-a-custom-supplier "mention") below.
***
**Connect Tab**
The **Connect** tab lists all suppliers available to connect with on Supply’d. Clicking on a supplier allows you to view all their information.
👉 See [#connecting-with-a-supplyd-supplier](#connecting-with-a-supplyd-supplier "mention") below for more information.
***
**Requests Tab**
The **Requests** tab lists any supplier connection requests. You can approve or decline suppliers you would like to trade with on Supply'd.
{% hint style="success" %}
The number of active requests you currently have will be indicated by the number in the red circle at the top right of the **Requests** tab.
{% endhint %}
👉 See [#supplier-requests](#supplier-requests "mention") below for more information.
***
**Promotions Tab**
The **Promotions** tab displays all promotions sent to you from your connected Supply'd suppliers. From this tab, you can view current and upcoming promotions, including the products included, promotional pricing, and promotion dates.
This provides a central location for managing and reviewing all promotions offered by your suppliers.
Clicking on a promotion opens the promotion details, where you can view all information associated with the selected promotion.
👉 See the [Supplier Promotions](/supplyd-erp/products/promotions/supplier-promotions) document for full details.
***
**Groups Tab**
While the **Suppliers** tab lists all your individual suppliers, the **Groups** tab shows the suppliers you’ve organised into groups. A **Supplier Group** in Supply’d lets you manage multiple suppliers together in one place. This is especially useful if you regularly order from the same set of suppliers, as it saves time and keeps your ordering process more organised.
For example, you could create a Supplier Group for *“Refrigerated Suppliers”* or *“Local Suppliers”*. When placing an order, instead of adding suppliers one-by-one, you can select the whole group and quickly order from everyone in it.
Clicking on a group will show all the suppliers in that group. Selecting a supplier will open their page, displaying all their details.
👉 To learn how to add supplier groups, see [#supplier-groups](#supplier-groups "mention") below.
***
## Adding a Custom Supplier
Adding a custom supplier in Supply’d is quick and simple - it takes less than a minute. The steps below will guide you through manually adding a supplier. If you need to add many suppliers at once, you can also bulk import them using a CSV file.
👉 You can find the instructions on importing suppliers in bulk in the [Bulk Importing Suppliers](/supplyd-erp/suppliers/bulk-importing-suppliers) document.
{% hint style="warning" %}
You can only add custom suppliers to Supply’d. Suppliers that are already connected through the Supply’d platform cannot be added manually, as their information and products are synced automatically. Custom suppliers give you the flexibility to enter and manage supplier details, contacts, and products that are unique to your business.
{% endhint %}
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Go to the Suppliers Page
Select **Suppliers** from the main menu. The **Suppliers** page will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click Add+
Click **Add +** in the top right.
The **Add Supplier** form will appear.
{% hint style="success" %}
To open or close the sections on this form click the little arrows to the right of the titles (as circled in red above).
{% endhint %}
Complete the sections as outlined below:
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Company Details
**Trading Name\* \[required field]**
Enter the trading name of the supplier you are adding.
{% hint style="success" %}
If while typing, the system finds a match in Supply'd, it will automatically suggest connecting to that supplier instead of creating a custom one. In this case, you will be connecting to a **Supply’d supplier** rather than creating a **custom supplier**.
👉 Proceed as explained from **Step 3** onwards in [#connecting-with-a-supplyd-supplier](#connecting-with-a-supplyd-supplier "mention") below for details on how to do this.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="success" %}
You can also add yourself as a Supplier. This is useful for franchises or businesses with multiple stores ordering from a single production facility.
When you type your name, Supply’d will recognise it and suggest connecting to your account.
If you add yourself as a supplier, you will automatically be added as a customer, so there’s no need to add yourself separately as both a supplier and a customer.
{% endhint %}
**Company Logo**
Optionally, upload the supplier’s logo.
1. Click **Choose File**.
2. **Select the image** file from your computer (usually JPG or PNG).
3. Once uploaded, the logo will appear on the supplier’s page and in lists where the supplier is displayed.
{% hint style="success" %}
Uploading a logo is optional, but it makes it easier to visually identify suppliers in your lists and reports.
{% endhint %}
**Business Number**
Enter the supplier's business number (eg. their ABN or NZBN).
**Company Legal Name**
Enter the supplier’s legal name, ie. the name registered with the business registry.
**Groups**
Select any **Supplier Groups** you would like to assign this supplier to.
👉 See [#supplier-groups](#supplier-groups "mention") below.
**Account Number**
Enter an optional account number that you have with this supplier. This will show on purchase orders.
**Website**
Add the supplier's website.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Custom Fields
Complete any custom fields you may have created.
{% hint style="info" %}
**Custom Fields** are user-defined fields that let you track additional information about a supplier that isn’t included in the default fields. You can name the field whatever you like and enter the data that’s relevant to your business.
👉 See the [Supplier Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/supplier-settings) document for information on creating custom fields for suppliers.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Address
Enter the address details for the supplier.
**Billing Address**
Enter the supplier's street address.
**Billing Suburb**
Enter the supplier's suburb.
**Billing State/Province**
Select the supplier's state.
**Billing Postcode**
Enter the supplier's postcode.
**Billing Country**
Select the supplier's country.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Contact
Enter the details of the supplier’s primary contact.
**First Name**
Enter the first name of a representative/contact of the supplier.
**Last Name**
Enter the last name of a representative/contact of the supplier.
**Role/Department**
Add the role or department of the contact, eg. Sales Rep, Accounts etc.
**Email**
Enter the email address for the contact.
**Mobile**
Add a mobile number for the contact.
**Phone**
Add a phone number for this contact.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Settings
Enter additional settings for the supplier.
**Order Minimums**
Often suppliers require a minimum order. Select whether to enforce a **Minimum Spend** or a **Minimum Carton Quantity**. When enabled, Supply’d will prevent orders from being sent unless the minimum requirement is met
* **Minimum Spend:** When "Minimum Spend" is selected an additional field, **Minimum Spend**, will show where you can enter a dollar amount.\
* **Minimum Carton Qty:** When "Minimum Carton Qty" is selected an additional field, **Minimum Qty**, will show where you can number amount.\
**Payment Terms**
Enter the supplier’s payment terms. First, enter the number of days the supplier gives you to pay, then select one of the following options:
* **Days:** Payment is due within a set number of days after the invoice date (eg. 7 days, 30 days).
* **Days EOM** (End of Month): Payment is due within a certain number of days after the end of the month in which the invoice was issued (eg. “30 Days EOM” means payment is due 30 days after the last day of that month.)
* **Days EOW** (End of Week): Payment is due within a set number of days after the end of the week in which the invoice was issued.
* **Pre-paid:** Payment is due before the goods are supplied, ie. the order must be paid for upfront.
Leave the payment term number blank to use the default term set in your [Supplier Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/supplier-settings).
**Currency**
Select the currency used to purchase from this supplier.
**Buyers Rep**
Select a buyers rep to assign this supplier.
**Default Sales Period (Days)**
You can override the default delivery period for products purchased from this supplier if they take shorter or longer than usual. Enter the number of days to apply.
**Notes**
Add any notes about this supplier. These are for internal reference only and are not visible to the supplier.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Payment Details
Add the supplier's bank account details for ABA generation when using **Expenses**.
**BSB**
Enter the BSB for the supplier's bank account. Max 6 digits.
**Account Number**
Enter the account number of the bank account. Max 9 digits.
***
{% hint style="warning" %}
The following sections - **MYOB & Xero** - will only show if you have these platforms integrated with your Supply'd account.
**NOTE:** The name "**MYOB Test**" will actually reflect whatever names you chose during the integration setup.
👉 See the [Integrations](/supplyd-erp/settings/integrations) help section for information on integrating various platforms with Supply'd.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Myob - "MYOB Test" Settings
Myob - "MYOB Test" settings for this supplier, where "MYOB Test" represents the name given to the integration during setup. Your integration name will reflect whatever name you chose when configuring it.
**MYOB "Test Contact"**
Select/enter the MYOB contact for this supplier.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Xero - "Xero Settings"
Xero settings for this supplier.
**Xero Contact**
Select/enter the MYOB contact for this supplier.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Advanced
Advanced settings for this supplier.
**Order Alert**
Add an internal alert to show when creating an order for this supplier. This alert is not visible to suppliers.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Save
Click to add your supplier.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
## Adding Suppliers' Products
After adding your custom supplier you may want to add or import their products.
Products can be added from the **Products** page (👉 see [Adding Products](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products)) or from the **Suppliers** page.
{% hint style="warning" %}
Products can only be added for custom suppliers. Supply’d-connected suppliers automatically sync their product lists, so you can’t manually add products for them. For custom suppliers you create, however, you have full control to add and manage their products, including pricing, descriptions, and other details.
{% endhint %}
***
### Adding Products Individually
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Select the Supplier
Select Suppliers from the main menu. The Suppliers list will open.
Click on the Supplier you would like to add products to.
The supplier's detail page will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Go to the Products Tab
Go to the products tab. This tab list all the Supplier's products that you may have added.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click on Add +
Click on **Add +** in the top right.
The **Add Product** form will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Complete the Form
Complete the form following the guidelines in the [Adding Products](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products) document.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
### Adding Products in Bulk
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Select the Supplier
Select Suppliers from the main menu. The Suppliers list will open.
Click on the Supplier you would like to add products to.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Go to the Products Tab
Go to the products tab.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Select Import > Products
Click on the 3 dots in the top right, select **Import**, then **Products**.
**The Import Products** form will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Continue the Process
Follow the instructions in the [Bulk Importing of Products](/supplyd-erp/products/bulk-importing-of-products) document to continue with the process.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
## Connecting with a Supply'd Supplier
The **Connect** tab lists all suppliers available to connect with on Supply’d. Clicking on a supplier allows you to view all their information and request to connect with them.
To connect with a Supply'd supplier:
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Open the Suppliers Page
Select **Suppliers** from the main menu. The **Suppliers** page will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Go to the Connect Tab
Go to the **Connect** tab to see a list of all suppliers available to connect with on Supply’d. Only suppliers that have made their stores public will appear; invite-only stores will not be visible.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Select the Supplier
Select the supplier that you would like to connect with. The supplier's details will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click Connect
To send a connection request to the supplier, click .
You will be asked to confirm.
The supplier will review your request and either approve or reject it. If approved, the supplier will appear in your **Suppliers** list.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
## Supplier Requests
The **Requests** tab lists any connection requests from suppliers. You can approve or decline suppliers you would like to trade with on Supply'd.
To review, accept or reject a request from a supplier:
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Open the Suppliers Page
Select **Suppliers** from the main menu. The **Suppliers** page will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Go to the Requests Tab
Go to the **Requests** tab to see a list all connection requests from suppliers.
{% hint style="success" %}
The number of active requests you currently have will be indicated by the number in the red circle at the top right of the **Requests** tab.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Select the Supplier
Select the supplier that you would like to review. The supplier's details will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Approve or Reject the Request
If you would like to connect with this supplier, click . Click **Reject** if you do not want to connect with this supplier.
You will be asked to confirm.
Click .
The supplier will show on your **Suppliers** list.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
## Supplier Groups
**Supplier Groups** in Supply’d help you organise suppliers into categories, such as product type, location, or performance, making it easier to manage and find the right suppliers. Create a group, then assign suppliers to it when setting up or editing a supplier.
### Creating a Supplier Group
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Go to the Suppliers Groups Page
1. Select **Suppliers** from the main menu.
2. Go to the **Groups** tab. The **Groups** page will open, listing any groups that may have been set up.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click Add+
Click **Add +** in the top right.
The **Add Supplier Group** form will appear.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Enter a Name
**Group Name\* \[required field]**
Enter a name for the group.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Save
Click to create the group.
The group will show in the **Supplier Groups** list.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
### Editing a Supplier Group
To edit a **Supplier Group**:
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Select **Suppliers** from the main menu and go to the **Groups** tab.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Select the group.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click on the 3 dots in the top right. Select **Edit Group**.
The **Edit Supplier Group** form will appear where you can edit the group name.
{% hint style="success" %}
Group members can be edited at an individual supplier level.
👉 See [Managing Suppliers](/supplyd-erp/suppliers/managing-suppliers) for more information.
{% endhint %}
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
### Removing a Supplier Group
To remove a **Supplier Group:**
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Select **Suppliers** from the main menu and go to the **Groups** tab.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Select the group.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click on the 3 dots in the top right. Select **Remove Group**.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
You will be asked to confirm.
Click .
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
{% hint style="success" %}
For more information on managing your suppliers, refer to the [Managing Suppliers](/supplyd-erp/suppliers/managing-suppliers) document.
{% endhint %}
# Bulk Importing Suppliers
If you have a large number of suppliers to add it can be cumbersome adding them manually. To solve for this Supply'd allows you to add suppliers in bulk via a spreadsheet.
If you have a large number of suppliers to set up, Supply’d makes it easy with the **Bulk Import** feature. Adding a large number of suppliers doesn't need to take forever. Instead of adding each supplier manually, you can prepare a simple CSV file and upload it directly. This saves time, reduces data entry errors, and ensures all your suppliers are added quickly and consistently.
{% hint style="success" %}
In Supply'd there are two types of Suppliers:
* **Supply'd Suppliers:** Suppliers already using Supply’d and selling through the Supply’d Marketplace. These will have status next to their names on the **Suppliers** list.
* **Custom Suppliers:** Suppliers not yet on Supply’d, and that you manually add to your account. These will have next to their names.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="success" %}
If you only have a few custom suppliers to add you may find it more efficient to add them manually.
👉 See how to do this in the [Adding Suppliers & Supplier Groups](/supplyd-erp/suppliers/adding-suppliers-and-supplier-groups) document.
{% endhint %}
In this document, we will guide you through the process of importing your custom suppliers in bulk into Supply’d.
***
## Bulk Import/Add Custom Suppliers
Supply'd makes it easy to import a large number of suppliers from a spreadsheet. There is a specific template you will need to follow to do so in order to allow Supply'd to import the values correctly.
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Go to the Suppliers Page
Select **Suppliers** from the main menu. The **Suppliers** page will open, listing all your suppliers, both custom and Supply'd.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Select Import
Click on the 3 dots in the top right and select **Import**, then **Supplier Data**.
The **Import Suppliers** form will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click on Download Template
Click **Download Template**.
The **Export Suppliers** form will appear. From here, you can download your CSV template, which provides the correct format and field structure needed to bulk import your suppliers into Supply’d.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Select the Data Source
Select the **Data Source** to generate the template from.
**Sample Data**
If you haven’t added any custom suppliers yet, the only available option will be **Sample Data**. This provides a set of example data to help you understand how to complete the template.
**Supply'd**
If you already have custom suppliers added to Supply’d, you will see the **Supply’d** option, which allows you to export your existing custom suppliers into a template file. This is particularly useful if you want to make bulk updates to your existing custom suppliers.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Choose What to Import
In the **Field**s section, tick the boxes for any additional data types you want to include.
* **Supplier Data:** Core supplier details.
* **Locations:** Supplier addresses and operating hours.
* **Contacts:** Supplier contacts.
{% hint style="info" %}
The more selections you make in the **Fields** section, the more data fields will be included in the spreadsheet. For clarity, we will break these down into sections in the next step. However, the order of fields on the spreadsheet may vary slightly, as some selections share the same fields, such as Supplier Name.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click Export
Click and a file will be generated and downloaded to your computer.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Complete the Fields
Open the template in a spreadsheet application, such as Excel or Numbers, and fill in the required information, using the downloaded data as a guide.
{% hint style="warning" %}
* Follow the column headings carefully.
* Do not change column names.
* Leave **Supplier Number** fields blank for new records.
* Delete any sample data before importing.
{% endhint %}
Complete the template by following the instructions provided in each tab - **Supplier Data**, **Locations** and **Contacts**. Make sure to click through all the tabs for each set of details you want to import, as each tab contains specific fields and examples needed to complete the template correctly.
{% hint style="danger" %}
**Important:** The title row should remain in the document in order for the system to match the columns when imported. You should remove the sample data before importing otherwise the system will create custom suppliers with the sample data.
{% endhint %}
{% tabs %}
{% tab title="Supplier Data" icon="table" %}
#### Supplier Data Fields
**Supplier Number**
The **Supplier Number** is the unique identifier of a supplier in Supply’d.
* **For existing suppliers:** Enter the supplier's number to update it.
* **For new suppliers:** Leave this tab blank so Supply’d can assign a new **Supplier Number** automatically.
This ensures Supply’d correctly matches updates to existing suppliers while preventing conflicts for new suppliers by letting the system generate a unique number.
**Supplier Name\* \[required field]**
Enter the trading name of the supplier you are adding.
**Supplier Website**
Add the supplier's website.
**Description**
Add brief description of the supplier's business.
**Legal Name**
Enter the supplier’s legal name, ie. the name registered with the business registry.
**Supplier Business Number**
Enter the supplier's business number (eg. their ABN or NZBN).
**Currency**
Enter the currency used to purchase from this supplier.
**Conversion Rate**
If you have exported your current supplier information, this field will show the last conversion rate for the currency used by those suppliers. For new suppliers, you can leave this field blank.
**Minimum Order Spend**
If your supplier requires a minimum spend, enter the dollar amount in this field. Supply’d will check orders against this amount to make sure the requirement is met.
**Minimum Order Qty**
If your supplier requires a minimum order quantity, enter that number in this field. This ensures Supply’d will flag any orders that don’t meet the requirement.
**Colour**
Assign a colour to the supplier for visual identification within Supply’d.
Colours can help you quickly distinguish between suppliers in lists or dashboards. This is optional and used for organisational purposes only.
**Has Products**
This field indicates whether products are already linked to the supplier.
* Enter **Yes** if the supplier already has products associated with them in Supply’d.
* Enter **No** if no products are currently linked.
This helps Supply’d understand how the supplier is set up and ensures product relationships are handled correctly during the import.
**Has Orders**
This field shows whether any orders already exist for the supplier.
* Enter **Yes** if you have previously placed orders with this supplier.
* Enter **No** if no orders exist.
This field is mainly informational and helps preserve historical order data when importing or updating suppliers.
**Account Number**
Enter an optional account number that you have with this supplier. This will show on purchase orders.
**Buyer's Rep**
Enter the name of a buyer's rep to assign to this supplier.
**Payment Terms Duration**
Enter the payment terms to apply to this suppliers invoices. Leave the payment term number blank to use the default term set in your supplier settings.
**Payment Terms Period**
Enter either **Days**, **Days EOM**, **Days EOW**, **Pre-paid**.
{% hint style="info" %}
* **Days:** Payment is due within a set number of days after the invoice date (eg. 7 days, 30 days).
* **Days EOM** (End of Month): Payment is due within a certain number of days after the end of the month in which the invoice was issued (eg. “30 Days EOM” means payment is due 30 days after the last day of that month.)
* **Days EOW** (End of Week): Payment is due within a set number of days after the end of the week in which the invoice was issued.
* **Pre-paid:** Payment is due before the goods are supplied, ie. the order must be paid for upfront.
{% endhint %}
**Notes**
Enter any notes about this supplier here. These are for internal reference only and will not be visible to the supplier.
**Groups**
Enter the name of any **Supplier Groups** you want to assign this supplier to, separating multiple groups with commas.
{% hint style="success" %}
**Supplier Groups** in Supply’d help you organise suppliers into categories, such as product type, location, or performance, making it easier to manage and find the right suppliers. Create a group, then assign suppliers to it when setting up or editing a supplier.
👉 See the [Adding Suppliers & Supplier Groups](/supplyd-erp/suppliers/adding-suppliers-and-supplier-groups#supplier-groups) section of [Adding Suppliers & Supplier Groups](/supplyd-erp/suppliers/adding-suppliers-and-supplier-groups) document for details on creating supplier groups.
{% endhint %}
**Invoice Inbox**
This field is automatically generated for each supplier to send their invoices, allowing them to be matched with received goods. It’s especially useful when using the **Expense** module. Simply share this email address with each supplier so they can email invoices, in PDF format, directly to your unique **Invoice Inbox**.
Leave this field blank for new suppliers.
{% endtab %}
{% tab title="Locations" icon="earth-oceania" %}
#### Location Fields
If you ticked **Locations** in the **Fields** section in Step 3, the following fields relate to supplier locations.
**Supplier Number**
The **Supplier Number** is the unique identifier of a supplier in Supply’d.
**Supplier Name**
Enter the trading name of the supplier.
**Location ID**
The unique identifier of a supplier location in Supply’d.
Leave blank for new locations.
**Location Name**
Enter a name for this location.
**Address**
Enter the supplier's street address.
**Suburb**
Enter the supplier's suburb.
**State**
Enter the supplier's states.
**Postcode**
Enter the supplier's postcode.
**Country**
Enter the supplier's country.
**Email**
Enter the supplier's email address.
**Is Billing**
Enter **Yes** if this location is the billing address.
**Is Shipping**
Enter **Yes** if this location is a shipping address.
**Next Call Date**
Enter the next call date for this location.
{% endtab %}
{% tab title="Contacts" icon="envelope" %}
#### Contact Fields
If you ticked **Contacts** in the **Fields** section in step 3, these fields relate to this.
**Contact ID**
The unique identifier of a supplier contact in Supply’d.
Leave blank for new contacts.
**Supplier Number**
The **Supplier Number** is the unique identifier of a supplier in Supply’d.
**Supplier Name**
Enter the trading name of the supplier.
**First Name**
Enter the first name of the contact you are adding.
**Last Name**
Enter the last name /surname of the contact you are adding.
**Role**
Add the role or department of the contact, eg. Sales Rep, Accounts etc.
**Is Default**
If this is the default contact for the supplier, enter **Yes**.
**Email**
Enter the contact's email address.
**Phone**
Enter a phone number for the contact.
**Mobile Area**
Add the country code for this contact's mobile number (eg. **61** for Australia).
**Mobile Number**
Add a mobile phone number for this contact.
**Notifications**
Specify the notifications this contact should receive, separating multiple types with commas if needed:
* Order Emails
* Order SMS
**Internal Notes**
Enter any relevant internal notes about this contact. These notes are for internal reference only and are not visible to the contact or supplier.
{% endtab %}
{% endtabs %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### **Save or Export**
Once you have completed filling out the spreadsheet, ensure that you save or export it as a CSV file, as this format is required for successful import into Supply’d.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Upload the File
After creating your import file, the next step is to upload it into Supply’d. To do this, return to the Import Supplier form.
On the **Suppliers** page, click on the 3 dots in the top right and select **Import**, then **Supplier Data**.
The **Import Suppliers** form will open.
**Upload CSV File**
Click on to select the CSV file from your device and upload it.
{% hint style="warning" %}
After selecting the file please ensure you wait for the file to successfully upload before clicking Import.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Select Options
Select the options to apply during the import.
**Update Existing Suppliers**
Select whether or not to update existing suppliers in Supply'd.
{% hint style="info" %}
This option will only appear if you already have suppliers in Supply'd.
{% endhint %}
* **Yes:** Select "Yes" if you want existing suppliers to be updated.
* **No:** Select this option if you want existing suppliers to be ignored.
{% hint style="success" %}
Selecting "**Yes**" is useful to bulk update suppliers in Supply'd.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Import the File
Once the file has successfully uploaded and you have selected your options, click to begin the import.
{% hint style="info" %}
Suppliers will be imported immediately into Supply'd. If you have a lot of suppliers, please be patient.
{% endhint %}
After the import completes, review the supplier details to ensure the information has been imported correctly.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 Once imported, suppliers can be managed as outlined in the [Managing Suppliers](/supplyd-erp/suppliers/managing-suppliers) document.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="success" %}
After adding your custom supplier, you may want to add or import their products.
Refer to the relevant documentation for guidance on how to do this:
* [Adding Products](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products) – Learn how to add products one at a time to a supplier.
* [Bulk Importing of Products](/supplyd-erp/products/bulk-importing-of-products) – Use a CSV file to import multiple products at once.
{% endhint %}
# Adding Suppliers in Bulk
If you have a large number of suppliers to add it can be cumbersome adding them manually. To solve for this Supply'd allows you to add suppliers in bulk via a spreadsheet.
If you have a large number of suppliers to set up, Supply’d makes it easy with the **Bulk Import** feature. Adding a large number of suppliers doesn't need to take forever. Instead of adding each supplier manually, you can prepare a simple CSV file and upload it directly. This saves time, reduces data entry errors, and ensures all your suppliers are added quickly and consistently.
{% hint style="success" %}
In Supply'd there are two types of Suppliers:
* **Supply'd Suppliers:** Suppliers already using Supply’d and selling through the Supply’d Marketplace. These will have status next to their names on the **Suppliers** list.
* **Custom Suppliers:** Suppliers not yet on Supply’d, and that you manually add to your account. These will have next to their names.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="success" %}
If you only have a few custom suppliers to add you may find it more efficient to add them manually.
👉 See how to do this in the [Adding Suppliers & Supplier Groups](/supplyd-erp/suppliers/adding-suppliers-and-supplier-groups) document.
{% endhint %}
In this document, we will guide you through the process of importing your custom suppliers in bulk into Supply’d.
***
## Bulk Import/Add Custom Suppliers
Supply'd makes it easy to import a large number of suppliers from a spreadsheet. There is a specific template you will need to follow to do so in order to allow Supply'd to import the values correctly.
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Go to the Suppliers Page
Select **Suppliers** from the main menu. The **Suppliers** page will open, listing all your suppliers, both custom and Supply'd.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Select Import
Click on the 3 dots in the top right and select **Import**, then **Supplier Data**.
The **Import Suppliers** form will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click on Download Template
Click **Download Template**.
The **Export Suppliers** form will appear. From here, you can download your CSV template, which provides the correct format and field structure needed to bulk import your suppliers into Supply’d.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Select the Data Source
Select the **Data Source** to generate the template from.
**Sample Data**
If you haven’t added any custom suppliers yet, the only available option will be **Sample Data**. This provides a set of example data to help you understand how to complete the template.
**Supply'd**
If you already have custom suppliers added to Supply’d, you will see the **Supply’d** option, which allows you to export your existing custom suppliers into a template file. This is particularly useful if you want to make bulk updates to your existing custom suppliers.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Choose What to Import
In the **Field**s section, tick the boxes for any additional data types you want to include.
* **Supplier Data:** Core supplier details.
* **Locations:** Supplier addresses and operating hours.
* **Contacts:** Supplier contacts.
{% hint style="info" %}
The more selections you make in the **Fields** section, the more data fields will be included in the spreadsheet. For clarity, we will break these down into sections in the next step. However, the order of fields on the spreadsheet may vary slightly, as some selections share the same fields, such as Supplier Name.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click Export
Click and a file will be generated and downloaded to your computer.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Complete the Fields
Open the template in a spreadsheet application, such as Excel or Numbers, and fill in the required information, using the downloaded data as a guide.
{% hint style="warning" %}
* Follow the column headings carefully.
* Do not change column names.
* Leave **Supplier Number** fields blank for new records.
* Delete any sample data before importing.
{% endhint %}
Complete the template by following the instructions provided in each tab - **Supplier Data**, **Locations** and **Contacts**. Make sure to click through all the tabs for each set of details you want to import, as each tab contains specific fields and examples needed to complete the template correctly.
{% hint style="danger" %}
**Important:** The title row should remain in the document in order for the system to match the columns when imported. You should remove the sample data before importing otherwise the system will create custom suppliers with the sample data.
{% endhint %}
{% tabs %}
{% tab title="Supplier Data" icon="table" %}
#### Supplier Data Fields
**Supplier Number**
The **Supplier Number** is the unique identifier of a supplier in Supply’d.
* **For existing suppliers:** Enter the supplier's number to update it.
* **For new suppliers:** Leave this tab blank so Supply’d can assign a new **Supplier Number** automatically.
This ensures Supply’d correctly matches updates to existing suppliers while preventing conflicts for new suppliers by letting the system generate a unique number.
**Supplier Name\* \[required field]**
Enter the trading name of the supplier you are adding.
**Supplier Website**
Add the supplier's website.
**Description**
Add brief description of the supplier's business.
**Legal Name**
Enter the supplier’s legal name, ie. the name registered with the business registry.
**Supplier Business Number**
Enter the supplier's business number (eg. their ABN or NZBN).
**Currency**
Enter the currency used to purchase from this supplier.
**Conversion Rate**
If you have exported your current supplier information, this field will show the last conversion rate for the currency used by those suppliers. For new suppliers, you can leave this field blank.
**Minimum Order Spend**
If your supplier requires a minimum spend, enter the dollar amount in this field. Supply’d will check orders against this amount to make sure the requirement is met.
**Minimum Order Qty**
If your supplier requires a minimum order quantity, enter that number in this field. This ensures Supply’d will flag any orders that don’t meet the requirement.
**Colour**
Assign a colour to the supplier for visual identification within Supply’d.
Colours can help you quickly distinguish between suppliers in lists or dashboards. This is optional and used for organisational purposes only.
**Has Products**
This field indicates whether products are already linked to the supplier.
* Enter **Yes** if the supplier already has products associated with them in Supply’d.
* Enter **No** if no products are currently linked.
This helps Supply’d understand how the supplier is set up and ensures product relationships are handled correctly during the import.
**Has Orders**
This field shows whether any orders already exist for the supplier.
* Enter **Yes** if you have previously placed orders with this supplier.
* Enter **No** if no orders exist.
This field is mainly informational and helps preserve historical order data when importing or updating suppliers.
**Account Number**
Enter an optional account number that you have with this supplier. This will show on purchase orders.
**Buyer's Rep**
Enter the name of a buyer's rep to assign to this supplier.
**Payment Terms Duration**
Enter the payment terms to apply to this suppliers invoices. Leave the payment term number blank to use the default term set in your supplier settings.
**Payment Terms Period**
Enter either **Days**, **Days EOM**, **Days EOW**, **Pre-paid**.
{% hint style="info" %}
* **Days:** Payment is due within a set number of days after the invoice date (eg. 7 days, 30 days).
* **Days EOM** (End of Month): Payment is due within a certain number of days after the end of the month in which the invoice was issued (eg. “30 Days EOM” means payment is due 30 days after the last day of that month.)
* **Days EOW** (End of Week): Payment is due within a set number of days after the end of the week in which the invoice was issued.
* **Pre-paid:** Payment is due before the goods are supplied, ie. the order must be paid for upfront.
{% endhint %}
**Notes**
Enter any notes about this supplier here. These are for internal reference only and will not be visible to the supplier.
**Groups**
Enter the name of any **Supplier Groups** you want to assign this supplier to, separating multiple groups with commas.
{% hint style="success" %}
**Supplier Groups** in Supply’d help you organise suppliers into categories, such as product type, location, or performance, making it easier to manage and find the right suppliers. Create a group, then assign suppliers to it when setting up or editing a supplier.
👉 See the [Adding Suppliers & Supplier Groups](/supplyd-erp/suppliers/adding-suppliers-and-supplier-groups#supplier-groups) section of [Adding Suppliers & Supplier Groups](/supplyd-erp/suppliers/adding-suppliers-and-supplier-groups) document for details on creating supplier groups.
{% endhint %}
**Invoice Inbox**
This field is automatically generated for each supplier to send their invoices, allowing them to be matched with received goods. It’s especially useful when using the **Expense** module. Simply share this email address with each supplier so they can email invoices, in PDF format, directly to your unique **Invoice Inbox**.
Leave this field blank for new suppliers.
{% endtab %}
{% tab title="Locations" icon="earth-oceania" %}
#### Location Fields
If you ticked **Locations** in the **Fields** section in Step 3, the following fields relate to supplier locations.
**Supplier Number**
The **Supplier Number** is the unique identifier of a supplier in Supply’d.
**Supplier Name**
Enter the trading name of the supplier.
**Location ID**
The unique identifier of a supplier location in Supply’d.
Leave blank for new locations.
**Location Name**
Enter a name for this location.
**Address**
Enter the supplier's street address.
**Suburb**
Enter the supplier's suburb.
**State**
Enter the supplier's states.
**Postcode**
Enter the supplier's postcode.
**Country**
Enter the supplier's country.
**Email**
Enter the supplier's email address.
**Is Billing**
Enter **Yes** if this location is the billing address.
**Is Shipping**
Enter **Yes** if this location is a shipping address.
**Next Call Date**
Enter the next call date for this location.
{% endtab %}
{% tab title="Contacts" icon="envelope" %}
#### Contact Fields
If you ticked **Contacts** in the **Fields** section in step 3, these fields relate to this.
**Contact ID**
The unique identifier of a supplier contact in Supply’d.
Leave blank for new contacts.
**Supplier Number**
The **Supplier Number** is the unique identifier of a supplier in Supply’d.
**Supplier Name**
Enter the trading name of the supplier.
**First Name**
Enter the first name of the contact you are adding.
**Last Name**
Enter the last name /surname of the contact you are adding.
**Role**
Add the role or department of the contact, eg. Sales Rep, Accounts etc.
**Is Default**
If this is the default contact for the supplier, enter **Yes**.
**Email**
Enter the contact's email address.
**Phone**
Enter a phone number for the contact.
**Mobile Area**
Add the country code for this contact's mobile number (eg. **61** for Australia).
**Mobile Number**
Add a mobile phone number for this contact.
**Notifications**
Specify the notifications this contact should receive, separating multiple types with commas if needed:
* Order Emails
* Order SMS
**Internal Notes**
Enter any relevant internal notes about this contact. These notes are for internal reference only and are not visible to the contact or supplier.
{% endtab %}
{% endtabs %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### **Save or Export**
Once you have completed filling out the spreadsheet, ensure that you save or export it as a CSV file, as this format is required for successful import into Supply’d.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Upload the File
After creating your import file, the next step is to upload it into Supply’d. To do this, return to the Import Supplier form.
On the **Suppliers** page, click on the 3 dots in the top right and select **Import**, then **Supplier Data**.
The **Import Suppliers** form will open.
**Upload CSV File**
Click on to select the CSV file from your device and upload it.
{% hint style="warning" %}
After selecting the file please ensure you wait for the file to successfully upload before clicking Import.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Select Options
Select the options to apply during the import.
**Update Existing Suppliers**
Select whether or not to update existing suppliers in Supply'd.
{% hint style="info" %}
This option will only appear if you already have suppliers in Supply'd.
{% endhint %}
* **Yes:** Select "Yes" if you want existing suppliers to be updated.
* **No:** Select this option if you want existing suppliers to be ignored.
{% hint style="success" %}
Selecting "**Yes**" is useful to bulk update suppliers in Supply'd.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Import the File
Once the file has successfully uploaded and you have selected your options, click to begin the import.
{% hint style="info" %}
Suppliers will be imported immediately into Supply'd. If you have a lot of suppliers, please be patient.
{% endhint %}
After the import completes, review the supplier details to ensure the information has been imported correctly.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 Once imported, suppliers can be managed as outlined in the [Managing Suppliers](/supplyd-erp/suppliers/managing-suppliers) document.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="success" %}
After adding your custom supplier, you may want to add or import their products.
Refer to the relevant documentation for guidance on how to do this:
* [Adding Products](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products) – Learn how to add products one at a time to a supplier.
* [Bulk Importing of Products](/supplyd-erp/products/bulk-importing-of-products) – Use a CSV file to import multiple products at once.
{% endhint %}
# Supplier Contacts Info
If you have a large number of supplier contacts to add, Supply’d allows you to save time by adding them in bulk using a spreadsheet.
Completing **Supplier Contacts** in bulk using a spreadsheet provides a quick and efficient way to add or update contact information for multiple suppliers. Using the spreadsheet template helps reduce manual data entry, maintain consistent supplier records, and save time when managing large numbers of suppliers.
{% hint style="success" %}
👉See the [Adding Suppliers in Bulk](/supplyd-erp/suppliers/bulk-importing-suppliers/adding-suppliers-in-bulk) document for details on downloading the spreadsheet and completing the import.
👉 See [Supplier Details](/supplyd-erp/suppliers/bulk-importing-suppliers/supplier-details) for details on completing the bulk import spreadsheet supplier data.
👉 See [Supplier Locations Info](/supplyd-erp/suppliers/bulk-importing-suppliers/supplier-locations-info) for details on completing the bulk import spreadsheet supplier locations.
👉 See the [Adding a Custom Supplier](/supplyd-erp/suppliers/adding-suppliers-and-supplier-groups/adding-a-custom-supplier) document for instructions on completing supplier information one supplier at a time.
{% endhint %}
This document explains how to complete the **Supplier Contacts** spreadsheet and prepare the information for bulk import into Supply’d.
***
### Completing the Supplier Contacts Template
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Select the Data
Following the instructions for [Adding Suppliers in Bulk](/supplyd-erp/suppliers/bulk-importing-suppliers/adding-suppliers-in-bulk):
1. In **Step 2**, select **Supplier Data** from the menu.
2. In **Step 3**, in the **Fields** section, select **Contacts**.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Complete the Template
Complete the template by opening it in a spreadsheet application, such as **Excel** or **Numbers**, and entering the required information. Follow the instructions provided for each section, using the downloaded sample data as a reference when entering your information.
{% hint style="warning" %}
* Follow the column headings carefully.
* Do not change column names.
* Leave **Contact ID** fields blank for new records.
* Delete any sample data before importing.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="success" %}
When updating supplier details, you can remove any columns from the CSV that you do not need to update. Keeping only the fields you want to change makes the import easier to manage and reduces the risk of unintentionally changing other supplier information.
For example, if you only want to update a supplier’s **Name** and **Email Address**, keep the **Supplier Number**, **Name**, and **Email Address** columns and remove the other fields. Any fields removed from the CSV will remain unchanged during the import.
**Important:** Keep the **Contact ID** and **Supplier Number** columns for every supplier contact you want to update. The **Contact ID** identifies the existing contact, while the **Supplier Number** identifies the supplier the contact belongs to, ensuring Supply’d updates the correct records when the CSV is imported.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="danger" %}
**Important:** The title row should remain in the document in order for the system to match the columns when imported. You should remove the sample data before importing otherwise the system will create custom suppliers with the sample data.
{% endhint %}
***
#### Contact Fields
**Contact ID**
Enter the unique identifier of the supplier contact in Supply’d. Leave this field blank when adding a new contact.
**Supplier Number**
Enter the **Supplier Number**, which is the unique identifier for the supplier in Supply’d.
**Supplier Name**
Enter the trading name of the supplier the contact belongs to.
**First Name**
Enter the first name of the supplier contact.
**Last Name**
Enter the last name/surname of the supplier contact.
**Role**
Enter the role or department of the supplier contact, such as **Sales Rep** or **Accounts**.
**Is Default**
If this is the default contact for the supplier, enter **Yes**.
**Email**
Enter the contact's email address.
**Phone**
Enter the phone number for the supplier contact.
**Mobile Area**
Enter the country code for the contact’s mobile number, such as **61** for Australia.
**Mobile Number**
Enter the mobile phone number for the supplier contact.
**Notifications**
Specify which notifications the contact should receive. If selecting multiple notification types, separate each one with a comma.
For example:
* **Order Emails**
* **Order SMS**
**Internal Notes**
Enter any relevant notes about the supplier contact. These notes are for internal reference only and are not visible to the contact or supplier.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 Once imported, supplier contacts can be managed as outlined in the [Managing Supplier Contacts](/supplyd-erp/suppliers/managing-suppliers/managing-supplier-contacts) document.
{% endhint %}
# Supplier Details
If you have a large number of suppliers to add, Supply’d allows you to save time by adding them in bulk using a spreadsheet.
Completing **Supplier Details/Data** in bulk using a spreadsheet provides a quick and efficient way to add or update information for multiple suppliers. Using the spreadsheet template helps reduce manual data entry, maintain consistent supplier records, and save time when managing large numbers of suppliers.
{% hint style="success" %}
👉See the [Adding Suppliers in Bulk](/supplyd-erp/suppliers/bulk-importing-suppliers/adding-suppliers-in-bulk) document for details on downloading the spreadsheet and completing the import.
👉 See [Supplier Contacts Info](/supplyd-erp/suppliers/bulk-importing-suppliers/supplier-contacts-info) for details on completing the bulk import spreadsheet supplier data.
👉 See [Supplier Locations Info](/supplyd-erp/suppliers/bulk-importing-suppliers/supplier-locations-info) for details on completing the bulk import spreadsheet supplier locations.
👉 See the [Adding a Custom Supplier](/supplyd-erp/suppliers/adding-suppliers-and-supplier-groups/adding-a-custom-supplier) document for instructions on completing supplier information one supplier at a time.
{% endhint %}
This document explains how to complete the **Supplier Data** spreadsheet and prepare the information for bulk import into Supply’d.
***
### Completing the Supplier Data Template
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Select the Data
Following the instructions for [Adding Suppliers in Bulk](/supplyd-erp/suppliers/bulk-importing-suppliers/adding-suppliers-in-bulk):
1. In **Step 2**, select **Supplier Data** from the menu.
2. In **Step 3**, in the **Fields** section, select **Supplier Data**.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Complete the Template
Complete the template by opening it in a spreadsheet application, such as **Excel** or **Numbers**, and entering the required information. Follow the instructions provided for each section, using the downloaded sample data as a reference when entering your information.
{% hint style="warning" %}
* Follow the column headings carefully.
* Do not change column names.
* Leave **Supplier Number** fields blank for new records.
* Delete any sample data before importing.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="success" %}
When updating supplier details, you can remove any columns from the CSV that you do not need to update. Keeping only the fields you want to change makes the import easier to manage and reduces the risk of unintentionally changing other supplier information.
For example, if you only want to update a supplier’s **Name** and **Email Address**, keep the **Supplier Number**, **Name**, and **Email Address** columns and remove the other fields. Any fields removed from the CSV will remain unchanged during the import.
**Important:** Keep the **Supplier Number** column for every supplier you want to update. The **Supplier Number** identifies the existing supplier that Supply’d should update when the CSV is imported.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="danger" %}
**Important:** The title row should remain in the document in order for the system to match the columns when imported. You should remove the sample data before importing otherwise the system will create custom suppliers with the sample data.
{% endhint %}
***
#### Supplier Data Fields
**Supplier Number**
The **Supplier Number** is the unique identifier of a supplier in Supply’d.
* **For existing suppliers:** Enter the supplier's number to update it.
* **For new suppliers:** Leave this tab blank so Supply’d can assign a new **Supplier Number** automatically.
This ensures Supply’d correctly matches updates to existing suppliers while preventing conflicts for new suppliers by letting the system generate a unique number.
**Supplier Name\* \[required field]**
Enter the trading name of the supplier you are adding.
**Supplier Website**
Add the supplier's website.
**Supplier Legal Name**
Enter the supplier’s legal name, ie. the name registered with the business registry.
**Supplier Business Number**
Enter the supplier's business number (eg. their ABN or NZBN).
**Currency**
Enter the currency used to purchase from this supplier.
**Minimum Order Spend**
If your supplier requires a minimum spend, enter the dollar amount in this field. Supply’d will check orders against this amount to make sure the requirement is met.
**Minimum Order Qty**
If your supplier requires a minimum order quantity, enter that number in this field. This ensures Supply’d will flag any orders that don’t meet the requirement.
**Account Number**
Enter an optional account number that you have with this supplier. This will show on purchase orders.
**Buyer's Rep**
Enter the name of a buyer's rep to assign to this supplier.
**Payment Terms Duration**
Enter the payment terms to apply to this suppliers invoices. Leave the payment term number blank to use the default term set in your supplier settings.
**Payment Terms Period**
Enter either **Days**, **Days EOM**, **Days EOW**, **Pre-paid**.
{% hint style="info" %}
* **Days:** Payment is due within a set number of days after the invoice date (eg. 7 days, 30 days).
* **Days EOM** (End of Month): Payment is due within a certain number of days after the end of the month in which the invoice was issued (eg. “30 Days EOM” means payment is due 30 days after the last day of that month.)
* **Days EOW** (End of Week): Payment is due within a set number of days after the end of the week in which the invoice was issued.
* **Pre-paid:** Payment is due before the goods are supplied, ie. the order must be paid for upfront.
{% endhint %}
**Notes**
Enter any notes about this supplier here. These are for internal reference only and will not be visible to the supplier.
**Alert**
Add an internal alert to show when creating an order for this supplier. This alert is not visible to suppliers.
**Custom - Test Field**
This is an example of a **Custom Field**. Any custom fields you have set up in [Supplier Settings](/supplyd-erp/settings/supplier-settings), will appear here.
{% hint style="info" %}
**Custom Fields** are user-defined fields that let you track additional information about a supplier that isn’t included in the default fields. You can name the field whatever you like and enter the data that’s relevant to your business.
👉 See the [Supplier Settings](https://help.supplyd.co/supplyd-erp/settings/supplier-settings) document for information on creating custom fields for suppliers.
{% endhint %}
**Groups**
Enter the name of any **Supplier Groups** you want to assign this supplier to, separating multiple groups with commas.
{% hint style="success" %}
**Supplier Groups** in Supply’d help you organise suppliers into categories, such as product type, location, or performance, making it easier to manage and find the right suppliers. Create a group, then assign suppliers to it when setting up or editing a supplier.
👉 See the [Adding Suppliers & Supplier Groups](/supplyd-erp/suppliers/adding-suppliers-and-supplier-groups#supplier-groups) section of [Adding Suppliers & Supplier Groups](/supplyd-erp/suppliers/adding-suppliers-and-supplier-groups) document for details on creating supplier groups.
{% endhint %}
**Invoice Inbox**
This field is automatically generated for each supplier to send their invoices, allowing them to be matched with received goods. It’s especially useful when using the **Expense** module. Simply share this email address with each supplier so they can email invoices, in PDF format, directly to your unique **Invoice Inbox**.
Leave this field blank for new suppliers.
{% hint style="success" %}
Double-check that all required fields are filled out correctly before uploading.
{% endhint %}
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
Once you've completed and saved your supplier data template, you’re ready to import it into Supply’d.
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 See [Adding Suppliers in Bulk](/supplyd-erp/suppliers/bulk-importing-suppliers/adding-suppliers-in-bulk) for details on importing your data.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 Once imported, suppliers can be managed as outlined in the [Managing Suppliers](/supplyd-erp/suppliers/managing-suppliers/managing-suppliers) document.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="success" %}
After adding your custom supplier, you may want to add or import their products.
Refer to the relevant documentation for guidance on how to do this:
* [Adding a Product](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products/adding-a-product) – Learn how to add products one at a time to a supplier.
* [Adding Products in Bulk](/supplyd-erp/products/bulk-importing-of-products/adding-products-in-bulk) – Use a CSV file to import multiple products at once.
{% endhint %}
# Supplier Locations Info
If you have a large number of supplier locations to add, Supply’d allows you to save time by adding them in bulk using a spreadsheet.
Completing **Supplier Locations** in bulk using a spreadsheet provides a quick and efficient way to add or update location information for multiple suppliers. Using the spreadsheet template helps reduce manual data entry, maintain consistent location details, and save time when managing a large number of supplier locations.
{% hint style="success" %}
👉See the [Adding Suppliers in Bulk](/supplyd-erp/suppliers/bulk-importing-suppliers/adding-suppliers-in-bulk) document for details on downloading the spreadsheet and completing the import.
👉 See [Supplier Details](/supplyd-erp/suppliers/bulk-importing-suppliers/supplier-details) for details on completing the bulk import spreadsheet supplier data.
👉 See [Supplier Contacts Info](/supplyd-erp/suppliers/bulk-importing-suppliers/supplier-contacts-info) for details on completing the bulk import spreadsheet supplier locations.
👉 See the [Adding a Custom Supplier](/supplyd-erp/suppliers/adding-suppliers-and-supplier-groups/adding-a-custom-supplier) document for instructions on completing supplier information one supplier at a time.
{% endhint %}
This document explains how to complete the **Supplier Locations** spreadsheet and prepare the information for bulk import into Supply’d.
***
### Completing the Supplier Locations Template
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Select the Data
Following the instructions for [Adding Suppliers in Bulk](/supplyd-erp/suppliers/bulk-importing-suppliers/adding-suppliers-in-bulk):
1. In **Step 2**, select **Supplier Data** from the menu.
2. In **Step 3**, in the **Fields** section, select **Locations**.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Complete the Template
Complete the template by opening it in a spreadsheet application, such as **Excel** or **Numbers**, and entering the required information. Follow the instructions provided for each section, using the downloaded sample data as a reference when entering your information.
{% hint style="warning" %}
* Follow the column headings carefully.
* Do not change column names.
* Leave **Location ID** fields blank for new records.
* Delete any sample data before importing.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="success" %}
When updating supplier location details, you can remove any columns from the CSV that you do not need to update. Keeping only the fields you want to change makes the import easier to manage and reduces the risk of unintentionally changing other location information.
For example, if you only want to update a supplier location’s **Name** and **Address**, keep the **Location ID**, **Supplier Number**, **Name**, and **Address** columns and remove the other fields. Any fields removed from the CSV will remain unchanged during the import.
**Important:** Keep the **Location ID** and **Supplier Number** columns for every supplier location you want to update. The **Location ID** identifies the existing location, while the **Supplier Number** identifies the supplier the location belongs to, ensuring Supply’d updates the correct records when the CSV is imported.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="danger" %}
**Important:** The title row should remain in the document in order for the system to match the columns when imported. You should remove the sample data before importing otherwise the system will create custom suppliers with the sample data.
{% endhint %}
***
#### Location Fields
**Supplier Number**
Enter the **Supplier Number**, which is the unique identifier for the supplier in Supply’d. This ensures the location is linked to the correct supplier.
**Supplier Name**
Enter the trading name of the supplier associated with the location.
**Location ID**
Enter the unique identifier for the supplier location in Supply’d. This is used to identify an existing location when updating location details.
Leave this field blank when adding a new location.
**Location Name**
Enter a name that clearly identifies the supplier location, such as **Head Office**, **Warehouse**, or **Melbourne Office**.
**Address**
Enter the street address for the supplier location.
**Suburb**
Enter the suburb for the supplier location.
**State**
Enter the state or territory for the supplier location.
**Postcode**
Enter the postcode for the supplier location.
**Country**
Enter the country where the supplier location is located.
**Email**
Enter the email address associated with the supplier location.
**Is Billing**
Enter **Yes** if this location should be used as the supplier’s billing address.
**Is Shipping**
Enter **Yes** if this location should be used as the supplier’s shipping address.
**Next Call Date**
Enter the next scheduled call date for this supplier location. This can be used to keep track of when the supplier at this location should next be contacted.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 Once imported, supplier locations can be managed as outlined in the [Managing Supplier Locations](/supplyd-erp/suppliers/managing-suppliers/managing-supplier-locations) document.
{% endhint %}
# Managing Suppliers
Supply’d lets you order from all suppliers in one place. Managing suppliers in Supply’d streamlines communication, offers real-time performance tracking, and centralised documentation.
At the heart of Supply’d is a powerful but intuitive ordering system that makes it easy to order from all of your suppliers in one place. With streamlined supplier management, you can easily maintain supplier details, track products, and manage purchasing with confidence.
This document will guide you on how to view and manage your suppliers, including:
* [#the-suppliers-page](#the-suppliers-page "mention")
* [#managing-a-supplier](#managing-a-supplier "mention")
* [#connecting-with-a-supplyd-supplier](#connecting-with-a-supplyd-supplier "mention")
* [#managing-supplier-requests](#managing-supplier-requests "mention")
* [#groups](#groups "mention")
***
## The Suppliers Page
Selecting **Suppliers** from the main menu will open the **Suppliers** page.
The **Suppliers** page is where you manage all the suppliers from. Here you’ll see a list of every supplier linked to your account, including both Supply’d-connected suppliers and any custom suppliers you’ve added manually.
{% hint style="success" %}
Supplier statuses will appear on the **Suppliers** list in various colours for easy identification of the supplier type:
- A supplier already using Supply’d and selling through the Supply’d Marketplace.
- Refers to a supplier not yet on Supply’d, and that you have manually added to your account.
- A supplier you’ve requested to connect with, but who has not yet approved your request.
{% endhint %}
From this page, you can:
* **Search and filter suppliers** to quickly find the one you need.
* **View supplier details**, such as contact information, ordering methods, and delivery preferences.
* **Add new suppliers**, either individually or by bulk import.
* **Edit supplier information** if details change.
* **Set up delivery schedules and ordering rules** to streamline your purchasing.
This page acts as your central hub for supplier management, ensuring that all supplier details are accurate and up to date.
👉 You can find the instructions on how to add custom suppliers in the [Adding Suppliers & Supplier Groups](/supplyd-erp/suppliers/adding-suppliers-and-supplier-groups) document.
***
### Supplier Page Tabs
You will see 4 tabs on the page:
**Suppliers Tab**
The **Suppliers** tab lists all suppliers associated with your account, including Supply’d-connected and manually added suppliers.
**Connect Tab**
The **Connect** tab lists all suppliers available to connect with on Supply’d. Only suppliers that have made their stores public will appear; invite-only stores will not be visible. Clicking on a supplier allows you to view all their information.
👉 See [#connecting-with-a-supplyd-supplier](#connecting-with-a-supplyd-supplier "mention") below for further details.
**Requests Tab**
The **Requests** tab lists any supplier connection requests. You can approve or decline suppliers you would like to trade with on Supply'd.
{% hint style="success" %}
The number of active requests you currently have will be indicated by the number in the red circle at the top right of the **Requests** tab.
{% endhint %}
👉 See [#managing-supplier-requests](#managing-supplier-requests "mention") below for more information.
**Promotions Tab**
The **Promotions** tab displays all promotions sent to you from your Supply'd suppliers. From this tab, you can view current and upcoming promotions, including the products included, promotional pricing, and promotion dates.
👉 See [#promotions](#promotions "mention") below.
**Groups**
The **Groups** tab shows the suppliers you’ve organised into groups. A **Supplier Group** in Supply’d lets you manage multiple suppliers together in one place.
👉 See [#groups](#groups "mention") below for more details.
***
### Additional Options
Clicking on the 3 dots in the top right of the **Suppliers** page will open a menu with additional options.
***
#### Smart Purchase
Opens the **Smart Purchase Order** form to use Supply'd Intelligence to automatically suggest the right quantities to order based on stock, sales, and production data.
{% hint style="success" %}
**Smart Purchase Orders** in Supply’d are an automated ordering tool designed to help you order the right products in the right quantities, faster and more efficiently. Instead of manually calculating what to order, Supply’d uses real-time data to suggest accurate order quantities for each product.
**How it works:**
* **Current Stock Levels:** Checks how much inventory you already have.
* **Past Sales Data:** Analyses your historical sales to predict future demand.
* **Upcoming Production Needs:** Considers your planned production to ensure you have enough stock.
**Benefits:**
* **Save Time:** Reduces manual calculations and order planning.
* **Reduce Over-Ordering:** Avoids excess stock that can tie up cash and storage.
* **Maintain Inventory Balance:** Helps ensure you have enough stock for production and sales without shortages.
**Example:**\
If you usually sell 100 chocolate bars a week and have 50 in stock, Smart Purchase Orders might suggest ordering 50 more to meet expected demand, adjusting automatically if production plans or past sales indicate changes.
{% endhint %}
👉 Refer to the [Smart Purchase Orders](/supplyd-erp/purchases/smart-purchase-orders) document for full instructions on using this feature.
***
#### Get Invite Link
The **Get Invite Link** option generates a unique invitation link that you can share with a supplier. When the supplier uses this link, they can connect with your business in Supply'd, allowing you to collaborate and exchange information within the platform.
Use this option when inviting a new supplier to connect to your Supply'd account.
***
#### Import
This allows you to make changes to supplier details in bulk and import them into Supply’d.
Here is an overview of how to import supplier details in Supply’d:
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Choose What to Import
Select the type of data you want to import from the menu:
* **Supplier Data** – core supplier details
* **Locations** – supplier addresses and operating hours
* **Contacts** – supplier contact people
* **Purchasing** – product purchasing information
The **Import Suppliers** form will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Download the Import Template
Click on **Download the template**. The **Export Suppliers** form will open.
{% hint style="success" %}
Each template is structured to match Supply’d’s required fields.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Select Your Options
Under **Data Source** select to either **Supply'd** to include your existing supplier data in the download.
In the **Fields** section tick the boxes if you would to include additional fields for other data types.
Click .
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Complete the Template
Open the template in a spreadsheet application such as Excel or Numbers and fill in the required information.
* Follow the column headings carefully
* Do not change column names
* Leave ID fields blank for new records
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Save as CSV
Once completed, export or save the file as a **CSV** (comma-separated values) file.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Upload the File
Return to Supply’d, upload the completed CSV file, click and follow the on-screen prompts to confirm the import.
Existing records will be updated if matching IDs are found.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Review the Results
After the import completes, review the supplier details to ensure the information has been imported correctly.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
👉 The import process is explained in more detail in the [Bulk Importing Suppliers](/supplyd-erp/suppliers/bulk-importing-suppliers) document.
***
#### Export
Selecting **Export** will open the **Export Suppliers** form allowing you to export your chosen data type to you computer as a spreadsheet.
***
## Managing a Supplier
Clicking on a supplier will open that supplier's profile page displaying all their details. Here, under the various tabs, you can view their contact details, payment terms, and delivery schedules, as well as see your order history with them. You’ll also find tabs for things like contacts, locations, and orders related to that supplier. From this page, you can easily place new orders, manage existing ones, and keep track of all interactions with that supplier in one place.
This page contains nine tabs, each providing information on different aspects of the supplier.
We will explain each in detail below, including instructions on how to manage the content of each tab. Simply click the relevant link or tab to view the corresponding details.
* [#about](#about "mention")
* [#contacts](#contacts "mention")
* [#locations](#locations "mention")
* [#call-log](#call-log "mention")
* [#favourites](#favourites "mention")
* [#products](#products "mention")
* [#orders](#orders "mention")
* [#standing](#standing "mention")
* [#promotions](#promotions "mention")
{% tabs %}
{% tab title="About" icon="square-info" %}
## About
The **About** tab provides an overview of the supplier, including their account number, payment terms, Invoice Inbox, supplier groups they belong to, and minimum spend. It also displays useful statistics, such as the number of orders you have placed with them, the total amount spent, and the date of your most recent order.
{% hint style="info" %}
**Invoice Inbox**
This field is automatically generated for each supplier to send their invoices, allowing them to be matched with received goods. It’s especially useful when using the **Expense** module. Simply share this email address with each supplier so they can email invoices, in PDF format, directly to your unique **Invoice Inbox**.
{% endhint %}
{% endtab %}
{% tab title="Contacts" icon="envelope" %}
## Contacts
The **Contacts** tab displays a list of contacts for the supplier.
Clicking on a contact will open that contact’s details.
***
### Adding a Contact
A contact can be added when initially adding a supplier. If you would like to add additional contacts, you can do so here.
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Click Add +
Click on **Add +** in the top right.
The **Add Contact** form will open.
Complete the sections as outlined below:
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Contact Details
**First Name**
Enter the first name of a representative/contact of the supplier.
**Last Name**
Enter the last name of a representative/contact of the supplier.
**Role/Department**
Add the role or department of the contact, eg. Sales Rep, Accounts etc.
**Email**
Enter the email address for the contact.
**Mobile**
Add a mobile number for the contact.
**Phone**
Add a phone number for this contact.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Settings
Additional setting for the contact.
**Notifications**
Select the notifications you would like this contact to receive.
**Notes**
Add any notes about this contact for internal reference only. This information is not visible to anyone else.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click Save
Click to add the contact.
The contact will appear on the supplier's contact list.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
### Editing a Contact
To edit a contact:
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Select **Suppliers** from the main menu.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Select the supplier whose contact you would like to edit.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Go to the **Contacts** tab and select the contact you would like to edit.
The contact's details will open.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click on the 3 dots in the top right and select **Edit Contact**.
The **Edit Contact** form will open.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Update the details following the guidelines for [#adding-a-contact](#adding-a-contact "mention") above.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click to apply the updates.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
### Removing a Contact
To remove a contact:
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Select **Suppliers** from the main menu.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Select the supplier whose contact you would like to remove.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Go to the **Contacts** tab and select the contact you would like to remove.
The contact's details will open.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click on the 3 dots in the top right and select **Remove Contact**.
You will be asked to confirm.
Click .
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
{% endtab %}
{% tab title="Locations" icon="earth-oceania" %}
## Locations
The **Locations** tab displays a list of locations for billing and shipping for the supplier.
Clicking on a location will open that location’s details.
***
### Adding a Location
A supplier’s billing address can be added when the supplier is first created. If a supplier has multiple locations, you can add them here.
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Click Add +
Click on **Add +** in the top right.
The **Add Location** form will open.
Complete the sections as outlined below:
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Location Details
**Location Name\* \[required field]**
Enter a name for this location.
**Location Type**
Select whether the address is for **Billing**, **Shipping**, or both **Billing & Shipping**.
{% hint style="warning" %}
You can only have one billing address.
{% endhint %}
**Address\* \[required field]**
Enter the supplier's street address.
**Suburb\* \[required field]**
Enter the supplier's suburb.
**State/Province\* \[required field]**
Select the supplier's state.
**Postcode\* \[required field]**
Enter the supplier's postcode.
**Country\* \[required field]**
Select the supplier's country.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Operating Hours
The **Operating Hours** section shows when the supplier is open each day. You can set start and finish times to help determine the best times to place orders or contact them.
Select the opening and closing hours for each day. If the business is closed on a certain day, select **Closed**.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Delivery Days
The **Delivery Days** section lets you specify which days the supplier delivers. This helps you plan orders and know when to expect stock.
**Delivery Days**
Tick the boxes for the days this supplier delivers.
**Order Cut-off**
Select an order cut-off time.
An order cut-off is the latest time an order must be placed before a delivery day. If you order after this time, that delivery day won’t be available.
Select **Not Set** if the supplier doesn’t have a cut-off.
**Delivery Delay**
Enter a delivery delay.
A delivery delay is extra time added between when an order is placed and when it is delivered. It’s used to give the supplier time to process the order before shipping.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Advanced
The **Advanced** section shows a map of the supplier’s exact location, helping you easily see where they are.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click Save
Click to add the location.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
### Editing a Location
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Select **Suppliers** from the main menu and select the supplier that you would like to edit the location for.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Go to the **Locations** tab and select the location you would like to edit.
The location's details will open.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click on the 3 dots in the top right and select **Edit Location**.
The **Edit Location** form will open.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Update any details as needed, following the guidelines outlined above for [#adding-a-location](#adding-a-location "mention").
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click to update the location details.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
### Removing a Location
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Select **Suppliers** from the main menu and select the supplier that you would like to remove the location for.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Go to the **Locations** tab and select the location you would like to remove.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click on the 3 dots in the top right and select **Remove Location**.
You will be asked to confirm.
Click .
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
{% endtab %}
{% tab title="Call Log" icon="phone-arrow-right" %}
## Call Log
The **Call Logs** tab is where you can record and review all communication with a supplier, such as phone calls or visits. It provides a central place to track interactions, ensuring you and your team have visibility over supplier communications.
Clicking on a call log will open the details for that log.
***
### Adding a Call Log
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Click Add +
Click the or **Add +** in the top right corner.
{% hint style="info" %}
The button only shows when there are no existing call logs. Use the **Add +** to log further calls.
{% endhint %}
The **Add Call Log** form will appear.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Complete the Form
**Supplier**
Automatically filled.
**Location**
Select the location of the call or visit.
**Call Date\* \[required field]**
Clicking on the field will cause a calendar to appear.
Select the month, year and day, and the time, then click on .
**Call Type\* \[required field]**
Select the type of call or visit - either **Visit** or **Call**.
**User**
Select the user or representative performing the call or visit.
**Next Call Date**
If a call or visit is scheduled, select the month, year, and day from the calendar.
**Notes**
Add any notes from the call or visit.
**Images**
Add any images relevant to the call or visit.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click Save
Click to add the call.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
### Editing a Call Log
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Select **Suppliers** from the main menu and select the supplier that you would like to edit the call log for.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Go to the **Call Log** tab and select the call you would like to edit.
The call log details will open.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click on the 3 dots in the top right and select **Edit Call Log**.
The **Edit Call Log** form will open.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Update any details as needed, following the guidelines outlined above for [#adding-a-call-log](#adding-a-call-log "mention").
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click to update the location details.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
### Removing a Call Log
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Select **Suppliers** from the main menu and select the supplier that you would like to remove the call log for.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Go to the **Locations** tab and select the call log you would like to remove.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click on the 3 dots in the top right and select **Remove Call Log**.
You will be asked to confirm.
Click .
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
{% endtab %}
{% tab title="Favourites" icon="circle-heart" %}
## Favourites
The **Favourites** tab lists all your favourite products from this supplier.
Products ordered from suppliers are automatically added to **Favourites**, making them easy to find and reorder.
Clicking on a product will open its page, displaying all the details about that product.
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 To manage these products, refer to the [Managing Products](/supplyd-erp/products/managing-products) document.
{% endhint %}
***
### Bulk Actions
Clicking the button on the **Favourites** page allows you to make changes singularly or in bulk.
Selecting one or more orders from the list and then clicking the button will open a menu with the options for those orders.
{% hint style="success" %}
Ticking the square beside the button will select all products on the list.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="info" %}
This button stays greyed out and inactive until at least one product is selected. After selecting products, the button turns green and becomes clickable.
{% endhint %}
**Bulk Edit**, **Export Products** & **Download**
👉 See the [Managing Products](/supplyd-erp/products/managing-products#bulk-actions) section of the [Managing Products](/supplyd-erp/products/managing-products) document for an explanation of these options.
**Remove**
* **From Favourites:** This will remove a product from your favourites list.
* **From Supplier:** This will remove the selected products from this supplier, while keeping the products in your system. This is useful if, for example, you switch to buying the product from another supplier.
* **Products:** This will remove the selected products from your **Products** list.
{% endtab %}
{% endtabs %}
{% tabs %}
{% tab title="Products" icon="box-open-full" %}
## Products
The **Products** tab lists all of a supplier’s products. For a custom supplier, this includes all the products you have manually added for them. For a Supply’d-connected supplier, it shows all products available for you to order from that supplier.
Clicking on a product will open its page, displaying all the details about that product.
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 These products can be managed as explained in the [Managing Products](/supplyd-erp/products/managing-products) document.
{% endhint %}
If the supplier is a custom supplier, you can add their products by clicking **Add +** in the top right and following the instructions in the [Adding Products](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products) document.
***
### Bulk Actions
Clicking the button on the **Products** page allows you to make changes singularly or in bulk.
Selecting one or more orders from the list and then clicking the button will open a menu with the options for those orders.
{% hint style="success" %}
Ticking the square beside the button will select all products on the list.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="info" %}
This button stays greyed out and inactive until at least one product is selected. After selecting products, the button turns green and becomes clickable.
{% endhint %}
**Bulk Edit** & **Print Shelf Tickets**
👉 See the [Managing Products](/supplyd-erp/products/managing-products#bulk-actions) section of the [Managing Products](/supplyd-erp/products/managing-products) document for an explanation of these options.
***
**Remove >**
* **From Supplier:** This will remove the selected products from this supplier, while keeping the products in your system. This is useful if, for example, you switch to buying the product from another supplier. You will be asked to confirm.\
\
* **Products:** This will remove the selected products from your **Products** list. You will be asked to confirm.
***
**Favourites >**
* **Add:** This will add the selected products to your [#favourites](#favourites "mention"). You will be asked to confirm.
* **Remove:** This will remove the selected products form your [#favourites](#favourites "mention"). You will be asked to confirm.
{% endtab %}
{% tab title="Orders" icon="box-magnifying-glass" %}
## Orders
This tab displays a list of all the orders you’ve placed with the supplier, including their statuses, providing a clear history of your transactions.
Clicking on an order will open it, displaying the full details.
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 Orders can be managed following the guidelines in the [Managing Purchase Orders](/supplyd-erp/purchases/managing-purchase-orders) document.
👉 You can place new orders from this page by clicking **Add +** in the top right and following the instructions in the [Placing a Purchase Order](/supplyd-erp/purchases/placing-a-purchase-order#creating-a-purchase-order-from-a-supplier) section of the [Placing a Purchase Order](/supplyd-erp/purchases/placing-a-purchase-order) document.
{% endhint %}
{% endtab %}
{% tab title="Standing" icon="arrows-spin" %}
## Standing
The **Standing** tab displays any **Standing Purchase Orders** you’ve created, which are regular repeat orders set up with this supplier. Here, you can create, view, and manage **Standing Purchase Orders**.
{% hint style="success" %}
A **Standing Order** is a recurring order that is automatically placed at regular intervals for a specific supplier. It ensures that products you regularly purchase are ordered consistently, without needing to create a new order each time.
{% endhint %}
Clicking on an order will open it, displaying the full details.
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 These orders can be managed following the guidelines in the [Standing Purchase Orders](/supplyd-erp/purchases/standing-purchase-orders#managing-standing-orders) section of the [Standing Purchase Orders](/supplyd-erp/purchases/standing-purchase-orders) document.
👉 You can create new standing orders from this page by clicking **Add +** in the top right and following the instructions in the [Standing Purchase Orders](/supplyd-erp/purchases/standing-purchase-orders#creating-standing-purchase-orders) section of the [Standing Purchase Orders](/supplyd-erp/purchases/standing-purchase-orders) document.
{% endhint %}
{% endtab %}
{% tab title="Promotions" icon="badge-percent" %}
### Promotions
The **Promotions** tab displays all promotions created by the selected supplier. From this tab, you can view the supplier's current and upcoming promotions, including the products included, promotional pricing, and promotion dates.
This provides a central location for managing and reviewing all promotions offered by the supplier.
Clicking on a promotion opens its details, where you can view the products included, promotional pricing, validity dates, and other relevant information.
Supplier promotions are displayed throughout Supply’d, including on the **Product** page, **Favourites** page, and when creating a **Purchase Order**. Promotional products are identified by a green promotion badge beneath the product name, which also displays the promotion dates so you can see how long the offer is available. Promotions are also displayed during **Expense Reconciliation**, allowing you to confirm that the supplier has honoured the promotional pricing.
***
#### Adding a Promotion
Promotions for suppliers are created and managed by the supplier and cannot be added or edited manually. For suppliers, you can create and manage your own promotions as required.
To add a Promotion for a supplier, click on or **Add +** in the top right.
{% hint style="success" %}
The button is only available when no promotions have been sent or created. Once a promotion exists, use **Add+** to create additional promotions.
{% endhint %}
The **Add Promotion** form will open.
👉 See the [Supplier Promotions](/supplyd-erp/products/promotions/supplier-promotions) document for more information and details for completing the form.
{% endtab %}
{% endtabs %}
***
### Additional Options for a Supplier
Clicking the 3 dots in the top right will open a menu with additional options and actions for this supplier.
{% hint style="info" %}
This menu is the same across all tabs.
{% endhint %}
***
#### Edit Supplier
Opens the **Edit Supplier** form allowing you to edit the supplier's details.
👉 See [#how-to-edit-a-supplier](#how-to-edit-a-supplier "mention") below.
***
#### Smart Purchase
Opens the **Smart Purchase Order** form where you can create a **Smart Purchase Order**.
👉 See the [Smart Purchase Orders](/supplyd-erp/purchases/smart-purchase-orders) document for details on how to complete this.
***
#### Actions > Set Next Call Date
Opens the **Set Next Call Date** form, allowing you to schedule the next call with this supplier and record the planned date in the system.
**Supplier**
Automatically entered.
**Location**
Select the location for the call.
**Next Call Date\* \[required field]**
Select the date from the calendar that appears when you click this field.
***
#### Actions > Merge Supplier
**Merge Supplier** allows you to consolidate and suppliers.
If, for instance, a supplier registers with Supply’d and creates a duplicate supplier record in your list, you can use the **Merge Supplier** option to combine your existing Custom supplier record with their Supply’d account.
Before merging, there are a few things to keep in mind:
* **Merging is safe to do at any time.** Even if the supplier has not yet loaded their full product catalogue, merging will not remove or overwrite your existing products, pricing, or sizes for that supplier. If the supplier has not loaded their products, the **Suppliers > Products** tab may appear empty after the merge. This is expected. Any custom-created products will remain available under **Favourites**.
* **Purchase Orders will continue to work as normal.** If the supplier has not yet linked their products, those items will appear as unassigned on the supplier’s end until they are matched.
* **Check your product barcodes to avoid duplicates.** Before adding the supplier’s catalogue to **Favourites**, make sure your products have the correct barcodes. Matching barcodes allow Supply’d to automatically link products. If the barcodes do not match, duplicate products may be created and require manual cleanup.
* **Match products in bulk.** If you have a large number of products to match, you can update them in bulk using a CSV spreadsheet, rather than matching products individually.\
👉 See [Bulk Importing of Products](/supplyd-erp/products/bulk-importing-of-products).
***
#### Actions > Get Invite Link
The **Supplier Invite Link** allows you to invite a supplier to join Supply’d and connect with your business. Share the link with the supplier so they can register for a free Supply’d HUB account and establish the connection.
***
#### Import > Products
Opens the **Import Products** form, allowing you to bulk import products from the supplier into Supply'd.
👉 See the [Bulk Importing of Products](/supplyd-erp/products/bulk-importing-of-products) document for full detail on how to do this.
***
#### Export
#### Export > Products
Opens the **Export Products** form, allowing you to download a list of the supplier's products and all their details.
Select the fields you would like to include information for and click .
***
#### Export > Call Logs
Opens the **Export Call Logs** form, allowing you to download a list of all calls made to and received from the supplier.
**Supplier**
Automatically entered.
**Locations**
Select **All** to download information across all your locations, or choose a specific location.
Click to download the information as a spreadsheet.
***
#### Remove Supplier
This will remove the supplier.
👉 See [#how-to-remove-a-supplier](#how-to-remove-a-supplier "mention") below.
***
### Editing a Supplier
To edit a supplier:
{% hint style="warning" %}
You can only edit suppliers you have added to your Supply'd account. These suppliers are marked with a status on the right-hand side, making them easy to identify.
{% endhint %}
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Select **Suppliers** from the main menu to open the **Suppliers** page. Select the supplier you would like to edit.
The supplier's profile page will open.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click on the 3 dots in the top right and select **Edit Supplier** from the menu.
The **Edit Supplier** form will open.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Update any details as needed, following the guidelines outlined above for [Adding Products](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products).
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click to update the supplier's details.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
### Removing a Supplier
To remove a supplier:
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Select **Suppliers** from the main menu and choose the supplier you would like to remove.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click on the 3 dots in the top right and select **Remove Supplier** from the menu.
You will be asked to confirm.
{% hint style="danger" %}
Confirm that you really do want to remove the supplier as the supplier will be removed along with all of their products.
{% endhint %}
Click .
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
## Connecting with a Supply'd Supplier
The **Connect** tab lists all suppliers available to connect with on Supply’d. Clicking on a supplier allows you to view all their information and request to connect with them.
To connect with a Supply'd supplier:
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Open the Suppliers Page
Select **Suppliers** from the main menu. The **Suppliers** page will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Go to the Connect Tab
Go to the **Connect** tab to see a list all suppliers available to connect with on Supply’d.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Select the Supplier
Select the supplier that you would like to connect with. The supplier's details will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click Connect
To send a connection request to the supplier, click .
You will be asked to confirm.
The supplier will review your request and either approve or reject it. If approved, the supplier will appear in your **Suppliers** list.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
## Managing Supplier Requests
The **Requests** tab lists any connection requests from suppliers. You can approve or decline suppliers you would like to trade with on Supply'd.
To review, accept or reject a request from a supplier:
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Open the Suppliers Page
Select **Suppliers** from the main menu. The **Suppliers** page will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Go to the Requests Tab
Go to the **Requests** tab to see a list all connection requests from suppliers.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Select the Supplier
Select the supplier that you would like to review. The supplier's details will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Approve or Reject the Request
If you would like to connect with this supplier, click . Click **Reject** if you don not want to connect with this supplier.
You will be asked to confirm.
Once approved the supplier will show on your **Suppliers** list.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
## Groups
While the **Suppliers** tab lists all your individual suppliers, the **Groups** tab shows the suppliers you’ve organised into groups. A **Supplier Group** in Supply’d lets you manage multiple suppliers together in one place. This is especially useful if you regularly order from the same set of suppliers, as it saves time and keeps your ordering process more organised.
For example, you could create a Supplier Group for *“Refrigerated Suppliers”* or *“Local Suppliers”*. When placing an order, instead of adding suppliers one-by-one, you can select the whole group and quickly order from everyone in it.
Clicking on a group will show all the suppliers in that group.
When you select a supplier from the group, their page will open and display all their details, just like on the main **Suppliers** page, as outlined in [#viewing-a-suppliers-details](#viewing-a-suppliers-details "mention") below.
***
### Adding a Supplier Group
Supplier Groups can be added by clicking an **Add +** in the top right and following the guidelines in the [Adding Suppliers & Supplier Groups](/supplyd-erp/suppliers/adding-suppliers-and-supplier-groups#supplier-groups) section of the [Adding Suppliers & Supplier Groups](/supplyd-erp/suppliers/adding-suppliers-and-supplier-groups) document.
***
### Editing a Supplier Group
To edit a **Supplier Group:**
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Select **Suppliers** from the main menu to open the **Suppliers** page.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Go to the **Groups** tab and select the group you would like to edit.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click on the 3 dots in the top right. Select **Edit Group**.
The **Edit Supplier Group** form will appear where you can edit the group name.
Click to apply the change.
{% hint style="success" %}
Group members can be edited at an individual supplier level.
👉 See [#how-to-edit-a-supplier](#how-to-edit-a-supplier "mention") above for more information.
{% endhint %}
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
## How to Remove a Supplier Group
To remove a **Supplier Group:**
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Select **Suppliers** from the main menu to open the **Suppliers** page.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Go to the **Groups** tab and select the group you would like to remove.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click on the 3 dots in the top right. Select **Remove Group**.
You will be asked to confirm.
Click .
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
## Filtering & Searching the Suppliers List
The 3 lines beside the 3 dots in the top right corner on the **Suppliers** page allows you to filter the **Suppliers** list, while the magnifying glass lets you search for specific suppliers.
Clicking the three lines opens the **Filter Suppliers** form, where you can access all available filtering options.
**Company Name**
Filter by the supplier’s name.
**Group**
Choose a supplier group to only show suppliers that belong to that group.
**Type**
Filter suppliers by their type:
* **Custom**: Only shows suppliers you’ve manually added.
* **System**: Shows suppliers already on Supply’d.
**Buyers Rep**
Select the buyer’s representative you would like to filter by.
**Next Call Date Range**
Clicking on this field will open a calendar for you to select a date range to filter by.
Click to set the range.
**State**
Select a state to filter suppliers based on their location.
**Suburb**
Select a suburb to filter suppliers by.
**Postcode**
Select a postcode to filter suppliers by.
**Supplier Status**
Select a supplier status - either **Active** or **Removed** - to filter by.
This allows you to view and re-activate removed suppliers.
Click to apply your selections and filter the **Suppliers** list.
# Managing Suppliers
Supply’d lets you order from all suppliers in one place. Managing suppliers in Supply’d streamlines communication, offers real-time performance tracking, and centralised documentation.
At the heart of Supply’d is a powerful but intuitive ordering system that makes it easy to order from all of your suppliers in one place. With streamlined supplier management, you can easily maintain supplier details, track products, and manage purchasing with confidence.
This document will guide you on how to view and manage your suppliers, including:
* [#the-suppliers-page](#the-suppliers-page "mention")
* [#managing-a-supplier](#managing-a-supplier "mention")
* [#connecting-with-a-supplyd-supplier](#connecting-with-a-supplyd-supplier "mention")
* [#managing-supplier-requests](#managing-supplier-requests "mention")
* [#groups](#groups "mention")
***
## The Suppliers Page
Selecting **Suppliers** from the main menu will open the **Suppliers** page.
The **Suppliers** page is where you manage all the suppliers from. Here you’ll see a list of every supplier linked to your account, including both Supply’d-connected suppliers and any custom suppliers you’ve added manually.
{% hint style="success" %}
Supplier statuses will appear on the **Suppliers** list in various colours for easy identification of the supplier type:
- A supplier already using Supply’d and selling through the Supply’d Marketplace.
- Refers to a supplier not yet on Supply’d, and that you have manually added to your account.
- A supplier you’ve requested to connect with, but who has not yet approved your request.
{% endhint %}
From this page, you can:
* **Search and filter suppliers** to quickly find the one you need.
* **View supplier details**, such as contact information, ordering methods, and delivery preferences.
* **Add new suppliers**, either individually or by bulk import.
* **Edit supplier information** if details change.
* **Set up delivery schedules and ordering rules** to streamline your purchasing.
This page acts as your central hub for supplier management, ensuring that all supplier details are accurate and up to date.
👉 You can find the instructions on how to add custom suppliers in the [Adding Suppliers & Supplier Groups](/supplyd-erp/suppliers/adding-suppliers-and-supplier-groups) document.
***
### Supplier Page Tabs
You will see 4 tabs on the page:
**Suppliers Tab**
The **Suppliers** tab lists all suppliers associated with your account, including Supply’d-connected and manually added suppliers.
**Connect Tab**
The **Connect** tab lists all suppliers available to connect with on Supply’d. Only suppliers that have made their stores public will appear; invite-only stores will not be visible. Clicking on a supplier allows you to view all their information.
👉 See [#connecting-with-a-supplyd-supplier](#connecting-with-a-supplyd-supplier "mention") below for further details.
**Requests Tab**
The **Requests** tab lists any supplier connection requests. You can approve or decline suppliers you would like to trade with on Supply'd.
{% hint style="success" %}
The number of active requests you currently have will be indicated by the number in the red circle at the top right of the **Requests** tab.
{% endhint %}
👉 See [#managing-supplier-requests](#managing-supplier-requests "mention") below for more information.
**Promotions Tab**
The **Promotions** tab displays all promotions sent to you from your Supply'd suppliers. From this tab, you can view current and upcoming promotions, including the products included, promotional pricing, and promotion dates.
👉 See [#promotions](#promotions "mention") below.
**Groups**
The **Groups** tab shows the suppliers you’ve organised into groups. A **Supplier Group** in Supply’d lets you manage multiple suppliers together in one place.
👉 See [#groups](#groups "mention") below for more details.
***
### Additional Options
Clicking on the 3 dots in the top right of the **Suppliers** page will open a menu with additional options.
***
#### Smart Purchase
Opens the **Smart Purchase Order** form to use Supply'd Intelligence to automatically suggest the right quantities to order based on stock, sales, and production data.
{% hint style="success" %}
**Smart Purchase Orders** in Supply’d are an automated ordering tool designed to help you order the right products in the right quantities, faster and more efficiently. Instead of manually calculating what to order, Supply’d uses real-time data to suggest accurate order quantities for each product.
**How it works:**
* **Current Stock Levels:** Checks how much inventory you already have.
* **Past Sales Data:** Analyses your historical sales to predict future demand.
* **Upcoming Production Needs:** Considers your planned production to ensure you have enough stock.
**Benefits:**
* **Save Time:** Reduces manual calculations and order planning.
* **Reduce Over-Ordering:** Avoids excess stock that can tie up cash and storage.
* **Maintain Inventory Balance:** Helps ensure you have enough stock for production and sales without shortages.
**Example:**\
If you usually sell 100 chocolate bars a week and have 50 in stock, Smart Purchase Orders might suggest ordering 50 more to meet expected demand, adjusting automatically if production plans or past sales indicate changes.
{% endhint %}
👉 Refer to the [Smart Purchase Orders](/supplyd-erp/purchases/smart-purchase-orders) document for full instructions on using this feature.
***
#### Get Invite Link
The **Get Invite Link** option generates a unique invitation link that you can share with a supplier. When the supplier uses this link, they can connect with your business in Supply'd, allowing you to collaborate and exchange information within the platform.
Use this option when inviting a new supplier to connect to your Supply'd account.
***
#### Import
This allows you to make changes to supplier details in bulk and import them into Supply’d.
Here is an overview of how to import supplier details in Supply’d:
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Choose What to Import
Select the type of data you want to import from the menu:
* **Supplier Data** – core supplier details
* **Locations** – supplier addresses and operating hours
* **Contacts** – supplier contact people
* **Purchasing** – product purchasing information
The **Import Suppliers** form will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Download the Import Template
Click on **Download the template**. The **Export Suppliers** form will open.
{% hint style="success" %}
Each template is structured to match Supply’d’s required fields.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Select Your Options
Under **Data Source** select to either **Supply'd** to include your existing supplier data in the download.
In the **Fields** section tick the boxes if you would to include additional fields for other data types.
Click .
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Complete the Template
Open the template in a spreadsheet application such as Excel or Numbers and fill in the required information.
* Follow the column headings carefully
* Do not change column names
* Leave ID fields blank for new records
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Save as CSV
Once completed, export or save the file as a **CSV** (comma-separated values) file.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Upload the File
Return to Supply’d, upload the completed CSV file, click and follow the on-screen prompts to confirm the import.
Existing records will be updated if matching IDs are found.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Review the Results
After the import completes, review the supplier details to ensure the information has been imported correctly.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
👉 The import process is explained in more detail in the [Bulk Importing Suppliers](/supplyd-erp/suppliers/bulk-importing-suppliers) document.
***
#### Export
Selecting **Export** will open the **Export Suppliers** form allowing you to export your chosen data type to you computer as a spreadsheet.
***
## Managing a Supplier
Clicking on a supplier will open that supplier's profile page displaying all their details. Here, under the various tabs, you can view their contact details, payment terms, and delivery schedules, as well as see your order history with them. You’ll also find tabs for things like contacts, locations, and orders related to that supplier. From this page, you can easily place new orders, manage existing ones, and keep track of all interactions with that supplier in one place.
This page contains nine tabs, each providing information on different aspects of the supplier.
We will explain each in detail below, including instructions on how to manage the content of each tab. Simply click the relevant link or tab to view the corresponding details.
* [#about](#about "mention")
* [#contacts](#contacts "mention")
* [#locations](#locations "mention")
* [#call-log](#call-log "mention")
* [#favourites](#favourites "mention")
* [#products](#products "mention")
* [#orders](#orders "mention")
* [#standing](#standing "mention")
* [#promotions](#promotions "mention")
{% tabs %}
{% tab title="About" icon="square-info" %}
## About
The **About** tab provides an overview of the supplier, including their account number, payment terms, Invoice Inbox, supplier groups they belong to, and minimum spend. It also displays useful statistics, such as the number of orders you have placed with them, the total amount spent, and the date of your most recent order.
{% hint style="info" %}
**Invoice Inbox**
This field is automatically generated for each supplier to send their invoices, allowing them to be matched with received goods. It’s especially useful when using the **Expense** module. Simply share this email address with each supplier so they can email invoices, in PDF format, directly to your unique **Invoice Inbox**.
{% endhint %}
{% endtab %}
{% tab title="Contacts" icon="envelope" %}
## Contacts
The **Contacts** tab displays a list of contacts for the supplier.
Clicking on a contact will open that contact’s details.
***
### Adding a Contact
A contact can be added when initially adding a supplier. If you would like to add additional contacts, you can do so here.
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Click Add +
Click on **Add +** in the top right.
The **Add Contact** form will open.
Complete the sections as outlined below:
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Contact Details
**First Name**
Enter the first name of a representative/contact of the supplier.
**Last Name**
Enter the last name of a representative/contact of the supplier.
**Role/Department**
Add the role or department of the contact, eg. Sales Rep, Accounts etc.
**Email**
Enter the email address for the contact.
**Mobile**
Add a mobile number for the contact.
**Phone**
Add a phone number for this contact.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Settings
Additional setting for the contact.
**Notifications**
Select the notifications you would like this contact to receive.
**Notes**
Add any notes about this contact for internal reference only. This information is not visible to anyone else.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click Save
Click to add the contact.
The contact will appear on the supplier's contact list.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
### Editing a Contact
To edit a contact:
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Select **Suppliers** from the main menu.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Select the supplier whose contact you would like to edit.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Go to the **Contacts** tab and select the contact you would like to edit.
The contact's details will open.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click on the 3 dots in the top right and select **Edit Contact**.
The **Edit Contact** form will open.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Update the details following the guidelines for [#adding-a-contact](#adding-a-contact "mention") above.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click to apply the updates.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
### Removing a Contact
To remove a contact:
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Select **Suppliers** from the main menu.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Select the supplier whose contact you would like to remove.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Go to the **Contacts** tab and select the contact you would like to remove.
The contact's details will open.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click on the 3 dots in the top right and select **Remove Contact**.
You will be asked to confirm.
Click .
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
{% endtab %}
{% tab title="Locations" icon="earth-oceania" %}
## Locations
The **Locations** tab displays a list of locations for billing and shipping for the supplier.
Clicking on a location will open that location’s details.
***
### Adding a Location
A supplier’s billing address can be added when the supplier is first created. If a supplier has multiple locations, you can add them here.
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Click Add +
Click on **Add +** in the top right.
The **Add Location** form will open.
Complete the sections as outlined below:
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Location Details
**Location Name\* \[required field]**
Enter a name for this location.
**Location Type**
Select whether the address is for **Billing**, **Shipping**, or both **Billing & Shipping**.
{% hint style="warning" %}
You can only have one billing address.
{% endhint %}
**Address\* \[required field]**
Enter the supplier's street address.
**Suburb\* \[required field]**
Enter the supplier's suburb.
**State/Province\* \[required field]**
Select the supplier's state.
**Postcode\* \[required field]**
Enter the supplier's postcode.
**Country\* \[required field]**
Select the supplier's country.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Operating Hours
The **Operating Hours** section shows when the supplier is open each day. You can set start and finish times to help determine the best times to place orders or contact them.
Select the opening and closing hours for each day. If the business is closed on a certain day, select **Closed**.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Delivery Days
The **Delivery Days** section lets you specify which days the supplier delivers. This helps you plan orders and know when to expect stock.
**Delivery Days**
Tick the boxes for the days this supplier delivers.
**Order Cut-off**
Select an order cut-off time.
An order cut-off is the latest time an order must be placed before a delivery day. If you order after this time, that delivery day won’t be available.
Select **Not Set** if the supplier doesn’t have a cut-off.
**Delivery Delay**
Enter a delivery delay.
A delivery delay is extra time added between when an order is placed and when it is delivered. It’s used to give the supplier time to process the order before shipping.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Advanced
The **Advanced** section shows a map of the supplier’s exact location, helping you easily see where they are.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click Save
Click to add the location.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
### Editing a Location
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Select **Suppliers** from the main menu and select the supplier that you would like to edit the location for.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Go to the **Locations** tab and select the location you would like to edit.
The location's details will open.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click on the 3 dots in the top right and select **Edit Location**.
The **Edit Location** form will open.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Update any details as needed, following the guidelines outlined above for [#adding-a-location](#adding-a-location "mention").
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click to update the location details.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
### Removing a Location
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Select **Suppliers** from the main menu and select the supplier that you would like to remove the location for.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Go to the **Locations** tab and select the location you would like to remove.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click on the 3 dots in the top right and select **Remove Location**.
You will be asked to confirm.
Click .
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
{% endtab %}
{% tab title="Call Log" icon="phone-arrow-right" %}
## Call Log
The **Call Logs** tab is where you can record and review all communication with a supplier, such as phone calls or visits. It provides a central place to track interactions, ensuring you and your team have visibility over supplier communications.
Clicking on a call log will open the details for that log.
***
### Adding a Call Log
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Click Add +
Click the or **Add +** in the top right corner.
{% hint style="info" %}
The button only shows when there are no existing call logs. Use the **Add +** to log further calls.
{% endhint %}
The **Add Call Log** form will appear.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Complete the Form
**Supplier**
Automatically filled.
**Location**
Select the location of the call or visit.
**Call Date\* \[required field]**
Clicking on the field will cause a calendar to appear.
Select the month, year and day, and the time, then click on .
**Call Type\* \[required field]**
Select the type of call or visit - either **Visit** or **Call**.
**User**
Select the user or representative performing the call or visit.
**Next Call Date**
If a call or visit is scheduled, select the month, year, and day from the calendar.
**Notes**
Add any notes from the call or visit.
**Images**
Add any images relevant to the call or visit.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click Save
Click to add the call.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
### Editing a Call Log
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Select **Suppliers** from the main menu and select the supplier that you would like to edit the call log for.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Go to the **Call Log** tab and select the call you would like to edit.
The call log details will open.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click on the 3 dots in the top right and select **Edit Call Log**.
The **Edit Call Log** form will open.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Update any details as needed, following the guidelines outlined above for [#adding-a-call-log](#adding-a-call-log "mention").
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click to update the location details.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
### Removing a Call Log
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Select **Suppliers** from the main menu and select the supplier that you would like to remove the call log for.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Go to the **Locations** tab and select the call log you would like to remove.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click on the 3 dots in the top right and select **Remove Call Log**.
You will be asked to confirm.
Click .
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
{% endtab %}
{% tab title="Favourites" icon="circle-heart" %}
## Favourites
The **Favourites** tab lists all your favourite products from this supplier.
Products ordered from suppliers are automatically added to **Favourites**, making them easy to find and reorder.
Clicking on a product will open its page, displaying all the details about that product.
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 To manage these products, refer to the [Managing Products](/supplyd-erp/products/managing-products) document.
{% endhint %}
***
### Bulk Actions
Clicking the button on the **Favourites** page allows you to make changes singularly or in bulk.
Selecting one or more orders from the list and then clicking the button will open a menu with the options for those orders.
{% hint style="success" %}
Ticking the square beside the button will select all products on the list.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="info" %}
This button stays greyed out and inactive until at least one product is selected. After selecting products, the button turns green and becomes clickable.
{% endhint %}
**Bulk Edit**, **Export Products** & **Download**
👉 See the [Managing Products](/supplyd-erp/products/managing-products#bulk-actions) section of the [Managing Products](/supplyd-erp/products/managing-products) document for an explanation of these options.
**Remove**
* **From Favourites:** This will remove a product from your favourites list.
* **From Supplier:** This will remove the selected products from this supplier, while keeping the products in your system. This is useful if, for example, you switch to buying the product from another supplier.
* **Products:** This will remove the selected products from your **Products** list.
{% endtab %}
{% endtabs %}
{% tabs %}
{% tab title="Products" icon="box-open-full" %}
## Products
The **Products** tab lists all of a supplier’s products. For a custom supplier, this includes all the products you have manually added for them. For a Supply’d-connected supplier, it shows all products available for you to order from that supplier.
Clicking on a product will open its page, displaying all the details about that product.
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 These products can be managed as explained in the [Managing Products](/supplyd-erp/products/managing-products) document.
{% endhint %}
If the supplier is a custom supplier, you can add their products by clicking **Add +** in the top right and following the instructions in the [Adding Products](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products) document.
***
### Bulk Actions
Clicking the button on the **Products** page allows you to make changes singularly or in bulk.
Selecting one or more orders from the list and then clicking the button will open a menu with the options for those orders.
{% hint style="success" %}
Ticking the square beside the button will select all products on the list.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="info" %}
This button stays greyed out and inactive until at least one product is selected. After selecting products, the button turns green and becomes clickable.
{% endhint %}
**Bulk Edit** & **Print Shelf Tickets**
👉 See the [Managing Products](/supplyd-erp/products/managing-products#bulk-actions) section of the [Managing Products](/supplyd-erp/products/managing-products) document for an explanation of these options.
***
**Remove >**
* **From Supplier:** This will remove the selected products from this supplier, while keeping the products in your system. This is useful if, for example, you switch to buying the product from another supplier. You will be asked to confirm.\
\
* **Products:** This will remove the selected products from your **Products** list. You will be asked to confirm.
***
**Favourites >**
* **Add:** This will add the selected products to your [#favourites](#favourites "mention"). You will be asked to confirm.
* **Remove:** This will remove the selected products form your [#favourites](#favourites "mention"). You will be asked to confirm.
{% endtab %}
{% tab title="Orders" icon="box-magnifying-glass" %}
## Orders
This tab displays a list of all the orders you’ve placed with the supplier, including their statuses, providing a clear history of your transactions.
Clicking on an order will open it, displaying the full details.
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 Orders can be managed following the guidelines in the [Managing Purchase Orders](/supplyd-erp/purchases/managing-purchase-orders) document.
👉 You can place new orders from this page by clicking **Add +** in the top right and following the instructions in the [Placing a Purchase Order](/supplyd-erp/purchases/placing-a-purchase-order#creating-a-purchase-order-from-a-supplier) section of the [Placing a Purchase Order](/supplyd-erp/purchases/placing-a-purchase-order) document.
{% endhint %}
{% endtab %}
{% tab title="Standing" icon="arrows-spin" %}
## Standing
The **Standing** tab displays any **Standing Purchase Orders** you’ve created, which are regular repeat orders set up with this supplier. Here, you can create, view, and manage **Standing Purchase Orders**.
{% hint style="success" %}
A **Standing Order** is a recurring order that is automatically placed at regular intervals for a specific supplier. It ensures that products you regularly purchase are ordered consistently, without needing to create a new order each time.
{% endhint %}
Clicking on an order will open it, displaying the full details.
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 These orders can be managed following the guidelines in the [Standing Purchase Orders](/supplyd-erp/purchases/standing-purchase-orders#managing-standing-orders) section of the [Standing Purchase Orders](/supplyd-erp/purchases/standing-purchase-orders) document.
👉 You can create new standing orders from this page by clicking **Add +** in the top right and following the instructions in the [Standing Purchase Orders](/supplyd-erp/purchases/standing-purchase-orders#creating-standing-purchase-orders) section of the [Standing Purchase Orders](/supplyd-erp/purchases/standing-purchase-orders) document.
{% endhint %}
{% endtab %}
{% tab title="Promotions" icon="badge-percent" %}
### Promotions
The **Promotions** tab displays all promotions created by the selected supplier. From this tab, you can view the supplier's current and upcoming promotions, including the products included, promotional pricing, and promotion dates.
This provides a central location for managing and reviewing all promotions offered by the supplier.
Clicking on a promotion opens its details, where you can view the products included, promotional pricing, validity dates, and other relevant information.
Supplier promotions are displayed throughout Supply’d, including on the **Product** page, **Favourites** page, and when creating a **Purchase Order**. Promotional products are identified by a green promotion badge beneath the product name, which also displays the promotion dates so you can see how long the offer is available. Promotions are also displayed during **Expense Reconciliation**, allowing you to confirm that the supplier has honoured the promotional pricing.
***
#### Adding a Promotion
Promotions for suppliers are created and managed by the supplier and cannot be added or edited manually. For suppliers, you can create and manage your own promotions as required.
To add a Promotion for a supplier, click on or **Add +** in the top right.
{% hint style="success" %}
The button is only available when no promotions have been sent or created. Once a promotion exists, use **Add+** to create additional promotions.
{% endhint %}
The **Add Promotion** form will open.
👉 See the [Supplier Promotions](/supplyd-erp/products/promotions/supplier-promotions) document for more information and details for completing the form.
{% endtab %}
{% endtabs %}
***
### Additional Options for a Supplier
Clicking the 3 dots in the top right will open a menu with additional options and actions for this supplier.
{% hint style="info" %}
This menu is the same across all tabs.
{% endhint %}
***
#### Edit Supplier
Opens the **Edit Supplier** form allowing you to edit the supplier's details.
👉 See [#how-to-edit-a-supplier](#how-to-edit-a-supplier "mention") below.
***
#### Smart Purchase
Opens the **Smart Purchase Order** form where you can create a **Smart Purchase Order**.
👉 See the [Smart Purchase Orders](/supplyd-erp/purchases/smart-purchase-orders) document for details on how to complete this.
***
#### Actions > Set Next Call Date
Opens the **Set Next Call Date** form, allowing you to schedule the next call with this supplier and record the planned date in the system.
**Supplier**
Automatically entered.
**Location**
Select the location for the call.
**Next Call Date\* \[required field]**
Select the date from the calendar that appears when you click this field.
***
#### Actions > Merge Supplier
**Merge Supplier** allows you to consolidate and suppliers.
If, for instance, a supplier registers with Supply’d and creates a duplicate supplier record in your list, you can use the **Merge Supplier** option to combine your existing Custom supplier record with their Supply’d account.
Before merging, there are a few things to keep in mind:
* **Merging is safe to do at any time.** Even if the supplier has not yet loaded their full product catalogue, merging will not remove or overwrite your existing products, pricing, or sizes for that supplier. If the supplier has not loaded their products, the **Suppliers > Products** tab may appear empty after the merge. This is expected. Any custom-created products will remain available under **Favourites**.
* **Purchase Orders will continue to work as normal.** If the supplier has not yet linked their products, those items will appear as unassigned on the supplier’s end until they are matched.
* **Check your product barcodes to avoid duplicates.** Before adding the supplier’s catalogue to **Favourites**, make sure your products have the correct barcodes. Matching barcodes allow Supply’d to automatically link products. If the barcodes do not match, duplicate products may be created and require manual cleanup.
* **Match products in bulk.** If you have a large number of products to match, you can update them in bulk using a CSV spreadsheet, rather than matching products individually.\
👉 See [Bulk Importing of Products](/supplyd-erp/products/bulk-importing-of-products).
***
#### Actions > Get Invite Link
The **Supplier Invite Link** allows you to invite a supplier to join Supply’d and connect with your business. Share the link with the supplier so they can register for a free Supply’d HUB account and establish the connection.
***
#### Import > Products
Opens the **Import Products** form, allowing you to bulk import products from the supplier into Supply'd.
👉 See the [Bulk Importing of Products](/supplyd-erp/products/bulk-importing-of-products) document for full detail on how to do this.
***
#### Export
#### Export > Products
Opens the **Export Products** form, allowing you to download a list of the supplier's products and all their details.
Select the fields you would like to include information for and click .
***
#### Export > Call Logs
Opens the **Export Call Logs** form, allowing you to download a list of all calls made to and received from the supplier.
**Supplier**
Automatically entered.
**Locations**
Select **All** to download information across all your locations, or choose a specific location.
Click to download the information as a spreadsheet.
***
#### Remove Supplier
This will remove the supplier.
👉 See [#how-to-remove-a-supplier](#how-to-remove-a-supplier "mention") below.
***
### Editing a Supplier
To edit a supplier:
{% hint style="warning" %}
You can only edit suppliers you have added to your Supply'd account. These suppliers are marked with a status on the right-hand side, making them easy to identify.
{% endhint %}
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Select **Suppliers** from the main menu to open the **Suppliers** page. Select the supplier you would like to edit.
The supplier's profile page will open.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click on the 3 dots in the top right and select **Edit Supplier** from the menu.
The **Edit Supplier** form will open.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Update any details as needed, following the guidelines outlined above for [Adding Products](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products).
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click to update the supplier's details.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
### Removing a Supplier
To remove a supplier:
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Select **Suppliers** from the main menu and choose the supplier you would like to remove.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click on the 3 dots in the top right and select **Remove Supplier** from the menu.
You will be asked to confirm.
{% hint style="danger" %}
Confirm that you really do want to remove the supplier as the supplier will be removed along with all of their products.
{% endhint %}
Click .
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
## Connecting with a Supply'd Supplier
The **Connect** tab lists all suppliers available to connect with on Supply’d. Clicking on a supplier allows you to view all their information and request to connect with them.
To connect with a Supply'd supplier:
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Open the Suppliers Page
Select **Suppliers** from the main menu. The **Suppliers** page will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Go to the Connect Tab
Go to the **Connect** tab to see a list all suppliers available to connect with on Supply’d.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Select the Supplier
Select the supplier that you would like to connect with. The supplier's details will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click Connect
To send a connection request to the supplier, click .
You will be asked to confirm.
The supplier will review your request and either approve or reject it. If approved, the supplier will appear in your **Suppliers** list.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
## Managing Supplier Requests
The **Requests** tab lists any connection requests from suppliers. You can approve or decline suppliers you would like to trade with on Supply'd.
To review, accept or reject a request from a supplier:
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Open the Suppliers Page
Select **Suppliers** from the main menu. The **Suppliers** page will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Go to the Requests Tab
Go to the **Requests** tab to see a list all connection requests from suppliers.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Select the Supplier
Select the supplier that you would like to review. The supplier's details will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Approve or Reject the Request
If you would like to connect with this supplier, click . Click **Reject** if you don not want to connect with this supplier.
You will be asked to confirm.
Once approved the supplier will show on your **Suppliers** list.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
## Groups
While the **Suppliers** tab lists all your individual suppliers, the **Groups** tab shows the suppliers you’ve organised into groups. A **Supplier Group** in Supply’d lets you manage multiple suppliers together in one place. This is especially useful if you regularly order from the same set of suppliers, as it saves time and keeps your ordering process more organised.
For example, you could create a Supplier Group for *“Refrigerated Suppliers”* or *“Local Suppliers”*. When placing an order, instead of adding suppliers one-by-one, you can select the whole group and quickly order from everyone in it.
Clicking on a group will show all the suppliers in that group.
When you select a supplier from the group, their page will open and display all their details, just like on the main **Suppliers** page, as outlined in [#viewing-a-suppliers-details](#viewing-a-suppliers-details "mention") below.
***
### Adding a Supplier Group
Supplier Groups can be added by clicking an **Add +** in the top right and following the guidelines in the [Adding Suppliers & Supplier Groups](/supplyd-erp/suppliers/adding-suppliers-and-supplier-groups#supplier-groups) section of the [Adding Suppliers & Supplier Groups](/supplyd-erp/suppliers/adding-suppliers-and-supplier-groups) document.
***
### Editing a Supplier Group
To edit a **Supplier Group:**
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Select **Suppliers** from the main menu to open the **Suppliers** page.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Go to the **Groups** tab and select the group you would like to edit.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click on the 3 dots in the top right. Select **Edit Group**.
The **Edit Supplier Group** form will appear where you can edit the group name.
Click to apply the change.
{% hint style="success" %}
Group members can be edited at an individual supplier level.
👉 See [#how-to-edit-a-supplier](#how-to-edit-a-supplier "mention") above for more information.
{% endhint %}
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
## How to Remove a Supplier Group
To remove a **Supplier Group:**
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Select **Suppliers** from the main menu to open the **Suppliers** page.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Go to the **Groups** tab and select the group you would like to remove.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click on the 3 dots in the top right. Select **Remove Group**.
You will be asked to confirm.
Click .
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
## Filtering & Searching the Suppliers List
The 3 lines beside the 3 dots in the top right corner on the **Suppliers** page allows you to filter the **Suppliers** list, while the magnifying glass lets you search for specific suppliers.
Clicking the three lines opens the **Filter Suppliers** form, where you can access all available filtering options.
**Company Name**
Filter by the supplier’s name.
**Group**
Choose a supplier group to only show suppliers that belong to that group.
**Type**
Filter suppliers by their type:
* **Custom**: Only shows suppliers you’ve manually added.
* **System**: Shows suppliers already on Supply’d.
**Buyers Rep**
Select the buyer’s representative you would like to filter by.
**Next Call Date Range**
Clicking on this field will open a calendar for you to select a date range to filter by.
Click to set the range.
**State**
Select a state to filter suppliers based on their location.
**Suburb**
Select a suburb to filter suppliers by.
**Postcode**
Select a postcode to filter suppliers by.
**Supplier Status**
Select a supplier status - either **Active** or **Removed** - to filter by.
This allows you to view and re-activate removed suppliers.
Click to apply your selections and filter the **Suppliers** list.
# Managing Supplier Contacts
Supply’d lets you order from all suppliers in one place. Managing suppliers in Supply’d streamlines communication, offers real-time performance tracking, and centralised documentation.
At the heart of Supply’d is a powerful but intuitive ordering system that makes it easy to order from all of your suppliers in one place. With streamlined supplier management, you can easily maintain supplier details, track products, and manage purchasing with confidence.
This document will guide you on how to view and manage your suppliers, including:
* [#the-suppliers-page](#the-suppliers-page "mention")
* [#managing-a-supplier](#managing-a-supplier "mention")
* [#connecting-with-a-supplyd-supplier](#connecting-with-a-supplyd-supplier "mention")
* [#managing-supplier-requests](#managing-supplier-requests "mention")
* [#groups](#groups "mention")
***
## The Suppliers Page
Selecting **Suppliers** from the main menu will open the **Suppliers** page.
The **Suppliers** page is where you manage all the suppliers from. Here you’ll see a list of every supplier linked to your account, including both Supply’d-connected suppliers and any custom suppliers you’ve added manually.
{% hint style="success" %}
Supplier statuses will appear on the **Suppliers** list in various colours for easy identification of the supplier type:
- A supplier already using Supply’d and selling through the Supply’d Marketplace.
- Refers to a supplier not yet on Supply’d, and that you have manually added to your account.
- A supplier you’ve requested to connect with, but who has not yet approved your request.
{% endhint %}
From this page, you can:
* **Search and filter suppliers** to quickly find the one you need.
* **View supplier details**, such as contact information, ordering methods, and delivery preferences.
* **Add new suppliers**, either individually or by bulk import.
* **Edit supplier information** if details change.
* **Set up delivery schedules and ordering rules** to streamline your purchasing.
This page acts as your central hub for supplier management, ensuring that all supplier details are accurate and up to date.
👉 You can find the instructions on how to add custom suppliers in the [Adding Suppliers & Supplier Groups](/supplyd-erp/suppliers/adding-suppliers-and-supplier-groups) document.
***
### Supplier Page Tabs
You will see 4 tabs on the page:
**Suppliers Tab**
The **Suppliers** tab lists all suppliers associated with your account, including Supply’d-connected and manually added suppliers.
**Connect Tab**
The **Connect** tab lists all suppliers available to connect with on Supply’d. Only suppliers that have made their stores public will appear; invite-only stores will not be visible. Clicking on a supplier allows you to view all their information.
👉 See [#connecting-with-a-supplyd-supplier](#connecting-with-a-supplyd-supplier "mention") below for further details.
**Requests Tab**
The **Requests** tab lists any supplier connection requests. You can approve or decline suppliers you would like to trade with on Supply'd.
{% hint style="success" %}
The number of active requests you currently have will be indicated by the number in the red circle at the top right of the **Requests** tab.
{% endhint %}
👉 See [#managing-supplier-requests](#managing-supplier-requests "mention") below for more information.
**Promotions Tab**
The **Promotions** tab displays all promotions sent to you from your Supply'd suppliers. From this tab, you can view current and upcoming promotions, including the products included, promotional pricing, and promotion dates.
👉 See [#promotions](#promotions "mention") below.
**Groups**
The **Groups** tab shows the suppliers you’ve organised into groups. A **Supplier Group** in Supply’d lets you manage multiple suppliers together in one place.
👉 See [#groups](#groups "mention") below for more details.
***
### Additional Options
Clicking on the 3 dots in the top right of the **Suppliers** page will open a menu with additional options.
***
#### Smart Purchase
Opens the **Smart Purchase Order** form to use Supply'd Intelligence to automatically suggest the right quantities to order based on stock, sales, and production data.
{% hint style="success" %}
**Smart Purchase Orders** in Supply’d are an automated ordering tool designed to help you order the right products in the right quantities, faster and more efficiently. Instead of manually calculating what to order, Supply’d uses real-time data to suggest accurate order quantities for each product.
**How it works:**
* **Current Stock Levels:** Checks how much inventory you already have.
* **Past Sales Data:** Analyses your historical sales to predict future demand.
* **Upcoming Production Needs:** Considers your planned production to ensure you have enough stock.
**Benefits:**
* **Save Time:** Reduces manual calculations and order planning.
* **Reduce Over-Ordering:** Avoids excess stock that can tie up cash and storage.
* **Maintain Inventory Balance:** Helps ensure you have enough stock for production and sales without shortages.
**Example:**\
If you usually sell 100 chocolate bars a week and have 50 in stock, Smart Purchase Orders might suggest ordering 50 more to meet expected demand, adjusting automatically if production plans or past sales indicate changes.
{% endhint %}
👉 Refer to the [Smart Purchase Orders](/supplyd-erp/purchases/smart-purchase-orders) document for full instructions on using this feature.
***
#### Get Invite Link
The **Get Invite Link** option generates a unique invitation link that you can share with a supplier. When the supplier uses this link, they can connect with your business in Supply'd, allowing you to collaborate and exchange information within the platform.
Use this option when inviting a new supplier to connect to your Supply'd account.
***
#### Import
This allows you to make changes to supplier details in bulk and import them into Supply’d.
Here is an overview of how to import supplier details in Supply’d:
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Choose What to Import
Select the type of data you want to import from the menu:
* **Supplier Data** – core supplier details
* **Locations** – supplier addresses and operating hours
* **Contacts** – supplier contact people
* **Purchasing** – product purchasing information
The **Import Suppliers** form will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Download the Import Template
Click on **Download the template**. The **Export Suppliers** form will open.
{% hint style="success" %}
Each template is structured to match Supply’d’s required fields.
{% endhint %}
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Select Your Options
Under **Data Source** select to either **Supply'd** to include your existing supplier data in the download.
In the **Fields** section tick the boxes if you would to include additional fields for other data types.
Click .
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Complete the Template
Open the template in a spreadsheet application such as Excel or Numbers and fill in the required information.
* Follow the column headings carefully
* Do not change column names
* Leave ID fields blank for new records
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Save as CSV
Once completed, export or save the file as a **CSV** (comma-separated values) file.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Upload the File
Return to Supply’d, upload the completed CSV file, click and follow the on-screen prompts to confirm the import.
Existing records will be updated if matching IDs are found.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Review the Results
After the import completes, review the supplier details to ensure the information has been imported correctly.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
👉 The import process is explained in more detail in the [Bulk Importing Suppliers](/supplyd-erp/suppliers/bulk-importing-suppliers) document.
***
#### Export
Selecting **Export** will open the **Export Suppliers** form allowing you to export your chosen data type to you computer as a spreadsheet.
***
## Managing a Supplier
Clicking on a supplier will open that supplier's profile page displaying all their details. Here, under the various tabs, you can view their contact details, payment terms, and delivery schedules, as well as see your order history with them. You’ll also find tabs for things like contacts, locations, and orders related to that supplier. From this page, you can easily place new orders, manage existing ones, and keep track of all interactions with that supplier in one place.
This page contains nine tabs, each providing information on different aspects of the supplier.
We will explain each in detail below, including instructions on how to manage the content of each tab. Simply click the relevant link or tab to view the corresponding details.
* [#about](#about "mention")
* [#contacts](#contacts "mention")
* [#locations](#locations "mention")
* [#call-log](#call-log "mention")
* [#favourites](#favourites "mention")
* [#products](#products "mention")
* [#orders](#orders "mention")
* [#standing](#standing "mention")
* [#promotions](#promotions "mention")
{% tabs %}
{% tab title="About" icon="square-info" %}
## About
The **About** tab provides an overview of the supplier, including their account number, payment terms, Invoice Inbox, supplier groups they belong to, and minimum spend. It also displays useful statistics, such as the number of orders you have placed with them, the total amount spent, and the date of your most recent order.
{% hint style="info" %}
**Invoice Inbox**
This field is automatically generated for each supplier to send their invoices, allowing them to be matched with received goods. It’s especially useful when using the **Expense** module. Simply share this email address with each supplier so they can email invoices, in PDF format, directly to your unique **Invoice Inbox**.
{% endhint %}
{% endtab %}
{% tab title="Contacts" icon="envelope" %}
## Contacts
The **Contacts** tab displays a list of contacts for the supplier.
Clicking on a contact will open that contact’s details.
***
### Adding a Contact
A contact can be added when initially adding a supplier. If you would like to add additional contacts, you can do so here.
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Click Add +
Click on **Add +** in the top right.
The **Add Contact** form will open.
Complete the sections as outlined below:
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Contact Details
**First Name**
Enter the first name of a representative/contact of the supplier.
**Last Name**
Enter the last name of a representative/contact of the supplier.
**Role/Department**
Add the role or department of the contact, eg. Sales Rep, Accounts etc.
**Email**
Enter the email address for the contact.
**Mobile**
Add a mobile number for the contact.
**Phone**
Add a phone number for this contact.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Settings
Additional setting for the contact.
**Notifications**
Select the notifications you would like this contact to receive.
**Notes**
Add any notes about this contact for internal reference only. This information is not visible to anyone else.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click Save
Click to add the contact.
The contact will appear on the supplier's contact list.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
### Editing a Contact
To edit a contact:
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Select **Suppliers** from the main menu.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Select the supplier whose contact you would like to edit.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Go to the **Contacts** tab and select the contact you would like to edit.
The contact's details will open.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click on the 3 dots in the top right and select **Edit Contact**.
The **Edit Contact** form will open.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Update the details following the guidelines for [#adding-a-contact](#adding-a-contact "mention") above.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click to apply the updates.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
### Removing a Contact
To remove a contact:
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Select **Suppliers** from the main menu.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Select the supplier whose contact you would like to remove.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Go to the **Contacts** tab and select the contact you would like to remove.
The contact's details will open.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click on the 3 dots in the top right and select **Remove Contact**.
You will be asked to confirm.
Click .
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
{% endtab %}
{% tab title="Locations" icon="earth-oceania" %}
## Locations
The **Locations** tab displays a list of locations for billing and shipping for the supplier.
Clicking on a location will open that location’s details.
***
### Adding a Location
A supplier’s billing address can be added when the supplier is first created. If a supplier has multiple locations, you can add them here.
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Click Add +
Click on **Add +** in the top right.
The **Add Location** form will open.
Complete the sections as outlined below:
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Location Details
**Location Name\* \[required field]**
Enter a name for this location.
**Location Type**
Select whether the address is for **Billing**, **Shipping**, or both **Billing & Shipping**.
{% hint style="warning" %}
You can only have one billing address.
{% endhint %}
**Address\* \[required field]**
Enter the supplier's street address.
**Suburb\* \[required field]**
Enter the supplier's suburb.
**State/Province\* \[required field]**
Select the supplier's state.
**Postcode\* \[required field]**
Enter the supplier's postcode.
**Country\* \[required field]**
Select the supplier's country.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Operating Hours
The **Operating Hours** section shows when the supplier is open each day. You can set start and finish times to help determine the best times to place orders or contact them.
Select the opening and closing hours for each day. If the business is closed on a certain day, select **Closed**.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Delivery Days
The **Delivery Days** section lets you specify which days the supplier delivers. This helps you plan orders and know when to expect stock.
**Delivery Days**
Tick the boxes for the days this supplier delivers.
**Order Cut-off**
Select an order cut-off time.
An order cut-off is the latest time an order must be placed before a delivery day. If you order after this time, that delivery day won’t be available.
Select **Not Set** if the supplier doesn’t have a cut-off.
**Delivery Delay**
Enter a delivery delay.
A delivery delay is extra time added between when an order is placed and when it is delivered. It’s used to give the supplier time to process the order before shipping.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Advanced
The **Advanced** section shows a map of the supplier’s exact location, helping you easily see where they are.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click Save
Click to add the location.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
### Editing a Location
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Select **Suppliers** from the main menu and select the supplier that you would like to edit the location for.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Go to the **Locations** tab and select the location you would like to edit.
The location's details will open.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click on the 3 dots in the top right and select **Edit Location**.
The **Edit Location** form will open.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Update any details as needed, following the guidelines outlined above for [#adding-a-location](#adding-a-location "mention").
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click to update the location details.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
### Removing a Location
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Select **Suppliers** from the main menu and select the supplier that you would like to remove the location for.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Go to the **Locations** tab and select the location you would like to remove.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click on the 3 dots in the top right and select **Remove Location**.
You will be asked to confirm.
Click .
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
{% endtab %}
{% tab title="Call Log" icon="phone-arrow-right" %}
## Call Log
The **Call Logs** tab is where you can record and review all communication with a supplier, such as phone calls or visits. It provides a central place to track interactions, ensuring you and your team have visibility over supplier communications.
Clicking on a call log will open the details for that log.
***
### Adding a Call Log
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Click Add +
Click the or **Add +** in the top right corner.
{% hint style="info" %}
The button only shows when there are no existing call logs. Use the **Add +** to log further calls.
{% endhint %}
The **Add Call Log** form will appear.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Complete the Form
**Supplier**
Automatically filled.
**Location**
Select the location of the call or visit.
**Call Date\* \[required field]**
Clicking on the field will cause a calendar to appear.
Select the month, year and day, and the time, then click on .
**Call Type\* \[required field]**
Select the type of call or visit - either **Visit** or **Call**.
**User**
Select the user or representative performing the call or visit.
**Next Call Date**
If a call or visit is scheduled, select the month, year, and day from the calendar.
**Notes**
Add any notes from the call or visit.
**Images**
Add any images relevant to the call or visit.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click Save
Click to add the call.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
### Editing a Call Log
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Select **Suppliers** from the main menu and select the supplier that you would like to edit the call log for.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Go to the **Call Log** tab and select the call you would like to edit.
The call log details will open.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click on the 3 dots in the top right and select **Edit Call Log**.
The **Edit Call Log** form will open.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Update any details as needed, following the guidelines outlined above for [#adding-a-call-log](#adding-a-call-log "mention").
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click to update the location details.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
### Removing a Call Log
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Select **Suppliers** from the main menu and select the supplier that you would like to remove the call log for.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Go to the **Locations** tab and select the call log you would like to remove.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click on the 3 dots in the top right and select **Remove Call Log**.
You will be asked to confirm.
Click .
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
{% endtab %}
{% tab title="Favourites" icon="circle-heart" %}
## Favourites
The **Favourites** tab lists all your favourite products from this supplier.
Products ordered from suppliers are automatically added to **Favourites**, making them easy to find and reorder.
Clicking on a product will open its page, displaying all the details about that product.
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 To manage these products, refer to the [Managing Products](/supplyd-erp/products/managing-products) document.
{% endhint %}
***
### Bulk Actions
Clicking the button on the **Favourites** page allows you to make changes singularly or in bulk.
Selecting one or more orders from the list and then clicking the button will open a menu with the options for those orders.
{% hint style="success" %}
Ticking the square beside the button will select all products on the list.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="info" %}
This button stays greyed out and inactive until at least one product is selected. After selecting products, the button turns green and becomes clickable.
{% endhint %}
**Bulk Edit**, **Export Products** & **Download**
👉 See the [Managing Products](/supplyd-erp/products/managing-products#bulk-actions) section of the [Managing Products](/supplyd-erp/products/managing-products) document for an explanation of these options.
**Remove**
* **From Favourites:** This will remove a product from your favourites list.
* **From Supplier:** This will remove the selected products from this supplier, while keeping the products in your system. This is useful if, for example, you switch to buying the product from another supplier.
* **Products:** This will remove the selected products from your **Products** list.
{% endtab %}
{% endtabs %}
{% tabs %}
{% tab title="Products" icon="box-open-full" %}
## Products
The **Products** tab lists all of a supplier’s products. For a custom supplier, this includes all the products you have manually added for them. For a Supply’d-connected supplier, it shows all products available for you to order from that supplier.
Clicking on a product will open its page, displaying all the details about that product.
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 These products can be managed as explained in the [Managing Products](/supplyd-erp/products/managing-products) document.
{% endhint %}
If the supplier is a custom supplier, you can add their products by clicking **Add +** in the top right and following the instructions in the [Adding Products](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products) document.
***
### Bulk Actions
Clicking the button on the **Products** page allows you to make changes singularly or in bulk.
Selecting one or more orders from the list and then clicking the button will open a menu with the options for those orders.
{% hint style="success" %}
Ticking the square beside the button will select all products on the list.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="info" %}
This button stays greyed out and inactive until at least one product is selected. After selecting products, the button turns green and becomes clickable.
{% endhint %}
**Bulk Edit** & **Print Shelf Tickets**
👉 See the [Managing Products](/supplyd-erp/products/managing-products#bulk-actions) section of the [Managing Products](/supplyd-erp/products/managing-products) document for an explanation of these options.
***
**Remove >**
* **From Supplier:** This will remove the selected products from this supplier, while keeping the products in your system. This is useful if, for example, you switch to buying the product from another supplier. You will be asked to confirm.\
\
* **Products:** This will remove the selected products from your **Products** list. You will be asked to confirm.
***
**Favourites >**
* **Add:** This will add the selected products to your [#favourites](#favourites "mention"). You will be asked to confirm.
* **Remove:** This will remove the selected products form your [#favourites](#favourites "mention"). You will be asked to confirm.
{% endtab %}
{% tab title="Orders" icon="box-magnifying-glass" %}
## Orders
This tab displays a list of all the orders you’ve placed with the supplier, including their statuses, providing a clear history of your transactions.
Clicking on an order will open it, displaying the full details.
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 Orders can be managed following the guidelines in the [Managing Purchase Orders](/supplyd-erp/purchases/managing-purchase-orders) document.
👉 You can place new orders from this page by clicking **Add +** in the top right and following the instructions in the [Placing a Purchase Order](/supplyd-erp/purchases/placing-a-purchase-order#creating-a-purchase-order-from-a-supplier) section of the [Placing a Purchase Order](/supplyd-erp/purchases/placing-a-purchase-order) document.
{% endhint %}
{% endtab %}
{% tab title="Standing" icon="arrows-spin" %}
## Standing
The **Standing** tab displays any **Standing Purchase Orders** you’ve created, which are regular repeat orders set up with this supplier. Here, you can create, view, and manage **Standing Purchase Orders**.
{% hint style="success" %}
A **Standing Order** is a recurring order that is automatically placed at regular intervals for a specific supplier. It ensures that products you regularly purchase are ordered consistently, without needing to create a new order each time.
{% endhint %}
Clicking on an order will open it, displaying the full details.
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 These orders can be managed following the guidelines in the [Standing Purchase Orders](/supplyd-erp/purchases/standing-purchase-orders#managing-standing-orders) section of the [Standing Purchase Orders](/supplyd-erp/purchases/standing-purchase-orders) document.
👉 You can create new standing orders from this page by clicking **Add +** in the top right and following the instructions in the [Standing Purchase Orders](/supplyd-erp/purchases/standing-purchase-orders#creating-standing-purchase-orders) section of the [Standing Purchase Orders](/supplyd-erp/purchases/standing-purchase-orders) document.
{% endhint %}
{% endtab %}
{% tab title="Promotions" icon="badge-percent" %}
### Promotions
The **Promotions** tab displays all promotions created by the selected supplier. From this tab, you can view the supplier's current and upcoming promotions, including the products included, promotional pricing, and promotion dates.
This provides a central location for managing and reviewing all promotions offered by the supplier.
Clicking on a promotion opens its details, where you can view the products included, promotional pricing, validity dates, and other relevant information.
Supplier promotions are displayed throughout Supply’d, including on the **Product** page, **Favourites** page, and when creating a **Purchase Order**. Promotional products are identified by a green promotion badge beneath the product name, which also displays the promotion dates so you can see how long the offer is available. Promotions are also displayed during **Expense Reconciliation**, allowing you to confirm that the supplier has honoured the promotional pricing.
***
#### Adding a Promotion
Promotions for suppliers are created and managed by the supplier and cannot be added or edited manually. For suppliers, you can create and manage your own promotions as required.
To add a Promotion for a supplier, click on or **Add +** in the top right.
{% hint style="success" %}
The button is only available when no promotions have been sent or created. Once a promotion exists, use **Add+** to create additional promotions.
{% endhint %}
The **Add Promotion** form will open.
👉 See the [Supplier Promotions](/supplyd-erp/products/promotions/supplier-promotions) document for more information and details for completing the form.
{% endtab %}
{% endtabs %}
***
### Additional Options for a Supplier
Clicking the 3 dots in the top right will open a menu with additional options and actions for this supplier.
{% hint style="info" %}
This menu is the same across all tabs.
{% endhint %}
***
#### Edit Supplier
Opens the **Edit Supplier** form allowing you to edit the supplier's details.
👉 See [#how-to-edit-a-supplier](#how-to-edit-a-supplier "mention") below.
***
#### Smart Purchase
Opens the **Smart Purchase Order** form where you can create a **Smart Purchase Order**.
👉 See the [Smart Purchase Orders](/supplyd-erp/purchases/smart-purchase-orders) document for details on how to complete this.
***
#### Actions > Set Next Call Date
Opens the **Set Next Call Date** form, allowing you to schedule the next call with this supplier and record the planned date in the system.
**Supplier**
Automatically entered.
**Location**
Select the location for the call.
**Next Call Date\* \[required field]**
Select the date from the calendar that appears when you click this field.
***
#### Actions > Merge Supplier
**Merge Supplier** allows you to consolidate and suppliers.
If, for instance, a supplier registers with Supply’d and creates a duplicate supplier record in your list, you can use the **Merge Supplier** option to combine your existing Custom supplier record with their Supply’d account.
Before merging, there are a few things to keep in mind:
* **Merging is safe to do at any time.** Even if the supplier has not yet loaded their full product catalogue, merging will not remove or overwrite your existing products, pricing, or sizes for that supplier. If the supplier has not loaded their products, the **Suppliers > Products** tab may appear empty after the merge. This is expected. Any custom-created products will remain available under **Favourites**.
* **Purchase Orders will continue to work as normal.** If the supplier has not yet linked their products, those items will appear as unassigned on the supplier’s end until they are matched.
* **Check your product barcodes to avoid duplicates.** Before adding the supplier’s catalogue to **Favourites**, make sure your products have the correct barcodes. Matching barcodes allow Supply’d to automatically link products. If the barcodes do not match, duplicate products may be created and require manual cleanup.
* **Match products in bulk.** If you have a large number of products to match, you can update them in bulk using a CSV spreadsheet, rather than matching products individually.\
👉 See [Bulk Importing of Products](/supplyd-erp/products/bulk-importing-of-products).
***
#### Actions > Get Invite Link
The **Supplier Invite Link** allows you to invite a supplier to join Supply’d and connect with your business. Share the link with the supplier so they can register for a free Supply’d HUB account and establish the connection.
***
#### Import > Products
Opens the **Import Products** form, allowing you to bulk import products from the supplier into Supply'd.
👉 See the [Bulk Importing of Products](/supplyd-erp/products/bulk-importing-of-products) document for full detail on how to do this.
***
#### Export
#### Export > Products
Opens the **Export Products** form, allowing you to download a list of the supplier's products and all their details.
Select the fields you would like to include information for and click .
***
#### Export > Call Logs
Opens the **Export Call Logs** form, allowing you to download a list of all calls made to and received from the supplier.
**Supplier**
Automatically entered.
**Locations**
Select **All** to download information across all your locations, or choose a specific location.
Click to download the information as a spreadsheet.
***
#### Remove Supplier
This will remove the supplier.
👉 See [#how-to-remove-a-supplier](#how-to-remove-a-supplier "mention") below.
***
### Editing a Supplier
To edit a supplier:
{% hint style="warning" %}
You can only edit suppliers you have added to your Supply'd account. These suppliers are marked with a status on the right-hand side, making them easy to identify.
{% endhint %}
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Select **Suppliers** from the main menu to open the **Suppliers** page. Select the supplier you would like to edit.
The supplier's profile page will open.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click on the 3 dots in the top right and select **Edit Supplier** from the menu.
The **Edit Supplier** form will open.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Update any details as needed, following the guidelines outlined above for [Adding Products](/supplyd-erp/products/adding-products).
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click to update the supplier's details.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
### Removing a Supplier
To remove a supplier:
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Select **Suppliers** from the main menu and choose the supplier you would like to remove.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click on the 3 dots in the top right and select **Remove Supplier** from the menu.
You will be asked to confirm.
{% hint style="danger" %}
Confirm that you really do want to remove the supplier as the supplier will be removed along with all of their products.
{% endhint %}
Click .
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
## Connecting with a Supply'd Supplier
The **Connect** tab lists all suppliers available to connect with on Supply’d. Clicking on a supplier allows you to view all their information and request to connect with them.
To connect with a Supply'd supplier:
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Open the Suppliers Page
Select **Suppliers** from the main menu. The **Suppliers** page will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Go to the Connect Tab
Go to the **Connect** tab to see a list all suppliers available to connect with on Supply’d.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Select the Supplier
Select the supplier that you would like to connect with. The supplier's details will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Click Connect
To send a connection request to the supplier, click .
You will be asked to confirm.
The supplier will review your request and either approve or reject it. If approved, the supplier will appear in your **Suppliers** list.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
## Managing Supplier Requests
The **Requests** tab lists any connection requests from suppliers. You can approve or decline suppliers you would like to trade with on Supply'd.
To review, accept or reject a request from a supplier:
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Open the Suppliers Page
Select **Suppliers** from the main menu. The **Suppliers** page will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Go to the Requests Tab
Go to the **Requests** tab to see a list all connection requests from suppliers.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Select the Supplier
Select the supplier that you would like to review. The supplier's details will open.
***
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
#### Approve or Reject the Request
If you would like to connect with this supplier, click . Click **Reject** if you don not want to connect with this supplier.
You will be asked to confirm.
Once approved the supplier will show on your **Suppliers** list.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
## Groups
While the **Suppliers** tab lists all your individual suppliers, the **Groups** tab shows the suppliers you’ve organised into groups. A **Supplier Group** in Supply’d lets you manage multiple suppliers together in one place. This is especially useful if you regularly order from the same set of suppliers, as it saves time and keeps your ordering process more organised.
For example, you could create a Supplier Group for *“Refrigerated Suppliers”* or *“Local Suppliers”*. When placing an order, instead of adding suppliers one-by-one, you can select the whole group and quickly order from everyone in it.
Clicking on a group will show all the suppliers in that group.
When you select a supplier from the group, their page will open and display all their details, just like on the main **Suppliers** page, as outlined in [#viewing-a-suppliers-details](#viewing-a-suppliers-details "mention") below.
***
### Adding a Supplier Group
Supplier Groups can be added by clicking an **Add +** in the top right and following the guidelines in the [Adding Suppliers & Supplier Groups](/supplyd-erp/suppliers/adding-suppliers-and-supplier-groups#supplier-groups) section of the [Adding Suppliers & Supplier Groups](/supplyd-erp/suppliers/adding-suppliers-and-supplier-groups) document.
***
### Editing a Supplier Group
To edit a **Supplier Group:**
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Select **Suppliers** from the main menu to open the **Suppliers** page.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Go to the **Groups** tab and select the group you would like to edit.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click on the 3 dots in the top right. Select **Edit Group**.
The **Edit Supplier Group** form will appear where you can edit the group name.
Click to apply the change.
{% hint style="success" %}
Group members can be edited at an individual supplier level.
👉 See [#how-to-edit-a-supplier](#how-to-edit-a-supplier "mention") above for more information.
{% endhint %}
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
## How to Remove a Supplier Group
To remove a **Supplier Group:**
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Select **Suppliers** from the main menu to open the **Suppliers** page.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Go to the **Groups** tab and select the group you would like to remove.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click on the 3 dots in the top right. Select **Remove Group**.
You will be asked to confirm.
Click .
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}
***
## Filtering & Searching the Suppliers List
The 3 lines beside the 3 dots in the top right corner on the **Suppliers** page allows you to filter the **Suppliers** list, while the magnifying glass lets you search for specific suppliers.
Clicking the three lines opens the **Filter Suppliers** form, where you can access all available filtering options.
**Company Name**
Filter by the supplier’s name.
**Group**
Choose a supplier group to only show suppliers that belong to that group.
**Type**
Filter suppliers by their type:
* **Custom**: Only shows suppliers you’ve manually added.
* **System**: Shows suppliers already on Supply’d.
**Buyers Rep**
Select the buyer’s representative you would like to filter by.
**Next Call Date Range**
Clicking on this field will open a calendar for you to select a date range to filter by.
Click to set the range.
**State**
Select a state to filter suppliers based on their location.
**Suburb**
Select a suburb to filter suppliers by.
**Postcode**
Select a postcode to filter suppliers by.
**Supplier Status**
Select a supplier status - either **Active** or **Removed** - to filter by.
This allows you to view and re-activate removed suppliers.
Click to apply your selections and filter the **Suppliers** list.
---
[Next Page](/llms-full.txt/1)
and complete the demo request form. You will receive an email with a link to book a time for a Supply’d representative to show you how Supply’d can help your business thrive.
***
### Supply’d Hub
Supply’d Hub is a free supplier-focused account designed for businesses that want to showcase products and connect with retailers on Supply’d.
#### Key Features
* Set up and manage products
* Connect with retailers
* Send product offers and promotions
* Allow retailers to range products
* View sales orders
* Manage customers and account settings
* Add one additional user
#### Benefits of Supply’d Hub
* Free to use
* Increases product visibility
* Helps build retailer relationships
* Supports product ranging opportunities
* Simple and easy to get started
#### Best For
Small suppliers or businesses wanting to promote products and connect with retailers without needing advanced operational tools.
To create a free **Supply's Hub** account, follow the steps outlined in the [Creating Your Supply'd Hub Account](/supplyd-hub/creating-your-supplyd-hub-account).
***
### Supply’d Lite
Supply’d Lite is designed for businesses who need essential operational tools for managing purchase orders, products, and suppliers.
#### Key Features
* Manage suppliers and products
* Process and track purchase orders
* Connect and purchase from suppliers
* Support day-to-day purchasing needs
* Add one additional user
#### Benefits of Supply’d Lite
* Free to use
* Improves purchasing efficiency
* Streamlines purchase order management
* Keeps product and supplier information organised
* Simple to use
#### Best For
Businesses that need purchasing tools to support regular supply activities.
To create a free **Supply'd Lite** account, follow the steps outlined in the [Creating Your Supply'd Lite Account](/supplyd-lite/quickstart).
***
## Choosing the Right Account
| Account Type | Best For | Main Benefit |
| ------------ | ------------------------------------------------ | ------------------------------------ |
| **ERP** | Full business management | Advanced enterprise functionality |
| **Hub** | Product showcasing and retailer connections | Free and simple to use for suppliers |
| **Lite** | Managing purchase orders, suppliers and products | Free and easy to use for customers |
Supply’d accounts are flexible, and businesses can operate multiple account types depending on their needs.
***
## Verifying Your Email Address
After creating your account you will see red message at the top of the screen that says "Your email address has not yet been verified, some features will be unavailable until your account is verified. Click here to verify your email".
To verify your email click the link that says **Click here to verify your email**. You will be sent an email with a verification code and a screen will appear to enter the code.
.
.
.
{% hint style="info" %}
When logging in:
* If a user does not belong to any of the companies, they will see an error page.
* If the user belongs to one company only, they will be taken directly into that account.
* If the user belongs to multiple companies, they will see a list of accounts (as above) to choose from when logging in.
{% endhint %}
# Navigating Supply'd ERP
Supply’d helps you manage your stores, orders, and inventory all in one place, making it easier to track sales, fulfil orders, and keep your business running smoothly.
Welcome to **Supply’d**, your all-in-one platform for food and retail businesses, streamlining operations, automating key tasks, and eliminating the hassle of disconnected systems - helping you save time, reduce costly errors, and clearly see what’s working (and what’s not). Supply’d gives you the tools to stay organised and focused.
This guide will walk you through a brief overview of how to navigate the platform, so you can make the most of its features and keep your business running smoothly, including:
button.
👉 Follow the instructions in the [Creating Your Supply'd Lite Account](/supplyd-lite/quickstart) document.
{% endhint %}
to select the files from your device.
5. Click 
.
***
## Main Menu
On the left-hand side you will see the main menu.
{% hint style="info" %}
Options may vary depending on your [Users](/supplyd-erp/settings/users) access, account type and additional modules.
{% endhint %}
button that, when items are selected, allows you to perform bulk actions on multiple items at once.
{% endhint %}
***
### Purchases
The **Purchases** page is where you can view, add, and manage all your purchase orders in Supply’d.
The scanner home screen will display the time and date. The icons in the top right indicate that Bluetooth is enabled, Wi-Fi is connected, and shows the battery level, much the same as a mobile phone.
Swipe up and the screen will now show the time, date and any apps installed on the scanner.
Click on the Supply'd logo and the Supply'd **Login** screen will show.
For detailed instructions on using each of these features, see the various articles:\ 
**Triangle:** Takes you back to the previous screen.
**Circle:** Takes you to scanner home screen.
**Square:** Shows all windows open on the scanner.
**Supply'd Intelligence** for purchase orders, see the [Smart Purchase Orders](/supplyd-erp/purchases/smart-purchase-orders) document.
{% endhint %}
This document will walk you through the process of placing orders using a handheld Supply’d scanner, including:
* [#creating-and-placing-an-order](#creating-and-placing-an-order "mention")
* [#viewing-orders-on-a-scanner](#viewing-orders-on-a-scanner "mention")
***
## Creating & Placing an Order
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Select Order Stock
Open Supply'd on the scanner, go to the **Scanner** menu and select **Order Stock**.
button to proceed. You will then be prompted to review your order.
Here, you’ll see all the items you’ve added to your cart. They will be organised by supplier, with details such as shipping method, preferred delivery date, an optional notes field, and the send timing for each supplier. The total cost of your order will be displayed at the bottom of the screen, along with the option to place the order.
. (The screenshot below has been split into sections for visibility.)
.
and 
. This simply means that this is a custom order and is queued for sending. Once the order has been sent, 
.
Select **Purchases**.
, enter your note, then click 
to add it to the **Order Activity**.
.
You will be prompted to confirm that you want to start the stocktake. Click 
.
.
to the right of the batch #. The **Edit Batch Details** form will show where you can edit any details necessary. Click 
to apply these changes.
.
The **Add Batch** form will show where you can create the new batch. Click 
(or the **X** in the top right corner) to close the item and proceed to the next one.
(**Finalise Stocktake)**.
### View Stocktake Items
Enables you to view the items you have adjusted during the stocktake.
{% hint style="info" %}
Only amended items will be displayed; unchanged items will not appear on this list.
{% endhint %}
Select **Inventory**, then the **Stocktakes** tab. Stocktakes are labeled with colour-coded tags - either 
or 
- for easy identification.
**Stocktake Status**
Select one or both from the drop-down menu.
* **In Progress**
* **Completed**
**Warehouse**
Select the location(s) you would like to filter by from the drop-down menu.
**Date Range**
Clicking the field will open a calendar, allowing you to select a date or date range for filtering.
to display the filtered list.
# Performing Deliveries as a Driver (Scanner)
As a delivery driver, using a handheld Supply'd scanner makes deliveries faster, more accurate, and keeps everything updated in real time.
As a driver, you will have only have access to delivery runs, and the deliveries within those runs, assigned to you on Supply'd.
\
This guide will walk you through how to perform deliveries using a handheld Supply’d scanner.
If you are using a tablet or would like to check deliveries in the app on a computer, see the [Performing Deliveries as a Driver](/supplyd-erp/deliveries/performing-deliveries-as-a-driver) document.
This document you will guide you through:
* [#home-page-my-deliveries](#home-page-my-deliveries "mention")
* [#performing-a-delivery-run](#performing-a-delivery-run "mention")
* [#additional-options-scheduled-delivery-run](#additional-options-scheduled-delivery-run "mention")
* [#additional-options-delivery-run-underway](#additional-options-delivery-run-underway "mention")
## Home Page - My Deliveries
When you log in to Supply’d on the scanner, you’ll see the **My Deliveries** home screen. This shows the delivery runs assigned to you.
- An upcoming delivery run.
* 
to begin the run. You will be asked to confirm.
.
. Google Maps will open and guide you to the address. When finished, tap the arrow at the bottom of the screen to return to Supply’d.
{% endhint %}
. You will be asked to confirm.
The **Order Cartons** section screen will appear. The status will now be 
.
below the carton details.
. The **Add POD & Deliver** screen will open.
.
. Under **Choose an Action**, select **Camera**.
.
, and the next screen will open.
.
(**Mark Delivery Run As Completed**). You will be asked to confirm.
* **Vehicle:** Change the vehicle being used for the delivery run. Select the vehicle from the drop-down menu.
* **Driver:** Change the driver for the delivery run. Select the new driver from the drop-down menu.
* **Start Location:** Change the start location for the delivery run. Select from the drop-down menu or add a custom address, for example, if the driver is leaving from home.
* **End Location:** Change the end location for the delivery run. Select from the drop-down, menu or add a custom address, for example, if the driver is ending the run at home.
### **Download >** **Delivery Run List**
Allows the **Delivery Run List** to be downloaded for viewing, saving, or printing.
), click the 3 dots in the top right to open a menu with the following options for the order you are delivering:
### **Edit Delivery Order**
Allows limited changes to be made to the delivery order. Selecting this will open the **Edit Delivery Order** form.
.
**Finalise Picking**
Will finalise the **Pick**. An alternative to the 
button. You will be asked to confirm.
{% hint style="info" %}
This option will only appear after you’ve picked all items.
{% endhint %}
**Download >**
Enables you to download and print the following for inclusion with the order:
* **Invoice**
* **Pack Slip**
* **Shipping Label**
to assign that batch to the order item.
.
{% hint style="info" %}
Before finalising, the order will be marked as 
during the picking process.
{% endhint %}
***
## Cluster Pick
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Select Cluster Pick
On the **Start Pick & Pack** screen, click on the **Process** field and select **Cluster Pick**.
***
### Finalising a Cluster Pick
Once you have completed the cluster pick, click 
**Add Parcel**
Should you need to add an extra carton for packing. Clicking this will cause the **Add Carton** form to appear.
You will be given the option to print the label or to finalise the pack.
(or click 
if you don't want to print labels).
Supply'd will automatically print the correct label for the order - either a shipping label for deliveries or a pick-up label for collection orders.
to complete the order.
Orders will automatically be marked as 
, or, in the case of Pick-Up orders, 
.
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 For more information on using a scanner for pick-up orders, see the [Pick Up Orders (Scanner)](/supplyd-erp/scanner/pick-up-orders-scanner) document.
{% endhint %}
# Pick Up Orders (Scanner)
The Supply’d scanner speeds up pick-up orders by ensuring quick, accurate item verification. It reduces errors, improves inventory tracking, and enhances customer satisfaction.
Using a Supply’d handheld scanner for pickup orders makes the process quicker, easier, and more accurate. Instead of manually checking items, you can scan products as you pick them to ensure the right items and quantities are collected. This reduces mistakes, saves time, and updates your orders in real time so everything stays accurate and ready for the customer.
***
.png?alt=media&token=86c8fe37-9aca-455f-9301-662eca6ebf4e)
(**Mark as Completed**) button will mark the order as 
to pull the current average buy price if it is empty.
{% endhint %}
**Production Date (Optional)**
The date the product was produced. Select the day, month and year from the calendar.
to apply this information to the batch.
***
### Finalise Receive
Will finalise the Receive. An alternative to the **Finalise Receive** button. You will be asked to confirm.
***
### Receive All
If you're certain you've received all the ordered items, selecting this option will mark them all as received, saving the time required to enter each one individually. You will be asked to confirm.
.png?alt=media&token=74ac2486-671b-42c4-94bd-2298e8f0e820)
.
Receives are labeled with colour-coded tags - either 
to set the dates.
. In our example, we are receiving 10 White Chocolate Unicorns.
(**Finalise Receiving**).
. In our example all items received have the same batch details so the number is "**10**".
***
#### Match Batch
Automatically matches existing batch data and updates the inventory numbers accordingly.
.
\
Repeat the process for remaining batches.
\
The total from all batches should equal the total number received.
***
### View Items Received
Open the **Edit Receive Stock** screen where you can view all the items you have entered.
to open the **Scan To List Action** screen to select the action you would like to perform.
to generate the tickets.
. The scanner will connect to the printer to print the labels.
. The data will be exported to your device in a spreadsheet.
button to add the number of items required to the transfer.
to the right of the batch #. The **Edit Batch Details** form will show where you can edit any details necessary.
to apply the batch data changes.
Transfers are labeled with colour-coded tags - 
, 
- The task is yet to be started.
* 
- The task has been started but not yet completed.
* 
- The task has been finished.
and a background timer will record how long the task takes to complete.
{% endhint %}
.
The status will change to 
.
**Smart Write-Off**.
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 For instructions on using the manual method for performing write-offs, see the [Writing Off Stock](/supplyd-erp/inventory/writing-off-stock) document.
{% endhint %}
In this document we will guide you through the scanner method, including:
* [#adding-a-write-off](#adding-a-write-off "mention")
* [#viewing-and-editing-write-off-items](#viewing-and-editing-write-off-items "mention")
* 
[#smart-write-off](#smart-write-off "mention")
* [#viewing-the-write-offs-list-on-the-scanner](#viewing-the-write-offs-list-on-the-scanner "mention")
* [#filtering-the-write-offs-list](#filtering-the-write-offs-list "mention")
***
## Adding a Write Off
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Select Write Off
Open Supply'd on the scanner. Select **Write Off** from the **Scanner** menu.
to add the number to be written-off.
to the right of the batch #. The **Edit Batch Details** form will show where you can edit any details necessary. Click 
(**Finalise Write Off**) button on the **Write Off Stock** screen.
.png?alt=media&token=df3a5c38-23c1-4423-b6f7-849c43f77147)
button on the **Edit Write Off** screen.
**Finalise Write Off**
An alternative to the 
Smart Write-Off
Streamline your end-of-day routines with 
**Smart Write-Off**. This feature automatically identifies all stock that is due to expire at the end of the day, allowing your team to quickly review, isolate, and discard affected items.
This is especially useful for businesses like bakeries, where unsold or overproduced items often need to be written off at the end of each day.
**Smart Write-Off** can be performed either on the app or through the main menu on the scanner.
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Go to the Inventory Page
Click the 3 lines on the top left to take you to the Supply'd main menu.
**Smart Write-Off**.
Click on the 3 dots in the top right and select 
to generate a list of products to be written-off.
The **Edit Write-Off** form will open, and a **Write-Off Number** will be automatically assigned to the record.
Write-offs are labeled with colour-coded tags - either 
- for easy identification.
to set the dates.
**-** The most common product type. It is a single product with no advanced traits.
- A bundle of multiple products within one parent product.
**-** A product that is made up of a number ingredients produced at the time of sale, eg. a burger at a restaurant.
- A shipping carton that can be used at the packing stage.
**-** A gift note/card that can be configured to be automatically generated and printed.
- A product that can be manufactured using the production module. When "Production" is selected, additional sections will appear.
**-** A product that can be broken down within the production module to make other products.
{% endhint %}
**Pricing Tab**
Under the **Pricing** tab, the **Pricing Schedule** displays all of your products with upcoming price changes.
{% hint style="success" %}
👉 See the [Product Price Changes](/supplyd-erp/products/product-price-changes) document for more information.
{% endhint %}
**Offers Tab**
The **Offers** tab lists any product offers you've received from suppliers.
{% hint style="success" %}
In the **Offers** tab, retailers can review offers. From there, they can range the product (which creates their own ranged version of the product), request samples, or reject the offer. All updates are reflected on the product page. Once a retailer ranges a product, they can begin purchasing it through Supply’d.
controls to quickly add the product to your order list and adjust the quantity.
{% endhint %}
***
#### Pricing (If product is sold)
Displays the pricing for the product across the various selling platforms you use, such as **Supply'd, Shopify**, and other connected platforms. It also displays the margins associated with the pricing on each platform.
status.
- The offer has been sent and is waiting for the customer to review and respond.
* 
- The customer has requested additional information or feedback before deciding whether to range the product.
* 
- The customer has requested product samples for evaluation.
* 
- The customer has decided not to range the product at this time.
* 
**-** The most common product type. It is a single product with no advanced traits.
- A bundle of multiple products within one parent product.
**-** A product that is made up of a number ingredients produced at the time of sale, eg. a burger at a restaurant.
- A shipping carton used during the packing stage, such as a bread tray, bread crate, produce crate, carton or box.
- A pallet, trolley, stillage, etc that shipping cartons may be packed into for shipping.
**-** A gift note/card that can be configured to be automatically generated and printed.
**-** A product that can be broken down within the production module to make other products.
{% endhint %}
Clicking on a product will show that product's page with all the information on that product.
**Pricing Tab**
Under the **Pricing** tab, the **Pricing Schedule** list displays all of your products with upcoming price changes.
👉 See the [Product Price Changes](/supplyd-erp/products/product-price-changes) document for more information
**Offers Tab**
The **Offers** tab lists any product offers you've received from suppliers.
👉 See the [Accepting Offers from Suppliers](/supplyd-erp/products/offers/accepting-offers-from-suppliers) document for details.
{% hint style="success" %}
In the **Offers** tab, retailers can review offers. From there, they can range the product (which creates their own ranged version of the product), request samples, or reject the offer. All updates are reflected on the product page. Once a retailer ranges a product, they can begin purchasing it through Supply’d.
👉 For details on sending product offers to customers, see the [Placing Offers to Customers](/supplyd-erp/products/offers/placing-offers-to-customers) document.
{% endhint %}
***
## Manually Adding Products
Manually adding products to Supply'd is easy.
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Go to the Products Page
Select **Products** from the main menu. The **Products** page will open, showing a list of all your products.
to finish creating the product.
.
.
The **Buy Product?** section will expand, allowing you to enter the relevant product details.
***
## Adding Labelling Details
{% hint style="warning" %}
For **Production** and **Recipe** type products - If wanting to use the auto generate features in this section, complete the **Production Settings**, **Production Stages** and **Production Items/Recipe Items** sections first.
{% endhint %}
button on the **Percentage Australian** field.
will automatically calculate the estimated percentage of Australian content in your product.
button.
to open the **Edit Nutrition** form, where you can enter nutritional details manually, use **Fetch Nutrition** to assist with calculations, or, for **Production** or **Recipe** products, have Supply’d calculate them automatically from their ingredients/components.
.
for the field to be added to the table.
.
***
### Recipe Type
Supply'd can automatically calculate the nutrition values for a **Recipe** type product.
{% hint style="warning" %}
You must complete the **Recipe Stages** and **Recipe Items** section before using the **Generate** feature.
For accurate calculations, each ingredient or product used in the recipe must also have its nutrition values added.
{% endhint %}
Click on the 3 dots in the top right and select **Generate From Recipe**.
buttons help you automatically work out the **Servings Per Package** and **Serving Size**, based on your product’s total weight or volume.
**✅ Calculate Serving Size**
If you already know how many **Servings Per Package** there are, Supply’d will calculate the **Serving Size** for you.
\
Example:
* You enter “Servings per Pack” = 4
* The total pack weight is 800g
* It will calculate the **Serving Size = 200g**
**✅ Calculate Servings per Pack**
If you know the **Serving Size**, Supply’d will calculate how many servings fit in a pack.
\
Example:
* You enter **Serving Size** = 250ml
* The total pack volume is 1lt
* It will calculate **Servings Per Package = 4**
{% endhint %}
**Generating Nutrition**
{% hint style="warning" %}
You need to complete the **Production Stages** and **Production Items** sections before using the **Calculate** **Generate** feature.
For accurate nutrition calculations, each ingredient or product used must also have its nutrition values added.
{% endhint %}
Click on the 3 dots in the top right and select **Generate From Recipe**.
to add the information to the **Labelling** section.
The completed information will look something like this on the product page.
. The **Edit Nutrition** form will open.
{% endstep %}
{% step %}
Click on the 3 dots on the top right of the **Edit Nutrition** form and select **Remove Nutrition**.
.
at the top right of the field.
{% endhint %}
.
to select the CSV file you just completed.
to begin the import.
button allows you to offer the product to customers.
👉 See the [Placing Offers to Customers](/supplyd-erp/products/offers/placing-offers-to-customers) document for more details.
{% hint style="success" %}
Offer statuses are colour-coded for easy identification:
***
### Download
***
### Download > Label
Opens the **Print Label** page, where you can generate labels for the product.
to generate your label for printing.
and select the file you wish to upload from your device.
***
## Bulk Actions
Clicking the 
button on the **Products** page allows you to make changes and perform certain actions singularly or in bulk.
Selecting one or more products from the list, then clicking the 
.
to generate the labels.
.
{% hint style="danger" %}
If any of these products are used in any recipes or bundles, a warning will appear: Removing these product will also remove it from those recipes.
{% endhint %}
to apply your selections and filter the **Products** list.
# Managing a Product
Keeping product information accurate & up to date helps improve efficiency, reduce errors, & ensure products are correctly managed across stock, pricing, sales, & connected channels.
Managing a product in **Supply’d** allows you to keep its information accurate, organised, and up to date. From the product's page, you can view and edit product details, manage stock, pricing, labels, attachments, and other product settings.
Keeping product information current helps ensure accurate inventory, consistent product details, and reliable information across purchasing, sales, and connected sales channels.
This document explains how to manage a product, including:
* [#the-products-page](#the-products-page "mention")
* [#product-management-options](#product-management-options "mention")
* [#editing-a-product](#editing-a-product "mention")
* [#removing-a-product](#removing-a-product "mention")
***
## The Products Page
The **Products** page provides a central place to view, search, filter, and manage all products in **Supply’d**. From this page, you can quickly find products, view their details, and access actions for managing your product list.
.png?alt=media&token=36716f2f-14aa-40a4-b82a-5159ebf7be2c)
in the top right corner) to narrow the list by specific criteria if you want to perform actions on matching products.
For example, all our Chocolate Unicorns require updates, so if we type "Unicorn" in the **Name** field of the **Filter Products** form, only the unicorns will show on the product list.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="info" %}
The 
button stays greyed out and inactive until at least one product is selected. After selecting products, the button turns blue and becomes clickable.
{% endhint %}
{% hint style="success" %}
Ticking the square beside the 
button will select all products on the list.\ 
.
to send the offer to the customer.
and choose how they would like to respond or whether they would like to range or reject the product. The choices are:
* **Awaiting Feedback:** The product has been offered and is awaiting feedback or a decision from the recipient.
* **Awaiting Samples:** Samples have been requested or are expected before a decision can be made on the product offer.
* **Ranged:** The product offer has been accepted and added to the recipient's product range.
* **Rejected:** The product offer has been declined and will not be ranged.
They also have the option to include a message with their response.
button.
{% hint style="success" %}
If, at any stage, you would like to range a product that you have previously rejected, you can do this easily by accessing the rejected product and selecting the option to range it again.\ 
to apply your selections and filter the **Products** list.
# Accepting Offers
Receiving and accepting offers in Supply’d gives you access to special pricing, promotions, and new products, helping you make informed purchasing decisions and secure the best available deals.
**Offers** in Supply’d give you access to special pricing, promotions, and new products from your suppliers. From the **Offers** page, you can view offer details, compare pricing, and accept offers that suit your business needs. Whether you're looking to take advantage of a promotion, secure better pricing, or discover new products, offers provide a simple way to make informed purchasing decisions and maximise value.
In Supply’d ERP, you can receive offers from connected suppliers who use either Supply’d ERP or Supply’d Hub. These offers may include special pricing, promotions, or new products available for you to review and accept.
This document guides you through responding to offers, including how to accept, reject, and range offered products.
* [#the-offers-page](#the-offers-page "mention")
* [#connecting-with-a-hub-supplier](#connecting-with-a-hub-supplier "mention")
* [#responding-to-an-offer](#responding-to-an-offer "mention")
* [#ranging-the-offer-product](#ranging-the-offer-product "mention")
***
## The Offers Page
The **Offers** tab on the **Products** page shows all product offers you’ve received from suppliers. It provides a central place to review new products, view pricing and offer details, and track the status of each offer (such as awaiting feedback, awaiting samples, ranged, or rejected).
From this tab, you can open each offer to see full product information, communicate with suppliers, and decide whether to accept, reject, or request samples before adding the product to your range.
to save the layout.
***
### Offer Details
Selecting an **Offer** opens the offer details, including information about the product being offered and the details of the offer.
To narrow the list based on specific criteria, select the 3 lines beside the 3 dots in the top right to open the **Filter Offers** form. You can use multiple filters together to quickly find the offers relevant to the task you are completing.
%20Inc.png?alt=media&token=13818141-0bf3-44aa-9eed-3dbd94aa8cbc)
%20Dec.png?alt=media&token=14bd0e01-b037-4a1d-ab7b-659d85116f39)
to apply the price change. You will be asked to confirm.
.
The products will appear on the **Pricing Schedule** under the **Pricing** tab.
.
to begin the import. Price changes will be imported into Supply'd so if you have a lot of price changes please be patient.
{% hint style="info" %}
The price changes process runs automatically on a 15-minute schedule. Changes may therefore take up to 15 minutes to be applied.
{% endhint %}
to generate the labels.
.
***
## Exporting the Pricing Schedule
**Price Change** details can be exported in a spreadsheet format if you’d like to view or print a copy.
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Select Export > Pricing
Click on the 3 dots in the top right of the page and select **Export** then **Pricing**.
to set the range.
- indicates how many customers that the promotion has been sent to.
{% endhint %}
Alternatively, to view promotions assigned to a specific customer, select the customer from the **Customers** list, then open the **Promotions** tab on the customer's page.
- The customer has been sent the promotion.
* 
- The customer has removed the promotion.
{% endhint %}
***
## Creating a Promotion
{% stepper %}
{% step %}
#### Go to the Promotions Tab
Select **Customers** from the main menu, then open the **Promotions** tab.
to send the promotion to the selected customer(s).
- indicates how many customers that the promotion has been sent to. This will automatically change to 
.png?alt=media&token=980f8fcc-b122-4a75-b53f-27ca636ddfb9)
or **Add +** in the top right.
%20-%20Lite.png?alt=media&token=cad060a2-6aa3-4821-afea-fb35ebbc46be)
.
.
to add all the selected items to the bundle.
to add these items to the current bundle.
3. You will be asked to confirm as this will override any items you may have already entered.
4. Edit any changes required after the items have been copied.
displayed beside its name for easy identification.
.
.
You will be prompted to save the changes you have made so far.
or **Add a Stage**.
You will be prompted to save your product before adding/editing any stages. Click 
to add the next stage (if required), and repeat the process for any additional stages needed.
to add the stage to the current product.
3. You will be asked to confirm as this will override any stage you may have already entered.
4. Make any changes required after the stage has been copied.
and make the required changes following the guidelines above.
To remove a item, click 
- Indicates the default recipe version used by the system for generating ingredients, nutrition, margins, and costings, unless a different version has been assigned to a specific location.
* 
- A recipe version assigned specifically to a particular location.
* 
- A recipe version that is not currently assigned to or used by any location.
- A supplier you’ve requested to connect with, but who has not yet approved your request.
{% endhint %}
👉 To learn how to add custom suppliers, see [#adding-a-custom-supplier](#adding-a-custom-supplier "mention") below.
***
**Connect Tab**
The **Connect** tab lists all suppliers available to connect with on Supply’d. Clicking on a supplier allows you to view all their information.
.
You will be asked to confirm.
. Click **Reject** if you do not want to connect with this supplier.
You will be asked to confirm.
.
The supplier will show on your **Suppliers** list.
to begin the import.
Smart Purchase
Opens the **Smart Purchase Order** form to use Supply'd Intelligence to automatically suggest the right quantities to order based on stock, sales, and production data.
or **Add +** in the top right corner.
